Mitsubishi f800 Manual
Mitsubishi f800 Manual
Mitsubishi f800 Manual
FR-F800
FR-F800
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (DETAILED)
FR-F820-00046(0.75K) to 04750(110K)
FR-F840-00023(0.75K) to 06830(315K)
FR-F842-07700(355K) to 12120(560K)
INVRERTER
INTRODUCTION
1
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF
THE INVERTER 3
Safety Instructions 1
Caution Caution
Transportation and Mounting Usage
The storage temperature (applicable for a short time, e.g. during The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee
transit) must be between -20 and +65°C. Otherwise the inverter protection of the motor from overheating. It is recommended to
may be damaged. install both an external thermal and PTC thermistor for overheat
The inverter must be used indoors (without corrosive gas, protection.
flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.) Otherwise the inverter Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for
may be damaged. frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. Otherwise the life of the
The inverter must be used at an altitude of 2500 m or less above inverter decreases.
sea level, with 5.9 m/s2 or less vibration at 10 to 55 Hz The effect of electromagnetic interference must be reduced by
(directions of X, Y, Z axes). Otherwise the inverter may be using a noise filter or by other means. Otherwise nearby
damaged. (Refer to page 26 for details.) electronic equipment may be affected.
If halogen-based materials (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, Appropriate measures must be taken to suppress harmonics.
etc.) infiltrate into a Mitsubishi product, the product will be Otherwise power supply harmonics from the inverter may heat/
damaged. Halogen-based materials are often included in damage the power factor correction capacitor and generator.
fumigant, which is used to sterilize or disinfest wooden When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, the motor must
packages. When packaging, prevent residual fumigant be an insulation-enhanced motor or measures must be taken to
components from being infiltrated into Mitsubishi products, or suppress surge voltage. Surge voltage attributable to the wiring
use an alternative sterilization or disinfection method (heat constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the
disinfection, etc.) for packaging. Sterilization of disinfection of insulation of the motor.
wooden package should also be performed before packaging When parameter clear or all parameter clear is performed, the
the product. required parameters must be set again before starting
Wiring operations. because all parameters return to their initial values.
Do not install a power factor correction capacitor or surge The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before
suppressor/capacitor type filter on the inverter output side. changing its setting, the performances of the motor and machine
These devices on the inverter output side may be overheated or must be fully examined.
burn out. Stop status cannot be hold by the inverter's brake function. In
The output side terminals (terminals U, V, and W) must be addition to the inverter’s brake function, a holding device must
connected correctly. Otherwise the motor will rotate inversely. be installed to ensure safety.
PM motor terminals (U, V, W) hold high-voltage while the PM Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long
motor is running even after the power is turned OFF. Before period, inspection and test operation must be performed.
wiring, the PM motor must be confirmed to be stopped. Static electricity in your body must be discharged beforeyou
Otherwise you may get an electric shock. touch the product.
Never connect an PM motor to the commercial power supply. Only one PM motor can be connected to an inverter.
Applying the commercial power supply to input terminals (U,V, An PM motor must be used under PM motor control. Do not use
W) of an PM motor will burn the PM motor. The PM motor must a synchronous motor, induction motor, or synchronous induction
be connected with the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter. motor.
Trial run Do not connect an PM motor in the induction motor control
Before starting operation, each parameter must be confirmed settings (initial settings). Do not use an induction motor in the
and adjusted. A failure to do so may cause some machines to PM motor control settings. It will cause a failure.
make unexpected motions. In the system with an PM motor, the inverter power must be
turned ON before closing the contacts of the contactor at the
2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-F840-04320(185K) or higher. output side.
When the emergency drive operation is performed, the operation
is continued or the retry is repeated even when a fault occurs,
Warning which may damage or burn the inverter and motor. Before
Usage restarting the normal operation after using the emergency drive
Everyone must stay away from the equipment when the retry function, make sure that the inverter and motor have no fault.
function is set as it will restart suddenly after a trip. Emergency stop
A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided
Since pressing a key may not stop output depending on to prevent hazardous conditions to the machine and equipment
in case of inverter failure.
the function setting status, separate circuit and switch that make When the breaker on the inverter input side trips, thewiring must
an emergency stop (power OFF, mechanical brake operation for be checked for fault (short circuit), and internalparts of the drive
emergency stop, etc.) must be provided. unit for a damage, etc. The cause of the trip must be identified
OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before resetting and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker.
the inverter fault. Resetting inverter fault with the start signal ON When a protective function activates, take an appropriate
restarts the motor suddenly. corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume the
Do not use an PM motor for an application where the PM motor operation.
is driven by its load and runs at a speed higher than the Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
maximum motor speed. Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the
Use this inverter only with three-phase induction motors or with control circuit of the inverter. It will cause a failure.
an PM motor. Connection of any other electrical equipment to Disposal
the inverter output may damage the equipment. The inverter must be treated as industrial waste.
Do not modify the equipment.
Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this
manual. Doing so may lead to fault or damage of the product. General instruction
Many of the diagrams and drawings in the Instruction Manual
show the product without a cover or partially open for
explanation. Never operate the product in this manner. The
cover must be always reinstalled and the instruction in the
Instruction Manual must be followed when operating the product.
For more details on the PM motor, refer to the Instruction Manual
of the PM motor.
2 Safety Instructions
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION 11
1.1 Product checking and accessories 12
2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers 22
CONTENTS 3
3 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 71
3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents 72
3.1.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures........................................................................................................ 72
3.1.2 Countermeasures against inverter-generated EMI ........................................................................................ 74
3.1.3 Built-in EMC filter............................................................................................................................................ 76
4 BASIC OPERATION 87
4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08) 88
4.1.1 Components of the operation panel (FR-DU08)............................................................................................. 88
4.1.2 Basic operation of the operation panel........................................................................................................... 89
4.1.3 Correspondences between digital and actual characters............................................................................... 90
4.1.4 Changing the parameter setting value ........................................................................................................... 91
4 CONTENTS
4.7.1 Performing JOG operation using external signals ........................................................................................109
4.7.2 JOG operation from the operation panel ......................................................................................................110
5 PARAMETERS 111
5.1 Parameter List 112
5.1.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)..........................................................................................................112
5.1.2 Group parameter display ..............................................................................................................................133
5.1.3 Parameter list (by function group).................................................................................................................134
CONTENTS 5
5.6.7 Operation by multi-speed setting.................................................................................................................. 222
6 CONTENTS
5.11.8 PID pre-charge function................................................................................................................................402
5.11.9 Multi-pump function (Advanced PID function) ..............................................................................................406
5.11.10 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start with an induction motor .............................414
5.11.11 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start with an IPM motor .....................................420
5.11.12 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search ...................................................................................................422
5.11.13 Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function...........................................................................................426
5.11.14 PLC function .................................................................................................................................................431
5.11.15 Trace function ...............................................................................................................................................433
5.17 Checking parameters changed from their initial values (Initial value change list) 527
CONTENTS 7
6.6 Check first when you have a trouble 552
6.6.1 Motor does not start ..................................................................................................................................... 552
6.6.2 Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise ................................................................................. 554
6.6.3 Inverter generates abnormal noise............................................................................................................... 554
6.6.4 Motor generates heat abnormally................................................................................................................. 555
6.6.5 Motor rotates in the opposite direction ......................................................................................................... 555
6.6.6 Speed greatly differs from the setting........................................................................................................... 555
6.6.7 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth....................................................................................................... 556
6.6.8 Speed varies during operation ..................................................................................................................... 556
6.6.9 Operation mode is not changed properly ..................................................................................................... 557
6.6.10 Operation panel (FR-DU08) display is not operating ................................................................................... 557
6.6.11 Motor current is too large ............................................................................................................................. 557
6.6.12 Speed does not accelerate........................................................................................................................... 558
6.6.13 Unable to write parameter setting ................................................................................................................ 559
6.6.14 Power lamp is not lit ..................................................................................................................................... 559
8 SPECIFICATIONS 577
8.1 Inverter rating 578
8 CONTENTS
APPENDIX 593
Appendix1 For customers replacing the conventional model with this inverter................................. 594
Appendix2 Specification comparison between PM motor control and induction motor control....... 596
Appendix3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods ............ 597
Appendix4 For customers using HMS network options ........................................................................ 610
CONTENTS 9
MEMO
10
1 INTRODUCTION
The contents described in this chapter must be read before using this
product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
For the "INTRODUCTION" of the separated converter type, refer to the
FR-F802 (Separated Converter Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware) [IB-
0600550ENG].
INTRODUCTION 11
Product checking and accessories
Inverter model
Symbol Voltage class Symbol Structure, functionality Symbol Description Symbol Type∗1
2 200V class 0 Standard model 00023 to 12120 SLD rated inverter current (A) -1 FM
4 400V class 2 Separated converter type 0.75K to 560K LD rated inverter capacity (kW) -2 CA
F R - F 8 2 0 - 00046 - 1
Rating plate
Inverter model
Input rating
Output rating
SERIAL
Manufactured
year and month
Specification differs by the type. Major differences are shown in the table below.
Initial setting
Type Monitor output Built-in Control Rated Pr.19 Base Pr.570 Multiple
EMC filter logic frequency frequency voltage rating setting
FM Terminal FM (pulse train output)
9999 (same as the
(terminal FM Terminal AM (analog voltage output OFF Sink logic 60 Hz 1 (LD rating)
power supply voltage)
equipped model) (0 to ±10 VDC))
Terminal CA (analog current output
CA
(0 to 20 mADC)) 8888 (95% of the
(terminal CA ON Source logic 50 Hz 0 (SLD rating)
Terminal AM (analog voltage output power supply voltage)
equipped model)
(0 to ±10 VDC))
NOTE
• Hereinafter, the inverter model name consists of the rated current and the applicable motor capacity.
(Example) FR-F820-00046(0.75K)
12 INTRODUCTION
Product checking and accessories
Accessory
• Fan cover fixing screws
These screws are necessary for compliance with the EU Directives. (Refer to Instruction Manual (Startup).)
Capacity Screw size (mm) Quantity
FR-F820-00105(2.2K) to FR-F820-00250(5.5K)
M3 35 1
FR-F840-00083(3.7K), FR-F840-00126(5.5K)
FR-F820-00340(7.5K), FR-F820-00490(11K)
M3 35 2
FR-F840-00170(7.5K), FR-F840-00250(11K)
FR-F820-00630(15K) to FR-F820-00930(22K)
M4 40 2
FR-F840-00310(15K) to FR-F840-00620(30K)
INTRODUCTION 13
Component names
(s) (c)
(d)
(g)
(e)
(n)
(f)
(o)
(r) (h)
(i)
(p)
(j)
(q)
(l)
(k)
(m)
Refer to
Symbol Name Description
page
Connects the operation panel or the parameter unit. This connector also
(a) PU connector 60
enables the RS-485 communication.
(b) USB A connector Connects a USB memory device. 61
Connects a personal computer and enables communication with FR
(c) USB mini B connector 61
Configurator2.
(d) RS-485 terminals Enables RS-485, Modbus-RTU communication and BACnet communication. 62
(e) Plug-in option connector1 Instruction
(f) Plug-in option connector2 Connects a plug-in option or a communication option. Manual of
(g) Plug-in option connector3 the option
(h) Voltage/current input switch Selects between voltage and current for the terminal 2 and 4 inputs. 306
(i) Control circuit terminal block Connects cables for the control circuit. 46
(j) EMC filter ON/OFF connector Turns ON/OFF the EMC filter. 76
(k) Main circuit terminal block Connects cables for the main circuit. 37
(l) Charge lamp Stays ON while the power is supplied to the main circuit. 38
This cover is removable without unplugging cables. (FR-F820-01250(30K) or
(m) Wiring cover 40
lower, FR-F840-00620(30K) or lower)
(n) Alarm lamp Turns ON when the protective function of the inverter is activated. 38
(o) Power lamp Stays ON while the power is supplied to the control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21). 38
Remove this cover for the installation of the product, installation of a plug-in
(p) Front cover (upper side) (communication) option, RS-485 terminal wiring, switching of the voltage/ 22
current input switch, etc.
(q) Front cover (lower side) Remove this cover for wiring. 22
(r) Operation panel (FR-DU08) Operates and monitors the inverter. 88
Cools the inverter. (FR-F820-00105(2.2K) or higher, FR-F840-00083(3.7K) or
(s) Cooling fan 567
higher.)
14 INTRODUCTION
Operation steps
Frequency command
(a)
Frequency
Installation/mounting
Inverter
output
frequency Wiring of the power
supply and motor
(b)
(Hz) Time
Start command ON (S)
Control mode selection (c)
How
How
o Start command using the PU
to
to give
e aa start
give start connector and RS-485 terminal of
command?
command?
m the inverter and plug-in option (d)
(Communication)
How
How w to
to How
How w to
to
give
give aa frequency
frequency
re give
give aa frequency
frequency
re
command?
command?
m command?
command?
m
1
Change of frequency Perform frequency Perform frequency
with ON/OFF switches setting by a voltage setting by a current
Set from the PU. connected to terminals output device output device
(multi-speed setting) (Connection across (Connection across
terminals 2 and 5) terminals 4 and 5)
(PU) (External) (External) (External)
INTRODUCTION 15
About the related manuals
16 INTRODUCTION
2 INSTALLATION AND
WIRING
This chapter explains the "installation" and the "wiring" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
For the "INSTALLATION AND WIRING" of the separated converter type,
refer to the FR-F802 (Separated Converter Type) Instruction Manual
(Hardware) [IB-0600550ENG].
USB host
(A connector)
Communication
status indicator USB
(LED)(USB host)
(c) Moulded case circuit breaker
(MCCB) or earth leakage current
USB device
breaker (ELB), fuse
(Mini B connector)
Personal computer
(FR Configurator 2)
IM connection PM connection
U VW U VW
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P/+ P1 P/+ N/-
(p) Contactor
Example) No-fuse
switch
(DSN type)
(h) High power factor (i) Power regeneration (l) Resistor unit
converter common converter (FR-BR, MT-BR5)
(FR-HC2) (FR-CV) Earth (Ground)
(j) Power regeneration
converter (MT-RC) : Install these options as required.
NOTE
• To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the motor and inverter.
• Do not install a power factor correction capacitor or surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter's output side.
Doing so will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices is
connected, immediately remove it. When installing a molded case circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter, contact
the manufacturer of the molded case circuit breaker.
• Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, activating the EMC filter may minimize
interference. (Refer to page 76.)
• For details of options and peripheral devices, refer to the respective Instruction Manual.
• A PM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
• A PM motor is a motor with permanent magnets embedded inside. High voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the
motor is running. Before closing the contactor at the output side, make sure that the inverter power is ON and the motor is
stopped.
Refer
Symbol Name Overview
to page
The life of the inverter is influenced by the surrounding air temperature.
The surrounding air temperature should be as low as possible within the
permissible range. This must be noted especially when the inverter is
26
installed in an enclosure.
(a) Inverter (FR-F800) 33
Incorrect wiring may lead to damage of the inverter. The control signal
76
lines must be kept fully away from the main circuit lines to protect them
from noise.
The built-in EMC filter can reduce the noise.
(b) Three-phase AC power supply Must be within the permissible power supply specifications of the inverter. 578
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB),
Must be selected carefully since an inrush current flows in the inverter at
(c) earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB), or 20
power ON.
fuse
Install this to ensure safety.
(d) Magnetic contactor (MC) Do not use this to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will shorten the life 81
of the inverter.
Install this to suppress harmonics and to improve the power factor.
An AC reactor (FR-HAL) (option) is required when installing the inverter
(e) AC reactor (FR-HAL) near a large power supply system (1000 kVA or more). Under such 80
condition, the inverter may be damaged if you do not use a reactor.
Select a reactor according to the applied motor capacity.
Install this to suppress harmonics and to improve the power factor.
Select a reactor according to the applicable motor capacity.
For the FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and the FR-F840-01800(75K) or
(f) DC reactor (FR-HEL) higher, always connect the FR-HEL. 80
When using the DC reactor with the FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower, FR-
F840-01160(55K) or lower, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and
P1 before connecting the DC reactor to the inverter.
The FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower, FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower are
(g) Noise filter (FR-BLF) 74
equipped with the common mode choke.
Suppresses the power supply harmonics significantly. Install this as
(h) High power factor converter (FR-HC2) 66
required.
Power regeneration common converter
(i) 67
(FR-CV)
Provides a large braking capability. Install this as required.
Power regeneration converter
(j) 68
(MT-RC)
(k) Brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU) Allows the inverter to provide the optimal regenerative braking capability.
63
(l) Resistor unit (FR-BR, MT-BR5) Install this as required.
2
A USB (Ver. 1.1) cable connects the inverter with a personal computer.
(m) USB connection 61
A USB memory device enables parameter copies and the trace function.
Install this to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the
Noise filter inverter. The noise filter is effective in the range from about 0.5 MHz to 5
(n) 74
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF) MHz.
A wire should be wound four turns at maximum.
(o) Induction motor Connect a squirrel-cage induction motor. ―
Connect this for an application where a PM motor is driven by the load
Contactor
(p) even while the inverter power is OFF. Do not open or close the contactor ―
Example) No-fuse switch (DSN type)
while the inverter is running (outputting).
Use the specified motor. An IPM motor cannot be driven by the
(q) IPM motor (MM-EFS, MM-THE4) 580
commercial power supply.
Compatible with the FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower and FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower.
Compatible with the FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher.
Assumes the use of an IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4 or a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with the
power supply voltage of 200 VAC 50 Hz.
Select an MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter. MCCB INV M
For the use in the United States or Canada, provide the appropriate UL and cUL listed fuse or UL489
MCCB INV M
molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) that is suitable for branch circuit protection. (Refer to the
Instruction Manual (Startup).)
The magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the
magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stops during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated
current. When using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial-power supply operation switching using a general-purpose motor,
select an MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.
NOTE
• When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model, and select cables and reactors according to the motor output.
• When the breaker on the inverter's input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the
inverter etc. The cause of the trip must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker.
• 400 V class
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
or
Motor Input-side magnetic contactor
earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) (NF,
output Applicable inverter
NV type)
(kW) model
Power factor improving (AC or DC) Power factor improving (AC or DC)
reactor reactor
Without With Without With
0.75 FR-F840-00023(0.75K) 5A 5A S-T10 S-T10
1.5 FR-F840-00038(1.5K) 10A 10A S-T10 S-T10
2.2 FR-F840-00052(2.2K) 10A 10A S-T10 S-T10
3.7 FR-F840-00083(3.7K) 20A 15A S-T10 S-T10
5.5 FR-F840-00126(5.5K) 30A 20A S-T21 S-T12
7.5 FR-F840-00170(7.5K) 30A 30A S-T21 S-T21
11 FR-F840-00250(11K) 50A 40A S-T21 S-T21
15 FR-F840-00310(15K) 60A 50A S-N25 S-T21
18.5 FR-F840-00380(18.5K) 75A 60A S-N25 S-N25
22 FR-F840-00470(22K) 100A 75A S-N35 S-N25
30 FR-F840-00620(30K) 125A 100A S-N50 S-N50
37 FR-F840-00770(37K) 150A 125A S-N65 S-N50
45 FR-F840-00930(45K) 175A 150A S-N80 S-N65
55 FR-F840-01160(55K) 200A 175A S-N80 S-N80
75 FR-F840-01800(75K) ― 225A ― S-N95
90 FR-F840-02160(90K) ― 225A ― S-N150
110 FR-F840-02600(110K) ― 225A ― S-N180
132 FR-F840-03250(132K) ― 400A ― S-N220
150 FR-F840-03610(160K) ― 400A ― S-N300
160 FR-F840-03610(160K) ― 400A ― S-N300
185 FR-F840-04320(185K) ― 400A ― S-N300
220 FR-F840-04810(220K) ― 500A ― S-N400
250 FR-F840-05470(250K) ― 600A ― S-N600
280 FR-F840-06100(280K) ― 600A ― S-N600
315 FR-F840-06830(315K) ― 700A ― S-N600
Assumes the use of an IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4 or a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with the
power supply voltage of 400 VAC 50 Hz.
Select an MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter. MCCB INV M
2
For the use in the United States or Canada, provide the appropriate UL and cUL listed fuse or UL489
MCCB INV M
molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) that is suitable for branch circuit protection. (Refer to the
Instruction Manual (Startup).)
Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stops during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated
current. When using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial-power supply operation switching using a general-purpose motor,
select an MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.
NOTE
• When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model, and select cables and reactors according to the motor output.
• When the breaker on the inverter's input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the
inverter etc. The cause of the trip must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker.
To reinstall the operation panel, align its connector on the back with the PU connector of the inverter, and insert the operation
panel. After confirming that the operation panel is fit securely, tighten the screws. (Tightening torque: 0.40 to 0.45 N·m)
Loosen
(a) Loosen the screws on the front cover (lower side). (These screws cannot be removed.)
(b) While holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the front cover (lower side), pull out the terminal block cover
using its upper side as a support.
(c) With the front cover (lower side) removed, wiring of the main circuit terminals and control circuit terminals can be performed.
Loosen
(a) With the front cover (lower side) removed, loosen the mounting screw(s) on the front cover (upper side). (The screw(s) cannot be
removed.)
(FR-F820-00340(7.5K) to FR-F820-01540(37K) and FR-F840-00170(7.5K) to FR-F840-00770(37K) have two mounting screws.)
(b) While holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the front cover (upper side), pull out the cover using its
upper side as a support.
(c) With the front cover (upper side) removed, wiring of the RS-485 terminals and installation of the plug-in option can be performed.
2
Fasten
Fasten
(a) Insert the upper hooks of the front cover (upper side) into the sockets of the inverter.
Securely install the front cover (upper side) to the inverter by fixing the hooks on the sides of the cover into place.
(b) Tighten the mounting screw(s) at the lower part of the front cover (upper side).
(FR-F820-00340(7.5K) to FR-F820-01540(37K) and FR-F840-00170(7.5K) to FR-F840-00770(37K) have two mounting screws.)
(c) Install the terminal block cover by inserting the upper hook into the socket of the front cover (lower side).
(d) Tighten the mounting screws at the lower part of the front cover (lower side).
NOTE
• When installing the front cover (upper side), fit the connector of the operation panel securely along the guides of the PU
connector.
(a) (b)
(a) When the mounting screws are removed, the front cover (lower side) can be removed.
(b) With the front cover (lower side) removed, wiring of the main circuit terminals can be performed.
Loosen
(a) With the front cover (lower side) removed, loosen the mounting screws on the front cover (upper side). (These screws cannot be
removed.)
(b) Holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the front cover (upper side), pull out the cover using its upper side
as a support.
(c) With the front cover (upper side) removed, wiring of the RS-485 terminals and installation of the plug-in option can be performed.
Fasten Fasten
(a) Insert the upper hooks of the front cover (upper side) into the sockets of the inverter.
Securely install the front cover (upper side) to the inverter by fixing the hooks on the sides of the cover into place.
(b) Tighten the mounting screw(s) at the lower part of the front cover (upper side).
(c) Fasten the front cover (lower side) with the mounting screws.
NOTE
• Fully make sure that the front covers are installed securely. Always tighten the mounting screws of the front covers.
With circuit board coating (conforming to IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2): 95% RH or less (non-condensing),
Ambient humidity
Without circuit board coating: 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage temperature -20 to +65°C
Atmosphere Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Altitude Maximum 1,000 m above sea level.
Vibration 5.9 m/s2 or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
For the installation at an altitude above 1,000 m (3280.80 feet) up to 2,500 m (8202 feet), derate the rated current 3% per 500 m (1640.40 feet).
2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-F840-04320(185K) or higher.
Temperature
The permissible surrounding air temperature of the inverter is between -10°C and +50°C (-10°C and +40°C at the SLD rating).
Always operate the inverter within this temperature range. Operation outside this range will considerably shorten the service
lives of the semiconductors, parts, capacitors and others. Take the following measures to keep the surrounding air
temperature of the inverter within the specified range.
(a) Measures against high temperature
• Use a forced ventilation system or similar cooling system. (Refer to page 28.)
• Install the enclosure in an air-conditioned electric chamber.
• Block direct sunlight.
• Provide a shield or similar plate to avoid direct exposure to the radiated heat and wind of a heat source.
• Ventilate the area around the enclosure well.
(b) Measures against low temperature
• Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
• Do not power OFF the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter OFF.)
(c) Sudden temperature changes
• Select an installation place where temperature does not change suddenly.
• Avoid installing the inverter near the air outlet of an air conditioner.
• If temperature changes are caused by opening/closing of a door, install the inverter away from the door.
Humidity
Operate the inverter within the ambient air humidity of usually 45 to 90% (up to 95% with circuit board coating). Too high
humidity will pose problems of reduced insulation and metal corrosion. On the other hand, too low humidity may cause a
spatial electrical breakdown.
The insulation distance defined in JEM1103 "Control Equipment Insulator" is humidity of 45 to 85%.
(a) Measures against high humidity
• Make the enclosure enclosed, and provide it with a hygroscopic agent.
• Provide dry air into the enclosure from outside.
• Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
(b) Measures against low humidity
Air with proper humidity can be blown into the enclosure from outside. Also when installing or inspecting the unit, discharge
your body (static electricity) beforehand, and keep your body away from the parts and patterns.
(c) Measures against condensation
Condensation may occur if frequent operation stops change the in-enclosure temperature suddenly or if the outside air
temperature changes suddenly.
Condensation causes such faults as reduced insulation and corrosion.
• Take the measures against high humidity in (a).
• Do not power OFF the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter OFF.)
Countermeasure
• Place the inverter in a totally enclosed enclosure.
Take measures if the in-enclosure temperature rises. (Refer to page 28.)
• Purge air.
Pump clean air from outside to make the in-enclosure air pressure higher than the outside air pressure.
High altitude
Use the inverter at an altitude of within 1000 m. For the installation at an altitude above 1,000 m (3280.80 feet) up to 2,500 m
(8202 feet), derate the rated current 3% per 500 m (1640.40 feet).
If it is used at a higher place, it is likely that thin air will reduce the cooling effect and low air pressure will deteriorate dielectric
strength.
Vibration, impact
The vibration resistance of the inverter is up to 5.9 m/s2 (2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-F840-04320(185K) or higher) at 10 to 55
Hz frequency and 1 mm amplitude for the directions of X, Y, Z axes. Applying vibration and impacts for a long time may loosen
the structures and cause poor contacts of connectors, even if those vibration and impacts are within the specified values.
Especially when impacts are applied repeatedly, caution must be taken because such impacts may break the installation feet.
Countermeasure
• Provide the enclosure with rubber vibration isolators.
• Strengthen the structure to prevent the enclosure from resonance.
• Install the enclosure away from the sources of the vibration.
Natural
cooling
Being a totally enclosed type, this system is the most
Natural ventilation (totally appropriate for hostile environment having dust, dirt, oil mist,
enclosed type) etc. The enclosure size increases depending on the inverter
INV capacity.
Heat
pipe
Heat pipe This is a totally enclosed for enclosure downsizing.
INV
Allow clearance.
10cm 20cm
(3.94inches) (7.87inches)
or more or more
For the FR-F820-00250(5.5K) or lower and FR-F840-00126(5.5K) or lower, allow 1 cm (0.39 inches) or more clearance.
When using the FR-F820-01250(30K) or lower and FR-F840-00620(30K) or lower at the surrounding air temperature of 40°C (104°F) or less
(30°C (86°F) or less for the SLD rated inverter), side-by-side installation (0 cm clearance) is available.
For replacing the cooling fan of the FR-F840-04320(185K) or higher, 30 cm (11.81 inches) of space is necessary in front of the inverter. Refer to
page 567 for fan replacement.
higher than the permissible value by providing ventilation (a) Horizontal arrangement (b) Vertical arrangement
Panel cutting
Cut the panel of the enclosure according to the inverter capacity.
FR-F840-04320(185K) FR-F840-05470(250K)
FR-F840-04810(220K) FR-F840-06100(280K)
FR-F840-06830(315K)
6-M10 screw
6-M10 screw
662
484
300 300
15
200 200
13
984
954
Hole
954
Hole
985
18
15
Unit: mm Unit: mm
Lower
installation
Shift frame
Cooling Dimension of
wind the outside of
185mm the enclosure
NOTE
• Having a cooling fan, the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure cannot be used in the environment of water drops,
oil, mist, dust, etc.
• Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter and cooling fan section.
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
Control input signals Control circuit Relay output∗8
(No voltage input allowed)∗3
STF C1
Forward rotation start
STR B1
Reverse rotation start Relay output 1
A1 (Fault output)
STP(STOP)
Start self-holding selection
RH C2
High speed
RM B2
Multi-speed Middle speed Relay output 2
selection A2
RL
Low speed
JOG ∗4 RUN Open collector output∗9
Jog operation Running
RT SU
Second function selection Up to frequency
MRS IPF
Output stop Instantaneous
RES OL power failure
Reset Overload
Terminal 4 input selection AU FU
Frequency detection
SOURCE
NOTE
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm (3.94 inches) or more away from the power cables. Also,
separate the main circuit cables at the input side from the main circuit cables at the output side.
• After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the
inverter.
• Set the voltage/current input switch correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
CA type
FR-F820-00770(18.5K) to 01250(30K),
DC reactor FR-F840-00470(22K) to 01800(75K)
(FR-HEL)∗1 DC reactor
Sourse logic Brake unit (FR-HEL)∗1
Main circuit terminal (Option) Brake unit
(Option)
Control circuit terminal Jumper
Earth Jumper
Jumper
(Ground) Earth
(Ground)
P1 P/+ PX∗7 PR∗7 N/-
P1 P/+ P3 PR∗7 N/-
MCCB MC
R/L1 Inrush current U
Three-phase V Motor
S/L2 limit circuit M
AC power W
T/L3
supply ON EMC filter Earth (Ground)
Jumper R1/L11 ON/OFF
∗2 S1/L21 OFF connecter
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
Control input signals Control circuit Relay output∗8
(No voltage input allowed)∗3
STF C1
Forward rotation start
STR B1
Reverse rotation start Relay output 1
A1 (Fault output)
STP(STOP)
Start self-holding selection
RH C2
High speed
RM B2
Multi-speed Middle speed Relay output 2
selection A2
RL
Low speed
JOG ∗4 RUN Open collector output∗9
Jog operation Running
RT SU
Second function selection Up to frequency
MRS IPF
Output stop Instantaneous
RES OL power failure
Reset Overload
Terminal 4 input selection AU FU
Frequency detection
SOURCE
2
24VDC power supply
NOTE
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm (3.94 inches) or more away from the power cables. Also,
separate the main circuit cables at the input side from the main circuit cables at the output side.
• After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the
inverter.
• Set the voltage/current input switch correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
2
FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher
Do not use terminals PX and PR. The terminal PX is equipped in the FR-F820-00490(11K) or lower and the
PX, PR FR-F840-00250(11K) or lower. The terminal PR is equipped in the FR-F820-01250(30K) or lower and the FR- —
F840-01800(75K) or lower.
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. This must be earthed
Earth (ground) 45
(grounded).
M
Charge lamp
Power supply Motor Charge lamp
Power supply M Motor
FR-F820-00340(7.5K), FR-F820-00490(11K) FR-F820-00630(15K)
FR-F840-00170(7.5K), FR-F840-00250(11K) FR-F840-00310(15K), FR-F840-00380(18.5K)
N/- P/+ PR Jumper Jumper
Jumper R1/L11 S1/L21 P/+ PR
R1/L11 S1/L21 N/-
Jumper
M
Charge lamp
M Power supply Motor
Power supply Motor
FR-F820-00770(18.5K) to FR-F820-01250(30K) FR-F820-01540(37K)
FR-F840-00470(22K), FR-F840-00620(30K) FR-F840-00770(37K)
R1/L11 S1/L21 Charge lamp
Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper R1/L11 S1/L21
Jumper
P3 PR P/+
Jumper
M
Power supply Motor
Power supply
M Motor
Jumper
Jumper
Jumper P/+
M
Power supply Motor
M
Power supply DC reactor Motor
FR-F820-03800(90K), FR-F820-04750(110K) FR-F840-00930(45K) to FR-F840-01800(75K)
FR-F840-03250(132K) to FR-F840-04810(220K)
R1/L11 S1/L21
R1/L11 S1/L21 Charge lamp
Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
P/+
M Jumper
Power supply Motor
M
For option DC reactor Power supply Motor
FR-F840-02160(90K), FR-F840-02600(110K) FR-F840-05470(250K) to FR-F840-06830(315K)
Charge lamp
Jumper
2
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
P/+ P/+
M M
Power supply Motor
DC reactor Power supply DC reactor Motor
Terminals P3 and PR of the FR-F820-01540(37K) are not provided with a screw. Do not connect anything to this.
For FR-F840-01800(75K), a jumper is not installed across the terminals P1 and P/+. Always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available
as an option, across the terminals P1 and P/+.
NOTE
• Make sure the power cables are connected to the R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. (Phase need not be matched.) Never connect the
power cable to the U, V, and W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter.
• Connect the motor to U, V, and W. The phase need to be matched.
• When wiring the inverter main circuit conductor of the FR-F840-05470(250K) or higher,
tighten a nut from the right side of the conductor. When wiring two wires, place wires on
both sides of the conductor. (Refer to the drawing on the right.) For wiring, use bolts
(nuts) provided with the inverter.
NOTE
• Cut off the same number of lugs as wires. If
parts where no wire is put through have been
cut off (10 mm or more), protective structure
(JEM1030) becomes an open type (IP00).
Applicable inverter
Terminal
Tightening
terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2) AWG/MCM PVC cables, etc. (mm2)
screw R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
model torque N•m P/+,
Size S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
P1
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
FR-F820-00046(0.75K) to
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00105(2.2K)
FR-F820-00167(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
FR-F820-00250(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
FR-F820-00340(7.5K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 6 8 16 10 16
FR-F820-00490(11K) M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
FR-F820-00630(15K) M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-F820-00770(18.5K) M6 4.4 38-6 38-6 38 38 38 14 2 2 35 35 25
FR-F820-00930(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
FR-F820-01250(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-F820-01540(37K) M8 (M6) 7.8 80-8 80-8 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
FR-F820-01870(45K) M10 (M8) 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-F820-02330(55K) M10 (M8) 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-F820-03160(75K) M12 (M8) 24.5 150-12 150-12 125 125 150 38 250 250 ― ― ―
FR-F820-03800(90K) M12 (M8) 24.5 150-12 150-12 150 150 2×100 38 2×4/0 2×4/0 ― ― ―
FR-F820-04750(110K) M12 (M8) 24.5 100-12 100-12 150 150 2×100 38 2×4/0 2×4/0 ― ― ―
Applicable inverter
Terminal
Tightening
terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2) AWG/MCM PVC cables, etc. (mm2)
screw R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
model torque N•m P/+,
Size S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
P1
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
FR-F840-00023(0.75K) to
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00083(3.7K)
FR-F840-00126(5.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 4
FR-F840-00170(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
FR-F840-00250(11K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10
FR-F840-00310(15K) M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 8 5.5 8 8 10 10 10
FR-F840-00380(18.5K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16
FR-F840-00470(22K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
FR-F840-00620(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-F840-00770(37K)
FR-F840-00930(45K)
M6
M8
4.4
7.8
22-6
38-8
22-6
38-8
22
38
22
38
22
38
14
22
4
1
4
2
25
50
25
50
16
25 2
FR-F840-01160(55K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-F840-01800(75K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-F840-02160(90K) M10 14.7 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-F840-02600(110K) M10 14.7 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
FR-F840-03250(132K) M10 (M12) 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-F840-03610(160K) M10 (M12) 14.7 150-10 150-10 125 125 100 38 250 250 120 120 70
FR-F840-04320(185K) M12 (M10) 24.5 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150 95
FR-F840-04810(220K) M12 (M10) 24.5 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
FR-F840-05470(250K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
FR-F840-06100(280K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2×125 2×125 2×125 60 2×250 2×250 2×120 2×120 120
FR-F840-06830(315K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2×150 2×150 2×125 60 2×300 2×300 2×150 2×150 150
For FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower and FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower, this cable gauge is with the continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 75°C (HIV cable (600 V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable), etc.). Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and
the wiring distance is 20 m or less.
For FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher, this cable gauge is with the continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 90°C or higher (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable), etc.). Assumes that the surrounding air
temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring is in-enclosure.
For all the 200 V class capacities and FR-F840-00930(45K) or lower, this cable gauge is with the continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 75°C (THHW cable). This is assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less and wiring distance of 20 m or less.
For FR-F840-01160(55K) or higher, this cable gauge is with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C (THHN cable). This assumes
a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or lower and in-enclosure wiring. (Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
For FR-F820-00770(18.5K) or lower and FR-F840-00930(45K) or lower, the cable gauge is with the continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 70°C (PVC cable). This assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less and wiring distance of 20 m or less.
For FR-F820-00930(22K) or higher and FR-F840-01160(55K) or higher, this cable gauge is with continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 90°C (XLPE cable). This assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40°C and in-enclosure wiring. (Selection example for use mainly in
Europe.)
The terminal screw size indicates the size of the terminal screw for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, P/+, N/-, P1, P3, and the screw for earthing
(grounding).
The screw size for earthing (grounding) of FR-F820-00930(22K) or higher is indicated in parentheses.
The screw size for P/+ terminal for connecting an option to FR-F840-03250(132K) or FR-F840-03610(160K) is indicated in parentheses.
The screw size for earthing (grounding) of FR-F840-04320(185K) or higher is indicated in parenthesis.
Applicable inverter
Terminal
Tightening
terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2) AWG/MCM PVC cables, etc. (mm2)
screw R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
model torque N•m P/+,
Size S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
P1
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
FR-F820-00046(0.75K) to
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00105(2.2K)
FR-F820-00167(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
FR-F820-00250(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
FR-F820-00340(7.5K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 6 8 16 10 16
FR-F820-00490(11K) M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
FR-F820-00630(15K) M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-F820-00770(18.5K) M6 4.4 38-6 38-6 38 38 38 14 2 2 50 50 25
FR-F820-00930(22K) M8(M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 50 50 25
FR-F820-01250(30K) M8(M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-F820-01540(37K) M8(M6) 7.8 80-8 80-8 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
FR-F820-01870(45K) M10(M8) 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-F820-02330(55K) M10(M8) 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-F820-03160(75K) M12(M8) 24.5 150-12 150-12 125 125 150 38 250 250 ― ― ―
FR-F820-03800(90K) M12(M8) 24.5 100-12 100-12 150 150 2×100 38 2×4/0 2×4/0 ― ― ―
FR-F820-04750(110K) M12(M8) 24.5 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 ― ― ―
Applicable inverter
Terminal
Tightening
terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2) AWG/MCM PVC cables, etc. (mm2)
screw R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
model torque N•m P/+,
Size S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
P1
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
FR-F840-00023(0.75K) to
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00083(3.7K)
FR-F840-00126(5.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 4
FR-F840-00170(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
FR-F840-00250(11K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10
FR-F840-00310(15K) M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 8 5.5 8 8 10 10 10
FR-F840-00380(18.5K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16
FR-F840-00470(22K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
FR-F840-00620(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-F840-00770(37K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-F840-00930(45K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25
FR-F840-01160(55K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-F840-01800(75K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-F840-02160(90K) M10 14.7 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
FR-F840-02600(110K) M10 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-F840-03250(132K) M10(M12) 14.7 150-10 150-10 125 125 100 38 250 250 120 120 70
FR-F840-03610(160K) M10(M12) 14.7 150-10 150-10 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150 95
FR-F840-04320(185K) M12(M10) 24.5 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
FR-F840-04810(220K) M12(M10) 24.5 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
FR-F840-05470(250K) M12(M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2×125 2×125 2×125 60 2×250 2×250 2×120 2×120 120
FR-F840-06100(280K) M12(M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2×150 2×150 2×125 60 2×300 2×300 2×150 2×150 150
FR-F840-06830(315K) M12(M10) 46 200-12 200-12 2×200 2×200 2×150 100 2×350 2×350 2×185 2×185 2×95
For all the 200 V class capacities and FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower, this cable gauge is with the continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 75°C (HIV cable (600 V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable), etc.). Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring
distance is 20 m or less.
FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher, this cable gauge is with the continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C or higher (LMFC (heat
resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable), etc.). Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring is
in-enclosure.
For all the 200 V class capacities and FR-F840-00930(45K) or lower, this cable gauge is with the continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 75°C (THHW cable). This is assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less and wiring distance of 20 m or less.
For FR-F840-01160(55K) or higher, this cable gauge is with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C (THHN cable). This assumes
a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or lower and in-enclosure wiring. (Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
For FR-F820-00930(22K) or lower and FR-F840-00930(45K) or lower, the cable gauge is with the continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 70°C (PVC cable). This assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less and wiring distance of 20 m or less.
For FR-F820-01250(30K) or higher and FR-F840-01160(55K) or higher, this cable gauge is with continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 90°C (XLPE cable). This assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40°C and in-enclosure wiring. (Selection example for use mainly in
Europe.)
The terminal screw size indicates the size of the terminal screw for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, P/+, N/-, P1, P3, and the screw for earthing
(grounding).
The screw size for earthing (grounding) of FR-F820-00930(22K) or higher is indicated in parentheses.
The screw size for P/+ terminal for connecting an option to FR-F840-03250(132K) or FR-F840-03610(160K) is indicated in parentheses.
The screw size for earthing (grounding) of FR-F840-04320(185K) or higher is indicated in parenthesis.
NOTE
• Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque.
A screw that has been tightened too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
A screw that has been tightened too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
• Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeves to wire the power supply and motor.
300 m
When driving a 400 V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the
motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. In this case, take one of the following measures.
• Use a "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor" and set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection according to
the wiring length.
Wiring length 50 m or shorter Wiring length 50 m to 100 m Wiring length longer than 100 m
15 (14.5 kHz) or lower 9 (9 kHz) or lower 4 (4 kHz) or lower
• For the FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower, connect a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) at the output
side of the inverter. For the FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher, connect a sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) at the output side
of the inverter.
With PM motor
Use the following length of wiring or shorter when connecting a PM motor.
Pr.72 setting FR-F820-00077(1.5K) or lower, FR-F820-00105(2.2K) or higher,
Voltage class
(carrier frequency) FR-F840-00038(1.5K) or lower FR-F840-00052(2.2K) or higher
200 V 0 (2 kHz) to 15 (14 kHz) 100 m 100 m
5 (2 kHz) or lower 100 m 100 m
400 V 6 to 9 (6 kHz) 50 m 100 m
10 (10 kHz) or higher 50 m 50 m
Use one PM motor for one inverter. Multiple PM motors cannot be connected to an inverter.
NOTE
• Especially for long-distance wiring or wiring with shielded cables, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused
by stray capacitances of the wiring, leading to an activation of the overcurrent protection, malfunction of the fast-response
current limit operation, or even to an inverter failure. It may also cause a malfunction or fault of the equipment connected ON
the inverter output side. Stray capacitances of the wiring differ by the installation condition, use the total wiring length in the
table above as reference values. If the fast-response current limit function malfunctions, disable this function. (Refer to Pr.156
Stall prevention operation selection on page 248.)
• A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) can be used under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector
control. A sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) can be used under V/F control. Do not use the filters under different control
methods.
• For the details of Pr.72 PWM frequency selection, refer to page 179.
• For the details of the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) and the sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), refer to
the Instruction Manual of each option.
• Refer to page 82 to drive a 400 V class motor by an inverter.
(I) Independent earthing (grounding).......Good (II) Common earthing (grounding).......Good (III) Common earthing (grounding) cable.......Not allowed
To be compliant with the EU Directive (Low Voltage Directive), refer to the Instruction Manual (Startup).
Input signal
Refer
Terminal Rated
Type
Refer
Terminal Rated
Type
input:
Inputting 4 to 20 mADC (or 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) provides the Input resistance
maximum output frequency at 20 mA and makes input and output 245 5
proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is Permissible
Frequency setting ON (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr.267 to switch among input maximum current
4 306
(current) 4 to 20 mA (initial setting), 0 to 5 VDC, and 0 to 10 VDC. Set the 30 mA
voltage/current input switch in the OFF position to select voltage
Voltage/current
input (0 to 5 V/0 to 10 V). Use Pr.858 to switch terminal input switch
functions. switch2
switch1
2 4
Input resistance 10
Inputting 0 to ±5 VDC or 0 to ±10 VDC adds this signal to terminal
k 1 k
Frequency setting 2 or 4 frequency setting signal. Use Pr.73 to switch between input
1 Permissible 306
auxiliary 0 to ±5 VDC and 0 to ±10 VDC (initial setting). Use Pr.868 to
maximum voltage
switch terminal functions.
20 VDC
Frequency setting Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4)
5 — 306
common and analog output terminal AM, CA. Do not earth (ground).
Applicable PTC
thermistor
Thermistor
Input voltage 23 to
For connecting a 24 V external power supply.
24 V external power 25.5 VDC
+24 If a 24 V external power supply is connected, power is supplied to 57
supply input Input current 1.4 A
the control circuit while the main power circuit is OFF.
or less
Set Pr.73, Pr.267, and the voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
Applying a voltage with the voltage/current input switch ON (current input is selected) or a current with the switch OFF (voltage input is selected)
could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuits of output devices. (For the details, refer to page 306.)
Sink logic is initially set for the FM-type inverter.
Source logic is initially set for the CA-type inverter.
Output signal
Refer
Terminal Rated
Type
FM
Outputs a selected monitored item
This terminal can be Maximum output
NPN open (such as output frequency) among used for open pulse 50k pulses/s
several monitored items. The signal is 218
collector output collector outputs by Permissible load
not output during an inverter reset.
setting Pr.291. current 80 mA
The output signal is proportional to the
magnitude of the corresponding Output signal 0 to 10
VDC, Permissible
monitoring item.
Analog voltage load current 1 mA
AM Use Pr.55, Pr.56, and Pr.866 to set full 273
output scales for the monitored output (load impedance 10
Output item:
Analog
k or more)
frequency, output current, and torque. Output frequency
Resolution 8 bits
(Refer to page 273.) (initial setting)
Load impedance 200
CA to 450
Analog current output 273
Output signal 0 to 20
mADC
Terminal FM is provided in the FM-type inverter.
Terminal CA is provided in the CA-type inverter.
Communication
Refer
Terminal
Type
TXD+
RS-485 terminals
Inverter transmission terminal The RS-485 terminals enables the communication by RS-485.
TXD-
Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
RXD+ Transmission format: Multidrop link 443
Inverter reception terminal Communication speed: 300 to 115200 bps
RXD-
Overall length: 500 m
SG Earthing (grounding)
A connector (receptacle)
USB A connector A USB memory device enables parameter Interface: Conforms to 61
copies and the trace function. USB1.1 (USB2.0 full-speed
USB
The terminals S1 and S2 are used for the safety stop input signal
Safety stop input for the safety relay module. The terminals S1 and S2 are used at
S1
(Channel 1) the same time (dual channel). Input resistance 4.7
Inverter output is shutoff by shortening/opening between k
terminals S1 and SIC, or between S2 and SIC. Input current 4 to 6
In the initial status, terminals S1 and S2 are shorted with the mADC (with 24 VDC
Safety stop input terminal PC by shorting wires. The terminal SIC is shorted with input)
S2 the terminal SD. Remove the shorting wires and connect the
(Channel 2)
safety relay module when using the safety stop function.
2
Safety stop input
SIC Common terminal for terminals S1 and S2. —
terminal common
Indicates the safety stop input signal status. 58
Permissible load
Switched to LOW when the status is other than the internal
D24 VDC (27 VDC at
safety circuit failure. Switched to HIGH during the internal safety
maximum), 0.1 A (The
circuit failure status.
voltage drop is 3.4 V
(LOW is when the open collector output transistor is ON
Safety monitor output at maximum while the
SO (conducted). HIGH is when the transistor is OFF (not
(open collector output) signal is ON.)
conducted).)
(The voltage drop is
Refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual (BCN-
3.4 V at maximum
A23228-001) when the signal is switched to HIGH while both
while the signal is
terminals S1 and S2 are open. (Please contact your sales
ON.)
representative for the manual.)
Safety monitor output
SOC Common terminal for terminal SO. —
terminal common
Jumper connector
SOURCE
SINK
NOTE
• Make sure that the jumper connector is installed correctly.
• Never change the control logic while power is ON.
Current flow concerning the input/output signal Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when sink logic is selected when source logic is selected
Current Sink
STF Current
connector
R STF
R Source
connector
STR
R STR
R
SD
SE - + TB17 SE + - TB18
24VDC 24VDC
2
wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal SD of the wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal PC of the
inverter with the terminal 0 V of the external power supply. inverter with the terminal +24 V of the external power
When using terminals PC-SD as a 24 VDC power supply, supply. When using terminals PC-SD as a 24 VDC power
do not install an external power supply in parallel with the supply, do not install an external power supply in parallel
inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter with the inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the
due to undesirable currents.) inverter due to undesirable currents.)
voltage
circuit circuit
Fuse TB17
TB18
TB18 SD
24VDC SD
∗1
2 5 4 1 F/C +24 SD So SOC SD SIC S1 S2 PC A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
This terminal operates as the terminal FM for the FM type, and as the terminal CA for the CA type.
Wiring method
• Power supply connection
For the control circuit wiring, strip off the sheath of a cable, and use it with a blade terminal. For a single wire, strip off the
sheath of the wire and apply directly.
Insert the blade terminal or the single wire into a socket of the terminal.
(1)Strip off the sheath for the below length. If the length of the sheath peeled is too long, a short circuit may occur with
neighboring wires. If the length is too short, wires might come off.
Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose. In addition, do not solder it.
Cable stripping size
10 mm
Flathead screwdriver
NOTE
• When using stranded wires without a blade terminal, twist enough to avoid short circuit with a nearby terminals or wires.
• Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause an inverter damage
or injury.
• Wire removal
Pull the wire while pushing the open/close button all
the way down firmly with a flathead screwdriver.
NOTE
Open/close button • Pulling out the wire forcefully without pushing the open/close
button all the way down may damage the terminal block.
• Use a small flathead screwdriver (tip thickness: 0.4 mm/tip
Flathead screwdriver
width: 2.5 mm).
If a flathead screwdriver with a narrow tip is used, terminal
block may be damaged.
Commercially available products (as of February 2012)
+24V Inverter
PC
+24V
STF, etc
External signal input using transistor External signal input using transistor
(sink logic) (source logic)
<Wiring example>
Rubber bush
(viewed from inside)
Connection method
<Connection diagram> When a fault occurs, opening of the electromagnetic contactor (MC) on the
MC inverter power supply side results in power loss in the control circuit, disabling the
R/L1 Inverter fault output signal retention. Terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 are provided to hold a
S/L2 fault signal. In this case, connect the power supply terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21
T/L3 of the control circuit to the input side of the MC.
R1/L11 Do not connect the power cable to incorrect terminals. Doing so may damage the
S1/L21 inverter.
Remove the jumper
R1/L11
(d)
S1/L21
2
Main circuit terminal block
(b)
R/L1
(d)
MC
FR-F820-00770(18.5K)
to 01250(30K)
FR-F840-00470(22K), FR-F820-01540(37K) FR-F820-01870(45K) or higher
00620(30K) FR-F840-00770(37K) FR-F840-00930(45K) or higher
Power supply
terminal block for
the control circuit
NOTE
• When using separate power supplies, always remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and across S/L2 and
S1/L21. The inverter may be damaged if the jumpers are not removed.
• The voltage should be the same as that of the main control circuit when the control circuit power is supplied from other than
the input side of the MC.
• The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the inverter
capacity.
• If the main circuit power is switched OFF (for 0.1 s or more) then ON again, the inverter is reset and a fault output will not be
held.
or OMRON Corporation
S8VS-06024
Specifications: Capacity 60W, output voltage (DC) 24 V, output current 2.5 A
Installation method: DIN rail installation
For the latest information about OMRON power supply, contact OMRON corporation.
2
NOTE
• When the 24 V external power is supplied while the main circuit power supply is OFF, the inverter operation is disabled.
• In the initial setting, when the main power supply is turned ON during the 24 V external power supply operation, a reset is
performed in the inverter, then the power supply changes to the main circuit power supply. (The reset can be disabled using
Pr.30. (Refer to page 508.))
Flickering
Flickering
POWER ALARM
• During the 24 V external power supply operation, the 24 V external power supply operation signal (EV) is output. To use the
EV signal, set "68 (positive logic) or 168 (negative logic)" in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection)
to assign function to an output terminal.
NOTE
• Inrush current equal to or higher than the 24 V external power supply specification may flow at power-ON. Confirm that the
power supply and other devices are not affected by the inrush current and the voltage drop caused by it. Depending on the
power supply, the inrush current protection may be activated to disable the power supply. Select the power supply and
capacity carefully.
• When the wiring length between the external power supply and the inverter is long, the voltage often drops. Select the
appropriate wiring size and length to keep the voltage in the rated input voltage range.
• In a serial connection of several inverters, the current increases when it flows through the inverter wiring near the power
supply. The increase of the current causes voltage to drop further. When connecting different inverters to different power
supplies, use the inverters after confirming that the input voltage of each inverter is within the rated input voltage range.
Depending on the power supply, the inrush current protection may be activated to disable the power supply. Select the power
supply and capacity carefully.
• "E.SAF or E.P24" may appear when the start-up time of the 24 V power supply is too long (less than 1.5 V/s) in the 24 V
external power supply operation.
• "E.P24" may appear when the 24 V external power supply input voltage is low. Check the external power supply input.
• Do not touch the control circuit terminal block (circuit board) during the 24 V power supply operation (when conducted).
Otherwise you may get an electric shock or burn.
In the initial status, terminals S1 and PC, S2 and PC, and SIC and SD are respectively shorted with shorting wires. To use the safety stop
function, remove all the shortening wires, and then connect to the safety relay module as shown in the following connection diagram.
At an internal safety circuit failure, the operation panel displays one of the faults shown on the next page.
NOTE
• Use the terminal SO to output a fault and to prevent restarting of the inverter. The signal cannot be used as safety stop input
terminal to other devices.
Connection diagram
To prevent automatic restart after a fault occurrence, connect the reset button of a safety relay module or a safety
programmable controller across the terminals SO and SOC. The reset button acts as the feedback input for the safety relay
module or the safety programmable controller.
SO
Logic
SOC
IGBTs
+24V
PC Fuse Gate Gate
CPU ASIC Driver Driver
RESET
24VDC
S2 G G
Emergency S1
stop button SIC
SD
Safety relay module
/ Safety programmable controller
U V W
For more details, refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual (BCN-A23228-001). (Find a PDF copy of this manual in
the CD-ROM enclosed with the product.
2.7.1 PU connector
Mounting the operation panel or the parameter unit on the enclosure
surface
• Having an operation panel or a parameter unit on the enclosure surface is convenient. With a connection cable, the
operation panel or the parameter unit can be mounted to the enclosure surface and connected to the inverter.
Use the option FR-CB2[ ], or connectors and cables available on the market.
(To mount the operation panel, the optional connector (FR-ADP) is required.)
Securely insert one end of the connection cable until the stoppers are fixed.
Parameter unit connection cable
(FR-CB2[ ]) (option)
STF FWD PU
NOTE
• Refer to the following table when fabricating the cable on the user side. Keep the total cable length within 20 m.
• Commercially available products (as of November 2013)
Name Model Manufacturer
SGLPEV-T (Cat5e/300 m)
Communication cable Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
24AWG 4P
RJ-45 connector 5-554720-3 Tyco Electronics
Communication operation
• Using the PU connector enables communication operation from a personal computer, etc. When the PU connector is
connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run to monitor the inverter
or read and write parameters.
Communication can be performed with the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link operation).
For the details, refer to page 441.
USB host
(A connector) USB
Communication status
Place a flathead screwdriver,
indicator (LED)
etc. in a slot and push up the
cover to open. USB device
(Mini B connector)
Personal computer
(FR Configurator2)
• When the inverter recognizes the USB memory device without any problem, is briefly displayed on the
operation panel.
• When the USB memory device is removed, is briefly displayed on the operation panel.
• The operating status of the USB host can be checked on the LED display of the inverter.
LED display status Operating status
OFF No USB connection.
ON The communication is established between the inverter and the USB device.
Flickering rapidly The USB memory device is being accessed. (Do not remove the USB memory device.)
Flickering slowly Error in the USB connection.
• When a device such as a USB battery charger is connected to the USB connector and an excessive current (500 mA or
more) flows, USB host error (UF warning) is displayed on the operation panel.
• When the UF warning appears, the USB error can be canceled by removing the USB device and setting Pr.1049 = "1". (The
UF warning can also be canceled by resetting the inverter power or resetting with the RES signal.)
NOTE
• Do not connect devices other than a USB memory device to the inverter.
• If a USB device is connected to the inverter via a USB hub, the inverter cannot recognize the USB memory device properly.
NOTE
• For the details of FR Configurator2, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.
The RS-485 terminals enable communication operation from a personal computer, etc. When the PU connector is connected
with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run to monitor the inverter or read and
write parameters.
Communication can be performed with the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link operation) and Modbus-RTU protocol.
For the details, refer to page 443.
OPEN
VCC GND + TXD - + RXD -
T ∗2
MC MC
GRZG type ∗5
discharging
OCR resistor
MCCB MC R R
R/L1 U Motor External thermal
Three-phase AC
power supply
S/L2 V M relay ∗4
T/L3 W
Inverter FR-BU2
∗3 PR A
∗1
P/+ P/+ B
∗1
N/- N/- C
BUE
∗4
SD
10 m or less
When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbol (P/+, N/-) at the inverter side and at the brake unit (FR-BU2) side.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit (FR-BU2), and between the brake unit (FR-BU2) and
discharging resistor must be within 5 m. Even when the wires are twisted, the cable length must be within 10 m.
It is recommended to install an external thermal relay to prevent overheat of the discharging resistor.
For the connection method of the discharging resistor, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-BU2.
• Recommended external thermal relay
2
Recommended
Brake unit Discharging resistor
external thermal relay
FR-BU2-1.5K GZG 300W-50Ω (one) TH-N20CXHZ 1.3A
1/L1 5/L3
GRZG 200-10Ω TH-N20
NOTE
• Set "1" in Pr.0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use a GRZG type discharging resistor.
• Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
T ∗2
MC MC
FR-BR
MCCB MC
R/L1 U Motor P TH1 ∗4
Three phase AC
power supply S/L2 V M PR
T/L3 W TH2
∗3
Inverter FR-BU2
PR A
P/+ P/+ B
∗1
N/- N/- C
BUE
∗3 SD
10 m or less
When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbol (P/+, N/-) at the inverter side and at the brake unit
(FR-BU2) side. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit (FR-BU2), and between the brake unit (FR-BU2)
and resistor unit (FR-BR) must be within 5 m. Even when the wire is twisted, the cable length must be
within 10 m.
The contact between TH1 and TH2 is closed in the normal status and is open at a fault.
NOTE
• Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
T ∗2
When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbol (P/+, N/-) at the inverter side and at the brake unit
(FR-BU2) side. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit (FR-BU2), and between the brake unit (FR-BU2)
and resistor unit (MT-BR5) must be within 5 m. Even when the wire is twisted, the cable length must be
within 10 m.
The contact between TH1 and TH2 is open in the normal status and is closed at a fault.
The CN8 connector used with the MT-BU5 type brake unit is not used.
NOTE
• The stall prevention (overvoltage), oL, does not occur while Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "1". (Refer to page
508.)
T ∗2
MC MC
FR-BR
MCCB MC
R/L1 U Motor
P TH1
Three-phase AC
S/L2 V M
power supply PR
T/L3 W TH2
Inverter FR-BU
PR
HA
P/+ P/+ HB
∗1
N/- N/- HC
∗3
10 m or less
When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbol (P/+, N/-) at the inverter side and at the brake unit (FR-BU(H)) side. (Incorrect connection
will damage the inverter.)
When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit (FR-BU2), and between the brake unit (FR-BU2) and discharging resistor must be within
5 m. Even when the cable is twisted, the wiring length must be within 10 m.
NOTE
• If the transistors in the brake unit should becomes faulty, the resistor will overheat. Install a magnetic contactor on the
inverter's input side and configure a circuit that shut off the current in case of a fault.
• Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
Inverter MC
MCCB MC Motor
U
R/L1 V M
Three-phase Brake unit
AC power S/L2 W (BU type) Remove the
supply T/L3 jumper
TB
N/-
N OCR HC
P/+
HB
HA
Discharging
resistor OCR
PC
PR Fit a jumper
P
NOTE
• The wiring distance between the inverter and brake unit (BU type), and between the brake unit (BU type) and discharging
resistor must be within 2 m. Even when the cable is twisted, the wiring length must be within 5 m.
• If the transistors in the brake unit should becomes faulty, the resistor will overheat and result in a fire. Install a magnetic
contactor on the inverter's input side and configure a circuit that shut off the current in case of a fault.
• Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 only when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
High power
Outside box factor converter
Reactor1 (FR-HCB2)∗10 Reactor2 (FR-HC2) Inverter
MCCB MC (FR-HCL21) (FR-HCL22)
∗1
∗7 R/ ∗7 R2/ R3/ ∗7 R3/ R4/ ∗7 R/L1 Motor
R2/ R4/L14
L1 L12 L12 L13 L13 L14 U
Three-phase S/L2
S/ S2/ S2/ S3/ S3/ S4/ T/L3 W V M
AC power L2 L22 L23 L23 L24 S4/L24
L22
supply R1/L11
T/ T2/ T2/ T3/ T3/ T4/
L3 L32 L32 L33 L33 L34 T4/L34 S1/L21 Earth
∗8
Fuse ∗9
∗8 (ground)
P/+ P/+
∗2
ROH1 ROH N/- N/-
ROH2 SD ∗5
88R 88R RDY X10 ∗3
88S 88S ∗4 IPF X11 ∗3
R/L1 RSO RES
∗8 S/L2 ∗6
T/L3 SE SD
R1/L11
S1/L21 ∗8 ∗8
Remove jumpers between terminal R/L1 and R1/L11 as well as between S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the power supply for the control
circuit to terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect anything to power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). Incorrect connection will
damage the inverter. (E.OPT (option fault) will occur. (Refer to page 546.)
Do not install an MCCB across the terminals P/+ and N/- (across terminals P and P/+ or across N and N/-). Connecting the opposite
polarity of terminals N/- and P/+ will damage the inverter.
Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 (X11) signal. (Refer to page 329.)
For RS-485 or any other communication where the start command is only transmitted once, use the X11 signal to save the operation
mode at the time of an instantaneous power failure.
Assign the IPF signal to an FR-HC2 terminal. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-HC2.)
Always connect the FR-HC2 terminal RDY to a terminal where the X10 signal or MRS signal is assigned in the inverter. Always connect
the FR-HC2 terminal SE to the inverter terminal SD. Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR-HC2.
Always connect the R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 terminals of FR-HC2 to the power supply. Operating the inverter without connecting them will
damage the FR-HC2.
Do not install an MCCB or MC between the reactor 1 terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and the FR-HC2 terminals (R4/L14, S4/L24, T4/L34). It
will not operate properly.
Securely perform grounding (earthing) by using the grounding (earthing) terminal.
Installation of a fuse is recommended. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-HC2.)
Outside box is not available for FR-HC2-H280K or higher. Connect filter capacitors, inrush current limit resistors, and magnetic
contactors. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-HC2.)
NOTE
• The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 and the voltage phases of terminals R4/L14, S4/L24, and T4/L34 must
be matched.
• The control logic (sink logic/source logic) of the high power factor converter and the inverter must be matched. (Refer to page
50.)
• Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when FR-HC2 is connected.
R/L1 U
S/L2 ∗1
T/L3 V M
R1/L11 W
S1/L21
Dedicated stand-alone FR-CV type
reactor (FR-CVL) Power regeneration Inverter
common converter
MCCB MC1
R/L11 R2/L12
Three-phase R2/L1
AC power S/L21 S2/L22
S2/L2 P/L+ P/+
supply T/L31 T2/L32 ∗2
T2/L3 N/L- N/-
P24 PC
R/L11
SD SD
S/L21 ∗4
RDYA
T/MC1 ∗5
RDYB X10 ∗3
RSO RES
SE
Remove jumpers between terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 as well as between S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the power supply for the
control circuit to terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect anything to power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). Incorrect
connection will damage the inverter. (E.OPT (option fault) will occur. (Refer to page 546.)
Do not insert an MCCB between terminals P/+ and N/- (between terminals P/L+ and P/+ or between N/L- and N/-). Connecting the
opposite polarity of terminals N/- and P/+ will damage the inverter.
Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 signal. (Refer to page 329.)
Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, and T/MC1. Operating the inverter without connecting them will
damage the power regeneration common converter.
Always connect terminal RDYB of the FR-CV to the inverter terminal where the X10 signal or the MRS signal is assigned to. Always
connect terminal SE of the FR-CV to the inverter terminal SD. Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR-CV.
NOTE 2
• The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, and T/MC1 and the voltage phases of terminals R2/L1, S2/L2, and T2/L3 must
be matched.
• Use the sink logic (factory setting) when the FR-CV is connected. It cannot be connected when the source logic is selected.
• Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when FR-CV is connected.
DCL S1/L21
P1
P1
P/+ N/-
P
MT-RCL
Reset signal
R R2 P N RES
R2
S S2 STF
S2 SD
T T2
T2
C
B
R Alarm signal
A
S
RDY
T
R1 Ready signal
S1 SE
MT-RC
NOTE
• When using the inverter with the MT-RC, install a magnetic contactor (MC) at
Inverter input power ON
the input side of the inverter so that power is supplied to the inverter after 1 s or supply (MC2)
more has elapsed after powering ON the MT-RC. When power is supplied to
the inverter prior to the MT-RC, the inverter and the MT-RC may be damaged
MT-RC power ON
or the MCCB may trip or be damaged.
supply (MC1)
• When connecting the power coordination reactor and others, refer to 1s or more
10cm or more
P1 P/+
FR-HEL
Remove
the jumper
• Select a DC reactor according to the applied motor capacity. (Refer to page 578.) For the FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher
and the FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher, always connect a DC reactor.
• Since the DC reactor (FR-HEL) is electrically connected to the enclosure through mounting screws, the DC reactor is
earthed (grounded) by being securely mounted to the enclosure. However, if the DC reactor is not earthed (grounded)
securely enough, an earthing (grounding) cable may be used.
When using an earthing (grounding) cable for FR-HEL-(H)55K or lower, wire the cable to the installation hole where varnish
is removed. For FR-HEL-(H)75K or higher, use an earth (ground) terminal to perform earthing (grounding). (Refer to the
Instruction Manual of the FR-HEL.)
NOTE
• The wiring distance must be within 5 m.
2
• As a reference, the cable gauge for the connection must be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/
L2, T/L3) and the earthing (grounding) cable. (Refer to page 41.)
70
3 PRECAUTIONS FOR
USE OF THE
INVERTER
The leakage currents of the 400 V class are about twice as large.
MCCB MC Thermal relay
Motor
Power Inverter/
supply M
converter
Line-to-line static
capacitances
Line-to-line leakage currents path
Countermeasures
• Use Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
• If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive.
To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a temperature sensor
to directly detect motor temperature.
Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit
breaker
When using an earth leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows,
independently of the PWM carrier frequency.
• Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial power
Rated sensitivity current supply operation
In ≥ 10 (Ig1 + Ign + Igi + Ig2 + Igm) Ign: Leakage current of inverter input side noise filter
• Standard breaker Igm: Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply
Rated sensitivity current operation
In ≥ 10 {Ig1 + Ign + Igi + 3 (Ig2 + Igm)} Igi: Leakage current of inverter unit
Example of leakage current of Example of leakage current per 1km during Leakage current example of three-
Leakage current example of the commercial power supply operation phase induction motor during the
cable path per 1km during the
three-phase induction motor when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit commercial power supply operation
commercial power supply operation
during the commercial
when the CV cable is routed in (Three-phase three-wire delta (Totally-enclosed fan-cooled
power supply operation type motor 400V60Hz)
metal conduit connection 400V60Hz)
(200V 60Hz) 2. 0
(200V 60Hz)
leakage currents (mA)
120
leakage currents (mA)
2.0 100
Leakage currents (mA)
Leakage currents (mA)
120 1. 0
100 80 0. 7
1.0 0. 5
80 0.7 60
0.5 0. 3
60 40
0. 2
0.3 20
40
0.2 0 0. 1
20 2 3.5 8 142238 80150 1. 5 3. 7 7. 5 15223755
0 0.1 5.5 30 60 100 2. 2 5.5 1118. 53045
2 3.5 8 14 2238 80150 1.5 3.7 7.5 15223755
5.5 30 60 100 2.2 5.5 11 18.5 3045 Cable size (mm )2
Motor capacity (kW)
2
Cable size(mm ) Motor capacity (kW) For " " connection, the amount of leakage current is appox.1/3 of the above value.
<Example>
Breaker designed
for harmonic and Standard breaker
surge suppression
5m
5.5mm2 5m 5.5mm2 50m Leakage current Ig1 (mA) 33 = 0.17
1000 m
ELB Noise Leakage current Ign (mA) 0 (without noise filter)
filter
3
Drive 3φ
M 200V 1 (without EMC filter)
unit
2.2kW Leakage current Igi (mA) For the leakage current of the inverter, refer to
Ig1 Ign Ig2 Igm the following table.
50 m
Igi
Leakage current Ig2 (mA) 33 = 1.65
1000 m
Motor leakage current Igm (mA) 0.18
Total leakage current (mA) 3.00 6.66
Rated sensitivity current (mA) (≥ Ig 10) 30 100
Earthed-neutral
system
400 2 1
NOTE
• Install the earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) on the input side of the inverter.
• In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is blunt against a ground fault in the inverter output side.
Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC
section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
• When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even if the
effective value is within the rating.
In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase, leading to temperature rise.
• The following models are standard breakers: BV-C1, BC-V, NVB, NV-L, NV-G2N, NV-G3NA, NV-2F, earth leakage relay
(except NV-ZHA), and NV with AA neutral wire open-phase protection. The other models are designed for harmonic and
surge suppression: NV-C/NV-S/MN series, NV30-FA, NV50-FA, BV-C2, earth leakage alarm breaker (NF-Z), NV-ZHA, and
NV-H.
Inverter generated
Air propagated Noise directly
electromagnetic radiated from inverter
Path (a)
noise
noise
Noise radiated from
power supply cable
Path (b) (e) Telephone
Noise radiated from
motor connection cable
Path (c)
(g) (g)
Electromagnetic (b)
Path (d), (e)
induction noise
(a) Sensor
Electrostatic power supply
Path (f)
induction noise Instrument Receiver (c) Inverter
(f) (a) (f)
Electrical path Noise propagated through
propagated noise power supply cable Path (g) (d)
Noise from earthing (c) Sensor
(grounding) cable due to
leakage current
Path (h) Motor M
Noise
Countermeasure
propagation path
When devices that handle low-level signals and are liable to malfunction due to electromagnetic noises, e.g.
instruments, receivers and sensors, are contained in the enclosure that contains the inverter or when their signal
cables are run near the inverter, the devices may malfunction due to by air-propagated electromagnetic noises. The
following countermeasures must be taken:
• Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.
• Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables.
(a)(b)(c)
• Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them.
• Set the EMC filter ON/OFF connector of the inverter to the ON position. (Refer to page 76.)
• Inserting a line noise filter into the output suppresses the radiated noise from the cables.
• Use shielded cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce
further effects.
When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power cables, magnetic and static induction
noises may be propagated to the signal cables to cause malfunction of the devices and the following
countermeasures must be taken:
• Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.
(d)(e)(f) • Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables.
• Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them.
• Use shielded cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce
further effects.
When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to the power supply of the inverter in the same
line, inverter-generated noises may flow back through the power supply cables to cause malfunction of the devices
(g) and the following countermeasures must be taken:
• Set the EMC filter ON/OFF connector of the inverter to the ON position. (Refer to page 76.)
• Install the line noise filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01) to the power cables (output cables) of the inverter.
When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral device wiring to the inverter, leakage currents
(h) may flow through the earthing (grounding) cable of the inverter to cause the device to malfunction. In that case,
disconnecting the earthing (grounding) cable from the device may stop the malfunction of the device.
Data line filter
Data line filter is effective as an EMI countermeasure. Provide a data line filter for the detector cable, etc.
<Example> Data line filter : ZCAT3035-1330 (by TDK)
: ESD-SR-250 (by NEC TOKIN)
Impedance (ZCAT3035-1330)
[Unit: mm]
Impedance (Ω) 39 1 Cable fixing band
10 to 100 MHz 100 to 500 MHz
13 1
mount
34 1
80 150
The impedance values above are reference values,
and not guaranteed values.
30 1
3
TDK
NOTE
• For compliance with the EU EMC Directive, refer to the Instruction Manual (Startup).
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON
NOTE
• Fit the connector or shorting wire to either ON or OFF position.
• Enabling (turning ON) the EMC filter increases leakage current. (Refer to page 73.)
WARNING
While power is ON or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may
get an electric shock.
• Countermeasures
The harmonic current generated from the inverter
DC reactor
to the input side differs according to various
conditions such as the wiring impedance, whether
(FR-HEL) 3
a reactor is used or not, and output frequency and
MCCB MC P/+ P1
Power supply
NOTE
• The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by
the harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent
protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side when the motor is driven by the
inverter. For power factor improvement, install a reactor on the inverter input side or in the DC circuit.
Calculation of equivalent
capacity total
Equal to or less
than reference
capacity Equivalent
capacity total
Above reference
capacity
Calculation of outgoing
harmonic current
P0 = ∑ (Ki Pi) [kVA] Rated capacity: Determined by the capacity of the applied
motor and found in Table 5. The rated capacity used here
Ki: Conversion coefficient (Refer to Table 2)
is used to calculate the generated harmonic amount and
Pi: Rated capacity of harmonic generating equipment [kVA] is different from the power supply capacity required for
i: Number indicating the conversion circuit type actual inverter drive.
(kVA)
AC reactor
Power supply system
Inverter 5300
MCCB MC (FR-HAL) 5000 Capacities requiring
R X 4000 installation of
capacity
R/L1 U AC reactor
Power 3000
S Y
S/L2 V M 2000
supply
T Z 1000
T/L3 W
110165 247 330 420 550 kVA
Inverter capacity
NOTE
• Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000
times), frequent starts and stops of the magnetic contactor must be avoided. Turn ON/OFF the inverter start controlling
terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.
NOTE
• Before wiring or inspection for a PM motor, confirm that the PM motor is stopped. In an application, such as fan and blower,
where the motor is driven by the load, a low-voltage manual contactor must be connected at the inverter's output side, and
wiring and inspection must be performed while the contactor is open. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
• Do not open or close the contactor while the inverter is running (outputting).
• Countermeasures
(With induction motor)
It is recommended to take one of the following countermeasures:
• Rectifying the motor insulation and limiting the PWM carrier frequency according to the wiring length
For the 400 V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor.
Specifically,
- Order a "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor".
- For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use an "inverter-driven dedicated
motor".
- Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length.
Wiring length
50 m or shorter 50 m to 100 m Longer than 100 m
Pr.72 PWM frequency selection 15 (14.5 kHz) or lower 9 (9 kHz) or lower 4 (4 kHz) or lower
(With PM motor)
• When the wiring length exceeds 50 m, set "9" (6 kHz) or less in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.
NOTE
• For the details of Pr.72 PWM frequency selection, refer to page 179. (When using an optional sine wave filter (MT-BSL/
BSC), set "25" (2.5 kHz) in Pr.72.)
• For the details of the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) and the sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), refer to
the Instruction Manual of each option.
• A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) can be used under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector
control.
A sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) can be used under V/F control. Do not use the filters under different control modes.
Refer Check
Checkpoint Countermeasure
to page by user
Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeves to wire the power supply
Crimping terminals are insulated. -
and the motor.
The wiring between the power supply
Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and the motor (U, V, 37
damage the inverter. Never perform such wiring.
W) is correct.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the
No wire offcuts are left from the time of inverter clean.
-
wiring. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to
allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
Use an appropriate cable gauge to suppress the voltage drop to 2% or
less.
The main circuit cable gauge is correctly
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, the voltage 41
selected.
drop in the main circuit will cause the motor torque to decrease
especially during the output of a low frequency.
Keep the total wiring length within the specified length.
In long distance wiring, charging currents due to stray capacitance in the
The total wiring length is within the
wiring may degrade the fast-response current limit operation or cause 41
specified length.
the equipment on the inverter's output side to malfunction. Pay attention
to the total wiring length.
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency
components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such
Countermeasures are taken against
as AM radios) used near the inverter. In such case, activate the EMC 76
EMI.
filter (turn ON the EMC filter ON/OFF connector) to minimize
interference.
On the inverter's output side, there is no Such installation will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge
power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices is connected, -
suppressor, or radio noise filter installed. immediately remove it.
For a short time after the power-OFF, a high voltage remains in the
When performing an inspection or
smoothing capacitor, and it is dangerous.
rewiring on the product that has been
Before performing an inspection or rewiring, wait 10 minutes or longer
energized, the operator has waited long -
after the power supply turns OFF, then confirm that the voltage across
enough after shutting off the power
the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- of the inverter is low enough using
supply.
a tester, etc.
• A short circuit or ground fault on the inverter's output side may damage
the inverter module.
• Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter
3
operation since repeated short circuits caused by peripheral circuit
The inverter's output side has no short inadequacy or a ground fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced
-
circuit or ground fault occurring. motor insulation resistance may damage the inverter module.
• Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and phase-to-phase
insulation of the inverter's output side before power-ON. Especially for
an old motor or use in hostile atmosphere, make sure to check the
motor insulation resistance, etc.
Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the
The circuit is not configured to use the
converter circuit, frequent starts and stops of the magnetic contactor
inverter's input-side magnetic contactor 81
must be avoided. Turn ON/OFF the inverter's start signals (STF, STR) to
to start/stop the inverter frequently.
run/stop the inverter.
Application of a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the
The voltage applied to the inverter I/O inverter I/O signal circuits or opposite polarity may damage the I/O
signal circuits is within the devices. Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting 46
specifications. potentiometer from being connected incorrectly to short circuit the
terminals 10E and 5.
Refer Check
Checkpoint Countermeasure
to page by user
When using a switching circuit as shown below, chattering due to mis-
configured sequence or arc generated at switching may allow
undesirable current to flow in and damage the inverter. Mis-wiring may
also damage the inverter.
(The commercial power supply operation is not available with PM
motors.)
Refer to
No. Interlock method Check method Used signals
page
Operation check of an alarm contact.
Inverter protective function
a Circuit error detection by negative Fault output signal (ALM signal) 293
operation
logic.
b Inverter operating status Operation ready signal check. Operation ready signal (RY signal) 292
Logic check of the start signal and Start signal (STF signal, STR signal)
c Inverter running status 292, 335
running signal. Running signal (RUN signal)
Start signal (STF signal, STR signal)
Logic check of the start signal and
d Inverter running status Output current detection signal (Y12 296, 335
output current.
signal)
When the inverter's protective function activates and Inverter fault occurrence
(trip)
the inverter trips, the fault output signal (ALM signal) is
output. (ALM signal is assigned to terminal A1B1C1 in
the initial setting).
With this signal, check that the inverter operates ALM
Time
ON OFF
properly. (when output
at NC contact)
In addition, negative logic can be set. (ON when the ON OFF
RES
Reset processing
inverter is normal, OFF when the fault occurs.) (about 1s)
Reset ON
(b) Checking the inverter operating status by the inverter
operation ready completion signal Power ON OFF
Operation ready signal (RY signal) is output when the supply
3
ON OFF
STF
inverter power is ON and the inverter becomes
ON
operative. Check if the RY signal is output after RH
powering ON the inverter.
Output frequency
DC injection brake
operation point
(c) Checking the inverter operating status by the start DC injection
signal input to the inverter and inverter running signal brake operation
Pr. 13 Starting
The inverter running signal (RUN signal) is output frequency
Reset
when the inverter is running. (RUN signal is assigned processing
Time
to terminal RUN in the initial setting.)
ON OFF
Check if RUN signal is being output while inputting a RY
RUN ON OFF
start signal to the inverter. (STF signal is a forward
rotation signal, and STR is a reverse rotation signal.)
Even after the start signal is turned OFF, the RUN
signal is kept output until the inverter makes the motor
to decelerate and to stop. For the logic check,
configure a sequence considering the inverter's
deceleration time.
(d) Checking the motor operating status by the start signal input to the inverter and inverter output current detection signal
The output current detection signal (Y12 signal) is output when the inverter operates and currents flows into the motor.
Check if Y12 signal is being output while inputting a start signal to the inverter. (STF signal is a forward rotation signal,
and STR is a reverse rotation signal.) The Y12 signal is initially set to be output at 120% (FM type) / 110% (CA type)
rated inverter current. Adjust the level to around 20% using no load current of the motor as reference with Pr.150
Output current detection level.
Like the inverter running signal (RUN signal), even after the start signal is turned OFF, the Y12 signal is kept output until
the inverter stops the output to a decelerating motor. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the
inverter's deceleration time.
• When using various signals, assign the functions to Pr.190 and
Output Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) referring to the
signal Positive logic Negative logic table on the left.
ALM 99 199
RY 11 111
RUN 0 100
Y12 12 112
NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 and Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Controller
System failure
Inverter Sensor
(speed, temperature,
air volume, etc.)
BASIC OPERATION 87
Operation panel (FR-DU08)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(j) (g)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(h)
(i)
(j) MODE key Switches to the easy setting mode by pressing simultaneously with .
Holding this key for 2 seconds locks the operation. The key lock is invalid when
Pr.161="0 (initial setting)". (Refer to page 166.)
Enters each setting. When the initial setting is set
If pressed during operation, the monitored Output frequency Output current Output voltage
(k) SET key
item changes.
(Using Pr.52 and Pr.774-Pr.776, the monitored item can be changed.)
Goes back to the previous display.
(l) ESC key
Holding this key for a longer time changes the mode back to the monitor mode.
Switches between the PU operation mode, the PUJOG operation mode, and the
External operation mode.
(m) PU/EXT key
Switches to the easy setting mode by pressing simultaneously with .
Cancels the PU stop also.
88 BASIC OPERATION
Operation panel (FR-DU08)
Basic operation
Operation mode switchover/Frequency setting
(Example) Flicker
∗5
Parameter clear All parameter clear Faults history clear Parameter copy
Group parameter setting Automatic parameter setting IPM parameter initialization Initial value change list
4
Function
Function mode
Long press
For the details of operation modes, refer to page 200.
Monitored items can be changed.(Refer to page 263.)
For the details of the trace function, refer to page 433. For the details of the PID gain tuning, refer to page 394.
For the details of faults history, refer to page 535.
The USB memory mode will appear if a USB memory device is connected. (Refer to page 61.)
BASIC OPERATION 89
Operation panel (FR-DU08)
Refer
Operation panel
Function name Description to
indication
page
Under this mode, the set value of the displayed parameter number is
Parameter setting mode 91
read or changed.
Clears and resets parameter settings to the initial values.
Calibration parameters and offline auto tuning parameters are not
Parameter clear cleared. 520
The communication parameters are not cleared.
For the details of the uncleared parameters, refer to page 597.
Clears and resets parameter settings to the initial values. Calibration
parameters and the offline auto tuning parameters are also cleared.
Parameter all clear 520
The communication parameters are not cleared.
For the details of the uncleared parameters, refer to page 597.
E(e) F(f) G(g) H(h) I(i) J(j) K(k) L(l) M(m) N n O o P(p) Q(q)
90 BASIC OPERATION
Operation panel (FR-DU08)
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2.
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator is on.
4. Turn until (Pr.1) appears. Press to read the present set value.
Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to enter the setting.
NOTE
• to are displayed... Why?
- appears.....Calibration error
POINT
• When Pr.77 Parameter write selection="0 (initial setting)", the parameter setting change is only available while the inverter
is stopped under the PU operation mode.
4
To enable the parameter setting change while the inverter is running or under the operation mode other than PU operation
mode, change the Pr.77 setting. (Refer to page 169)
BASIC OPERATION 91
Monitoring the inverter status
Operation
1. Press during operation to monitor the output frequency. [Hz] indicator turns ON.
Press to monitor the output current. This operation is valid during running or stopping under any operation
2.
mode. [A] appears.
3. Press to monitor the output voltage. [V] appears.
NOTE
• Other monitored items, such as output voltage and set frequency, are also available. Use Pr.52 to change the setting. (Refer
to page 263.)
To set a monitored item as the first monitored item, display a monitored item, and press for a while.
Changing example Set the output current as the first monitored item.
Operation
1. Select the monitor mode, and select the output current.
2. Press for a while (1 s). The output current is set as the first monitored item.
3. When the monitor mode is selected next time, the output current is monitored first.
NOTE
• Use Pr.774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 to change the monitored item. (Refer to page 263.)
In the PU operation mode or in the External/PU combined operation mode 1( ) (Pr.79 Operation mode selection
="3"), select the monitor mode, and then press the setting dial. The present set frequency is displayed.
NOTE
• Use Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection to change the displayed indication. (Refer to page 263.)
92 BASIC OPERATION
Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)
Changing example Operate with the external (STF/STR) start command and frequency command.
Operation
1.
Flickering
Turn until (External/PU combined operation mode 1) appears. (For other settings, refer to the
table below.)
2.
Flickering
3. Press to enter the setting. External/PU combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79="3") is set.
Operation method
Operation panel indication Operation mode
Start command Frequency command
PU operation mode
Flickering ,
External Analog
External operation mode
(STF, STR) voltage input
Flickering
BASIC OPERATION 93
Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)
NOTE
• is displayed... Why?
-Pr.79 may not be included in the user group set by Pr.160 User group read selection ="1".
• is displayed... Why?
-Setting cannot be changed during operation.Turn the start command ( or , STF or STR) OFF.
• If is pressed before pressing , the easy setting mode is terminated and the display goes back to the monitor
display.If the easy setting mode is terminated while Pr.79 ="0 (initial value)", the operation mode switches between the PU
operation mode and the External operation mode. Check the operation mode.
• Reset by is enabled.
• The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr.79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14)
> terminal 4 analog input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".
94 BASIC OPERATION
Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
POINT
• Pr.160 User group read selection can narrow down the displayed parameters to only the simple mode parameters. Set
Pr.160 User group read selection as required. (For the parameter change, refer to page 91.)
BASIC OPERATION 95
Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
96 BASIC OPERATION
Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
Operation panel
(FR-DU08)
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2.
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator is on.
Setting the frequency
Turn until the target frequency, " " (30.00 Hz), appears. The frequency flickers for about 5 s.
While the value is flickering, press to enter the frequency. " " and " " flicker alternately. After about 3 s of
3.
flickering, the indication goes back to " " (monitor display).
(If is not pressed, the indication of the value goes back to " " (0.00 Hz) after about 5 s of flickering.In that
4
case, turn again and set the frequency.)
Press or to start running. The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr.7 Acceleration time, and
4.
" " (30.00 Hz) appears.
(To change the set frequency, perform the operation in above step 3. The previously set frequency appears.)
Deceleration → stop
5. Press to stop. The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr.8 Deceleration time, and the motor stops
BASIC OPERATION 97
Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
NOTE
• To display the set frequency under PU operation mode or External/PU combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3"), press .
• can also be used like a potentiometer to perform operation. (Refer to page 98.)
Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time page 187
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2.
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator is on.
Changing the parameter setting
3.
Change Pr.161 setting to "1". (For setting value change, refer to page 91.)
Start
4.
Press or to start the inverter operation.
Turn " " until " " appears. The set frequency flickers. (The frequency flickers for about 5 s.)
5.
NOTE
• If the display changes from flickering "60.00" to "0.00", Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection may be set
to a value other than "1".
• Simply turning will enable frequency setting whether the inverter is running or at a stop.
• The newly-set frequency will be saved as the set frequency in EEPROM after 10 s.
• With the setting dial, the frequency can go up to the setting value of Pr.1 Maximum frequency.
Check the Pr.1 Maximum frequency setting, and adjust the setting according to the application.
Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency page 245
Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection page 166
98 BASIC OPERATION
Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
Speed 1
Speed 2
High speed RH Operation panel (Middle speed)
(FR-DU08) Speed 3
Middle speed RM (Low speed)
Low speed RL
Switch Time
SD
RH ON
ON
RM
ON
RL
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2.
Set "4" in Pr.79. [PU] and [EXT] indicators are on. (For setting value change, refer to page 93.)
Setting the frequency
3.
Turn ON the low-speed switch (RL).
Start → acceleration → constant speed
4. Press or to start running. The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr.7 Acceleration time, and
5. Press to stop. The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr.8 Deceleration time, and the motor stops
rotating with " " (0.00 Hz) displayed. Turn OFF the low-speed switch (RL).
NOTE
• The terminal RH is initially set to 60 Hz for the FM type inverter, and to 50 Hz for the CA type inverter. The terminal RM is set
to 30 Hz, and the RL is set to 10 Hz. (To change, set Pr.4, Pr.5, and Pr.6.)
• In the initial setting, when two or more of multi-speed settings are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the set
frequency of the lower signal.
4
For example, when RH and RM signals turn ON, RM signal (Pr.5) has a higher priority.
• Maximum of 15-speed operation can be performed.
Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting) page 222
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time page 187
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
BASIC OPERATION 99
Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2.
Set "4" in Pr.79. [PU] and [EXT] indicators are on. (For setting value change, refer to page 91.)
Start
3.
Press or . [FWD] or [REV] flickers as no frequency command is given.
NOTE
• To change the frequency (60 Hz) at the maximum voltage input (initial value 5 V), adjust Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency
setting gain frequency.
• To change the frequency (0 Hz) at the minimum voltage input (initial value 0 V), adjust the calibration parameter C2
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency.
Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time page 187
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency page 314
C2(Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency page 314
Inverter
Operation panel
AU signal AU (FR-DU08)
SD
Current signal 4(+)
source
(4 to 20mADC) 5(-)
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2.
Set "4" in Pr.79. [PU] and [EXT] indicators are on. (For setting value change, refer to page 91.)
Terminal 4 input selection
3.
Turn ON the terminal 4 input selection signal (AU). Input to the terminal 4 is enabled.
Start
4.
Press or . [FWD] or [REV] flickers as no frequency command is given.
Acceleration → constant speed
5. Input 20 mA. The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz)
appears.
Deceleration
6. Input 4 mA or less.The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr.8 Deceleration time, and the motor stops rotating
with " " (0.00 Hz) displayed. [FWD] or [REV] indicator flickers.
Stop
7.
Press . [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
4
NOTE
• Pr.184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value).
• To change the frequency (60 Hz) at the maximum current input (initial value 20 mA), adjust Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency
setting gain frequency.
• To change the frequency (0 Hz) at the minimum current input (initial value 4 mA), adjust the calibration parameter C5
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency.
Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time page 187
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency page 314
Pr.184 AU terminal function selection? page 329
C5(Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency page 314
Operation
Changing the operation mode
1.
Set "3" in Pr.79. [PU] and [EXT] indicators are on. (For setting value change, refer to page 91.)
Setting the frequency
Turn to until the target frequency, " " (30.00 Hz), appears. The frequency flickers for about 5 s.
While the value is flickering, press to enter the frequency. " " and " " flicker alternately. After about 3 s of
2.
flickering, the indication goes back to " " (monitor display).
(If is not pressed, the indication of the value goes back to " " (0.00 Hz) after about 5 s of flickering. In that
NOTE
• When both the forward rotation switch (STF) and the reverse rotation switch (STR) are ON, the motor cannot be started. If
both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
• Pr.178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr.179 STR terminal function selection must be set to
"61"). (All are initial values.)
• Setting Pr.79 Operation mode selection="3" also enables multi-speed operation.
• If stopped using on the operation panel (FR-DU08) during the External operation, the inverter enters the PU stop
status.
To reset the PU stop status, turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR), and then press . (Refer to page 163)
Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting) page 222
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time page 187
Pr.178 STF terminal function selection page 329
Pr.179 STR terminal function selection page 329
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
RL ON
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Setting the frequency
2.
Turn ON the high-speed switch (RH).
Start → acceleration → constant speed
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR). The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr.7 Acceleration time, and
3. " " (60.00 Hz) appears. [FWD] indicator is on during the forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is on during the
reverse rotation.
• When RM is turned ON, 30 Hz is displayed. When RL is turned ON, 10 Hz is displayed.
Deceleration → stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR).The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr.8 Deceleration time, and the
4.
motor stops rotating with " " (0.00 Hz) displayed. [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF. Turn OFF the high-speed
switch (RH).
NOTE
• When both the forward rotation switch (STF) and the reverse rotation switch (STR) are ON, the motor cannot be started. If
both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
• The terminal RH is initially set to 60 Hz for the FM type inverter, and to 50 Hz for the CA type inverter. The terminal RM is set
to 30 Hz, and the RL is set to 10 Hz. (To change, set Pr.4, Pr.5, and Pr.6.)
• In the initial setting, when two or more of multi-speed settings are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the set
frequency of the lower signal.
For example, when RH and RM signals turn ON, RM signal (Pr.5) has a higher priority.
• Maximum of 15-speed operation can be performed.
Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting) page 222
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time page 187
10
Frequency setting
2
potentiometer
5
Potentiometer
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Start
2.
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR). [FWD] or [REV] flickers as no frequency command is given.
Acceleration → constant speed
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) clockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the indication
3.
increases in Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz) appears. [FWD] indicator is on during the forward rotation,
and [REV] indicator is on during the reverse rotation.
Deceleration
4. Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) counterclockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the
indication decreases in Pr.8 Deceleration time, and the motor stops rotating with " " (0.00 Hz) displayed.
Stop
5.
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR). [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
NOTE
• When both the forward rotation switch (STF) and the reverse rotation switch (STR) are ON, the motor cannot be started. If
both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
• Pr.178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr.179 STR terminal function selection must be set to
"61"). (All are initial values.)
4
Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time page 187
Pr.178 STF terminal function selection page 329
Pr.179 STR terminal function selection page 329
Changing example With a 0 to 5 VDC input frequency setting potentiometer, change the frequency at 5 V from 60 Hz
(initial value) to 50 Hz.
Adjust the setting so that the inverter outputs 50 Hz when 5 V is input. Set "50 Hz" in Pr.125.
Operation
Parameter selection
Press to enter the setting." " and " " flicker alternately.
Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR), then turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) clockwise slowly to full.
4.
(Refer to steps 2 and 3 in 4.6.3.)
Operate at 50 Hz.
NOTE
• To set the frequency at 0 V, use the calibration parameter C2.
Initial value
60Hz
(50Hz)
Output frequency
(Hz)
Gain Pr.125
Bias
C2
(Pr.902)
0 100%
0 Frequency setting signal 5V
0 10V
C3(Pr.902) C4(Pr.903)
• Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting voltage gain are the following: adjustment by applying a voltage directly
across terminals 2 and 5, and adjustment using a specified point without applying a voltage across terminals 2 and 5.
Parameters referred to
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency page 314
C2(Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency page 314
C4(Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain page 314
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Terminal 4 input selection
2.
Turn ON the terminal 4 input selection signal (AU). Input to the terminal 4 is enabled.
Start
3.
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR). [FWD] or [REV] flickers as no frequency command is given.
Acceleration → constant speed
4. Input 20 mA.The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz)
appears. [FWD] indicator is on during the forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is on during the reverse rotation.
Deceleration
5. Input 4 mA or less.The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr.8 Deceleration time, and the motor stops rotating
with " " (0.00 Hz) displayed. [FWD] or [REV] indicator flickers.
Stop
6.
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR). [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
NOTE
• When both the forward rotation switch (STF) and the reverse rotation switch (STR) are ON, the motor cannot be started. If
both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
• Pr.184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value).
4
Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time page 187
Pr.184 AU terminal function selection page 329
Changing example With a 4 to 20 mA input frequency setting potentiometer, change the frequency at 20 mA from 60 Hz
(initial value) to 50 Hz.
Adjust the setting so that the inverter outputs 50 Hz when 20 mA is input. Set "50 Hz" in Pr.126.
Operation
Parameter selection
Press to enter the setting." " and " " flicker alternately.
NOTE
• To set the frequency at 4 mA, use the calibration parameter C5.
Initial value
60Hz
(50Hz)
Output frequency
(Hz)
Gain Pr.126
Bias
C5
(Pr.904)
0 20 100%
0 4 20mA
0 1 Frequency setting signal 5V
0 2 10V
C6(Pr.904) C7(Pr.905)
• Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting current gain are the following: adjustment by applying a current through
terminals 4 and 5, and adjustment using a specified point without applying a current through terminals 4 and 5.
Parameters referred to
Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency page 314
C5(Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency page 314
C7(Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain page 314
Inverter
SD
Switch
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Turning ON the JOG signal
2.
Turn ON the JOG switch (JOG). The inverter is set ready for the JOG operation.
Start → acceleration → constant speed
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR). The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr.16 Jog acceleration/
3.
deceleration time, and " " (5.00 Hz) appears. [FWD] indicator is on during the forward rotation, and [REV] indicator
is on during the reverse rotation.
Deceleration → stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR). The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr.16 Jog acceleration/
4.
deceleration time, and the motor stops rotating with " " (0.00 Hz) displayed. [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
Turn OFF the JOG switch (JOG).
Stop
5.
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR). [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
NOTE
• To change the running frequency, change Pr.15 Jog frequency (initial value "5 Hz").
• To change the acceleration/deceleration time, change Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time (initial value "0.5 s").
4
Parameters referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequency page 221
Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time page 221
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
Operation panel
(FR-DU08)
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2.
Press twice to choose the PUJOG operation mode. The monitor displays , and [PU] indicator is on.
Start → acceleration → constant speed
3. Keep pressing or . The frequency value on the indication increases in Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration
4. Release or . The frequency value on the indication decreases in Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time,
and the motor stops rotating with " " (0.00 Hz) displayed.
NOTE
• To change the running frequency, change Pr.15 Jog frequency (initial value "5 Hz").
• To change the acceleration/deceleration time, change Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time (initial value "0.5 s").
Parameters referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequency page 221
Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time page 221
This chapter explains the function setting for use of this product.
Always read this instructions before use.
The following marks are used to indicate the controls as below. (Parameters without
any mark are valid for all control.)
Mark Control method Applied motor
V/F V/F control
Advanced magnetic flux Three-phase induction motor
Magnetic flux
vector control
PM PM sensorless vector control IPM motor
The setting range and the initial value of parameters differ depending on the structure
or functions of the inverter. The following common designations are used for each
type of the inverter models.
Inverter model Common designation
FR-F8[ ]0 Standard model
FR-F8[ ]2 Separated converter type
PARAMETERS 111
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
NOTE
• Simple indicates simple mode parameters. Use Pr.160 User group read selection to indicate the simple mode
parameters only.
• Parameter setting may be restricted in some operating statuses. Use Pr.77 Parameter write selection to change the setting.
• Refer to Appendix 3 (page 597) for instruction codes for communication and availability of parameter clear, all clear, and
parameter copy of each parameter.
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
6%
4%
3%
0 G000 Torque boost Simple 0 to 30% 0.1% 496
2%
1.5%
1%
120 Hz
1 H400 Maximum frequency Simple 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 245
60 Hz
2 H401 Minimum frequency Simple 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 245
frequency
brake
112 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
Pr.
Acceleration/
Acceleration/deceleration reference
deceleration
Acceleration/deceleration time
21 F001 0, 1 1 0 187
increments
22 H500 Stall prevention operation level 0 to 400% 0.1% 120% 110% 248
prevention
Stall
D304
setting
47 G011 Second V/F (base frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 497
Second stall prevention operation
48 H600 0 to 400% 0.1% 120% 110% 248
level
Second stall prevention operation
49 H601 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 248
frequency
50 M444 Second output frequency detection
5
0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 30 Hz 294
225,
H010 Second electronic thermal O/L relay 0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A
51 9999 341,
C203 Rated second motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999 0.1 A 351
0, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 20,
23 to 25, 34, 38, 40 to
Operation panel main monitor
52 M100 45, 50 to 57, 61, 62, 1 0 263
selection
64, 67, 68, 81 to 96,
Monitor functions
98, 100
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18,
21, 24, 34, 50, 52, 53,
54 M300 FM/CA terminal function selection 61, 62, 67, 70, 85, 1 1 273
87 to 90, 92, 93, 95,
98
55 M040 Frequency monitoring reference 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 273
0 to 500 A 0.01 A Rated inverter
56 M041 Current monitoring reference 273
0 to 3600 A 0.1 A current
PARAMETERS 113
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
414,
Automatic
420
114 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
351
Speed control gain (Advanced
89 G932 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 147
magnetic flux vector)
0 to 50 , 9999 0.001 341,
90 C120 Motor constant (R1) 9999 351,
0 to 400 m, 9999 0.01 m
422
0 to 50 , 9999 0.001
91 C121 Motor constant (R2) 9999 341
0 to 400 m, 9999 0.01 m
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis 0 to 6000mH, 9999 0.1 mH 341,
92 C122 9999
inductance (Ld) 0 to 400mH, 9999 0.01 mH 351
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis 0 to 6000mH, 9999 0.1 mH 341,
93 C123 9999
inductance (Lq) 0 to 400mH, 9999 0.01 mH 351
0.1%
94 C124 Motor constant (X) 0 to 100%, 9999 9999 341
0.01%
95 C111 Online auto tuning selection 0, 1 1 0 359
341,
96 C110 Auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 11, 101 1 0 351,
422
100 G040 V/F1 (first frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 501
101 G041
Adjustable 5 points V/F
768, 1152
PU communication stop bit length /
- 0, 1, 10, 11 1
data length
119 1 449
N022
5
PU communication data length 0, 1 0
N023 PU communication stop bit length 0, 1 1
120 N024 PU communication parity check 0 to 2 1 2 449
Number of PU communication
121 N025 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 449
retries
PU communication check time
122 N026 0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 449
interval
PU communication waiting time
123 N027 0 to 150 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 449
setting
124 N028 PU communication CR/LF selection 0 to 2 1 1 449
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
─ 125 T022 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 314
frequency Simple
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
─ 126 T042 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 314
frequency Simple
PARAMETERS 115
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
PID control automatic switchover
127 A612 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 378
frequency
0, 10, 11, 20, 21,
50, 51, 60, 61, 70, 71,
80, 81, 90, 91, 100,
128 A610 PID action selection 1 0 378
PID operation
149 H621 Stall prevention level at 10 V input 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 120% 248
150 M460 Output current detection level 0 to 400% 0.1% 120% 110% 296
Output current detection signal
151 M461 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 0s 296
delay time
152 M462 Zero current detection level 0 to 400% 0.1% 5% 296
153 M463 Zero current detection time 0 to 10 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 296
Voltage reduction selection during
─ 154 H631 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 248
stall prevention operation
RT signal function validity
─ 155 T730 0, 10 1 0 333
condition selection
─ 156 H501 Stall prevention operation selection 0 to 31, 100, 101 1 0 248
─ 157 M430 OL signal output timer 0 to 25 s, 9999 0.1 s 0s 248
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18,
21, 24, 34, 50, 52 to
─ 158 M301 AM terminal function selection 1 1 273
54, 61, 62, 67, 70,
86 to 96, 98
Automatic switchover frequency
─ 159 A005 range from bypass to inverter 0 to 10 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 363
operation
─ 160 E440 User group read selection Simple 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 0 177
Frequency setting/key lock
─ 161 E200 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 166
operation selection
116 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
Automatic restart after 414, Pr.
162 A700 instantaneous power failure 0 to 3, 10 to 13 1 0 420, List
Automatic
functions
selection 422
restart
retention time
Output current detection operation
167 M464 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 296
selection
E000
─ 168
E080
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
E001
─ 169
E081
Cumulative
batch clear
User
0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16,
18, 24, 25, 28,
37 to 40, 46 to 48, 50,
179 T701 STR terminal function selection 1 61 329
51, 61, 62, 64 to 67,
70 to 73, 77 to 81, 84,
94 to 98, 9999
180 T702 RL terminal function selection 1 0 329
181 T703 RM terminal function selection 1 1 329
182 T704 RH terminal function selection 1 2 329
183 T705 RT terminal function selection 0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 1 3 329
18, 24, 25, 28,
184 T706 AU terminal function selection 1 4 329
37 to 40, 46 to 48, 50,
185 T707 JOG terminal function selection
51, 62, 64 to 67,
1 5 329
186 T708 CS terminal function selection 70 to 73, 77 to 81, 84, 1 9999 329
94 to 98, 9999 24
187 T709 MRS terminal function selection 1 329
10
188 T710 STOP terminal function selection 1 25 329
189 T711 RES terminal function selection
5
1 62 329
PARAMETERS 117
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10 to 19,
25, 26, 35, 39, 40,
45 to 54, 57, 64 to 68,
195 M405 ABC1 terminal function selection 70 to 79, 82, 85, 90, 1 99 288
91, 94 to 96,
98 to 105, 107, 108,
110 to 116, 125, 126,
135, 139, 140,
145 to 154, 157,
164 to 168,
170 to 179, 182, 185,
190, 191,
196 M406 ABC2 terminal function selection 194 to 196,
1 9999 288
198 to 208,
211 to 213, 215,
300 to 308,
311 to 313, 315, 9999
Multi-speed
D308
setting
246 G204 Slip compensation time constant 0.01 to 10 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 518
118 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
Pr.
compensation
─ 254 A007 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 1s 600 s 370
255 E700 Life alarm status display (0 to 15) 1 0 180
Inrush current limit circuit life
256 E701 (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 180
Life check
display
257 E702 Control circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 180
258 E703 Main circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 180
Main circuit capacitor life
259 E704 0, 1 1 0 180
measuring
PWM frequency automatic
─ 260 E602 0, 1 1 1 179
switchover
261 A730 Power failure stop selection 0 to 2, 11, 12, 21, 22 1 0 426
Power failure stop
Subtracted frequency at
262 A731 0 to 20 Hz 0.01 Hz 3 Hz 426
deceleration start
263 A732 Subtraction starting frequency 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 426
264 A733 Power-failure deceleration time 1 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 426
265 A734 Power-failure deceleration time 2 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 426
Power failure deceleration time
266 A735 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 426
switchover frequency
─ 267 T001 Terminal 4 input selection 0 to 2 1 0 306
─ 268 M022 Monitor decimal digits selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 263
─ 269 E023 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
─ 289 M431 Inverter output terminal filter 5 to 50 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 288
263,
─ 290 M044 Monitor negative output selection 0 to 7 1 0
273
[FM Type]
0, 1, 10, 11, 20, 21,
218,
─ 291 D100 Pulse train I/O selection 100 1 0
273
[CA Type]
0, 1
─ 294 A785 UV avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 426
Frequency change increment
─ 295 E201 0, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 0.01 0 167
amount setting
0 to 6, 99, 100 to 106,
Password
199, 9999
(0 to 5), 1000 to 9998,
297 E411 Password lock/unlock 1 9999 171
9999
─ 298 A711 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1 9999 422
Rotation direction detection
─ 299 A701 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 414
selection at restarting
PARAMETERS 119
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
RS-485 communication station
331 N030 0 to 31 (0 to 247) 1 0 449
number
3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96,
332 N031 RS-485 communication speed 192, 384, 576, 768, 1 96 449
1152
RS-485 communication stop bit
- 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1
length / data length
333 449
N032 PU communication data length 0, 1 1 0
N033 PU communication stop bit length 0, 1 1 1
RS-485 communication
input
setting
416 A802 Pre-scale function selection 0 to 5 1 0 431
417 A803 Pre-scale setting value 0 to 32767 1 1 431
120 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, Pr.
20, 23, 24, 40, 43, 44, List
50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74,
450 C200 Second applied motor 1 9999 337
210, 213, 214, 8093,
8094, 9090, 9093,
9094, 9999
0.4 to 55 kW, 9999 0.01 kW 341,
453 C201 Second motor capacity 9999
0 to 3600 kW, 9999 0.1 kW 351
341,
454 C202 Number of second motor poles 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1 9999
351
0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A
455 C225 Second motor excitation current
Second motor constants
9999 341
0 to 3600 A, 9999 0.1 A
200 V 341,
456 C204 Rated second motor voltage 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V
400 V 351
341,
457 C205 Rated second motor frequency 10 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999
351
0 to 50 , 9999 0.001 341,
458 C220 Second motor constant (R1) 9999 351,
0 to 400 m, 9999 0.01 m
422
0 to 50 , 9999 0.001
459 C221 Second motor constant (R2) 9999 341
0 to 400 m, 9999 0.01 m
Second motor constant (L1) / d-axis 0 to 6000mH, 9999 0.1 mH 341,
460 C222 9999
inductance (Ld) 0 to 400mH, 9999 0.01 mH 351
Second motor constant (L2) / q-axis 0 to 6000mH, 9999 0.1 mH 341,
461 C223 9999
inductance (Lq) 0 to 400mH, 9999 0.01 mH 351
0.1%
462 C224 Second motor constant (X) 0 to 100%, 9999 9999 341
0.01%
341,
Second motor auto tuning setting/
463 C210 0, 1, 11, 101 1 0 351,
status
422
495 M500 Remote output selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 298
Remote
output
PARAMETERS 121
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
Communication
553 A603 PID deviation limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 378
control
PID
─ 560 A712 Second frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1 9999 422
─ 561 H020 PTC thermistor protection level 0.5 to 30 k, 9999 0.01 k 9999 225
Energization time carrying-over
─ 563 M021 (0 to 65535) 1 0 263
times
─ 564 M031 Operating time carrying-over times (0 to 65535) 1 0 263
constants
Second
motor
569 G942 Second motor speed control gain 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 147
Multiple
rating
122 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
593 A301 Maximum amplitude amount 0 to 25% 0.1% 10% 373 List
Amplitude compensation amount
594 A302 0 to 50% 0.1% 10% 373
during deceleration
Amplitude compensation amount
595 A303 0 to 50% 0.1% 10% 373
during acceleration
596 A304 Amplitude acceleration time 0.1 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 373
597 A305 Amplitude deceleration time 0.1 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 373
─ 598 H102 Undervoltage level 350 to 430 V, 9999 0.1 V 9999 234
0
─ 599 T721 X10 terminal input selection 0, 1 1 508
1
First free thermal reduction
600 H001 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 225
Electronic thermal
frequency 1
601 H002 First free thermal reduction ratio 1 1 to 100% 1% 100% 225
O/L relay
610 A625 PID measured value input selection 1 to 5, 101 to 105 1 3 378
414,
─ 611 F003 Acceleration time at a restart 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999
420
smoothing
656 M531 Analog remote output 1 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 300
657 M532 Analog remote output 2 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 300
658 M533 Analog remote output 3 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 300
659 M534 Analog remote output 4 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 300
excitation deceleration
661 G131 Magnetic excitation increase rate 0 to 40%, 9999 0.1% 9999 517
662 G132
Increased magnetic excitation
0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 517
5
current level
PARAMETERS 123
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
711 C131 Motor Ld decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 351
712 C132 Motor Lq decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 351
Starting resistance tuning
717 C182 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 351
compensation
Starting magnetic pole position 0 to 6000 s, 10000 to
721 C185 1 s 9999 351
detection pulse width 16000 s, 9999
724 C108 Motor inertia (exponent) 0 to 7, 9999 1 9999 351
725 C133 Motor protection current level 100 to 500%, 9999 0.1% 9999 351
726 N050 Auto Baudrate/Max Master 0 to 255 1 255 480
BACnet MS/TP
2010, 2011
Second PID control automatic
754 A652 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 378
switchover frequency
755 A651 Second PID action set point 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 378
756 A653 Second PID proportional band 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100% 378
757 A654 Second PID integral time 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s 378
758 A655 Second PID differential time 0.01 to 10 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 378
759 A600 PID unit selection 0 to 43, 9999 1 9999 399
124 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
762 A618 Pre-charge ending time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 402
763 A619 Pre-charge upper detection level 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 402
764 A620 Pre-charge time limit 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 402
765 A656 Second pre-charge fault selection 0, 1 1 0 402
766 A657 Second pre-charge ending level 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 402
767 A658 Second pre-charge ending time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 402
Second pre-charge upper detection
768 A659 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 402
level
769 A660 Second pre-charge time limit 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 402
774 M101 Operation panel monitor selection 1 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 1 9999 263
17, 18, 20, 23 to 25,
function
Monitor
775 M102 Operation panel monitor selection 2 34, 38, 40 to 45, 1 9999 263
50 to 57, 61, 62, 64,
776 M103 Operation panel monitor selection 3 67, 68, 81 to 96, 98, 1 9999 263
100, 9999
A681 4 mA input fault operation
─ 777 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 325
T053 frequency
A682
─ 778 4 mA input check filter 0 to 10 s 0.01 s 0s 325
T054
Operation frequency during
─ 779 N014 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 446
communication error
Acceleration time in low-speed
─ 791 F070 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 187
range
Deceleration time in low-speed
─ 792 F071 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 187
range
Pulse increment setting for output 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
─ 799 M520 0.1 kWh 1 kWh 303
power kWh
─ 800 G200 Control method selection 9, 20 1 20 143
820 G211 Speed control P gain 1 0 to 1000% 1% 25% 154
821 G212 Speed control integral time 1 0 to 20 s 0.001 s 0.333 s 154
822 T003 Speed setting filter 1 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 313
Torque control P gain 1 (current
824 G213 0 to 500% 1% 50% 154
Adjustment function
248,
858 T040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0, 4, 9999 1 0
310
Torque current/Rated PM motor 0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A 341,
859 C126 9999
current 0 to 3600 A, 9999 0.1 A 351
Second motor torque current/Rated 0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A 341,
860 C226 9999
PM motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999 0.1 A 351
864 M470 Torque detection 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 298
Indication
function
PARAMETERS 125
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
874 H730 OLT level setting 0 to 400% 0.1% 120% 110% 248
Regeneration avoidance at
884 G122 0 to 5 1 0 514
deceleration detection sensitivity
Regeneration avoidance
885 G123 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 514
compensation frequency limit value
Regeneration avoidance voltage
886 G124 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 514
gain
parameters
126 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
C0 Pr.
(900) M310 FM/CA terminal calibration ─ ─ ─ 279 List
C1
(901) M320 AM terminal calibration ─ ─ ─ 279
C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
(902) T200 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 314
frequency
C3
(902) T201 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 314
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
(903) T202 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 314
frequency
C4
(903) T203 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 314
C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
(904) T400 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 314
frequency
C6
(904) T401 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 314
Calibration parameters
PARAMETERS 127
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
C9
(930) M331 Current output bias current 0 to 100% 0.1% ─ 0% 279
C10
(931) M332 Current output gain signal 0 to 100% 0.1% ─ 100% 279
C11
(931) M333 Current output gain current 0 to 100% 0.1% ─ 100% 279
C38
(932) T410 Terminal 4 bias command (torque) 0 to 400% 0.1% 0% 320
Calibration parameters
C39
(932) T411 Terminal 4 bias (torque) 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 320
C40
(933) T412 Terminal 4 gain command (torque) 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 320
C41
(933) T413 Terminal 4 gain (torque) 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 320
C42
(934) A630 PID display bias coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 399
C43
(934) A631 PID display bias analog value 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 399
C44
(935) A632 PID display gain coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 399
C45
(935) A633 PID display gain analog value 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 399
─ 977 E302 Input voltage mode selection 0, 1 1 0 168
10 10
─ 989 E490 Parameter copy alarm release 1 521
100 100
990 E104 PU buzzer control 0, 1 1 1 164
PU
128 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
1032 A915 Analog source selection (6ch) 201 to 213, 206 433
230 to 232, 237, 238
1033 A916 Analog source selection (7ch) 207 433
1034 A917 Analog source selection (8ch) 208 433
1035 A918 Analog trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 433
1036 A919 Analog trigger operation selection 0, 1 1 0 433
1037 A920 Analog trigger level 600 to 1400 1 1000 433
1038 A930 Digital source selection (1ch) 1 433
1039 A931 Digital source selection (2ch) 2 433
1040 A932 Digital source selection (3ch) 3 433
1041 A933 Digital source selection (4ch) 4 433
1 to 255 1
1042 A934 Digital source selection (5ch) 5 433
1043 A935 Digital source selection (6ch) 6 433
1044 A936 Digital source selection (7ch) 7 433
1045 A937 Digital source selection (8ch) 8 433
1046 A938 Digital trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 433
1047 A939 Digital trigger operation selection 0, 1 1 0 433
─ 1048 E106 Display-off waiting time 0 to 60 min 1 min 0 165
─ 1049 E110 USB host reset 0, 1 1 0 540
1106 M050 Torque monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 263
function
Monitor
1107 M051 Running speed monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 263
1108 M052 Excitation current monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 263
PARAMETERS 129
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
Pre-charge change increment
1132 A626 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 402
amount
Second pre-charge change
1133 A666 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 402
increment amount
1134 A605
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
1135 A606
1136 A670 Second PID display bias coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 399
Second PID display bias analog
1137 A671 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 399
value
1138 A672 Second PID display gain coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 399
Second PID display gain analog
1139 A673 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 399
value
PID control
to to 0 to 65535 1 0 431
50
1199 A859
1211 A690 PID gain tuning timeout time 1 to 9999 s 1s 100 s 394
1212 A691 Step manipulated amount 900 to 1100% 0.1% 1000% 394
1213 A692 Step responding sampling cycle 0.01 to 600 s 0.01 s 1s 394
Timeout time after the maximum
1214 A693 1 to 9999 s 1s 10 s 394
PID gain tuning
slope
1215 A694 Limit cycle output upper limit 900 to 1100% 0.1% 1100% 394
1216 A695 Limit cycle output lower limit 900 to 1100% 0.1% 1000% 394
1217 A696 Limit cycle hysteresis 0.1 to 10% 0.1% 1% 394
0, 100 to 102, 111,
112, 121, 122,
1218 A697 PID gain tuning setting 1 0 394
200 to 202, 211, 212,
221, 222
1219 A698 PID gain tuning start/status (0), 1, 8, (9, 90 to 96) 1 0 394
1300 N500
to to
1343, N543, Communication option parameters.
─
1350 N550 For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.
to to
1359 N559
130 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
1460 A683 PID multistage set point 1 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 378 Pr.
1461 A684 PID multistage set point 2 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 378 List
PID gain tuning
1462 A685 PID multistage set point 3 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 378
1463 A686 PID multistage set point 4 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 378
1464 A687 PID multistage set point 5 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 378
1465 A688 PID multistage set point 6 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 378
1466 A689 PID multistage set point 7 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 378
1469 A420 Number of cleaning times monitor 0 to 255 1 0 375
1470 A421 Number of cleaning times setting 0 to 255 1 0 375
1471 A422 Cleaning trigger selection 0 to 15 1 0 375
1472 A423 Cleaning reverse rotation frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 30 Hz 375
Cleaning reverse rotation operation
1473 A424 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 375
time
Cleaning
5
1492 H534 time / load reference measurement 0 to 60 s 0.1 s 1s 255
waiting time
Pr.CLR Parameter clear (0), 1 1 0 520
parameters
Clear
PARAMETERS 131
Parameter List
Parameter list (by parameter number)
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
132 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Group parameter display
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Parameter setting mode
2.
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
4. Turn to change the set value to " " (group parameter display). Press to select the group parameter setting.
" " and " " flicker alternately after the setting is completed.
6. Turn until (P.H400 Maximum frequency) appears. Press to read the present set value.
PARAMETERS 133
Parameter List
Parameter list (by function group)
134 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by function group)
PARAMETERS 135
Parameter List
Parameter list (by function group)
136 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by function group)
PARAMETERS 137
Parameter List
Parameter list (by function group)
A408 586 Auxiliary motor 3 starting frequency 406 A643 1145 Second PID deviation limit 378
A409 587 Auxiliary motor 1 stopping frequency 406 A644 1146 Second PID signal operation selection 378
A410 588 Auxiliary motor 2 stopping frequency 406 A650 753 Second PID action selection 378
A411 589 Auxiliary motor 3 stopping frequency 406 A651 755 Second PID action set point 378
A412 590 Auxiliary motor start detection time 406 Second PID control automatic
A652 754 switchover frequency
378
A413 591 Auxiliary motor stop detection time 406
A420 1469 Number of cleaning times monitor 375 A653 756 Second PID proportional band 378
A421 1470 Number of cleaning times setting 375 A654 757 Second PID integral time 378
138 PARAMETERS
Parameter List
Parameter list (by function group)
A665 1141
Second PID measured value input
378 A903 1023 Number of analog channels 433
selection
Second pre-charge change increment
A904 1024 Sampling auto start 433
A666 1133 402
amount A905 1025 Trigger mode selection 433
A670 1136 Second PID display bias coefficient 399 A906 1026 Number of sampling before trigger 433
A671 1137 Second PID display bias analog value 399 A910 1027 Analog source selection (1ch) 433
A672 1138 Second PID display gain coefficient 399 A911 1028 Analog source selection (2ch) 433
A673 1139 Second PID display gain analog value 399 A912 1029 Analog source selection (3ch) 433
A680 573 4 mA input check selection 325
A913 1030 Analog source selection (4ch) 433
A681 777 4 mA input fault operation frequency 325
A914 1031 Analog source selection (5ch) 433
A682 778 4 mA input check filter 325
A683 1460 PID multistage set point 1 378 A915 1032 Analog source selection (6ch) 433
A684 1461 PID multistage set point 2 378 A916 1033 Analog source selection (7ch) 433
A685 1462 PID multistage set point 3 378 A917 1034 Analog source selection (8ch) 433
A686 1463 PID multistage set point 4 378 A918 1035 Analog trigger channel 433
A687 1464 PID multistage set point 5 378
A919 1036 Analog trigger operation selection 433
A688 1465 PID multistage set point 6 378
A920 1037 Analog trigger level 433
A689 1466 PID multistage set point 7 378
A690 1211 PID gain tuning timeout time 394 A930 1038 Digital source selection (1ch) 433
A691 1212 Step manipulated amount 394 A931 1039 Digital source selection (2ch) 433
A692 1213 Step responding sampling cycle 394 A932 1040 Digital source selection (3ch) 433
A693 1214 Timeout time after the maximum slope 394
A933 1041 Digital source selection (4ch) 433
A694 1215 Limit cycle output upper limit 394
A934 1042 Digital source selection (5ch) 433
A695 1216 Limit cycle output lower limit 394
A696 1217 Limit cycle hysteresis 394 A935 1043 Digital source selection (6ch) 433
A697 1218 PID gain tuning setting 394 A936 1044 Digital source selection (7ch) 433
A698 1219 PID gain tuning start/status 394 A937 1045 Digital source selection (8ch) 433
414, A938 1046 Digital trigger channel 433
Automatic restart after instantaneous
A700 162 power failure selection
420,
422 A939 1047 Digital trigger operation selection 433
Rotation direction detection selection at
A701 299 restarting
414 N: Operation via communication and its
414, settings
A702 57 Restart coasting time
Parameters for communication operation. These parameters set the
420
A703 58 Restart cushion time 414 communication specifications and operation.
5
A704 163 First cushion time for restart 414 Pr. Refer
Pr. Name
A705 164 First cushion voltage for restart 414 group to page
Stall prevention operation level for N000 549 Protocol selection 446
A710 165 restart
414
Communication EEPROM write
N001 342 446
A711 298 Frequency search gain 422 selection
A712 560 Second frequency search gain 422 Modbus-RTU communication check
N002 539 time interval
465
A730 261 Power failure stop selection 426 Stop mode selection at communication
Subtracted frequency at deceleration N013 502 error
446
A731 262 start
426
Operation frequency during
A732 263 Subtraction starting frequency 426 N014 779 communication error
446
A733 264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 426 N020 117 PU communication station number 449
A734 265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 426 N021 118 PU communication speed 449
A735 266
Power failure deceleration time
426 N022 119 PU communication data length 449
switchover frequency
N023 119 PU communication stop bit length 449
A785 294 UV avoidance voltage gain 426
PARAMETERS 139
Parameter List
Parameter list (by function group)
140 PARAMETERS
Control method
V/F control
• It controls the frequency and voltage so that the ratio of frequency (F) to voltage (V) is constant while changing the
frequency.
POINT
• Advanced magnetic flux vector control requires the following conditions.
If the conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control. Otherwise, malfunctions such as insufficient torque, uneven rotation may
occur.
• For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (It must be 0.4 kW
or higher.)
Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the rated inverter current will cause torque ripples, etc. and
degrade the speed and torque accuracies. As a reference, select the motor with the rated motor current that is about 40% or
higher of the rated inverter current.
• The motor described in the table below is used.
Motor Condition
Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR)
Mitsubishi high-efficiency motor (SF-HR)
Offline auto tuning is not required
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA 4P, SF-HRCA)
Mitsubishi high-performance energy-saving motor (SF-PR)
Other motors (other manufacturers, SF-TH, etc.) Offline auto tuning is required
PARAMETERS 141
Control method
POINT
• The PM motor control requires the following conditions.
• For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (It must be 0.4 kW
or higher.)
Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the rated inverter current will cause torque ripples, etc. and
degrade the speed and torque accuracies. As a reference, select the motor with the rated motor current that is about 40% or
higher of the rated inverter current.
• Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is preformed.
• The overall wiring length with the motor is 100 m or less. (Refer to page 44.) (Even with the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4,
when the wiring length exceeds 30 m, perform offline auto tuning.)
• A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF/FR-BMF) or sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) is not used.
142 PARAMETERS
Control method
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23,
24, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, By selecting a standard motor or constant-torque
71
Applied motor 0 70, 73, 74, 210, 213, 214, motor, the thermal characteristic and motor constant
C100 8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, of each motor are set.
9093, 9094
0.4 to 55 kW
80 Set the applied motor capacity.
Motor capacity 9999 0 to 3600 kW
C101
9999 V/F control
81 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of motor poles.
Number of motor poles 9999
C102 9999 V/F control
83
Rated motor voltage 200/400V 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
C104
84 10 to 400Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
Rated motor frequency 9999
C105 9999 The setting value of Pr.3 Base frequency is used.
PM motor test operation (Motor is not driven even if it
800 Control method 9
is connected.)
20
G200 selection
20 Normal operation (Motor can be driven.)
For theFR-F820-02330(55K) or lower, and theFR-F840-01160(55K)or lower.
For theFR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and theFR-F840-01800(75K)or higher.
The initial value differs according to the voltage class. (200V class/400V class)
When the IPM motor MM-EFS or MM-THE4 is selected by Pr.71 Applied motor, the rated frequency of the MM-EFS or MM-THE4 is used.
When a PM motor other than the MM-EFS or MM-THE4 is selected by Pr.71, 75 Hz (for the motor capacity 15 kW or lower) or 100 Hz (18.5 kW
or higher) is used.
PARAMETERS 143
Control method
Setting the motor capacity and the number of motor poles (Pr.80, Pr.81)
• Motor specifications (the motor capacity and the number of motor poles) must be set to select Advanced magnetic flux
vector control, or PM motor control.
• Set the motor capacity (kW) in Pr.80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr.81 Number of motor poles.
NOTE
• Setting the number of motor poles in Pr.81 changes the Pr.144 Speed setting switchover setting automatically. (Refer to
page 261.)
NOTE
• Since current is not detected and voltage is not output, monitors related to current and voltage such as output current and
output voltage, etc. and output signals do not function.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
144 PARAMETERS
Control method
DU/PU
DU/PU FM/AM/CA
FM/AM/CA Types of monitor Monitor
Types of monitor Monitor Output
Output display
display
Option output terminal status ―
Output frequency
Motor thermal load factor
Fault display ―
Inverter thermal load factor
Frequency setting value
PTC thermistor value ―
Running speed
PID measured value 2
Converter output voltage
Remote output 1
Electric thermal relay load factor
Remote output 2
Output current peak value
Remote output 3
Converter output voltage peak
Remote output 4
value
Load meter PID manipulated amount
Cumulative energization time ― Second PID set point
Reference voltage output ― Second PID measured value
Actual operation time ― Second PID deviation
Cumulative power ∆ ― Second PID measured value 2
Trace status Second PID manipulated amount
Different output interface (operation panel, parameter
Station number
― unit, terminal FM/CA or terminal AM) can output different
(RS-485 terminals)
monitored items. For details, refer to page 273.
Station number (PU connector) ―
When the operation is switched to the test run, "0" is
Station number (CC-Link) ― displayed. When PM sensorless vector control is selected
Energy saving effect again after a test run, the output current peak value and
Cumulative energy saving ∆ ― the electronic thermal relay load factor from the last
operation are displayed.
PID set point
The monitored status can be output via the terminal AM
PID measured value
only.
PID deviation When the operation is switched to the test run,
Input terminal status ― accumulated thermal value is reduced by considering the
Output terminal status ― output current is "0".
Option input terminal status ―
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection page 263
Pr.158 AM terminal function selection page 273
PARAMETERS 145
Control method
Changing the control method with external terminals (RT signal, X18
signal)
• Control method (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control) can be switched among using external terminals.
The control method can be either switched using the Second function selection (RT) signal or the V/F switchover (X18)
signal.
• When using the RT signal, set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied motor. Turning ON the RT signal enables the
second function, enabling the switchover of the control method.
• When using the X18 signal, turning ON the X18 signal switches the presently-selected control method (Advanced magnetic
flux vector control) to the V/F control. At this time, the second functions including electronic thermal characteristic are not
changed. Use this method to switch the control method for one motor. (To switch the second functions, use the RT signal.)
To input the X18 signal, set "18" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
NOTE
• RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• The RT signal is a second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 333.)
• The control method could be changed by external terminals (RT signal, X18 signal) while the inverter is stopped. If a signal is
switched during the operation, the control method changes after the inverter stops.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.450 Second applied motor page 337
146 PARAMETERS
Control method
Test run
As required
• Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr.96) (Refer to page 341.)
• Select the online auto tuning. (Pr.95) (Refer to page 359.)
PARAMETERS 147
Control method
NOTE
• Under this control, rotations are more likely to be uneven than under V/F control. (This control method is not suitable for
grinder, wrapping machine, etc., which require even rotation at a low speed.)
• For FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower and FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower, the operation with a surge voltage suppression filter
(FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) installed between the inverter and the motor may reduce the output torque.
• The optional sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) cannot be used between the inverter and the motor.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Keeping the motor speed constant when the load fluctuates (speed
control gain)
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Makes adjustments to keep the motor speed constant during variable
Speed control gain
89 0 to 200% load operation under Advanced magnetic flux vector control.
(Advanced magnetic flux 9999
The reference value is 100%.
G932
vector)
9999 The gain set by Pr.71. (The gain set in accordance with the motor.)
Makes adjustments to keep the second motor speed constant during
569 Second motor speed 0 to 200% variable load operation under Advanced magnetic flux vector control.
9999 The reference value is 100%.
G942 control gain
9999 The gain set by Pr.450. (The gain set in accordance with the motor.)
• Use Pr.89 to keep the motor speed constant during variable load operation.
(This parameter is useful to make adjustments on the motor speed.)
Load torque
Speed
NOTE
• The RT signal is a second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 333.)
RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.71, Pr.450 Applied motor page 337
Pr.800 Control method selection page 143
148 PARAMETERS
Control method
Initialize the parameter settings for an IPM motor MM-EFS or MM-THE4 by selecting IPM
Operation example
parameter initialization on the operation panel.
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2. Press to choose the PU operation mode.
[PU] indicator is on.
Parameter setting mode
3. Press to choose the parameter setting mode.
[PRM] indicator is on.
IPM parameter initialization
4.
Turn until (IPM parameter initialization) appears.
" " and " " flicker alternately. The setting is completed.
Setting Description
0 Parameter settings for an induction motor
12 Parameter settings for an IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4 (rotations per minute)
NOTE
• If parameters are initialized for a PM motor in the IPM initialization mode, the Pr.998 PM parameter initialization setting is
automatically changed.
• To set a speed or to display monitored items in frequency, Pr.998. (Refer to page 150.)
PARAMETERS 149
Control method
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
The parameter settings required
Parameter settings for an induction motor
0 to drive an induction motor are
(frequency)
set.
For IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4.
12 The parameters settings
Parameter setting (rotations per minute)
required to drive an IPM motor
For IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4.
112 are set.
Parameter setting (frequency)
The parameters settings required to drive
The parameters settings
an IPM motor other than MM-EFS/MM-
8009 required to drive an IPM motor
998 PM parameter THE4 are set. (rotations per minute)(after
0 are set.
E430 initialization tunning)
(Set Pr.71 Applied motor and
The parameters settings required to drive
perform offline auto tuning in
8109 an IPM motor other than MM-EFS/MM- advance. (Refer to page 351.))
THE4 are set. (frequency)(after tunning)
The parameters settings required to drive The parameters settings
9009 an SPM motor are set. (rotations per required to drive an SPM motor
minute)(after tunning) are set.
The parameters settings required to drive (Set Pr.71 Applied motor and
9109 an SPM motor are set. perform offline auto tuning in
(frequency)(after tunning) advance. (Refer to page 351.))
• To use a motor capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Pr.80 Motor capacity before performing IPM
parameter initialization.
• When Pr.998="12, 8009, or 9009", the monitor is displayed and the frequency is set using the motor rotations per minute.
To use frequency to display or set, set Pr. 998="112, 8109, or 9109".
• Set Pr.998="0" to change the PM motor control parameter settings to the parameter settings required to drive an induction
motor.
• When using an IPM motor other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4, set Pr.998 = "8009, 8109, 9009, or 9109". The setting can be
made after performing offline auto tuning.
NOTE
• Make sure to set Pr.998 before setting other parameters. If the Pr.998 setting is changed after setting other parameters,
some of those parameters will be initialized too. (Refer to "(3) PM parameter initialization list" for the parameters that are
initialized.)
• To change back to the parameter settings required to drive an induction motor, perform parameter clear or all parameter clear
• If the setting of Pr.998 PM parameter initialization is changed between "12, 8009, 9009 (rotations per minute)" "112,
8109, 9109 (frequency)", the target parameters are respectively set to their initial values. The purpose of Pr.998 is not to
change the display units. Use Pr.144 Speed setting switchover to change the display units between rotations per minute
and frequency. Pr.144 enables switching of display units between rotations per minute and frequency without initializing the
parameter settings.
Example) Changing the Pr.144 setting between "6" and "106" switches the display units between frequency and rotations per
minute.
• For an inverter out of the capacity range of the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4, "12 or 112" cannot be set. (Refer to page 583
for the capacities of MM-EFS/MM-THE4 motors.)
150 PARAMETERS
Control method
PARAMETERS 151
Control method
Setting
Setting
Induction PM motor
PM motor (frequency) increments
motor (rotations per minute)
0 8009 8109
Pr. Name
(initial 12 9009 112 9109 12, 0, 112,
Pr.998 value) (MM-EFS, (other than (MM-EFS, (other than 8009, 8109,
MM-THE4) MM-EFS, MM-THE4) MM-EFS, 9009 9109
FM CA
MM-THE4) MM-THE4)
Rated motor
Power failure deceleration time Rated motor
266 60 Hz 50 Hz rotations per Pr.84 Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
switchover frequency frequency
minute
Overspeed Maximum Overspeed Maximum
detection level, motor detection motor
374 Overspeed detection level 9999 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
rotations per frequency level, frequency
minute +10 Hz frequency +10 Hz
Rated motor
Rated motor
390 % setting reference frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz rotations per Pr.84 Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
frequency
minute
Rated motor Rated motor
505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz Pr.84 Pr.84 0.01 Hz
frequency frequency
Rated motor Rated motor
0.01 A
Current average value monitor Rated inverter current current
557 Pr.859 Pr.859
signal output reference current current (Refer to page (Refer to page
0.1 A
583.) 583.)
Speed detection Speed
hysteresis detection
870 Speed detection hysteresis 0 Hz 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
rotations per hysteresis
minute frequency
Regeneration avoidance Minimum
Minimum
885 compensation frequency limit 6 Hz rotations per Pr.84 10% Pr.84 10% 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
frequency
value minute
Energy saving monitor reference Rated inverter 0.01 kW
893 Motor capacity (Pr.80)
(motor capacity) capacity 0.1 kW
Rated motor
C14 Terminal 1 gain frequency Rated motor
60 Hz 50 Hz rotations per Pr.84 Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
(918) (speed) frequency
minute
―: Not changed
Initial value for the FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower and FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower.
Initial value for the FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and FR-F840-01800(75K) and higher.
Setting Pr.71 Applied motor ="213, 214, 8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094" does not change the Pr.71 setting.
When a value other than "9999" is set, the set value is not changed.
110% for SLD, 120% for LD (Refer to Pr.570 Multiple rating setting page 168.)
The Pr.702 Maximum motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency. When Pr.702 =“9999 (initial value)", the Pr.84 Rated motor
frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency.
NOTE
• If PM parameter initialization is performed in rotations per minute (Pr.998 = "12, 8009, or 9009"), the parameters not listed in the
table and the monitored items are also set and displayed in rotations per minute.
MM-EFS (15 kW or lower) MM-EFS (18.5 kW to 55 kW) MM-THE4 (75 kW to 160 kW)
Rated motor frequency
75 Hz (1500 r/min) 100 Hz (1500 r/min) 75 Hz (1500 r/min)
(rotations per minute)
Maximum motor frequency
112.5 Hz (2250 r/min) 150 Hz (2250 r/min) 90 Hz (1800 r/min)
(rotations per minute)
Number of motor poles 6 8 6
Short-time motor torque 110% for SLD, 120% for LD
Minimum frequency
7.5 Hz (150 r/min) 10 Hz (150 r/min) 7.5 Hz (150 r/min)
(rotations per minute)
Speed detection hysteresis
0.5 Hz (10 r/min) 0.5 Hz (8 r/min) 0.5 Hz (10 r/min)
frequency (rotations per minute)
Overspeed detection level,
122.5 Hz (2450 r/min) 160 Hz (2400 r/min) 100 Hz (2000 r/min)
frequency (rotations per minute)
152 PARAMETERS
Speed control under PM motor control
This inverter is set for a general-purpose motor in the initial setting. Follow the following procedure to change the
setting for the PM motor control.
Set "12 or 112" in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization, or select "12" in (IPM initialization mode).
Setting value "12": parameter settings for MM-EFS/MM-THE4 IPM motor (rotations per minute)
Setting value "112": parameter settings for MM-EFS/MM-THE4 IPM motor (frequencies)
Set the motor. (Pr.9, Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83, Pr.84) (Refer to page 337, 351.)
Set "8093 (IPM motor other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4)" or "9093 (SPM motor)" in Pr.71
Applied motor. Set Pr.9 Rated motor current, Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number
of motor poles, Pr.83 Rated motor voltage, and Pr.84 Rated motor frequency
according to the motor specifications.
(Setting "9999 (initial value)" in Pr.80 or Pr.81 selects V/F control.)
Perform offline auto tuning for a PM motor. (Pr.96) (Refer to page 351.)
Set "1" (offline auto tuning without rotating motor (for other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4))
in Pr.96,
Configure the initial setting for the PM motor control using Pr.998. (Refer to page
150.)
When the setting for the PM motor is selected in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization,
the PM motor control is selected.
[PM] on the operation panel (FR-DU08) is lit when the PM motor control is set.
"8009": Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-
EFS/MM-THE4
"8109": Parameter (frequency) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-EFS/MM-
THE4 5
"9009": Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an SPM motor
"9109": Parameter (frequency) settings for an SPM motor
Test run
As required for MM-EFS/MM-THE4
• Perform offline auto tuning for a PM motor. (Refer to page 351.)
PARAMETERS 153
Speed control under PM motor control
NOTE
• To change to the PM motor control, perform PM parameter initialization at first. If parameter initialization is performed after
setting other parameters, some of those parameters will be initialized too. (Refer to page 151 for the parameters that are
initialized.)
• Constant-speed operation cannot be performed in the low-speed range of 150 r/min or less.
• During PM motor control, the RUN signal is output about 100 ms after turning ON the start command (STF, STR). The delay
is due to the magnetic pole detection.
• During PM motor control, the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function operates only when an MM-EFS or
MM-THE4 IPM motor is connected.
When a regeneration unit is used, the frequency search may not be available if the rotation speed is about 10% higher than
the rating.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
The proportional gain during speed control is set. (Setting
820 this parameter higher improves the trackability for speed
Speed control P gain 1 25% 0 to 1000%
G211 command changes. It also reduces the speed fluctuation
caused by external disturbance.)
The integral time during speed control is set. (Setting this
821 Speed control integral parameter lower shortens the return time to the original
0.333 s 0 to 20 s
G212 time 1 speed when the speed fluctuates due to external
disturbance.)
Torque control P gain 1
824
(current loop 50% 0 to 500% The proportional gain of the current controller is set.
G213
proportional gain)
Torque control integral
825
time 1 (current loop 40 ms 0 to 500 ms The integral time of the current controller is set.
G214
integral time)
830 0 to 1000% Second function of Pr.820 (valid when RT signal is ON)
Speed control P gain 2 9999
G311 9999 The Pr.820 setting is applied to the operation.
831 Speed control integral 0 to 20 s Second function of Pr.821 (valid when RT signal is ON)
9999
G312 time 2 9999 The Pr.821 setting is applied to the operation.
834 0 to 500% Second function of Pr.824 (valid when RT signal is ON)
Torque control P gain 2 9999
G313 9999 The Pr.824 setting is applied to the operation.
835 Torque control integral 0 to 500 ms Second function of Pr.825 (valid when RT signal is ON)
9999
G314 time 2 9999 The Pr.825 setting is applied to the operation.
154 PARAMETERS
Speed control under PM motor control
∗1
200 (100)rad/s
∗1
50 (25)rad/s
Pr.820
25% 100% Setting
(initial value)
The value in parentheses is applicable with the FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher.
Load
fluctuation
Speed
Since increasing the proportional gain enhances the
response level and decreases the speed fluctuation.
5
machines. If overshoots occur, raise the setting by double the setting and then set the value to 0.8
Pr.821
to 0.9 the setting where overshoots stop occurring.
Set Pr.820 higher.
3 Response is slow. If acceleration is slow, raise the setting by 5%s and then set the value to 0.8 to 0.9
Pr.820
the setting immediately before vibration/noise starts occurring.
Set Pr.821 lower.
Return time (response time)
4 Lower Pr.821 by half the current setting and then set the value to 0.8 to 0.9 the setting
is long.
immediately before overshoots or unstable movements stop occurring.
Set Pr.821 higher.
Overshoots or unstable
5 Raise Pr.821 by double the current setting and then set the value to 0.8 to 0.9 the setting
movements occur.
immediately before overshoots or unstable movements stop occurring.
NOTE
• Pr.830 Speed control P gain 2 and Pr.831 Speed control integral time 2 are valid when terminal RT is ON. In this case,
replace them for Pr.820 and Pr.821 in the description above.
PARAMETERS 155
Speed control under PM motor control
Gain adjustment of current controllers for the d axis and the q axis
• Use Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) to adjust the proportional gain of current controllers
for the d axis and the q axis. The 100% gain is equivalent to 1000 rad/s. Setting this parameter higher improves the
trackability for current command changes. It also reduces the current fluctuation caused by external disturbance.
• Use Pr.825 Torque control integral time 1 (current loop integral time) to set the integral time of current controllers for
the d axis and the q axis. If the setting value is small, it produces current fluctuation toward disturbance, decreasing time
until it returns to original current value.
NOTE
• Pr.834 Torque control P gain 2 and Pr.835 Torque control integral time 2 are valid when terminal RT is ON. In this case,
replace them for Pr.824 and Pr.825 in the description above.
156 PARAMETERS
Speed control under PM motor control
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.19 Base frequency voltage page 497
Pr.72 PWM frequency selection page 179
Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor poles page 143
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency page 314
Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1 page 313 5
PARAMETERS 157
Speed control under PM motor control
Set the time constant of primary delay filter for torque feedback signal.
Speed loop response is reduced. Under ordinary circumstances, therefore, use the initial value as it is.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 Without filter
827
Torque detection filter 1 0s Set the time constant of primary delay filter torque
G216 0.001 to 0.1 s
feedback signal.
837 0 to 0.1 s Second function of Pr.827 (enabled when RT signal ON)
Torque detection filter 2 9999
G316 9999 Same as Pr.827 setting
NOTE
• The RT signal is a second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 333.)
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial setting. Set "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
158 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
PARAMETERS 159
(E) Environment setting parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
1006
Clock (year) 2000 2000 to 2099 Set the year.
E020
101 to 131, 201 to 228,
(229), 301 to 331, Set the month and day.
401 to 430, 501 to 531, 1000 and 100 digits: January to December
1007 101
Clock (month, day) 601 to 630, 701 to 731, 10 and 1 digits: 1 to end of month (28, 29, 30 or
E021 (January 1)
801 to 831, 901 to 930, 31)
1001 to 1031, 1101 to 1130, For December 31, set "1231".
1201 to 1231
0 to 59, 100 to 159,
200 to 259, 300 to 359,
400 to 459, 500 to 559,
600 to 659, 700 to 759,
800 to 859, 900 to 959, Set the hour and minute using the 24-hour clock.
1008 0 1000 to 1059, 1100 to 1159, 1000 and 100 digits: 0 to 23 hours
Clock (hour, minute)
E022 (00:00) 1200 to 1259,1300 to 1359, 10 and 1 digits: 0 to 59 minutes
1400 to 1459, 1500 to 1559, For 23:59, set "2359".
1600 to 1659, 1700 to 1759,
1800 to 1859,1900 to 1959,
2000 to 2059, 2100 to 2159,
2200 to 2259, 2300 to 2359
NOTE
• The clock's count-up data is saved in the inverter's EEPROM every 10 minutes.
• Because the date and time are cleared after turning OFF the control circuit power supply, the clock function must be reset
after turning ON the power supply. Use a separate power supply, such as an external 24 V power supply, for the control circuit
of the simple clock function, and supply power continuously to this control circuit.
• In the initial setting, inverter reset is performed if supplying power to the main circuit is started when power is supplied only to
the control circuit. Then, the clock information stored in EEPROM is restored. Reset at the start of supplying power to the
main circuit can be disabled by setting Pr.30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to page 508)
• The set clock is also used for functions such as faults history.
160 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
Hz Out 1:00
Count-up Hz Out 2:00
Count-up Hz Out 3:00
0. 00 Hz 0. 00 Hz 0. 00 Hz
−−− STOP PU −−− STOP PU −−− STOP PU
1:00
PREV SET NEXT
2:00
PREV SET NEXT
3:00
PREV SET NEXT
Synchronization Synchronization
• When the FR-LU08 is connected to the inverter, the internal clock of the inverter can be synchronized with the clock of FR-
LU08. (Real time clock function)
With a battery (CR1216), the FR-LU08 time count continues even if the main power of the inverter is turned OFF. (The time
count of the inverter internal clock does not continue when the inverter power is turned OFF.
• To adjust the clock of FR-LU08, use the FR-LU08 and set Pr.1006 to Pr.1008.
NOTE
• Time adjustment between the inverter internal clock and the FR-LU08 is performed every one minute.
• When the FR-LU08 clock is initialized after the battery is exhausted for example, the inverter internal clock is valid.
5
GROUP
E
PARAMETERS 161
(E) Environment setting parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 to 3, 14 to 17 For the initial setting, reset is always
Reset selection/disconnected
75 14 0 to 3, 14 to 17, enabled, without disconnected PU detection,
PU detection/PU stop selection
100 to 103, 114 to 117 and with the PU stop function.
0 Reset input is always enabled.
E100 Reset selection 0 Reset input is enabled only when the
1
protective function is activated.
Operation continues even when the PU is
0
disconnected.
E101 Disconnected PU detection 0
The inverter output is shut off when the PU is
1
disconnected.
Decelerates to a stop when the STOP key is
0
pressed in PU operation mode only.
E102 PU stop selection 1 Decelerates to a stop when the STOP key
1 for PU is pressed in any of the PU, external
and communication operation modes.
0 Reset limit disabled
E107 Reset limit 0
1 Reset limit enabled
The parameters above will not return to their initial values even if parameter (all) clear is executed.
The setting range for the FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower and FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower.
The setting range for the FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher.
Pr.75
Reset selection Disconnected PU detection PU stop selection
Setting
0, 100 Reset input always enabled
Operation continues even when PU
Reset input enabled only when
1, 101 is disconnected.
protective function activated Decelerates to a stop when is
2, 102 Reset input always enabled
Inverter output shut off when PU input in PU operation mode only.
Reset input enabled only when
3, 103 disconnected.
protective function activated
14 (Initial
Reset input always enabled
value), 114 Operation continues even when PU
Reset input enabled only when is disconnected. Decelerates to a stop when is
15, 115
protective function activated
input in any of the PU, external and
16, 116 Reset input always enabled communication operation modes.
Inverter output shut off when PU
Reset input enabled only when
17, 117 disconnected.
protective function activated
Setting Pr.75 = any of "100 to 103 and 114 to 117" will enable the reset limit function. The setting is available for the FR-F820-03160(75K) or
higher and FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher.
NOTE
• When the reset signal (RES) is input during operation, the motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output.
Also, the cumulative values of electronic thermal O/L relay and regenerative brake duty are cleared.
• The input of the PU reset key is only enabled when the protective function is activated, regardless of the P.E100 and Pr.75
settings.
162 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
NOTE
• When the PU has been disconnected since before power-ON, the output is not shut off.
• To restart, confirm that the PU is connected and then reset.
• When P.E101="0" or Pr.75 ="0, 1, 14, 15, 100, 101, 114, or 115" (operation continues even when PU disconnected),
decelerates to a stop when PU is disconnected during PU JOG operation.
• When RS-485 communication operation is performed through the PU connector, the reset selection/PU stop selection
function is valid but the disconnected PU detection function is invalid. (The communication is checked according to Pr.122
PU communication check time interval.)
• When P.E102="0" or Pr.75="0 to 3, 100 to 103" is set, deceleration stop using is valid only in the PU operation
mode.
NOTE
• When Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection="1" (PU mode RS-485 terminal), deceleration stop is
performed even when is input during operation in PU mode via RS-485 communication.
How to restart after stopping with input from the PU during External
operation (PU stop (PS) release method)
• PU stop release method for operation panel (FR-DU08)
1)After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch OFF the STF and STR signal.
Speed
5
Time
Key
Operation
panel
Key
STF ON
GROUP
(STR) OFF
E
Stop/restart example for External operation
• The motor can be restarted by resetting the power supply or resetting with a RES signal.
NOTE
• Even when Pr.250 Stop selection "9999" is set and coasting stop is selected, deceleration stop and not coasting stop is
performed in the PU stop function during External operation.
PARAMETERS 163
(E) Environment setting parameters
NOTE
• Resetting the inverter power (turning OFF the control power) will clear the accumulated thermal value.
• When the retry function is set enabled (Pr.67 Number of retries at fault occurrence "0"), the reset limit function is
disabled.
Caution
Do not perform a reset while a start signal is being input. Doing so will cause a sudden start of the
motor, which is dangerous.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.67 Number of retries at fault occurrence page 236
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
Pr.250 Stop selection page 507
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection page 210
NOTE
• When with buzzer is set, the buzzer sounds if an inverter fault occurs.
164 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
NOTE
• The "P.RUN" LED is on in the display-off mode (when the PLC function is operating).
PARAMETERS 165
(E) Environment setting parameters
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
Setting dial frequency
0
setting mode Key lock mode
Setting dial disabled
1
161 Frequency setting/key lock potentiometer mode
0
E200 operation selection Setting dial frequency
10
setting mode
Key lock mode enabled
Setting dial
11
potentiometer mode
needs not to be pressed. (For the details of the operation method, refer to page 98.)
NOTE
• If the display changes from flickering "60.00" to "0.00", the setting value of Pr.161 may not be "1".
• The newly-set frequency will be saved as the set frequency in EEPROM after 10 s.
• When setting the frequency by turning the setting dial, the frequency goes up to the set value of Pr.1 Maximum frequency
(initial value: 200 Hz). Be aware of what frequency Pr.1 is set to, and adjust the setting of Pr.1 according to the application.
Disabling the setting dial and key operation of the operation panel (Press
and hold [MODE] (2 s))
• Operation using the setting dial and keys of the operation panel (FR-DU08) can be disabled to prevent parameter changes,
unexpected starts or frequency changes.
• Set Pr.161 to "10 or 11" and then press for 2 s to disable setting dial or key operations.
• When setting dial and key operations are disabled, appears on the operation panel. If setting dial or key
operation is attempted while dial and key operations are disabled, appears. (When a setting dial or key operation
is not performed for 2 s, the monitor display appears.)
• To enable the setting dial and key operation again, press for 2 s.
NOTE
• Even if setting dial and key operations are disabled, the monitor indicator and are enabled.
• The PU stop cannot be released with key operations unless the operation lock is released first.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency page 245
166 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
Basic operation
• When Pr.295"0", the minimum increment when the set frequency is changed with the setting dial can be set.
For example, when Pr.295="1.00 Hz", one click (one dial gauge) of the setting dial changes the frequency in increments of
1.00 Hz, such as 1.00 Hz 2.00 Hz 3.00 Hz.
When Pr.295="1"
1 click 1 click
NOTE
• When machine speed display is selected in Pr.37 Speed display, the minimum increments of change are determined by
Pr.295 as well. Note that the setting value may differ because the speed setting performs frequency conversion for the set
machine speed, and then reverse-converts it to the speed display again.
• For Pr.295, the increments are not displayed.
• The Pr.295 setting is enabled only for changes to the set frequency. It does not apply to the settings of other parameters
related to frequency.
• When 10 is set, the frequency setting changes in 10 Hz increments. Be cautious of excessive speed (in potentiometer mode).
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.37 Speed display page 261
5
GROUP
E
PARAMETERS 167
(E) Environment setting parameters
NOTE
• When Pr.570="0" (SLD rating), carrier frequency automatic reduction is enabled regardless of the setting in Pr.260 PWM
frequency automatic switchover.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.260 PWM frequency automatic switchover page 179
NOTE
• Stand-alone options (except line noise filter) cannot be used when inputting a voltage between 480 and 500 V.
• The voltage protection level of the 200 V class inverters is not affected by the Pr.977 setting.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.660 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation selection page 517
168 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
Writing during operation is enabled in PU operation mode, but disabled in External operation mode.
Writing during operation is disabled. To change the parameter setting value, stop the operation.
PARAMETERS 169
(E) Environment setting parameters
Writing during operation is disabled. To change the parameter setting value, stop the operation.
291 Pulse train I/O selection 738 to 746 (Second PM motor tuning)
313 to 322 (Extended output terminal function selection) 858 Terminal 4 function assignment
329 Digital input unit selection 859 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
414 PLC function operation selection Second motor torque current/Rated PM motor
860
current
415 Inverter operation lock mode setting
868 Terminal 1 function assignment
418 Extension output terminal filter
977 Input voltage mode selection
450 Second applied motor
998 PM parameter initialization
453 Second motor capacity
999 Automatic parameter setting
454 Number of second motor poles
1002 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient
170 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
2)Write a four-digit number (1000 to 9998) in Pr.297 as a password. (Writing is disabled when Pr.296="9999".) When a
password is registered, parameter reading/writing is restricted with the restriction level set in Pr.296 until unlocking.
PARAMETERS 171
(E) Environment setting parameters
NOTE
• After registering a password, the read value of Pr.297 is always one of "0 to 5".
NOTE
• If the password is forgotten, it can be unlocked with all parameter clear, but doing so will also clear the other parameters.
• All parameter clear cannot be performed during the operation.
• During the conditions where parameter reading is disabled (Pr.296 = any of "0, 4, 5, 99, 100, 104, 105, or 199"), do not use
FR Configurator2. It may not operate correctly.
• The password unlocking method differs between the operation panel, parameter unit, RS-485 communication and
communication option.
Operation panel/
RS-485 communication Communication option
parameter unit
All parameter clear
Parameter clear
: Password can be unlocked, : Password cannot be unlocked
• For the parameter clear and parameter all clear methods for the communication option and parameter unit, refer to the
Instruction Manual of each option. (For the operation panel (FR-DU08), refer to page 520, for the Mitsubishi inverter protocol
of RS-485 communication, refer to page 451, and for the Modbus-RTU communication protocol, refer to page 465.)
NOTE
• When Pr.296 = "4, 5, 104, or 105" (password lock), the setting screen for PU JOG frequency is not displayed in the parameter
unit (FR-PU07).
• When the password is being locked, parameter copy using the operation panel, parameter unit and USB memory is not
enabled.
172 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.77 Parameter write selection page 169
Pr.160 User group read selection page 177
Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection page 210
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection page 210
NOTE
• Pr.888 and Pr.889 do not influence the operation of the inverter.
20 50 Hz rated frequency E
21 60 Hz rated frequency
9999 No action
The read value is always "9999".
PARAMETERS 173
(E) Environment setting parameters
NOTE
• If the automatic setting is performed with Pr.999 or the automatic parameter setting mode, the settings including the changed
parameter settings (changed from the initial setting) will be automatically changed. Before performing the automatic setting,
confirm that changing the parameters will not cause any problem.
174 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
NOTE
• The display of parameters other than the above may be changed due to changes in C42 or C44. Set the PID monitor
indicator before changing the settings of other parameters.
PARAMETERS 175
(E) Environment setting parameters
NOTE
• Always perform an inverter reset after the initial setting.
• For the details of connection with GOT, refer to the Instruction Manual of GOT.
176 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
Only simple mode parameters can be
9999
displayed.
160 Simple mode and extended parameters
User group read selection 9999 0 0
E440 can be displayed.
Only parameters registered in user groups
1
can be displayed.
Displays the number of groups that are
172 User group registered (0 to 16)
registered as user groups. (Read-only)
0
E441 display/batch clear
9999 Batch clear of user group registrations
173 Sets the parameter number to register for
User group registration 9999 0 to 1999, 9999
E442 the user group.
174 Sets the parameter number to clear from
User group clear 9999 0 to 1999, 9999
E443 the user group.
The read value is always "9999".
NOTE
• When a plug-in option in installed on the inverter, the option parameters can also be read.
• Every parameter can be read regardless of the Pr.160 setting when reading parameters via a communication option.
• When reading the parameters using the RS-485 terminals, all parameters can be read regardless of the Pr.160 setting by
setting Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection and Pr.551 PU mode operation command source
selection.
• When the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is installed, Pr.15 Jog frequency, Pr.16 Jog
acceleration/deceleration time, C42(Pr.934) PID display bias coefficient, C43(Pr.934) PID display bias analog value,
C44(Pr.935) PID display gain coefficient, C45(Pr.935) PID display gain analog value and Pr.991 PU contrast
adjustment are displayed as simple mode parameters.
5
User group function (Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174)
• The user group function is a function for displaying only the parameters required for a setting. GROUP
E
• A maximum of 16 parameters from any of the parameters can be registered in a user group. When Pr.160="1", reading/
writing is enabled only for the parameters registered in user groups. (Parameters not registered in user groups can no
longer be read.)
• To register a parameter in a user group, set the parameter number in Pr.173.
• To clear a parameter from a user group, set the parameter number in Pr.174. To batch clear all the registered parameters,
set Pr.172 ="9999".
PARAMETERS 177
(E) Environment setting parameters
Parameter registration
6. Turn until (Pr.3) appears. Press to register the parameter. and flicker alternately.
NOTE
• Pr.77 Parameter write selection, Pr.160, Pr.296 Password lock level, Pr.297 Password lock/unlock and Pr.991 PU
contrast adjustment can always be read regardless of the user group setting. (For Pr.991, only when the FR-LU08 or the
FR-PU07 is connected.)
• Pr.77, Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174, Pr.296, Pr.297 cannot be registered in a user group.
• When Pr.174 is read, "9999" is always displayed. "9999" can be written, but it does not function.
• Pr.172 is disabled if set to a value other than "9999".
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequency, Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time page 221
Pr.77 Parameter write selection page 169
Pr.296 Password lock level, Pr.297 Password lock/unlock page 171
Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection page 210
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection page 210
Pr.991 PU contrast adjustment page 165
178 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
In the low-speed range (slower than 10% of the rated motor frequency), the carrier frequency is automatically changed to 2 kHz.
(For FR-F820-00490(11K) or lower and FR-F840-00250(11K) or lower)
• When using the optional sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), set Pr.72 = "25" (2.5 kHz). (FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher, FR-
F840-01800(75K) or higher.)
NOTE
• When Pr.72="25", the following limitations apply.
- V/F control is forcibly set.
- Soft-PWM control is disabled.
- The maximum output frequency is 60 Hz.
NOTE
• While a sine wave filter (Pr.72 = "25") is being used, the Soft-PWM control is disabled.
PARAMETERS 179
(E) Environment setting parameters
NOTE
• Reducing the PWM carrier frequency is effective as a countermeasure against EMI from the inverter or for reducing leakage
current, but doing so increases the motor noise.
• When the PWM carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or lower (Pr.72 1), the increase in the harmonic current causes the fast-
response current limit to activate before the stall prevention operation, which may result in torque shortage. In this case,
disable the fast-response current limit in Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection page 248
Pr.570 Multiple rating setting page 168
Pr.800 Control method selection page 143
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Displays whether or not the parts of the control
255 circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling
Life alarm status display 0 (0 to 15)
fan, and inrush current limit circuit have reached
E700
the life alarm output level. Read-only.
256 Inrush current limit circuit life Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush
100% (0 to 100%)
E701 display current limit circuit. Read-only.
257 Control circuit capacitor life Displays the deterioration degree of the control
100% (0 to 100%)
E702 display circuit capacitor. Read-only.
258 Main circuit capacitor life Displays the deterioration degree of the main
100% (0 to 100%) circuit capacitor. Read-only.
E703 display The value measured by Pr.259 is displayed.
Setting "1" and turning the power supply OFF
starts the mea
259 Main circuit capacitor life 0, 1 surement of the main circuit capacitor life.
0 If the setting value of Pr.259 becomes "3" after
E704 measuring (2, 3, 8, 9)
turning the power supply ON again, it means that
the measurement is completed. The deterioration
degree is read to Pr.258.
The setting range (reading only) for separated converter types is "0, 1, 4, or 5".
The setting is available only for standard models.
180 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
• Use Pr.255 Life alarm status display and the life alarm signal (Y90) to check whether or not the parts of the control circuit
capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan or inrush current limit circuit have reached the life alarm output level.
bit 15 7 0 • Pr.255 read • Pr.255 setting read
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Pr.255
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Decimal Binary
15 1111
14 1110
13 1101
12 1100
11 1011
10 1010
9 1001
8 1000
7 0111
6 0110
5 0101
4 0100
3 0011
2 0010
1 0001
0 0000
: With warnings, : Without warnings
• The life alarm signal (Y90) turns ON when any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan or inrush
current limit circuit reaches the life alarm output level.
• For the terminal used for the Y90 signal, set "90" (positive logic) or "190" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output
terminal function selection).
NOTE
• When using an option (FR-A8AY, FR-A8AR, FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE), the life can be output separately to the control circuit
capacitor life signal (Y86), main circuit capacitor life signal (Y87), cooling fan life signal (Y88), and inrush current limit circuit 5
life signal (Y89).
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
GROUP
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
E
Life display of the inrush current limit circuit (Pr.256) (Standard models)
• The life of the inrush current limit circuit (relay, contactor and inrush resistor) is displayed in Pr.256.
• The number of contact (relay, contactor, thyristor) ON times is counted, and it is counted down from 100% (0 time) every
1%/10,000 times. As soon as 10% (900,000 times) is reached, Pr.255 bit 3 is turned ON and also a warning is output to the
Y90 signal.
PARAMETERS 181
(E) Environment setting parameters
NOTE
• When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions, "forced end" (Pr.259 ="8") or", easurement
error" (Pr.259 ="9") may occur, or the status may remain in "measurement start" (Pr.259 ="1"). To perform measurement, first
eliminate the following conditions. Under the following conditions, even if "measurement complete" (Pr.259 ="3") is reached,
measurement cannot be performed correctly.
- FR-HC2, FR-CV, MT-RC, or a sine wave filter is connected.
- Terminals R1/L11, S1/L21 or DC power supply is connected to terminals P/+ and N/-.
- The power supply is switched ON during measurement.
- The motor is not connected to the inverter.
- The motor is running (coasting).
- The motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by two ranks or more.
- The inverter is tripped or a fault occurred while the power was OFF.
- The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal.
- The start command is given while measuring.
- The applied motor setting is incorrect.
• Operation environment: surrounding air temperature (annual average of 40°C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil
mist, dust and dirt)).
Output current (80% of the inverter rating)
• Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit, frequent starts and stops of the
magnetic contactor must be avoided.
WARNING
When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr.259 ="1"), the DC voltage is applied to the
motor for about 1 s at power OFF. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering OFF to
prevent an electric shock.
182 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
NOTE
• When the inverter is mounted with two ore more cooling fans, "FN" is displayed with one or more fans with speed of 50% or
less.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• For replacement of each part, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
5
GROUP
E
PARAMETERS 183
(E) Environment setting parameters
First power ON
9998
(999800h) Set "0" in Pr.503
Maintenance
timer1 Pr.504
(Pr. 503)
Time
• The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored in the EEPROM every hour and displayed in Pr.503 (Pr.686,
Pr.688) in 100 h increments. Pr.503 (Pr.686, Pr.688) is clamped at 9998 (999800 h).
• When the value in Pr.503 (Pr.686, Pr.688) reaches the time (100 h increments) set in Pr.504 (Pr.687, Pr.689), Maintenance
timer signal (Y95) is output, and also (MT1), (MT2), or (MT3) is displayed on the operation panel.
• For the terminal used for Y95 signal output, assign the function by setting "95 (positive logic)" or "195 (negative logic)" in
any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection).
NOTE
• The Y95 signal turns ON when any of MT1, MT2 or MT3 is activated. It does not turn OFF unless all of MT1, MT2 and MT3
are cleared.
• If all of MT1, MT2 and MT3 are activated, they are displayed in the priority of "MT1 > MT2 > MT3".
• MT is displayed on the FR-PU07 parameter unit if any of MT1, MT2 or MT3 is activated.
• The cumulative energization time is counted every hour. Energization time of less than 1 h is not counted.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
184 PARAMETERS
(E) Environment setting parameters
Operation example
• The pulse output of Current average monitor signal (Y93) is indicated below.
• For the terminal used for Y93 signal output, assign the function by setting "93 (positive logic)" or "193 (negative logic)" in
any of Pr.190 to Pr.194 (output terminal function selection). (This cannot be assigned by setting in Pr.195 ABC1
terminal function selection or Pr.196 ABC2 terminal function selection.)
Time
1 cycle (20s) Next cycle
Y93 signal
Data output mask time End pulse
When the speed has changed to constant output as low pulse
from acceleration/deceleration, Y93 signal is shape for 1 to 16.5s
not output for Pr. 556 time.
Maintenance timer pulse
Start pulse The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is output
Output as Hi pulse shape for 1s (fixed) as Hi output pulse shape for 2 to 9s (16000h to
The output currents are averaged during the time 72000h).
period set in Pr.555. Pr. 503 100h
5
Signal output time= 5s
40000h
Output current average value pulse
The averaged current value is output as low pulse shape for
0.5 to 9s (10 to 180%) during start pulse output.
output current average value (A)
Signal output time= 5s
Pr. 557 (A)
GROUP
E
Pr.556 Data output mask time setting
• Immediately after acceleration/deceleration is shifted to constant-speed operation, the output current is unstable
(transitional state). Set the time for not obtaining (masking) transitional state data in Pr.556.
PARAMETERS 185
(E) Environment setting parameters
Pr.557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current setting
• Set the reference (100%) for outputting the output current average value signal. The signal output time is calculated with
the following formula.
Output current average value
5s (Output current average value 100%/5 s)
Pr.557 setting value
The output time range is 0.5 to 9 s. When the output current average value is less than 10% of the setting value in Pr.557,
the output time is 0.5 s, and when it is more than 180%, the output time is 9 s.
For example, when Pr.557 = "10 A" and the output current average value is 15 A:
15 A/10 A 5 s = 7.5 s, thus the current average value monitor signal is Low output in 7.5 s intervals.
(s)
Signal output time
0.5
10 180 (%)
Output current average value
2
16000 72000 (h)
Maintenance timer value
NOTE
• Masking of the data output and sampling of the output current are not performed during acceleration/deceleration.
• If constant speed changes to acceleration or deceleration during start pulse output, it is judged as invalid data, and HIGH
output in 3.5 s intervals is performed for the start pulse and LOW output in 16.5 s intervals is performed for the end signal.
After the start pulse output is completed, minimum 1-cycle signal output is performed even if acceleration/deceleration is
performed.
The speed is changed to deceleration from
Output frequency the constant speed during start pulse output
Time
Previous cycle Invalid cycle (20s) Next cycle
Y93
signal
Start pulse End signal
Output as high pulse shape for 3.5s Output as low pulse shape for 16.5s
• If the output current value (inverter output current monitor) is 0 A at the completion of the 1-cycle signal output, no signal is
output until the next constant-speed state.
• Under the following conditions, the Y93 signal is output with Low output in 20 s intervals (no data output).
- When acceleration or deceleration is operating at the completion of the 1-cycle signal output
- When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr.57 Restart coasting time "9999") is set, and the 1-cycle
signal output is completed during the restart operation
- When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr.57 "9999") is set, and the restart operation was being
performed at the completion of data output masking
• Pr.686 Maintenance timer 2 and Pr.688 Maintenance timer 3 cannot be output.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting time page 414, page 420
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
Pr.503 Maintenance timer 1, Pr.686 Maintenance timer 2, Pr.688 Maintenance timer 3 page 184
186 PARAMETERS
(F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
Acceleration/ Set the frequency that will be the basis of acceleration/
20
deceleration 60 Hz 50 Hz 1 to 590 Hz deceleration time. As acceleration/deceleration time, set the
F000 frequency change time from a stop status to Pr.20.
reference frequency
Increment: 0.1 s
Acceleration/ 0 Select the increment for the
21 Range: 0 to 3600 s
deceleration time 0 acceleration/deceleration time
F001 Increment: 0.01 s
setting and the setting range.
increments 1
Range: 0 to 360 s
Set the acceleration/deceleration time for JOG operation (from
16 Jog acceleration/
0.5 s 0 to 3600 s (360 s) stop status to Pr.20).
F002 deceleration time Refer to page 221
Set the acceleration time for restart (from stop status to Pr.20).
611 Acceleration time at When "9999" is set, standard acceleration time (like Pr.7) is
9999 0 to 3600 s, 9999
F003 a restart applied as the acceleration time at restart.
Refer to page 414, page 420.
7 5 s
Acceleration time 0 to 3600 s (360 s) Set the motor acceleration time (from stop status to Pr.20).
F010 15 s
8 10 s
Deceleration time 0 to 3600 s (360 s) Set the motor deceleration time (from Pr.20 to stop status).
F011 30 s
44 Second acceleration/ Set the acceleration/deceleration time when the RT signal is
5s 0 to 3600 s (360 s)
F020 deceleration time ON.
45 Second deceleration 0 to 3600 s (360 s) Set the deceleration time when the RT signal is ON.
F021 time
9999
9999 Acceleration time = deceleration time 5
Acceleration/ 0 to 590 Hz
Set the frequency where the acceleration/deceleration time
147 switches to the time set in Pr.44 and Pr.45.
deceleration time 9999
F022
switching frequency 9999 No function
GROUP
Set the acceleration time in a low-speed range (less than 10% F
0 to 3600 s (360 s)
791 Acceleration time in of the rated motor frequency).
9999
F070 low-speed range The acceleration time set in Pr.7 is applied. (While RT signal is
9999
ON, the second function is enabled.)
Set the deceleration time in a low-speed range (less than 10%
0 to 3600 s (360 s)
792 Deceleration time in of the rated motor frequency).
9999
F071 low-speed range The deceleration time set in Pr.8 is applied. (While RT signal is
9999
ON, the second function is enabled.)
Depends on the Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting. The initial value for the setting range is“0 to 3600 s”, and for the
setting increment is “0.1 s”.
Initial value for the FR-F820-00340(7.5K) or lower and FR-F840-00170(7.5K) or lower.
Initial value for the FR-F820-00490(11K) or higher and FR-F840-00250(11K) and higher.
PARAMETERS 187
(F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
Acceleration time setting = Pr.20 Acceleration time from stop status to maximum frequency / (maximum frequency -
Pr.13)
• For example, the following calculation is performed to find the setting value for Pr.7 when increasing the output
frequency to the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 s with Pr.20 = "60 Hz (initial value)" and Pr.13 = "0.5 Hz".
Pr.20
(60Hz/50Hz) Running
frequency
frequency (Hz)
Output
Time
Deceleration time setting = Pr.20 deceleration time from maximum frequency to stop / (maximum frequency - Pr.10)
• For example, the following calculation is used to find the setting value for Pr.8 when increasing the output frequency to the
maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 s with Pr.20 = 120 Hz and Pr.10 = 3 Hz.
NOTE
• If the acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the
shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system J (moment of inertia) and motor torque.
• If the Pr.20 setting is changed, the Pr.125 and Pr.126 (frequency setting signal gain frequency) settings do not change. Set
Pr.125 and Pr.126 to adjust the gains.
• Under PM motor control, if the protective function (E.OLT) is activated due to insufficient torque in the low-speed range, set
longer acceleration/deceleration times only in the low-speed range in Pr.791 Acceleration time in low-speed range and
Pr.792 Deceleration time in low-speed range.
188 PARAMETERS
(F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
NOTE
• Changing the Pr.21 setting changes the acceleration/deceleration time setting (Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.16, Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.264, Pr.265,
Pr.582, Pr.583, Pr.791, Pr.792, Pr.1477, Pr.1478). (The Pr. 611 Acceleration time at a restart setting is not affected.)
Output frequency
(Hz)
Set
frequency
Time
Pr. 7 Pr. 44 Pr. 44 Pr. 8
(Pr. 45)
RT signal ON
• Switching frequency for each control method
NOTE GROUP
• The reference frequency during acceleration/deceleration depends on the Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern F
selection setting. (Refer to page 191.)
• The RT signal can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 333.)
• RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
PARAMETERS 189
(F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
Low-speed range
(rated motor frequency/10)
Time
Acceleration time Deceleration time
in low-speed range in low-speed range
Slope set by Pr. 791 Slope set by Pr.792
Acceleration time Deceleration time
Slope set by Pr.7 Slope set by Pr.8
NOTE
• Set Pr.791 higher than Pr.7, and Pr.792 higher than Pr.8. If set as Pr.791 < Pr.7, the operation is performed as Pr.791 = Pr.7.
If set as Pr.792 < Pr.8, the operation is performed as Pr.792 = Pr.8.
• Refer to page 583 for the rated motor frequency of MM-EFS/MM-THE4.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.3 Base frequency page 497
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency page 502
Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection page 191
Pr.125, Pr.126 (frequency setting gain frequency) page 314
Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.264 Power-failure deceleration time 1, Pr.265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 page 426
190 PARAMETERS
(F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
[Linear acceleration
/ deceleration]
(Hz)
Time
GROUP
F
PARAMETERS 191
(F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
[S-pattern acceleration
/deceleration A]
fb
(Hz)
Time
• Acceleration/deceleration time calculation method when the set frequency is equal to or higher than the base frequency
NOTE
• For the acceleration/deceleration time setting of the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A, set the time to Pr.3 (Pr.84 under
PM motor control) instead of Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.
f1
Output frequency
f2
(Hz)
Time
192 PARAMETERS
(F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
[Anti-backlash measure
function]
Pr. 142
Pr. 140
Pr. 13
Time
Pr. 141 Pr. 143
NOTE
• Setting the backlash measures increases the acceleration/deceleration time by the stopping time.
[Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration]
Output frequency
Set frequency
NOTE
• When the base frequency is out of the range 45 to 65 Hz, the linear acceleration/deceleration is performed even if Pr.29 = "6".
• Even if Pr.14 Load pattern selection = "1 (variable torque load)", variable torque acceleration/deceleration setting is
prioritized and the inverter operates as Pr.14 = "0 (constant torque load)".
• For the variable torque acceleration/deceleration time setting, set the time period to reach Pr.3 Base frequency. (Not the
time period to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.)
• The variable torque acceleration/deceleration is disabled during PM motor control. (Linear acceleration/deceleration is
performed.)
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.3 Base frequency page 497
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time, Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency page 502
page 187
5
Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) page 329
GROUP
F
PARAMETERS 193
(F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
Description
Deceleration to
Initial Setting Frequency
Pr. Name RH, RM, RL the frequency
value range setting
signal function lower than the set
storage function
frequency
0 Multi-speed setting -
1 Remote setting With
2 Remote setting Without
Without Disabled
(Turning STF/STR
3 Remote setting
OFF clears remotely-
59
Restart cushion time 0 set frequency.)
F101
11 Remote setting With
12 Remote setting Without
Without Enabled
(Turning STF/STR
13 Remote setting
OFF clears remotely-
set frequency.)
Forward Inverter
rotation
STF When Pr.59 = "1, 2, 11, 12" When Pr.59 = "1, 11"
(Hz)
Acceleration
RH When Pr.59 = "3, 13"
Deceleration When Pr.59 = "2, 3, 12, 13"
RM 10
Clear
Set frequency
RL 2
∗1
SD 5 0Hz
0 Time
194 PARAMETERS
(F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
Acceleration/deceleration operation
• When the acceleration signal (RH) is turned ON, the set frequency increases. The increased speed at this time is
determined by the setting of Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time. Turning OFF the RH signal will stop
increasing the set frequency and run the motor at the frequency at that time.
• When the deceleration signal (RM) is turned ON, the set frequency decreases. The decreased speed at this time is
determined by the setting of Pr.45 Second deceleration time. When Pr.45 = "9999", the deceleration speed is the same
as Pr.44 setting. Turning OFF the RM signal will stop decreasing the set frequency and runs the motor at the frequency at
that time.
• When Pr.59 = any of "11, 12, or 13", deceleration can be performed to a frequency equal to or lower than the main speed
(External operation mode frequency except multi-speed or PU operation mode frequency).
Pr.59 = “ 1, 2, 3”
Output frequency
Forward rotation(STF) ON
ON
Acceleration(RH)
ON
Deceleration(RM)
NOTE
• While the RT signal is OFF, Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time and Pr.45 Second deceleration time are used
as the set frequency accelerating/decelerating time at turn ON of the acceleration/deceleration signal. If the Pr.7 and Pr.8
settings are longer, the acceleration/deceleration time set by Pr.7 and Pr.8 are applied.
While the RT signal is ON, Pr.44 and Pr.45 settings are used as the acceleration/deceleration time regardless of the Pr.7 and
Pr.8 settings.
Output frequency
• During External operation, the remotely-set frequency set with RH and RM signals is added to the terminal 4 input and
External operation mode frequency (PU operation mode frequency when Pr.79 = "3" (External and PU combined
operation)) except multi-speed setting. (When compensating analog input, set Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation
selection = "1". If the RH and RM signals are used for acceleration/deceleration while the frequency is set by analog
voltage input (terminal 2 or 4, selected by Pr.28 = "0"), the auxiliary input via the terminal 1 is disabled.)
• During PU operation, the remotely-set frequency set with RH and RM signal operation is added to the PU running
frequency.
PARAMETERS 195
(F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
NOTE
• The range of frequency changeable by acceleration signal (RH) and deceleration signal (RM) is 0 to maximum frequency
(Pr.1 or Pr.18 setting). Note that the maximum value of set frequency is (main speed + maximum frequency).
(Hz) The set frequency is clamped at (main speed + Pr.1)
• Even if the start signal (STF or STR) is OFF, turning ON the RH or RM signal varies the preset frequency.
• The RH, RM, or RL signal can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• The inverter can be used in the Network operation mode.
• The remote setting function is invalid during JOG operation and PID control operation.
• The multi-speed operation function is invalid when remote setting function is selected.
Within 1 minute
ON the RL (clear) signal after
turning OFF (ON) both the RH Remotely-set frequency stored last time
and RM signals, the inverter
operates at the remotely-set
Time
frequency stored in the last
operation if power is reapplied
Acceleration (RH) ON
before one minute has elapsed Deceleration (RM) OFF
ON
since turning OFF (ON) both the Clear (RL)
RH and RM signals. Forward rotation ON ON
(STF)
Power supply ON ON
Within 1 minute
(clear) signal after
turning OFF (ON) both the RH Remotely-set frequency stored last time
and RM
signals, the inverter operates at
Time
the
frequency in the remotely-set
Acceleration (RH) ON
frequency cleared state if power Deceleration (RM) OFF
ON
is reapplied before one minute Clear (RL)
has elapsed since turning OFF Forward rotation ON ON
(STF)
(ON) both the RH and RM Power supply ON ON
signals.
Caution
When using the remote setting function, set the maximum frequency again according to the
machine.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency page 245
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time, Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time, Pr.45 Second deceleration time page 187
Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selection page 222
Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) page 329
196 PARAMETERS
(F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
It is possible to set the starting frequency and hold the set starting frequency for a certain period of time.
Set these functions when a starting torque is needed or the motor drive at start needs smoothing.
Pr.13
0
Time
STF ON
NOTE
• The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value set in Pr.13.
For example, while Pr.13 = 5 Hz, the inverter output starts when the frequency setting signal reaches 5 Hz.
Pr.13
0
Time
Pr. 571 setting time
STF ON
NOTE
5
• When Pr.13 ="0 Hz", the starting frequency is held at 0.01 Hz.
• When the start signal was turned OFF during start-time hold, deceleration is started at that point.
• At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation, the starting frequency is valid but the start-time hold function is
invalid.
GROUP
F
Caution
Note that when Pr.13 is set to any value equal to or lower than Pr.2 Minimum frequency, simply
turning ON the start signal will run the motor at the preset frequency even if the command frequency
is not input.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.2 Minimum frequency page 245
PARAMETERS 197
(F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
Set the frequency where the PM motor starts running. Set the deadband in the low-speed range to eliminate noise and
offset deviation when setting a frequency with analog input.
Set frequency
Output
frequency
Pr.13
0
Time
Output from 0.01Hz
STF ON
NOTE
• Under induction motor control (under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control), the output starts at the
frequency set in Pr.13. Under PM motor control, the output always starts at 0.01 Hz.
• The inverter output does not start when the frequency-setting signal is less than Pr.13. For example, while Pr.13 = "20 Hz",
the inverter output starts when the frequency setting signal reaches 20 Hz.
Caution
Note that when Pr.13 is set to any value equal to or lower than Pr.2 Minimum frequency, simply turning ON
the start signal will run the motor at the preset frequency even if the command frequency is not input.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.2 Minimum frequency page 245
Pr.7 Acceleration time page 187
198 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
GROUP
D
PARAMETERS 199
(D) Operation command and frequency command
External
0 operation mode
Use the External/PU switchover mode ( ) to switch between the PU and External operation
(initial 204
mode.
value) At power ON, the inverter is in the External operation mode.
NET operation
mode
External
operation mode
External operation mode
fixed.
External signal input (terminal 2
The operation can be External signal input
2 and 4, JOG, multi-speed 204
performed by switching (terminal STF, STR) NET operation
selection, etc.)
between the External and mode
NET operation modes.
Operation panel/
External/PU combined parameter unit or External signal input External/PU
3 205
operation mode 1 external signal input (multi- (terminal STF, STR) combined
speed setting, terminal 4) operation mode
External
operation mode
External operation mode (PU operation interlock)
X12 signal ON: Switchover to PU operation mode enabled (during External operation, output
7 206
shutoff)
X12 signal OFF: Switchover to PU operation mode disabled NET operation
mode
The priority of frequency commands when Pr.79 = "3" is "multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14) > terminal 4 analog input
(AU) > digital input by operation panel".
200 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
Programmable controller
Personal computer
Network operation PU operation mode
mode
Inverter
Operation panel
Personal computer
PU connector
External terminal 1
2
3 7
8
9
10
Potentiometer Switch
NOTE
• There are two settings of "3" and "4" with PU/External combined operation. The startup method differs according to the
setting value.
• In the initial setting, the stop function (PU stop selection) by the operation panel or the parameter unit is effective in
modes other than the PU operation mode. (Refer to Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop
selectionon page 162.)
GROUP
D
PARAMETERS 201
(D) Operation command and frequency command
NOTE
• For details on switching by external terminals, refer to the following pages.
- PU operation external interlock signal (X12) page 206
- PU-External operation switchover signal (X16) page 207
- External-NET operation switchover signal (X65), NET-PU operation switchover signal (X66) page 207
- Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection page 209
202 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
Communication
Terminal 2 and 4 (analog)
RL, RM, RH, JOG, etc.
5
(Communication
PU (digital setting) N/A
option)
• Frequency setting
Terminals for
Transmit a frequency command
Communication communication option GROUP
via communication.
(communication (Refer to the Instruction Pr.340 = "1"
• Start command D
option) Manual of the
Transmit a start command via
communication option.)
communication
PARAMETERS 203
(D) Operation command and frequency command
to the PU operation mode by pressing of the operation panel. After switching to the PU operation mode, always
return to the External operation mode.
• The STF and STR signal are used as a start command, and the voltage to terminal 2 and 4, current signal, multi-speed
signal, and JOG signal are used as a frequency command.
Inverter
10
Frequency setting
2
potentiometer
5
Potentiometer
Operation panel
(FR-DU08)
204 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
Inverter
Operation panel
Forward rotation STF (FR-DU08)
start
Reverse rotation STR
start
Switch SD
Inverter
Operation panel
(FR-DU08)
10
Frequency setting
2
potentiometer
5
Potentiometer
Operation mode
Operation switchover/Operating status
switchover
Set to the PU operation mode on the operation panel and the parameter unit.
External operation→PU • As the direction of rotation, the direction that was active by External operation is continued.
operation • For the setting frequency, the setting of the potentiometer (frequency command) is continued. (Note,
however, that the setting disappears when the power is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset.)
The switchover command to the Network operation mode is transmitted via communication.
External operation→NET • As the direction of rotation, the direction that was active by External operation is continued.
operation • The setting by the setting potentiometer (frequency command) is kept. (Note, however, that the setting
disappears when the power is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset.)
Press the External operation key on the operation panel and the parameter unit.
PU operation→External
5
• The direction of operation is determined by the External operation input signal.
operation
• The setting frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.
The switchover command to the Network operation mode is transmitted via communication.
PU operation→NET operation
• For the direction of operation and setting frequency, the status during PU operation is continued.
The switchover command to the External operation mode is transmitted via communication.
NET operation→External
• The direction of operation is determined by the External operation input signal.
operation GROUP
• The setting frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.
D
Switch to the PU operation mode on the operation panel and the parameter unit.
NET operation→PU operation
• For the direction of operation and frequency, the status during Network operation is continued.
PARAMETERS 205
(D) Operation command and frequency command
When a fault occurs, the inverter can be reset by pressing on the operation panel.
NOTE
• The operation mode cannot switched to the PU operation mode with the start signal (STF, STR) in an ON state even if the
X12 (MRS) signal is ON.
• If the MRS signal is ON and Pr.79 is written to a value other than "7" when the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal
during PU operation mode, the MRS signal will act as a regular MRS function (output stop). Also, when Pr.79="7", the MRS
signal becomes the PU interlock signal.
• The logic of the signal follows the Pr.17 MRS input selection setting also when the MRS signal is used as the PU operation
interlock signal. When Pr.17 ="2", ON and OFF in the above explanation are reversed.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
206 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
NOTE
• The status of the operation mode follows the Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection setting and the ON/OFF state
of the X65 and X66 signals. (For details, refer to page 207.)
• The priority among Pr.79 and Pr.340 and signals is Pr.79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr.340.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
PARAMETERS 207
(D) Operation command and frequency command
• To switch between the Network operation mode and the External operation mode
1) Set Pr.79="0" (initial value) or "2, "6" or "7". (When Pr.79 ="7" and the X12 (MRS) signal is ON, the operation mode can
be switched.)
2) Set Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection ="0" (initial value), "1" or "2".
3) Set "66" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign the NET-External operation switching signal (X66) to a terminal.
4) When the X66 signal is ON, Network operation mode is selected. When the X66 signal is OFF, the External operation
mode is selected.
NOTE
• The priority of Pr.79 and Pr.340 and signals is Pr.79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr.340.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequency page 221
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to 27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 multi-speed operation page 222
Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection page 162
Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection page 166
Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection page 209
Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection page 210
208 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
79 Selects the operation mode.
Operation mode selection 0 0 to 4, 6, 7
D000 (Refer to page 200.)
0 Follows the Pr.79 setting.
The inverter starts up in the Network operation mode.
1, 2 If an instantaneous power failure occurs when "2" is set, the operating
status before the instantaneous power failure is maintained.
340 Communication startup
0 The inverter starts up in the Network operation mode. The operation
D001 mode selection
mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and Network
10, 12 operation mode from the operation panel.
If an instantaneous power failure occurs when "12" is set, running is
continued at the condition before the instantaneous power failure.
Switching between the PU and NET operation modes is available with the key on the operation panel or the X65 signal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting time page 414, page 420
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
PARAMETERS 209
(D) Operation command and frequency command
NOTE
• In the initial setting, "9999" (communication option automatic recognition) is set for Pr.550. Thus, if the communication option
is mounted, parameters cannot be written or the start and frequency commands cannot be sent by communications that use
the RS-485 terminals. (Monitoring or parameter reading can be performed.)
210 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
NOTE
• When Pr.550 ="1" (NET mode RS-485 terminals) and Pr.551 ="1" (PU mode RS-485 terminals), the PU operation mode has
a precedence. For this reason, if the communication option is not mounted, switching to the Network operation mode is not
longer possible.
• Changed setting values are enabled at power-ON or inverter reset.
Command source
Pr.550 Pr.551
RS-485 Communication REMARKS
setting setting PU connector USB connector
terminals option
PU operation NET operation
1 mode mode
NET operation
2 PU operation mode mode
0 NET operation
3 PU operation mode mode
9999
PU operation PU operation NET operation
(initial
mode mode
mode
value)
PU operation Switching to NET
1 mode
operation mode disabled
NET operation
2 PU operation mode mode
1 NET operation
3 PU operation mode mode
9999
PU operation PU operation NET operation
(initial
mode mode mode
value)
PU operation NET operation
1 mode mode
NET operation With communication
mode option
2 PU operation mode
NET operation Without communication
mode
option
9999
NET operation With communication
(initial mode option
value) 3 PU operation mode
NET operation Without communication
mode
option
NET operation With communication
9999 mode option
PU operation PU operation
(initial
mode mode NET operation Without communication
value)
mode
option
The Modbus-RTU protocol cannot be used in the PU operation mode. To use the Modbus-RTU protocol, set Pr.551="2".
If the communication option is not mounted, switching to the Network operation mode is not longer possible.
When Pr.551= "9999", the priority of the PU command source is USB connector > PU connector. 5
GROUP
D
PARAMETERS 211
(D) Operation command and frequency command
212 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
source selection="9999" with no communication option connected.
When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection="0" (communication option enabled), or Pr.550 NET mode operation
5
command source selection="9999" with communication option connected.
GROUP
D
PARAMETERS 213
(D) Operation command and frequency command
Operation at fault
Operation in each operation mode at error occurrences
External/PU External/PU NET NET operation
Conditions combined combined operation (when
Fault record PU External
(Pr.551 setting) operation operation (when RS-485 communication
operation operation
mode 1 mode 2 terminals are option is
(Pr.79 =3) (Pr.79 =4) used) used)
Inverter fault ― Stop
2 (PU connector)
PU connector 9999 (automatic Stop/continued
disconnection recognition)
Other than 2 Stop/continued
Communication Stop/continued Stop/
2 (PU connector) Continued Continued
error at PU continued
connector Other than 2 Continued
1 (RS-485 Stop/continued Stop/
Communication Continued Continued
terminals) continued
error at RS-485
Stop/continued
terminals Other than 1 Continued Continued
3 (USB
Communication connector) Stop/continued
Continued
error at USB 9999 (automatic
connector recognition)
Other than 3 Continued
Communication
error at Stop/continued
― Continued
communication
option
Selectable with Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection
Selectable with Pr.122 PU communication check time interval, Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time interval, and Pr.548 USB
communication check time interval
Follows the communication option
In the PU JOG operation mode, operation always stops when the PU is disconnected. The operation of PU disconnection (E.PUE) follows the
Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection setting.
When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection= "1" (RS-485 terminals enabled), or Pr.550 NET mode operation command
source selection="9999" with no communication option connected.
When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection="0" (communication option enabled), or Pr.550 NET mode operation
command source selection="9999" with communication option connected.
214 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
detection
PU operation external
12 X12 External
interlock
External DC injection brake
13 X13 NET External
operation start
14 X14 PID control valid terminal NET External NET External
PU/External operation
16 X16 External
switchover
18 X18 V/F switchover NET External
Output stop Combined External Pr.79 ≠ "7"
5
not assigned.
STP
25 Start self-holding selection - External
(STOP)
Start-time tuning start
28 X28 NET External
external input
37 X37 Traverse function selection NET External GROUP
PID multistage set point D
38 PDI1 NET External NET External
setting 1
PID multistage set point
39 PDI2 NET External NET External
setting 2
PID multistage set point
40 PDI3 NET External NET External
setting 3
46 TRG Trace trigger input NET External
47 TRC Trace sampling start/end NET External
48 X48 Power failure stop external External
PARAMETERS 215
(D) Operation command and frequency command
Pr.338 Communication
Operation 0: NET 1: EXT
operation command source
location REMARKS
Pr.339 Communication speed 0: 2: 0: 1: 2:
selection 1: EXT
command source NET EXT NET EXT EXT
Pr.414="1": Valid
when there is external
50 SQ Sequence start External, NET External
or network input
Pr.414="2": External
51 X51 Fault clear Combined External
60 STF Forward rotation command NET External
61 STR Reverse rotation command NET External
62 RES Inverter reset External
PID forward/reverse action
64 X64 NET External NET External
switchover
65 X65 PU/NET operation switchover External
External/NET operation
66 X66 External
switchover
67 X67 Command source switchover External
DC feeding operation
70 X70 NET External
permission
Pr.178 to Pr.189 setting
Selectable function
NOTE
• The command source of communication follows the Pr.550 and Pr.551 settings.
• The Pr.338 and Pr.339 settings can be changed while the inverter is running when Pr.77 = "2". Note that the setting change
is applied after the inverter has stopped. Until the inverter has stopped, communication operation command source and
communication speed command source before the setting change are valid.
216 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
NOTE
• The ON/OFF state of the X67 signal is applied only during a stop. When the terminals are switched during operation, the ON/
OFF state is applied after a stop.
• When the X67 is OFF, a reset via communication is disabled.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selection page 222
Pr.59 Remote function selection page 194
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
• Set this parameter to limit the motor rotation to only one direction.
• This parameter is valid for all of the reverse rotation and forward rotation keys of the operation panel and of the parameter
unit, the start signals (STF, STR signals) via external terminals, and the forward and reverse rotation commands through
communication.
GROUP
D
PARAMETERS 217
(D) Operation command and frequency command
PC PC
Pull up resistance ∗1
JOG JOG 2kΩ
2kΩ
Pull down resistance ∗1
SD
SD
When the wiring length is long with open collector outputs, the influence of stray capacitance causes the pulse to flatten out and prevents the
input pulse from being recognized.
When the wiring length is long (10 m or longer of shielded twisted pair cable with a recommended cable gauge of 0.75 mm2), connect the open
collector output signal to the power supply by an external pull-up resistance. The table below shows the reference resistance values for wiring
length. The stray capacitance of the wiring changes considerably according to how the cable is laid, thus the above wiring lengths are not
guaranteed values. When using a pull-up/down resistance, check the permissible load of the resistor and the permissible load current of the
output transistor, and use within the permissible range.
218 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
NOTE
• When pulse train input is selected, the function assigned to terminal JOG by Pr.185 JOG terminal function selection is
invalid.
• Pr.291 is the selection parameter for pulse train output/FM output. Thus, before changing the setting, check the specifications
of the device connected to the terminal FM. (For the pulse train output, refer to page 277.)
(Hz)
Input pulse
0Hz (pulse/s)
0 Maximum input pulse
Pr. 385
PARAMETERS 219
(D) Operation command and frequency command
NOTE
• The priority of the frequency command by the external signals is "Jog operation > multi-speed operation > terminal 4 analog
input". When pulse train input is enabled (Pr.291 = "1, 11, 21, 100" and Pr.384 ≠ "0"), terminal 2 analog input becomes
invalid.
When the wiring length between FM and JOG is long, the influence of stray capacitance causes the pulse to flatten out and prevents the input
pulse from being recognized. When the wiring length is long (10 m or longer of shielded twisted pair cable with a recommended cable size of
0.75 mm2), connect the terminal JOG to the terminal PC by an external pull-up resistance. The table below shows the reference resistance
values for wiring length.
• Setting "100" to Pr.291 enables out of the pulse train input as it is to the pulse train output (terminal FM). Connecting in a
daisy chain enables speed synchronized operation of multiple inverters.
• Set Pr.384 to "125" for inverters that receive pulse train since the maximum pulse train output is 50k pulses/s.
• The maximum number of input pulses should be 50k pulses/s.
• When performing synchronized operation, wire according to the following procedure. (This is to prevent contact input of 24
V from being applied to the terminal FM.)
1) Set pulse train output (setting other than "0, 1") to Pr.291 on the master side inverter.
2) Turn the inverter power supply OFF.
3) Wire the slave side terminal JOG-SD to the master side terminal FM-SD.
4) Turn the inverter power supply ON.
NOTE
• After changing the Pr.291 setting, connect the JOG terminal to the terminal FM-SD. When FM output (voltage output) is taken
as the pulse train, take caution to prevent voltage from being applied to the terminal FM.
• Use the sink logic (factory setting) for the slave side inverter. The inverter does not operate properly with source logic.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.291 (Pulse train output) page 273
220 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
15
Jog frequency 5 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency during JOG operation.
D200
Sets motor acceleration/deceleration time during JOG
operation. For the acceleration/deceleration time, set the time
16 Jog acceleration/
0.5 s 0 to 3600 s (360 s) until the frequency set to Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration
F002 deceleration time reference frequency is reached.
The acceleration/deceleration times cannot be set separately.
The above parameter is displayed as a simple mode parameter when the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is
mounted. Setting of this parameter is enabled when the operation panel (FR-DU08) is connected and "0" is set to Pr.160 User group read
selection. (Refer to page 177.)
When Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments = "0" (initial value), the setting range is "0 to 3600 s" and the setting increment is "0.1
s". When Pr.21 = "1" is set, this means a setting range of "0 to 360 s" and the setting increment is "0.01 s".
The Pr.20 initial value is set to 60 Hz for the FM type and to 50 Hz for the CA type.
JOG signal ON
JOG operation in PU
• When the operation panel or the parameter unit is in the JOG operation mode, the motor jogs only while the start button is
pressed. (For the operation method, refer to page 110.)
NOTE
• The reference frequency of the acceleration/deceleration time differs according to the Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration
pattern selectionsetting. (Refer to page 191.)
• The Pr.15 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr.13 Starting frequency setting.
• The JOG signal can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. 5
• During JOG operation, the second acceleration/deceleration cannot be selected with the RT signal. (Other second functions
are enabled. (Refer to page 333.))
• When Pr.79 Operation mode selection="4", JOG operation is started by one push of / on the operation panel
GROUP
and stopped by . D
• This function is invalid when Pr.79= "3".
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequency page 197
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments page 187
Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection page 191
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) page 329
PARAMETERS 221
(D) Operation command and frequency command
(High speed)
RL ON
NOTE
• In the initial setting, when two or more of multi-speed settings are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the set
frequency of the lower signal.
For example, when RH and RM signals turn ON, RM signal (Pr.5) has a higher priority.
• The RH, RM and RL signals are assigned to the terminals RH, RM and RL in the initial status.
Set "0 (RL)", "1 (RM)", and "2 (RH)" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the signals to
other terminals.
222 PARAMETERS
(D) Operation command and frequency command
Output frequency
Forward Speed 10
Speed 5
rotation Inverter Speed 11
Speed 6 Speed 12
STF Speed 9
Multi-speed selection
Speed 13
Speed 4 Speed 8
REX 10 Speed 14
(Hz)
RH Frequency setting Speed 7 Speed 15
2
potentiometer
RM Time
5
RL ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RH
SD ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RM
ON ON ON ON ON ON
RL
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
REX
∗1
When RH, RM and RL is set to OFF and REX is set to ON when "9999" is set to Pr.232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8), the inverter runs by the
frequency set to Pr.6.
NOTE
• The priority of the frequency commands by the external signals are "Jog operation > multi-speed operation > terminal 4
analog input > pulse train input > terminal 2 analog input". (For details on frequency commands by analog input, refer to page
314.)
• Valid in the External operation mode or PU/External combined operation mode (Pr.79= "3" or "4".
• Multi-speed parameters can also be set during PU operation or External operation.
• The Pr.24 to Pr.27 and Pr.232 to Pr.239 settings have no priority among them.
• When Pr.59 Remote function selection ≠ "0", the multi-speed setting is invalid since the RH, RM, and RL signals are for
remote setting.
• When performing analog input compensation, set Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selection to "1".
• Select the terminals (terminals 1, 2) to use for compensation input voltage (0 to ± 5 V, 0 to ± 10 V) at Pr.73 Analog input
selection.
• When using terminal 1 for compensation input, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment "0" (initial value).
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequency page 221
Pr.59 Remote function selection page 194
5
Pr.73 Analog input selection page 306
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment page 310
GROUP
D
PARAMETERS 223
(H) Protective function parameter
224 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
9 Electronic thermal O/L Rated inverter 0 to 500 A
Set the rated motor current.
H000 relay current 0 to 3600 A
600 First free thermal reduction 0 to 590 Hz
9999
H001 frequency 1 9999
601 First free thermal reduction 1 to 100%
100% The electronic thermal O/L relay operation level can be
H002 ratio 1 9999
changed to match the motor temperature
602 First free thermal reduction 0 to 590 Hz
9999 characteristics with the combination of these three
H003 frequency 2 9999 points (Pr.600, Pr.601), (Pr.602, Pr.603), (Pr.604, Pr.9).
603 First free thermal reduction 1 to 100% 9999: Free thermal O/L relay invalid
100%
H004 ratio 2 9999
604 First free thermal reduction 0 to 590 Hz
9999
H005 frequency 3 9999
607 Motor permissible load Set the permissible load according to the motor
150% 110 to 250%
H006 level characteristics.
0 to 500 A Enabled when the RT signal is ON.
51 Second electronic thermal Set the rated motor current.
9999 0 to 3600 A
H010 O/L relay
9999 Second electronic thermal O/L relay invalid
692 Second free thermal 0 to 590 Hz
9999
H011 reduction frequency 1 9999
693 Second free thermal 1 to 100%
The electronic thermal O/L relay operation level can be
100%
H012 reduction ratio 1 9999 changed to match the second motor temperature
694 Second free thermal 0 to 590 Hz characteristics with the combination of these three
9999
H013 reduction frequency 2 9999 points (Pr.692, Pr.693), (Pr.694, Pr.695), (Pr.696,
695 Second free thermal 1 to 100% Pr.51).
100% 9999: Second free thermal O/L relay invalid
H014 reduction ratio 2 9999
696 Second free thermal 0 to 590 Hz
9999
H015 reduction frequency 3 9999
110 to 250% Set the permissible load when the RT signal is ON.
608 Second motor permissible
9999 The Pr.607 setting is applied even when the RT signal
H016 load level 9999
is ON.
561 PTC thermistor protection 0.5 to 30 kΩ Set the PTC thermistor protection level (resistance).
9999
H020 level 9999 PTC thermistor protection disabled
Set the time from when the resistance of the PTC
1016 PTC thermistor protection
0s 0 to 60 s thermistor reaches the protection level until the
H021 detection time protective function is activated.
The setting range for FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower and FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower. The minimum setting increment is "0.01 A".
The setting range for FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher, and FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher. The minimum setting increment is "0.1 A". 5
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 225
(H) Protective function parameter
70 30Hz or more∗3
30Hz
this region
180
Range for
120
the transistor
protection∗4
60
52.5% 105%
50 100 120 150 230
Inverter output power (%)
(% to the inverter rated current)
When setting Pr.9 to a value (current value) of 50% of the inverter rated current
The % value denotes the percentage to the rated inverter current. It is not the percentage to the rated motor current.
When the electronic thermal O/L relay of the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor is set, the characteristic curve is as shown in this diagram at 6 Hz
or higher. (For selection of the operation characteristic , refer to page 337.)
Transistor protection is activated depending on the temperature of the heatsink. The protection may be activated even with less than 120%
depending on the operating conditions.
NOTE
• The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset to the initial value by the inverter's power
reset and reset signal input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
• Install an external thermal relay (OCR) between the inverter and motors to operate several motors, a multi-pole motor or a
dedicated motor with one inverter. When setting an external thermal relay, note that the current indicated on the motor rating
plate is affected by the line-to-line leakage current. (Refer to page 72.) The cooling effect of the motor drops during low-speed
operation. Use a thermal protector or a motor with built-in thermistor.
• The protective characteristic of the electronic thermal O/L relay is degraded when there is a large difference in capacity
between the inverter and motor, and when the set value is small. In such case, use an external thermal relay.
• A dedicated motor cannot be protected by an electronic thermal O/L relay. Use an external thermal relay.
• If the electronic thermal O/L relay is set to 3% or lower of the rated inverter current, the electronic thermal O/L relay may not
operate.
• The transistor protection thermal O/L relay is activated early when the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting is increased.
226 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
Electronic thermal O/L relay when using IPM motor (Pr.9, E.THM)
• This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor and trips the inverter by stopping the operation of the transistor at
the inverter output side. (The operation characteristic is shown below.)
• Set the rated current (A) of the motor in Pr.9. Performing IPM parameter initialization automatically sets the rated current of
the IPM motor. (Refer to page 151.)
• Set "0" in Pr.9 to avoid activating the electronic thermal O/L relay function; for example, when using an external thermal
relay for the motor.
(Note that the output transistor protection of the inverter is activated. (E.THT))
• MM-EFS, MM-THE4
(min) unit display in this range
70 750r/min
operation time (min)
150r/min
Thermal relay
1125r/min
60 500r/min
1500r/min
50
240
750r/min
Thermal relay operation time (s)
150r/min
(s) unit display in this range
180 1125r/min
500r/min
1500r/min
120
60
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Inverter output current (%)∗1
NOTE
• The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset to the initial value by the inverter's power
reset and reset signal input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
• When using a PM motor other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4, set the free thermal parameters (Pr.600 to Pr.604) in accordance
with the motor characteristic.
• The transistor protection thermal O/L relay is activated early when the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting is increased.
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 227
(H) Protective function parameter
MC
U
V IM
W
RT
SD
• These settings are used when rotating two motors with different rated current separately by a single inverter. (When rotating
two motors together, use an external thermal relay.)
• Set the rated motor current for the second motor in Pr.51.
• When the RT signal is ON, thermal protection is provided based on the Pr.51 setting.
NOTE
• The RT signal is a second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 333.)
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial setting. Set "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection),to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
228 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
Motor permissible
load 150% (Initial value)
Motor permissible
load 110%
Thermal relay operation time (s)
240
Range for
180
the transistor
protection
120
60
0
80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Inverter output power (%)
(% to the inverter rated current)
Example of motor permissible load setting
(when Pr.9="100% of the inverter rating")
Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (TH) and warning signal (THP
signal)
• If the accumulated electronic thermal value reaches 85% of the Pr.9 or Pr.51 setting, electronic thermal O/L relay function
pre-alarm (TH) is displayed and the electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (THP) signal is output. If the value reaches
100% of the Pr.9 setting, the motor thermal protection (E.THM/E.THT) is activated to shut off the inverter output. The
inverter output is not shut off with the TH display. The inverter output is not shut off with the warning signal (THP).
• For the terminal used for THP signal output, set "8 (positive logic)" or "108 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196
(output terminal function selection) to assign the function.
NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 229
(H) Protective function parameter
NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
230 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
• When the PTC thermistor protection level setting is used, use Pr.1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time to set
the time from when the resistance of the PTC thermistor reaches the protection level until the protective function (E.PTC) is
activated.
If the resistance of the PTC thermistor falls below the protection level within the protection detection time, the elapsed time
count is cleared.
Pr.561
setting
Time
Pr.1016
ALM
E.PTC
NOTE
• When using terminal 2 for PTC thermistor input (Pr.561 ≠ "9999"), the terminal 2 will not operate as an analog frequency
command terminal. The PID and dancer control functions assigned to the terminal 2 will be also disabled. Use Pr.133 PID
action set point to set the set point for the PID function.
• To input power to the PTC thermistor power supply, always use the terminal 10. Do not use any other terminals or an external
power supply Otherwise, the PTC thermistor protection (E.PTC) does not operate properly.
• When E.PTC is activated, the alarm display, "External protection (AU terminal)", may appear on the parameter unit (FR-
PU07), but it is not a fault.
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 231
(H) Protective function parameter
Pr.603
(Pr.695)
Pr.601
(Pr.693)
10 Outout frequency[Hz]
NOTE
• Make sure to set the parameters according to the motor temperature characteristic used.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.71 Applied motor page 337
Pr.72 PWM frequency selection page 179
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
232 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
A cooling fan operates at power ON.
0 Cooling fan ON/OFF control is invalid. (The cooling fan is
always ON at power ON)
Cooling fan ON/OFF control is valid.
244 Cooling fan operation
1 The fan is always ON while the inverter is running. During a
H100 selection 1
stop, the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches ON/
OFF according to the temperature.
Cooling fan ON/OFF control is valid.
101 to 105
Set the cooling fan stop waiting time within 1 to 5 s.
Cooling fan operation control (Pr.244 = "1" (initial value), "101 to 105")
• The cooling fan operation is controlled when Pr.244 = "1". When the inverter is running, the cooling fan operates; and when
it is stopped, the cooling fan operates according to the temperature of the inverter heatsink. If the fan stops although it
meets the conditions for running, fan operation is regarded as faulty, [FN] is displayed on the operation panel, and the fan
signal and LF signals are output.
• To prevent the cooling fan from turning ON and OFF repeatedly during frequent starts/stops (inching), the cooling fan stop
waiting time can be set. The waiting time when Pr.244 = "101 to 105" is Pr.244-100 (or 1 s, if the Pr.244 = "101").
NOTE
• The cooling fan is installed on the FR-F820-00105(2.2K) or higher and FR-F840-00083(3.7K) or higher.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
5
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 233
(H) Protective function parameter
Select whether to enable/disable earth (ground) fault detection at start. When enabled, earth (ground) fault detection is
performed immediately after a start signal input to the inverter.
NOTE
• Because of the detection performed at start, the output is delayed by approximately 20 ms at every start.
• Use Pr.249 to enable/disable ground fault detection at operation start. Ground faults are detected always during operation
regardless of the Pr.249 setting.
• If a smaller-capacity motor is used with the FR-F820-00250(5.5K) or higher and FR-F840-00126(5.5K) or higher, ground fault
protection may be insufficient.
NOTE
• Do not use this function when switching to an external battery, since the inrush current when power is restored increases, as
the undervoltage level is decreased.
• The Pr.598 settings are only valid for 400 V class inverters.
• The Pr.598 setting is disabled during PM motor control. The Pr.598 setting is also invalid during PM motor control for the first
or second functions.
234 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
The setting range is same with the one for fault data codes of
16 to 253 the inverter (which can be read through communication).
997
Fault initiation 9999 Written data is not stored in EEPROM.
H103
The read value is always "9999".
9999
With this setting, the protective function does not activate.
• To initiate a fault (protective function), set the assigned number of the protective function you want to initiate in Pr.997.
• The value set in Pr.997 is not stored in EEPROM.
• When a protective function activates, the inverter trips, a fault is displayed, and a fault signal (ALM, ALM2) is output.
• The latest fault in the faults history is displayed while the fault initiation function is in operation. After a reset, the faults
history goes back to the previous status. (The protective function generated by the fault is not saved in the faults history.)
• Perform inverter reset to cancel the protective function.
• For the selectable parameter by Pr.997 and the corresponding protective functions, refer to page 535.
NOTE
• If a protective function is already operating, no fault can be activated by Pr.997.
• The retry function is disabled when a protective function has been initiated by the fault initiation function.
• If a fault occurs after a protective function has been activated, the protective function indication does not change. The fault is
not saved in the faults history either.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
251 Output phase loss 0 Without output phase loss protection
1
H200 protection selection 1 With output phase loss protection
872 Input phase loss 0 Without input phase loss protection
0
H201 protection selection 1 With input phase loss protection
The setting is available only for standard models.
NOTE
• When several motors are connected, output phase loss cannot be detected even if the wiring to one motor loses phase.
GROUP
• If an input phase is lost while Pr.872 = "1" (with input phase loss protection), Pr.261 Power failure stop selection ≠ "0" H
(power failure stop function enabled), the motor decelerates to stop without outputting E.ILF.
• In the case of R/L1, S/L2 phase loss, the input phase loss protection will not operate, and the inverter will trip.
• If an input phase loss continues for a long time, the converter section and capacitor lives of the inverter will be shorter.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.261 Power failure stop selection page 426
PARAMETERS 235
(H) Protective function parameter
• When retries fail consecutively more than the number of times set in Pr.67, a retry count excess (E.RET) occurs, resulting
in an inverter retries. (Refer to the retry failure example.)
• Use Pr.68 to set the waiting time from a protective function activation to a retry in the range of 0.1 to 600 s.
• During retry operation, the during retry (Y64) signal is ON. For the Y64 signal, set "64 (positive operation)” or "164 (negative
operation)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) to assign the function.
Pr. 68 × 4
Pr.68 (If it is below 3.1s, 3.1s is set.) Pr.68 Pr.68 Pr.68
Inverter Inverter
output output
frequency frequency
0 0 Time
Time
Retry start Success count + 1 First Second Third
Fault occurrence retry retry retry Retry failure
Fault Fault Fault (E.RET)
Retry success count occurrence occurrence occurrence
Fault signal ON
(ALM)
Y64 ON Y64 ON ON ON
236 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
NOTE
• Use the retry function only when the operation can be resumed after resetting a protective function activation. Making a retry
against the protective function, which is activated by an unknown condition, will lead the inverter and motor to be faulty.
Identify what condition the protective function was activated, and eliminate such condition before resuming the operation.
• If the retry function operates during PU operations, the operating conditions (forward/reverse rotation) are stored; and
operations resume after retry reset.
• Only the fault details for the first fault that occurred are stored in the faults history.
• The reset by the retry function does not clear the accumulated data of the electronic thermal O/L relay, regenerative brake
duty, etc. (This is different from power supply reset or reset by RES signal.)
• When the parameter storage device fault (E.PE) is occurring and reading of the retry-function-related parameters is not
possible, retry cannot operated.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Caution
When the retry function is set enabled, stay away from the motor and machine in the case of an
inverter trip. The motor and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after the
inverter trip. When the retry function is set enabled, apply in easily visible places the CAUTION
stickers supplied to this product.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting time page 414, page 420
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 237
(H) Protective function parameter
Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
100, 111, 112, 121,
122, 123, 124, 200,
211, 212, 221, 222,
523 Emergency drive mode 223, 224, 300, 311, Select the operation mode of the emergency drive.
9999
H320 selection 312, 321, 322, 323,
324, 400, 411, 412,
421, 422, 423, 424
9999 Emergency drive disabled
Set the running frequency in the fixed frequency mode
0 to 590 Hz of the emergency drive. (when the fixed frequency
524 mode is selected in Pr.523)
Emergency drive
H321 9999 Set the PID set point in the PID control mode of the
running speed 0 to 100% emergency drive. (when the PID control mode is
selected in Pr.523)
9999 Emergency drive disabled
1 to 200 Set the retry count during emergency drive operation.
515 Emergency drive
1 Without retry count excess (no restriction on the
H322 dedicated retry count 9999
number of retries)
Emergency drive Set the frequency for operation after a retry when any
1013
running speed after 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz of E.CPU, E.1 to E.3, E.5 to E.7 occurs during
H323 emergency drive operation.
retry reset
Set the retry waiting time during emergency drive
514 Emergency drive 0.1 to 600 s
operation.
9999
H324 dedicated waiting time
9999 As set in Pr.68.
136 MC switchover interlock
1s 0 to 100 s Set the operation interlock time for MC2 and MC3.
A001 time
Set the frequency at which the inverter-driven
operation is switched over to the commercial power
Automatic switchover
139 0 to 60 Hz supply operation when the condition for electronic
frequency from inverter 9999
bypass is established during emergency drive
A004
to bypass operation operation.
9999 Without automatic switchover
Coasting time differs according to the inverter
0
capacity. (Refer to page 414.)
57 Set the waiting time for the inverter to perform a
Restart coasting time 9999
A702 0.1 to 30 s restart after the power lost by an instantaneous power
failure restores.
9999 No restart
The setting is available only for standard models.
Set Pr.524 after setting Pr.523.
When Pr.523 = "100, 200, 300, 400", the emergency drive is activated regardless of the Pr.524 setting.
238 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
Connection diagram
• An example connection diagram of the emergency drive is shown below.
MC2
MCCB
MC3
R/L1 U
S/L2 V IM
T/L3 W
∗4
Y65 Emergency drive in operation
∗3 ∗4
Emergency drive execution X84 ALM3 Fault output during emergency drive
SE
When connecting a DC power supply, insert a protective diode. When connecting an AC power supply, use the relay output option (FR-A8AR)
and use contact outputs.
The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection).
NOTE
• Always provide mechanical interlocks for MC2 and MC3.
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 239
(H) Protective function parameter
Frequency
Pr.524
Coasting
Motor rotations per minute
Time
Retry waiting time
Pr.514
Emergency drive in operation Normal operation
Y65
ON
• When the electronic bypass during emergency drive is activated (CS signal is turned ON) (when the switchover to the
commercial power supply during emergency drive is enabled)
Emergency drive continued
Power supply ON
X84 ON
3s
STF ON
CS ON ON
MC3
ON
MC2 ON
Pr.136 MC delay
MC3 ON
MC2
ON
MC delay
Frequency
Coasting
Motor rotations per minute
Time
Emergency drive commercial power supply operation
240 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 241
(H) Protective function parameter
NOTE
• During electronic bypass operation while the electronic bypass sequence is enabled (Pr.135 = "1"), the emergency drive
function is not available.
242 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
• While the "retry" (Pr.523 = "22[], 32[]") is selected in the PID control mode, if a retry occurs at an occurrence of E.CPU,
E.1 to E.3, E.5 to E.7 during emergency drive operation, the operation is performed not under PID control but with the
fixed frequency. Use Pr.1013 Emergency drive running speed after retry reset to set the fixed frequency.
NOTE
• For details of the PID control, refer to page 378.
PARAMETERS 243
(H) Protective function parameter
NOTE
• When the "retry" (Pr.523 = "2[][], 3[][]") is selected, it is recommended to use the automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure function at the same time.
• Parameter setting is not available during emergency drive operation.
• To return to the normal operation during emergency drive operation, do the following.
(The operation will not be returned to normal only by turning OFF the X84 signal.)
- Reset the inverter, or turn the power supply OFF.
- Clear a fault by turning ON the X51 signal while the sequence function is enabled (when the protective function is
activated).
• The operation is switched over to the commercial power supply operation in case of the following during emergency drive
operation.
24 V external power supply operation, power failure status or operation with the power supplied through R1/S1, undervoltage
• While the electronic bypass sequence is set or when the operation is performed with the power supplied through R1/S1,
when Pr.30 = "2", the emergency drive function is disabled.
Caution
When the emergency drive operation is performed, the operation is continued or the retry is
repeated even when a fault occurs, which may damage or burn the inverter and motor. Before
restarting the normal operation after using this function, make sure that the inverter and motor have
no fault. Any damage of the inverter or the motor caused by using the emergency drive function is
not covered by the warranty even within the free guarantee period.
244 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
Pr.1
Pr.18
0 5, 10V
Clamped at the (4mA) (20mA)
minimum frequency
NOTE
• To operate with a frequency higher than 60 Hz using frequency-setting analog signals, change the Pr.125 (Pr.126)
(frequency setting gain) setting. Simply changing the Pr.1 and Pr.18 settings does not enable operation at a frequency
higher than 60 Hz.
• During PM motor control, the upper and lower limits are for the commanded frequency.
• When Pr.15 Jog frequency setting is equal to or less than Pr.2 setting, the Pr.15 setting has precedence over the Pr.2
setting.
• If a jump frequency that exceeds Pr.1(Pr.18) Maximum frequency is set for the 3-point frequency jump, the maximum
frequency setting is the set frequency. If the set frequency is less than the jump frequency Pr.2 Minimum frequency, the
jump frequency is the set frequency. (The set frequency can be equal to or lower than the frequency lower limit.) When stall
5
prevention is activated to decrease the output frequency, the output frequency may drop to Pr.2 or below.
Caution
GROUP
Note that when Pr.2 is set to any value equal to or higher than Pr.13 Starting frequency, simply H
turning ON the start signal will run the motor at the frequency set in Pr.2 even if the command
frequency is not input.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequency page 197, page 198
Pr.15 Jog frequency page 221
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency page 314
PARAMETERS 245
(H) Protective function parameter
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
31
Frequency jump 1A
H420
32
Frequency jump 1B
H421
33
Frequency jump 2A 1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B are frequency jumps.
H422 0 to 590 Hz,
9999 (3-point jump)
34 9999
Frequency jump 2B 9999: Function disabled
H423
35
Frequency jump 3A
H424
36
Frequency jump 3B
H425
552 0 to3 (0 Hz) Set the jump range for the frequency jumps (6-point jump).
Frequency jump range 9999
H429 9999 3-point jump
Pr.34:35Hz
Set frequency after
Pr.35
Pr.33:30Hz
Pr.33
Pr.34 • [Example 2] To jump the frequency to 35 Hz in the range of 30 Hz
Pr.32 to 35 Hz, set 35 Hz in Pr.33 and 30 Hz in Pr.34.
Pr.31 Pr.33:35Hz
Pr.34:30Hz
Input set frequency (Hz)
246 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
Pr.36
Pr.35
Pr.32
Pr.552 Jump range
Pr.33 Pr.31
Jump range Pr.552
Pr.34
Pr.31 Pr.552
Jump range
Pr.552
NOTE
• During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is valid.
• If the setting ranges of individual groups (1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, 3A and 3B) overlap, write disable error (Er1) will occur.
• Setting Pr.552 = "0" disables frequency jumps.
• If a jump frequency that exceeds Pr.1(Pr.18) Maximum frequency is set for the 3-point jump, the maximum frequency
setting is the set frequency. If the set frequency is less than the jump frequency Pr.2 Minimum frequency, the jump
frequency is the set frequency. (The set frequency can be equal to or lower than the frequency lower limit.)
Example with 6-point frequency jump
Output frequency Output frequency
Pr.552 Pr.552
Maximum Minimum
frequency Pr.552 frequency Pr.552
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency, Pr.2 Minimum frequency page 245
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 247
(H) Protective function parameter
248 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
Output frequency
will be activated. Normally, use this parameter in the initial setting.
• Stall prevention operation stops acceleration (makes deceleration) during
ion
De
at
ce
ler
speed
at
Ac
ion
NOTE
• A continuous overloaded condition may activate a protective function such as motor overload trip (electronic thermal O/L
relay function) (E.THM).
• When Pr.156 has been set to activate the fast response current limit (initial value), the Pr.22 setting should not be higher than
140%. Such setting will prevent torque generation
• Under PM motor control, the stall prevention operation level is reduced inversely proportional to the output frequency in the
constant output range of the rated motor frequency or higher.
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 249
(H) Protective function parameter
Constant speed
current limit current limit
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration
Deceleration
setting continued setting continued
: enabled : enabled
: :
: disabled : disabled
operation operation
stopped stopped
0
16
(initial value)
1 17
2 18
3 19
4 20
5 21
6 22
7 23
8 24
9 25
10 26
11 27
12 28
13 29
14 30
15 ― 31 ―
Regenerative driving Power driving
100 101
― ―
When "operation stop at OL signal output" is selected, the fault output " " (stop due to stall prevention) is displayed, and operation
stops.
The OL signal and E.OLT are not outputted because fast-response current limit and stall prevention are not operating.
Setting values "100, 101" can be individually set for power driving and regenerative driving. The setting value "101" disables the fast-response
current limit during power driving.
NOTE
• When the load is heavy or the acceleration/deceleration time is short, stall prevention operates and acceleration/deceleration
may not be performed according to the time set. In such case, set the Pr.156 and the stall prevention operation level to the
optimum values.
• For lift applications, make settings to disable the fast-response current limit. Otherwise, the torque may be insufficient,
causing the load to drop.
250 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
Adjusting the stall prevention operation signal output and output timing
(OL signal, Pr.157)
• If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level and stall prevention is activated, Overload warning (OL)
signal will turn ON for 100 ms or more. The output signal turns OFF when the output current falls to the stall prevention
operation level or less.
• Pr.157 OL signal output timer can set whether to output the OL signal immediately, or to output it after a certain time
period.
• This function also operates during regeneration avoidance operation (overvoltage stall).
Overload state
(OL operation)
OL output signal
NOTE
• OL signal is assigned to the terminal OL in the initial status. The OL signal can be assigned to other terminals by setting "3
(positive logic) or 103 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection).
• If the stall prevention operation has lowered the output frequency to 0.5 Hz and kept the level for 3 s, the stall prevention stop
(E.OLT) is activated to shut off the inverter output.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
72
36
level (%)
24
level (%)
• When operating at the rated motor frequency or higher, acceleration may not be made because the motor current does not
increase. Also, when operating in the high-frequency range, the current flowing to the locked motor becomes less than the
5
rated output current of the inverter; and even if the motor is stopped, the protective function will not operate (OL).
In a case like this, the stall prevention level can be reduced in the high-frequency range to improve the motor's
operating characteristics. This is useful when operating up to the high speed range, such as when using a centrifuge.
Normally, set Pr.66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency to 60 Hz, and Pr.23 Stall prevention
operation level compensation factor at double speed to 100%.
GROUP
• Calculation formula for stall prevention operation level
H
Stall prevention operation level (%) Pr.22 -A Pr.23 -100
= A+B [ ] [ ]
in the high-frequency range Pr.22 -B 100
• When Pr.23 ="9999" (initial value), the stall prevention operation level is constant at the Pr.22 level up to 590 Hz.
PARAMETERS 251
(H) Protective function parameter
• By setting Pr.49 Second stall prevention operation frequency = "9999" and turning ON the RT signal, Pr.48 Second
stall prevention operation level will be enabled.
• For Pr.48, set the stall prevention operation level that is effective in the output frequency range between 0 Hz and Pr.49.
However, the operation level is Pr.22 during acceleration.
• Stop-on-contact operation can be used by decreasing the Pr.48 setting and loosening the reduction torque (torque when
stopped).
Output
Output frequency (Hz) Output
During acceleration frequency (Hz)
Output frequency
frequency Set frequency
Pr.49 Pr.49
Set frequency
NOTE
• When Pr.49 ≠ "9999" (level change according to frequency) and Pr.48 = "0%", the stall prevention function will be disabled at
or lower than the frequency set in Pr.49.
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 333.)
252 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
NOTE
• The fast-response current limit cannot be set.
• To change the stall prevention operation level with the analog signal under PM motor control, set C16 to C19 or C38 to C41
to calibrate terminal 1 or terminal 4. (Refer to page 320.)
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 253
(H) Protective function parameter
• When Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "0, 10", the output voltage is reduced. By
making this setting, an overcurrent trip becomes less likely to occur. Use this setting when torque reduction does not pose
a problem. (Under V/F control, the output voltage is reduced only during the stall prevention operation is activated.)
• Set Pr.154 = "10, 11" when the overvoltage protective function (E.OV[ ]) activates during stall prevention operation in an
application with large load inertia. Note that turning OFF the start signal (STF/STR) or varying the frequency command
during stall prevention operation may delay the acceleration/deceleration start.
Pr.154 E.OC[ ] countermeasure E.OV[ ] countermeasure
0 Effective ―
1 (initial value) ― ―
10 Effective Effective
11 ― Effective
Torque
1.5Hz
Time
Start signal
(STF)
3s
Fault signal
(ALM) E.OLT occurs
NOTE
• Under V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control, if the output frequency drops to 0.5 Hz due to the stall prevention
operation and this state continues for 3 s, a fault indication (E.OLT) appears, and the inverter output is shut off. This operation
is activated regardless of the Pr.874 setting.
Caution
Do not set the stall prevention operation current too low.
Doing so will reduce the generated torque.
Be sure to perform a test run.
Stall prevention operation during acceleration may extend the acceleration time.
Stall prevention operation during constant-speed operation may cause sudden speed changes.
Stall prevention operation during deceleration may extend the deceleration time.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.73 Analog input selection page 306
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment page 310
254 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 255
(H) Protective function parameter
f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 Output frequency
(Pr.1487) (Pr.1486)
• Setting Pr.1480 Load characteristics measurement mode = "1" enables automatic measurement of the load
characteristics reference. (Load characteristics measurement mode)
• Use Pr.1486 and Pr.1487 to set the frequency band for the measurement, and set Pr.1480 = "1". When the inverter is
started after the setting, the measurement is started.
• The automatically measured load characteristics reference is written in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485.
• After the measurement is started, read Pr.1480 to display the status of the measurement. If "8" appears in the tens place,
the measurement has not properly completed.
Read value of
Pr.1480
Status
Tens Ones
place place
─ 1 During measurement from the starting point to Point 1
─ 2 During measurement from Point 1 to Point 2
─ 3 During measurement from Point 2 to Point 3
─ 4 During measurement from Point 3 to Point 4
─ 5 During measurement from Point 4 to Point 5
─ 0 Normal completion
Termination of measurement by an activation of a protective function, inverter
reset, turning ON of MRS signal, turning OFF of the start command, or timeout.
8 1 to 5
(The value in the ones place represents the above-mentioned measurement
point.)
• During automatic measurement, During load characteristics measurement signal (Y213) is output. For the Y213 signal,
assign the function by setting "213 (forward action)" or "313 (reverse action)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal
function selection).
• Setting "8888" in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 enables fine adjustment of load characteristics. When setting Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 =
"8888" during operation, the load status at that point is set in the parameter. (Only when the set frequency is within ±2 Hz
of the frequency of the measurement point, and SU signal is in the ON state)
256 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
Frequency(Hz)
Load reference 5 recorded
f5(Pr.1486) Pr.41
Load reference 4 recorded
f4 Pr.41
Load reference 3 recorded
f3 Pr.41
Load reference 2 recorded
f2 Pr.41 Operation at the
Load reference set frequency
1 recorded
f1(Pr.1487) Pr.41
STF=ON
Pr.1480=1 Time
Measurement start
Pr.1492 Pr.1492 Pr.1492 Pr.1492 Pr.1492
NOTE
• Even if the load measurement is not properly completed, the load characteristics fault is detected based on the load
characteristics found by the already-completed portion of the measurement.
• During the load characteristics measurement, the load characteristics fault detection is not performed.
• During the load characteristics measurement, linear acceleration/deceleration is performed even if the S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration is set.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Pr.1492
LUP ON
LDN ON ON
E.LDN Output shutoff
LDF warning indication ON ON ON
PARAMETERS 257
(H) Protective function parameter
NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Setting example
• The load characteristics are calculated from the parameter setting and the output frequency.
• A setting example is shown below. The reference value is linearly interpolated from the parameter settings. For example,
the reference when the output frequency is 30 Hz is 26%, which is linearly interpolated from values of the reference 2 and
the reference 3.
Reference Frequency Load reference
Load characteristics
f1: load characteristics minimum frequency (Pr.1487) = 10 Hz Pr.1481 = 15%
reference 1
Load characteristics
f2 = (f5 - f1)/4 + f1 = 22.5 Hz Pr.1482 = 20%
reference 2
Load characteristics
f3 = (f5 - f1)/2 + f1 = 35 Hz Pr.1483 = 30%
reference 3
Load characteristics
f4 = (f5 - f1)×3/4 + f1 = 47.5 Hz Pr.1484 = 60%
reference 4
Load characteristics
f5: load characteristics maximum frequency (Pr.1486) = 60 Hz Pr.1485 = 100%
reference 5
Load(%)
120
100
80
60
40
26
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Frequency(Hz)
NOTE
• When the load reference is not set for five points, the load characteristics value is determined by linear interpolation of the set
load reference values only. If there is only one load reference setting, the set load reference is used as the load reference all
through the range.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity page 294
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
258 PARAMETERS
(H) Protective function parameter
The Overspeed occurrence (E.OS) is activated when the motor speed exceeds the overspeed detection level. This
function prevents the motor from accidentally speeding over the specified value, due to an error in parameter setting,
etc.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
If the motor rotation speed exceeds the speed set in Pr.374
0 to 590 Hz during PM motor control, Overspeed occurrence (E.OS)
374 Overspeed detection occurs, and the inverter output is shut off.
9999
H800 level
During PM motor control, E.OS occurs when the speed
9999
exceeds the "maximum motor frequency + 10 Hz".
The maximum motor frequency is set in Pr.702 Maximum motor frequency. When Pr.702 = "9999 (initial value)", the Pr.84 Rated motor
frequency setting is applied as the maximum motor frequency.
Motor speed
Pr.374
Coast to stop
Time
ALM ON
E.OS
GROUP
H
PARAMETERS 259
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
260 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
37 0 Frequency display and setting
Speed display 0
M000 1 to 9998 Set the machine speed for Pr.505.
505 Speed setting
60 Hz 50 Hz 1 to 590 Hz Set the reference speed for Pr.37.
M001 reference
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
144 Speed setting Set the number of motor poles when displaying the
4 102, 104, 106, 108,
M002 switchover 110, 112
motor speed.
The maximum value of the setting range differs according to the Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.505 Speed setting reference, and it can be
calculated from the following formula.
The maximum value of Pr.37 < 65535 Pr.505 / Pr.1 setting value (Hz).
The maximum setting value of Pr.37 is 9998 if the result of the above formula exceeds 9998.
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 261
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
NOTE
• The inverter's output frequency is displayed as synchronous speed under V/F control. The displayed value is "actual motor
speed" + "motor slip." When Advanced magnetic flux vector control or PM motor control is selected, the actual motor speed
(estimated value by motor slip calculation) is used.
• When Pr.37 = "0" and Pr.144 = "0", the running speed monitor is displayed with the number of motor poles 4. (Displays 1800
r/min at 60 Hz)
• To change the PU main monitor (PU main display), refer to Pr.52.
• When using the machine speed display for the parameter unit (FR-PU07), do not change the speed with the up/down key if a
set speed above 65535 is being displayed. The set speed may become an undetermined value.
• When the FR-A8ND is connected, the frequency display (setting) will be used regardless of the Pr.37, Pr.144 settings.
Caution
Make sure to set the running speed and the number of motor poles.
Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency page 245
Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection page 263
Pr.81 Number of motor poles page 143
Pr.800 Control method selection page 143
262 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
PARAMETERS 263
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
RS-485
Modbus-
Pr.52, communication
Types of RTU real Minus (-)
Unit Pr.774 to Pr.776, dedicated Description
monitor time display
Pr.992 monitor
monitor
(hexadecimal)
Output frequency/ 0.01 Hz/1 Displays the inverter output
1/0/100 H01 40201
speed frequency.
Output current 0.01 A/ Displays the inverter output current
2/0/100 H02 40202
0.1 A effective value.
Output voltage 0.1 V 3/0/100 H03 40203 Displays the inverter output voltage.
Fault display — 0/100 — — Displays 8 past faults individually.
Frequency setting 0.01 Hz/1
5 H05 40205 Displays the set frequency
value/speed setting
Displays the motor speed (by the
Running speed 1 (r/min) 6 H06 40206 Pr.37, Pr.144 settings). (Refer to
page 261)
Displays motor torque as a
percentage (0% under V/F control),
Motor torque 0.1% 7 H07 40207
considering the rated torque as
100%.
Converter output
0.1 V 8 H08 40208 Displays the DC bus voltage value.
voltage
For manufacturer setteing. Do not
— — 9 H09 40209
set.
Electronic thermal Displays the motor thermal
O/L relay load 0.1% 10 H0A 40210 cumulative value, considering the
factor thermal operation level as 100%.
Saves and displays the output current
Output current peak 0.01 A/
11 H0B 40211 monitor peak value.
value 0.1 A
(Cleared with each start.)
Converter output Saves and displays the DC bus
voltage peak 0.1 V 12 H0C 40212 voltage peak value.
value (Cleared with each start.)
0.01 kW/ Displays the power at the inverter
Input power 13 H0D 40213
0.1 kW input side.
0.01 kW/ Displays the power at the inverter
Output power 14 H0E 40214
0.1 kW output side.
Displays torque current as a
Load meter 0.1% 17 H11 40217 percentage, considering Pr.56 setting
value as 100%.
Motor excitation 0.01 A/
18 H12 40218 Displays the motor excitation current
current 0.1 A
Displays the cumulative energization
Cumulative time since the inverter shipment.
1h 20 H14 40220
energization time Check how many times the monitor
value exceeded 65535 h with Pr.563.
Displays the cumulative time since
the inverter began running.
The number of times the monitor
Actual operation
1h 23 H17 40223 value exceeded 65535 h can be
time
checked with Pr.564
This can be cleared with Pr.171.
(Refer to page 271)
Displays the output current value as a
percentage, considering the inverter
rated current value as 100%.
Motor load factor 0.1% 24 H18 40224
Monitor value = output current
monitor value / inverter rated current
100 [%]
264 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
RS-485
Modbus-
Pr.52, communication
Types of RTU real Minus (-)
Unit Pr.774 to Pr.776, dedicated Description
monitor time display
Pr.992 monitor
monitor
(hexadecimal)
Displays the cumulative energy
0.01 kWh/
based on the output power monitor.
Cumulative power 0.1 kWh 25 H19 40225
This can be cleared with Pr.170.
(Refer to page 271.)
Multiplies the output torque at that
0.01 kW/ time with the motor speed, and
Motor output 34 H22 40234
0.1 kW displays the machine output for the
motor shaft end.
Displays the trace status. (Refer to
Trace status 1 38 H26 40238
page 433)
PLC function user Displays the arbitrary monitoring item
40 H28 40240
monitor 1 using the PLC function.
PLC function user Displays the following special register
According 41 H29 40241
monitor 2 values.
to the
SD1216: Displays in No.40
SD1215
SD1217: Displays in No.41
PLC function user setting
42 H2A 40242 SD1218: Displays in No.42
monitor 3 (Refer to the PLC Function
Programming Manual.)
Displays which station number (0 to
Station number 31) can currently be used for
1 43 H2B 40243
(RS-485 terminals) communication from the RS-485
terminal block.
Displays which station number (0 to
Station number 31) can currently be used for
1 44 H2C 40244
(PU) communication from the PU
connector.
Displays which station number (0 to
31) can currently be used for CC-Link
Station number
1 45 H2D 40245 communication.
(CC-Link)
Displays "0" when the FR-A8NC is
not connected.
Energy saving Displays the energy saving effect
50 H32 40250
effect monitor.
Changeab
Conversion to power saving, average
le by
power saving, price display, and
Cumulative energy parameter
51 H33 40251 percentage display can be done
saving setting.
using parameters.
(Refer to page 283.)
PID set point 0.1% 52 H34 40252 Displays the set point, measured
PID measured value, and deviation under PID
0.1% 53 H35 40253
value control.
PID deviation 0.1% 54 H36 40254 (Refer to page 389)
Displays input terminal ON/OFF state
Input terminal
— H0F 40215 of the inverter. (Refer to page 270 for
status
DU display.)
55
Displays output terminal ON/OFF
Output terminal
status
— H10 40216 state of the inverter. (Refer to page
270 for DU display.) 5
Displays input terminal ON/OFF state
Option input of the digital input option (FR-A8AX)
— 56 — — —
terminal status on the DU. (Refer to page 270 for
details.)
Displays output terminal ON/OFF
state of the digital output option (FR- GROUP
Option output M
— 57 — — — A8AY) and the relay output option
terminal status
(FR-A8AR) on the DU. (Refer to page
270 for details.)
Input terminal X0 to X15 ON/OFF
Option input
state of the digital input option (FR-
terminal status 1
— — H3A 40258 A8AX) can be monitored via RS-485
(for
communication and the
communication)
communication option.
PARAMETERS 265
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
RS-485
Modbus-
Pr.52, communication
Types of RTU real Minus (-)
Unit Pr.774 to Pr.776, dedicated Description
monitor time display
Pr.992 monitor
monitor
(hexadecimal)
Input terminal DY ON/OFF state of
Option input
the digital input option (FR-A8AX) can
terminal status 2
— — H3B 40259 be monitored via RS-485
(for
communication and the
communication)
communication option.
Output terminal ON/OFF state of the
Option output
digital output option (FR-A8AY) and
terminal status 1
— — H3C 40260 relay output option (FR-A8AR) can be
(for
monitored via RS-485 communication
communication)
and the communication option.
Displays the accumulated heat value
Motor thermal load of the motor thermal O/L relay.
0.1% 61 H3D 40261
factor The motor overload trip (E.THM)
occurs at 100%.
Displays the accumulated heat value
Inverter thermal of the inverter thermal O/L relay.
0.1% 62 H3E 40262
load factor The inverter overload trip (E.THT)
occurs at 100%.
Displays the PTC thermistor
resistance when Pr.561 PTC
PTC thermistor
0.01 kΩ 64 H40 40264 thermistor protection level ≠ 9999
resistance
(voltage monitor when Pr.561 =
9999).
Displays the PID control measured
PID measured value even when PID control is
0.1% 67 H43 40267
value 2 disabled.
(Refer to page 389)
Emergency drive Displays the emergency drive status
1 68 H44 40268
status (Refer to page 238)
32-bit cumulative
power (lower 16 1 kWh — H4D 40277
bits) Displays the 32-bit cumulative power
32-bit cumulative value in multiplies of 16 bits.
Monitoring can be performed via RS-
power (upper 16 1 kWh — H4E 40278
485 communication and
bits)
communication options. (To find the
32-bit cumulative monitor codes for each
0.01 kWh/
power (lower 16 — H4F 40279
0.1 kWh communication option, refer to the
bits)
Instruction Manual of each
32-bit cumulative communication option.)
0.01 kWh/
power (upper 16 — H50 40280
0.1 kWh
bits)
BACnet reception Displays the BACnet reception
1 81 H51 40281
status status.
BACnet token pass
1 82 H52 40282 Displays the count of received token.
counter
BACnet valid APDU Displays the count of valid APDU
1 83 H53 40283
counter detection.
BACnet
Displays the count of communication
communication 1 84 H54 40284
error detection.
error counter
Displays the value set in the Analog
BACnet terminal
0.1% 85 H55 40285 Output object (ID=0: Terminal FM/CA)
FM/CA output level
for BACnet communication.
Displays the value set in the Analog
Output object (ID=1: Terminal AM) for
BACnet terminal
0.1% 86 H56 40286 BACnet communication. (A display
AM output level
without signs displays negative
values as absolute values.)
266 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
RS-485
Modbus-
Pr.52, communication
Types of RTU real Minus (-)
Unit Pr.774 to Pr.776, dedicated Description
monitor time display
Pr.992 monitor
monitor
(hexadecimal)
Remote output
0.1% 87 H57 40287
value 1
Remote output
0.1% 88 H58 40288 Displays the setting values of Pr.656
value 2
to Pr.659 (analog remote output).
Remote output
0.1% 89 H59 40289 (Refer to page 300.)
value 3
Remote output
0.1% 90 H5A 40290
value 4
Displays the PID control manipulated
PID manipulated
0.1% 91 H5B 40291 amount.
variable
(Refer to page 389)
Second PID set
0.1% 92 H5C 40292
point
Displays the set point, measured
Second PID
0.1% 93 H5D 40293 value, and deviation under second
measured value
PID control. (Refer to page 389)
Second PID
0.1% 94 H5E 40294
deviation
Displays the second PID control
Second PID measured value even when the
0.1% 95 H5F 40295
measured value 2 second PID control is disabled.(Refer
to page 389)
Second PID Displays the second PID control
manipulated 0.1% 96 H60 40296 manipulated amount.
variable (Refer to page 389)
Displays the temperature of the
Control circuit control circuit board.
1°C 98 H62 40298
temperature Without minus sign: 0 to 100°C
With minus sign: -20 to 100°C
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 267
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
When using the item as the main monitor data on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07), use Pr.774 to Pr.776 or
the monitor function of the FR-LU08 or the FR-PU07 for setting.
The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from
0.
The actual operation time does not increase if the cumulative running time before power OFF is less than an hour.
When using the parameter unit (FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed.
Differs according to capacities. (FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower, FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower /FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher, FR-F840-
01800(75K) or higher)
Since the voltage and current display on the operation panel (FR-DU08) is shown in four digits, a monitor value of more than "9999" is displayed
as "----".
The setting is available only for standard models.
When the output current is less than the specified current level (5% of the rated inverter current), the output current is monitored as 0 A.
Therefore, the monitored value of an output current and output power may be displayed as "0" when using a much smaller-capacity motor
compared to the inverter or in other instances that cause the output current to fall below the specified value.
Available when the plug-in option is connected.
Input terminal monitor details ("1" denotes terminal ON, "0" denotes terminal OFF, and "―" denotes undetermined value.)
b15 b0
STP
― ― ― ― CS RES MRS JOG RH RM RL RT AU STR STF
(STOP)
Output terminal monitor details ("1" denotes terminal ON, "0" denotes terminal OFF, and "―" denotes undetermined value.)
b15 b0
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― SO ABC2 ABC1 FU OL IPF SU RUN
Option input terminal monitor 1 details (FR-A8AX input terminal status, "1" denotes terminal ON and "0" denotes terminal OFF.) ―― All are OFF
when the option is not connected.
b15 b0
X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
Option input terminal monitor 2 details (FR-A8AX input terminal status. "1" denotes terminal ON, "0" denotes terminal OFF, "―" denotes
undetermined value.) ―― All are OFF when the option is not connected.
b15 b0
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― DY
Option output terminal monitor details (FR-A8AY/A8AR output terminal status. "1" denotes terminal ON, "0" denotes terminal OFF, and "―" denotes
undetermined value.)―― All are OFF when the option is not connected.
b15 b0
― ― ― ― ― ― RA3 RA2 RA1 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
The increment is 1 when Pr.37 = "1 to 9998" or when Pr.144 = "2 to 12" or "102 to 112". (Refer to page 261.)
The monitored values are retained even if an inverter fault occurs. Resetting will clear the retained values.
Parameter setting is not available for setting the item as the main monitor data on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-
PU07). Use the monitor function of the FR-LU08 or the FR-PU07 for setting.
268 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
the monitor that will be the first monitor, and continue pressing for 1 s. (To return to the output frequency monitor,
• For example, when Pr.52 = "20" (cumulative energization time), the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as shown
below.
• Power-on monitor (first monitor) • Second monitor • Third monitor • Fault monitor
With fault
Output frequency monitor Output current monitor Cumulative energization time monitor
• Pr.774 sets the output frequency monitor, Pr.775 sets the output current monitor, and Pr.776 sets the monitor
description to be displayed at the output voltage monitor position. When Pr.774 to Pr.776 = "9999" (initial value), the Pr.52
setting value is used.
NOTE
• On the operation panel (FR-DU08), the "Hz" unit indicator is lit while displaying the output frequency, the "Hz" flickers when
displaying the set frequency.
Fault or alarm
Pr.52 setting Status Output frequency Output current Output voltage
indication
0 During running/stop Output frequency
Fault or alarm
During stop Set frequency Output current Output voltage
100 indication
Running Output frequency
Displays the frequency that is output when the start command is ON. The value considers the maximum/minimum frequency and frequency
jumps. It is different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr.52 = "5".
5
NOTE
• During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence appears.
• During output shutoff by the MRS signal, the values displayed are the same as during a stop.
• During offline auto tuning, the tuning state monitor takes priority.
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 269
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
• On the I/O terminal monitor (Pr.52 = "55"), the upper LEDs denote the input terminal state, and the lower LEDs denote the
output terminal state.
STP (STOP) Input terminal
AU RES STF JOG
RM RH CS
RT MRS STR - Display example -
RL
When signals STF,
RH and RUN are on
Center line is always ON
A
ABC1 RUN OL
SU FU
ABC2 IPF SO
Output terminal
• The decimal point of the first digit on the LED will light for the input option terminal monitor (Pr.52 = "56").
X1 X2 X4 X5 X7 X8
X0 X3 X6 X9
RA1 RA2RA3
FR-A8AR
Decimal point LED of second digit LED is always ON
270 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
• The monitor data digit can be shifted to the right by the number of Pr.891.
For example, if the cumulative power value is 1278.56 kWh when Pr.891 = "2", the operation panel display is 12.78
(display in 100 kWh increments) and the communication data is 12.
• If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr.891 = "0 to 4", the monitor value is clamped at the maximum value, indicating that
a digit shift is necessary. If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr.891 = "9999", the monitor value returns to 0, and the
counting starts again.
• Writing "0" in Pr.170 clears the cumulative power monitor.
NOTE
• If "0" is written to Pr.170, and Pr.170 is read again, "9999" or "10" is displayed.
NOTE
• The cumulative energization time does not increase if the power is turned OFF after less than an hour.
• The actual operation time does not increase if the cumulative running time before power OFF is less than an hour.
• If "0" is written to Pr.171 and Pr.171 is read again, "9999" is always displayed.Setting "9999" does not clear the actual
operation time meter.
PARAMETERS 271
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
NOTE
• The number of display digits on the cumulative energization time (Pr.52 = "20"), actual operation time (Pr.52 = "23"),
cumulative power (Pr.52 = "25") and cumulative energy saving (Pr.52 = "51") does not change.
Monitoring via
Pr.290 setting Terminal AM output Operation panel display
communication
0 (initial value) ― ― ―
1 Output with a minus sign ― ―
2 ― Displayed with minus sign. ―
3 Output with a minus sign Displayed with minus sign. ―
4 ― ― Displayed with minus sign.
5 Output with a minus sign ― Displayed with minus sign.
6 ― Displayed with minus sign. Displayed with minus sign.
7 Output with a minus sign Displayed with minus sign. Displayed with minus sign.
―: Output without minus sign
(positive values only)
NOTE
• When terminal AM (analog voltage output) is "output with a minus sign", the output will be within the -10V DC to +10V DC
range. Connect the meter with which output level is matched.
• Parameter unit (FR-PU07) displays only positive values.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection page 508
Pr.37 motor speed display, Pr.144 Speed setting switchover page 261
Pr.55 Frequency monitoring reference, Pr.56 Current monitoring reference, Pr.866 Torque monitoring reference page 273
272 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18,
21, 24, 34, 50, 52, 53,
54 FM/CA terminal function Select the monitored item to be output to
61, 62, 67, 70, 85,
M300 selection 87 to 90, 92, 93, 95,
the terminal FM and terminal CA.
1
(output 98
frequency) 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18,
158 AM terminal function 21, 24, 34, 50, Select the monitored item to be output to
M301 selection 52 to 54, 61, 62, 67, the terminal AM.
70, 86 to 96, 98
Set the full-scale value when outputting
55 Frequency monitoring
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz the frequency monitor value to terminals
M040 reference FM, CA and AM.
0 to 500 A Set the full-scale value when outputting
56 Inverter
Current monitoring reference the output current monitor value to
M041 Rated current 0 to 3600 A
terminals FM, CA and AM.
Set the full-scale value when outputting
866
Torque monitoring reference 150% 0 to 400% the torque monitor value to terminals FM,
M042 CA and AM.
Set the availability of output with a minus
290 Monitor negative output sign for the terminal AM, the operation
0 0 to 7
M044 selection panel display, or monitoring via
communication. (Refer to page 272)
Pulse train Pulse train
input output
(terminal JOG) (terminal FM)
0 JOG signal FM output
1 Pulse train input FM output
High-speed pulse
10 JOG signal train output
(50% duty)
High-speed pulse
11 Pulse train input train output
291 (50% duty)
Pulse train I/O selection 0
D100 High-speed pulse
20 JOG signal train output
(ON width fixed)
High-speed pulse
21 Pulse train input train output
(ON width fixed)
High-speed pulse
train output
5
(ON width fixed)
100 Pulse train input
Output the pulse
train input without
changes.
FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower and FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower.
FR-F820-03160(75K) or more, FR-F840-01800(75K) or more. GROUP
PARAMETERS 273
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Pr.54 (FM/CA)
Terminal FM, CA, AM Negative
Types of monitor Unit Pr.158 (AM) REMARKS
Full-scale value (-) output
setting
Output frequency 0.01 Hz 1 Pr.55
Output current 0.01 A/0.1 A 2 Pr.56
200 V class: 400 V
Output voltage 0.1 V 3
400 V class: 800 V
Frequency setting value 0.01 Hz 5 Pr.55
Value is Pr.55 converted
Refer to page 261 for the
Running speed 1 (r/min) 6 by Pr.37, Pr.144. (Refer
running speed monitor.
to page 261.)
Motor torque 0.1% 7 Pr.866
200 V class: 400 V
Converter output voltage 0.1 V 8
400 V class: 800 V
For manufacturer setting. Do
— — 9 —
not set.
Electronic thermal O/L
Electronic thermal O/L
0.1% 10 relay operation level
relay load factor
(100%)
Output current peak value 0.01 A/0.1 A 11 Pr.56
Converter output voltage 200 V class: 400 V
0.1 V 12
peak value 400 V class: 800 V
0.01 kW/
Input power 13 Rated inverter power 2
0.1 kW
0.01 kW/
Output power 14 Rated inverter power 2
0.1 kW
Load meter 0.1% 17 Pr.866
Motor excitation current 0.0 1 A/0.1 A 18 Pr.56
Terminal FM:
1440 pulses/s is output when
Pr.291 = 0,1.
Reference voltage output — 21 — 50k pulses/s is output when
Pr.291 ≠ 0,1.
Terminal CA: output is 20 mA
Terminal AM: output is 10 V.
Motor load factor 0.1% 24 200%
0.01 kW/
Motor output 34 Rated motor capacity
0.1 kW
Changeable by
Regarding the energy saving
Energy saving effect parameter 50 Inverter capacity
monitor, refer to page 283
setting
PID set point 0.1% 52 100% Refer to page 389 for the PID
PID measured value 0.1% 53 100% control.
Output with a negative sign
PID deviation 0.1% 54 100%
(terminal AM)
Motor thermal
Motor thermal load factor 0.1% 61
operation level (100%)
Inverter thermal load Inverter thermal
0.1% 62
factor operation level (100%)
PID measured value 2 0.1% 67 100%
PLC function analog Refer to page 431 for the
0.1% 70 100%
output PLC function.
274 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Pr.54 (FM/CA)
Terminal FM, CA, AM Negative
Types of monitor Unit Pr.158 (AM) REMARKS
Full-scale value (-) output
setting
The value set in the Analog
BACnet terminal FM/CA Output object (ID=0: Terminal
0.1% 85 100%
output level FM/CA) for BACnet
communication is output.
The value set in the Analog
Output object (ID=1: Terminal
AM) for BACnet
BACnet terminal AM communication is output.
0.1% 86 100%
output level (The output is always
negative regardless of the
Pr.290 setting when the
monitored value is negative.)
Remote output value 1 0.1% 87 1000%
Remote output value 2 0.1% 88 1000% Refer to page 300 for the
Remote output value 3 0.1% 89 1000% analog remote output.
Remote output value 4 0.1% 90 1000%
Output with a minus sign
PID manipulated variable 0.1% 91 100%
(terminal AM)
Second PID set point 0.1% 92 100%
Second PID measured
0.1% 93 100%
value
Second PID deviation 0.1% 94 200% Refer to page 389 for the PID
Second PID measured control.
0.1% 95 100%
value 2
Second PID manipulated
0.1% 96 100%
variable
Terminal FM/CA: 0 to 100°C
Control circuit temperature 1°C 98 100°C
terminal AM: -20 to 100°C
Differs according to capacities. (FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower, FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower /FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher, FR-F840-
01800(75K) or higher)
When the output current is less than the specified current level (5% of the rated inverter current), the output current is monitored as 0 A.
Therefore, the monitored value of an output current and output power may be displayed as "0" when using a much smaller-capacity motor
compared to the inverter or in other instances that cause the output current to fall below the specified value.
The setting is available only with terminal AM (Pr.158).
The setting is available only with terminal FM/CA (Pr.54).
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 275
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Output voltage • For the calibration of terminal AM, set the full-scale value of
the connected meter when output voltage of terminal FM is
10VDC
10 VDC. Set the frequency to be indicated as the full scale
value on the meter (10 VDC voltmeter) connected between
terminal AM and 5. (For example, 60 Hz or 120 Hz) Output
60Hz voltage is proportional to the frequency. (The maximum
60Hz ∗1 120Hz
(initial value) output voltage is 10 VDC.)
∗2
Setting range of Pr.55 FM type: 60 Hz; CA type: 50 Hz
-10VDC Output with a negative sign available when Pr.290 Monitor
negative output selection = "1, 3"
276 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
FM output circuit • When Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "0 (initial value) or 1", this is FM
Inverter
output with a maximum output of 8 VDC and 2400 pulses/s.
The pulse width can be adjusted by using the operation panel or the
24V
parameter unit and calibration parameter C0(Pr.900) FM/CA terminal
calibration.
2.2K 3.3K FM • Commands can be sent (such as inverter output frequency) by connecting
20K SD a 1 mA full-scale DC ammeter or a digital meter.
Indicator
1mA full-scale (Digital indicator)
analog meter
1mA 1440 pulses/s(+) (-)
FM FM
(+) (-) T1
Calibration
resistor ∗1 8VDC
SD SD
T2
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55 (frequency monitor)
Set with Pr.56 (current monitor)
Not needed when the operation panel or the parameter unit is used for calibration.
Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter) needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located
far from the inverter.
5
However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, calibrate additionally with
the operation panel or the parameter unit.
In the initial setting, 1 mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM are used at 60 Hz.
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 277
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
High-speed pulse train output circuit • When Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "10, 11, 20, 21, 100", this
(example of connection to pulse counter) is high-speed pulse train output for open collector output. A
Pulse counter maximum pulse train of 55k pulses/s is outputted.
Pull up resistance ∗3 There are two types of pulse width: "50% duty" and "fixed ON
Inverter width"; this cannot be adjusted with the calibration parameter C0
FM (Pr.900) FM/CA terminal calibration.
The pulses may weaken due to stray capacitance in the wiring if the
wiring is long, and the pulse counter will be unable to recognize the
pulses. Connect the open collector output to the power source with a
SD pull-up resistor if the wiring is too long.
Check the pulse counter specs for the pull-up resistance. The resistance
should be at 80 mA of the load current or less.
Pulse of Pr.291 = "10, 11" • When Pr.291 = "10, 11", the pulse cycle is 50% duty (ON width and
50%duty 50%duty
OFF width are the same).
• When Pr.291 = "20, 21, 100", the pulse ON width is output at a fixed
width (approx. 10 μs).
Hi ∗4 Low
• At the "100" setting, the same pulse train from the pulse train input
Pulse of Pr.291 = "20, 21, 100"
(terminal JOG) will be outputted. This is used when running at a
Approx. 10μs Approx. 10μs
synchronized speed with more than one inverter. (Refer to page
218.)
Hi ∗4 Low "HIGH" indicates when the open collector output transistor is OFF.
NOTE
• Terminal JOG input specifications (pulse train input or contact input) can be selected with Pr.291. When changing the setting
value, be careful not to change the terminal JOG input specifications. (Refer to page 218 for pulse train input.)
• Connect a meter between the terminals FM and SD after changing the Pr.291 setting value. When using the pulse train of FM
output (voltage output), be careful that voltage is not added to terminal FM.
• A connection cannot be made to the pulse input of a source logic type.
• If all parameter clear is performed when selecting the high-speed pulse FM output circuit
train output (Pr.291 = "10, 11, 20, 21, 100"), the terminal FM output can
be changed from high-speed pulse train output to FM output (voltage 3.3kΩ Pr.291
output), since the Pr.291 setting value returns to the initial value of "0". 0, 1 Terminal FM
Perform all parameter clear after removing the device connected to the 8.2V
terminal FM.
10, 11,
20, 21, 100
278 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Calibration
resistor ∗1 8VDC
SD SD
T2
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55 (frequency monitor)
Set with Pr.56 (current monitor)
Not needed when the operation panel or the parameter unit is used for calibration.
Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter) needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located
far from the inverter.
However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected.In this case, perform calibration using 5
the operation panel or the parameter unit.
In the initial setting, 1 mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM are used at 60 Hz.
• Calibrate the terminal FM in the following procedure.
1) Connect an indicator (frequency meter) across terminals FM and SD of the inverter. (Note the polarity. The terminal FM
is positive.)
GROUP
2) When a calibration resistor has already been connected, adjust the resistance to "0" or remove the resistor.
M
3) Refer to the monitored item list (page 264) and set Pr.54.
When the running frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor, set the running frequency or current
value at which the output signal will be 1440 pulses/s, using Pr.55 Frequency monitoring reference or Pr.56 Current
monitoring reference beforehand. Normally, at 1440 pulses/s the meter deflects to full-scale.
4) If the meter needle does not point to maximum even at maximum output., calibrate it with C0(Pr.900).
PARAMETERS 279
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
NOTE
• When outputting such an item as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr.54 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and calibrate. 1440 pulses/s are output from the terminal FM.
• When Pr.310 Analog meter voltage output selection = "21", the terminal FM calibration cannot be performed. For the
details of Pr.310, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-A8AY.
• The wiring length of the terminal FM should be 200 m at maximum.
• The initial value of the calibration parameter C0(Pr.900) is set to 1 mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM pulse train
output at 60 Hz. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400 pulses/s.
• When connecting a frequency meter between terminals FM-SD and monitoring the running frequency, it is necessary to
change Pr.55 to the maximum frequency, since the FM terminal output will be saturated at the initial value when the
maximum frequency reaches 100 Hz or greater.
• Calibration with the calibration parameter C0(Pr.900) cannot be done when Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "10, 11, 20, 21,
100" (high-speed pulse train output).
Turn until (C0(Pr.900) FM/CA terminal calibration) appears. Press to enable the parameter
5.
setting. The monitored value of the item (initially the output frequency) selected by Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function
selection will appear.
Pulse output via terminal FM
6. If stopped, press or to start the inverter operation. (To monitor the output frequency, motor connection is not
required.
Calibration is also possible in a stop status.
Scale adjustment
7.
Turn to move the meter needle to a desired position.
Setting completed
Press to enter the setting. The monitored value and flicker alternately.
NOTE
• Calibration can also be made for the External operation.Set the frequency in the External operation mode, and make
calibration in the above procedure.
• Calibration can be performed during operation.
• For the operation from the parameter unit, refer to the Instruction Manual of the parameter unit.
280 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
NOTE
• When outputting such an item as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr.54 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and calibrate.20 mADC is output from the terminal CA.
• When Pr.310 Analog meter voltage output selection = "21", the terminal CA calibration cannot be performed. For the
details of Pr.310, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-A8AY.
• Output is possible from terminal CA even if C8 (Pr.930) ≥ C10 (Pr.931), C9 (Pr.930) ≥ C11 (Pr.931).
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 281
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
NOTE
• When outputting such an item as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr.158 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and calibrate.10 VDC is output from the terminal AM.
• When Pr.306 Analog output signal selection = "21", the terminal AM calibration cannot be performed. For the details of
Pr.306, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-A8AY.
• Use Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection to enable negative output from the terminal AM. When this is set, the output
voltage range will be -10 VDC to +10 VDC. Calibrate the terminal AM with the maximum positive output value.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection page 273
Pr.55 Frequency monitoring reference page 273
Pr.56 Current monitoring reference page 273
Pr.158 AM terminal function selection page 273
Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection page 273
Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection page 218
282 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
PARAMETERS 283
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
284 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
NOTE
• The operation panel and the parameter unit has a 5-digit display. This means, for example, that when a monitor value in 0.01
units exceeds "999.99", the decimal place is moved up as in "1000.0" and the display changes to 0.1 units. The maximum
display number is "99999".
• The maximum value for communication (RS-485 communication, communication option) when Pr.898 Power saving
cumulative monitor clear = "9999" is "65535". The maximum value for the 0.01-unit monitor is "655.35", and the maximum
value for the 0.1-unit monitor is "6553.5".
Power saving real-time monitor ([1 Power saving] and [2 Power saving
rate])
• On the [1 Power saving monitor], an energy saving effect as compared to the consumed power during commercial power
supply operation (estimated value) is calculated and displays on the main monitor.
• In the following cases, the [1 Power saving monitor] indicates "0".
- Calculated values of the power saving monitor are negative values.
- During DC injection brake operation.
- The motor is not connected (output current monitor is 0A).
• On the [2 Power saving rate monitor], the power saving rate considering the consumed power during the power supply
operation (estimated value) as 100% is displayed. Pr.895 Power saving rate reference value needs to be set to "0".
Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity)
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 285
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
NOTE
• The power saving cumulative monitor value is saved every hour. This means that if the power is turned OFF after less than
an hour, when then the power is turned ON again, the previously saved monitor value is displayed, and accumulation starts.
(In some cases, the cumulative monitor value may go down.)
80
Valve control
70 (pump)
60
50
40 Inlet damper control
(fan)
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100110
Ratio of speed to rating [%]
286 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
• The estimated value of the consumed power during commercial power supply operation (kW) is calculated from the motor
capacity set in Pr.893 and Pr.892 Load factor with the following formula.
NOTE
• In commercial power supply operation, because the rotations per minute cannot rise higher than the power supply frequency,
if the output frequency rises to Pr.3 Base frequency or higher, it stays at a constant value.
Annual operation time (h/year) = average time (h/day) number of operation days (days/year)
NOTE
• Setting example for operation time rate: When operation is performed about 21h per day for an average 16 operation days
per month,
Annual operation time = 21 (h/day) 16 (days/month) 12 months = 4032 (h/year)
4032 (h/year)
Operation time rate (%) = 100(%) = 46.03%
24 (h/day) 365 (days/year)
Set 46.03% in Pr.899.
• Calculate the annual power saving amount from Pr.899 Operation time rate (estimated value) and the average power
saving monitor.
• When the power cost per hour is set in Pr.896 Power unit cost, the annual power cost savings can be monitored.
Annual power cost saving = annual power saving amount (kWh/year) Pr.896
NOTE
• During regenerative driving, make calculation on the assumption that "power saving = power during commercial power
5
supply operation (input power = 0)".
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.3 Base frequency page 497
Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection page 263 GROUP
PARAMETERS 287
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Initial
Pr. Name Initial set signal Setting range
value
190 RUN terminal
0 RUN (Inverter running)
M400 function selection
191 SU terminal function 0 to 5, 7, 8, 10 to 19, 25, 26, 35, 39, 40,
1 SU (Up to frequency)
M401 selection 45 to 54, 57, 64 to 68, 70 to 79, 82, 85,
Open
IPF (Instantaneous power 90 to 96, 98 to 105, 107, 108, 110 to 116,
192 IPF terminal function collector 2
failure/undervoltage) 125, 126, 135, 139, 140, 145 to 154, 157,
M402 selection output 164 to 168, 170 to 179, 182, 185,
9999 No function
terminal 190 to 196, 198 to 208, 211 to 213, 215,
193 OL terminal function
3 OL (Overload warning) 300 to 308, 311 to 313, 315
M403 selection
194 FU terminal function FU (Output frequency
4
M404 selection detection)
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10 to 19, 25, 26, 35, 39, 40,
195 ABC1 terminal 45 to 54, 57, 64 to 68, 70 to 79, 82, 85,
99 ALM (Fault)
M405 function selection 90, 91, 94 to 96, 98 to 105, 107, 108,
Relay
110 to 116, 125, 126, 135, 139,
output
140, 145 to 154, 157, 164 to 168,
196 ABC2 terminal terminal 170 to 179, 182, 185, 190, 191, 194 to 196,
9999 No function
M406 function selection 198 to 208, 211 to 213, 215, 300 to 308,
311 to 313, 315
Setting Refer
Signal Related
Positive Negative Function Operation to
name parameter
logic logic page
Output during operation when the inverter output
0 100 RUN Inverter running frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting frequency or ― 292
higher.
Output when the output frequency reaches the set
1 101 SU Up to frequency Pr.41 294
frequency.
Instantaneous power failure/ Output when an instantaneous power failure or 414,
2 102 IPF Pr.57
undervoltage undervoltage protection operation occurs. 420
Pr.22, Pr.23, Pr.66,
Output during operation of the stall prevention
3 103 OL Overload warning Pr.148, Pr.149, 248
function.
Pr.154
Output when the output frequency reaches the
4 104 FU Output frequency detection frequency set in Pr.42 (Pr.43 during reverse Pr.42, Pr.43 294
rotation) or higher.
Second output frequency Output when the output frequency reaches the
5 105 FU2 Pr.50 294
detection frequency set in Pr.50 or higher.
7 107 For manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Output when the cumulative electronic thermal O/
L relay value reaches 85% of the trip level.
Electronic thermal O/L relay
8 108 THP (Electronic thermal O/L relay protection (E.THT/ Pr.9 225
pre-alarm
E.THM) is activated when the value reaches
100%.)
10 110 PU PU operation mode Output when PU operation mode is selected. Pr.79 200
288 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Setting Refer
Signal Related
Positive Negative Function Operation to
name parameter
logic logic page
Output when the reset process is completed after
powering ON the inverter (when starting is
11 111 RY Inverter operation ready ― 292
possible by switching the start signal ON or during
operation).
Output when the output current is higher than the
12 112 Y12 Output current detection Pr.150, Pr.151 296
Pr.150 setting for the time set in Pr.151 or longer.
Output when the output current is lower than the
13 113 Y13 Zero current detection Pr.152, Pr.153 296
Pr.152 setting for the time set in Pr.153 or longer.
Output when the value is lower than the lower limit
14 114 FDN PID lower limit
of PID control.
Output when the value is higher than the upper Pr.127 to Pr.134,
15 115 FUP PID upper limit 378
limit of PID control. Pr.575 to Pr.577
PID forward/reverse rotation
16 116 RL Output during forward rotation under PID control.
output
17 ― MC1 Electronic bypass MC1
Pr.135 to Pr.139,
18 ― MC2 Electronic bypass MC2 Used when using the electronic bypass function. 363
Pr.159
19 ― MC3 Electronic bypass MC3
25 125 FAN Fan fault output Output when a fan fault occurs. Pr.244 233
Output when the heatsink temperature reaches
26 126 FIN Heatsink overheat pre-alarm about 85% of the heatsink overheat protection ― 543
operation temperature.
Output when the motor torque is higher than the
35 135 TU Torque detection Pr.864 298
Pr.864 setting.
39 139 Y39 Start time tuning completion Output when tuning is completed during start-up. Pr.95, Pr.574 359
40 140 Y40 Trace status Output during trace operation. Pr.1020 to Pr.1047 433
Inverter running and start Output while the inverter is running and the start
45 145 RUN3 ― 292
command is ON command is ON.
During deceleration at Output after the power-failure deceleration
46 146 Y46 occurrence of power failure function operates. Pr.261 to Pr.266 426
(retained until release) (Retained until canceled.)
Pr.127 to Pr.134,
47 147 PID During PID control activated Output during PID control. 378
Pr.575 to Pr.577
Output when the absolute deviation value exceeds Pr.127 to Pr.134,
48 148 Y48 PID deviation limit 378
the limit value. Pr.553, Pr.554
49 149 Y49 During pre-charge operation
During second pre-charge Output during pre-charge operation.
50 150 Y50
operation Pr.127 to Pr.134,
51 151 Y51 Pre-charge time over Pr.241, Pr.553,
Output when the pre-charge operation reaches
Second pre-charge time Pr.554,
52 152 Y52 the time limit set in Pr.764 or Pr.769. 402
over Pr.575 to Pr.577,
Pr.753 to Pr.769,
53 153 Y53 Pre-charge level over Output when the measured value before reaching
C42 to C45
the ending time during pre-charge operation is
Second pre-charge level higher than the detection level set in Pr.763 or
54 154 Y54
over
Pr.768.
Output while the control method is PM motor Pr.71, Pr.80,
57 157 IPM During PM motor control 149
control. Pr.998
64 164 Y64 Control circuit capacitor life Output during retry processing. Pr.65 to Pr.69 236
65 165 Y65
Emergency drive in
operation
Output during emergency drive operation. Pr.514, Pr.515, 5
Pr.523, Pr.524, 238
Fault output during Output when a fault occurs during emergency
66 166 ALM3 Pr.1013
emergency drive drive operation.
Output when the power failure time deceleration-
67 167 Y67 Power failed signal to-stop function is activated during output shutoff Pr.261 to Pr.266 426
due to power failure or undervoltage.
GROUP
24 V external power supply Output while operating with a 24 V power supply M
68 168 EV ― 57
operation input from an external source.
Output during PID output suspension function Pr.127 to Pr.134,
70 170 SLEEP PID output interruption 378
operation. Pr.575 to Pr.577
PARAMETERS 289
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Setting Refer
Signal Related
Positive Negative Function Operation to
name parameter
logic logic page
Commercial power supply
71 171 RO1 side motor 1 connection
RO1
Commercial power supply
72 172 RO2 side motor 2 connection
RO2
Commercial power supply
73 173 RO3 side motor 3 connection
RO3
Commercial power supply Output depending on the motor drive conditions
74 174 RO4 side motor 4 connection Pr.575 to Pr.591 406
when the multi-pump function is used.
RO4
Inverter side motor 1
75 175 RIO1
connection RIO1
Inverter side motor 2
76 176 RIO2
connection RIO2
Inverter side motor 3
77 177 RIO3
connection RIO3
Inverter side motor 4
78 178 RIO4
connection RIO4
Output in pulses every time the accumulated
Pulse train output of output
79 179 Y79 output power of the inverter reaches the Pr.799 Pr.799 303
power
setting.
Enables output from the Binary Output object for
82 182 Y82 BACnet binary output Pr.549 480
BACnet communication.
Output when there is a power failure or
85 185 Y85 DC current feeding Pr.30 508
undervoltage for the AC current.
Control circuit capacitor life Output when the control circuit capacitor
86 186 Y86
(for FR-A8AY, FR-A8AR) approaches the end of its life.
Main circuit capacitor life Output when the main circuit capacitor
87 187 Y87
(for FR-A8AY, FR-A8AR) approaches the end of its life.
Cooling fan life Output when the cooling fan approaches the end
88 188 Y88
(for FR-A8AY, FR-A8AR) of its life.
Pr.255 to Pr.259 180
Inrush current limit circuit life Output when the inrush current limit circuit
89 189 Y89
(for FR-A8AY, FR-A8AR) approaches the end of its life.
Output when any of the control circuit capacitor,
main circuit capacitor and inrush current limit
90 190 Y90 Life alarm
circuit or the cooling fan approaches the end of its
life.
Fault output 3(power-OFF Output when an error occurs due to an inverter
91 191 Y91 ― 293
signal) circuit fault or connection fault.
Switches between ON and OFF each time the
average power saving is updated when using the Pr.52, Pr.54,
Energy saving average
92 192 Y92 power saving monitor. Pr.158, 283
value updated timing
This cannot be set in Pr.195 or Pr.196, Pr.320 to Pr.891 to Pr.899
Pr.322 (relay output terminal).
Outputs the average current and maintenance
Current average monitor timer value as a pulse.
93 193 Y93 Pr.555 to Pr.557 185
signal This cannot be set in Pr.195 or Pr.196, Pr.320 to
Pr.322 (relay output terminal).
Output when the inverter's protective function is
activated to stop the output (at fault occurrence).
94 194 ALM2 Fault output 2 The signal output continues even during an ― 293
inverter reset, and the signal output stops after the
reset release.
Output when Pr.503 reaches the Pr.504 setting or
95 195 Y95 Maintenance timer signal Pr.503, Pr.504 184
higher.
Output via terminals when certain parameters are
96 196 REM Remote output Pr.495 to Pr.497 298
set.
Output when an alarm (fan fault or communication 233,
98 198 LF Alarm Pr.121, Pr.244
error warning) occurs. 446
Output when the inverter's protective function is
99 199 ALM Fault activated to stop the output (at fault occurrence). ― 293
The signal output is stopped after a reset.
290 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Setting Refer
Signal Related
Positive Negative Function Operation to
name parameter
logic logic page
Output when the value is lower than the lower limit
200 300 FDN2 Second PID lower limit
of second PID control.
Output when the value is higher than the upper
201 301 FUP2 Second PID upper limit
limit of second PID control. Pr.753 to Pr.758
Second PID forward/reverse Output during forward rotation under second PID Pr.753 to Pr.758
202 302 RL2
rotation output control.
378
Second During PID control
203 303 PID2 Output during second PID control.
activated
SLEEP During second PID output Output during second PID output suspension Pr.753 to Pr.758,
204 304
2 shutoff function operation. Pr.1147 to Pr.1149
Output when the absolute deviation value during Pr.753 to Pr.758,
205 305 Y205 Second PID deviation limit
second PID control exceeds the limit value. Pr.1145, Pr.1146
Cooling fan operation Output when the cooling fan operation is
206 306 Y206 Pr.244 233
command signal commanded.
Control circuit temperature Output when the temperature of the control circuit
207 307 Y207 Pr.663 304
signal board reaches the detection level or higher.
208 308 PS PU stopped signal Output while the PU is stopped. Pr.75 162
Upper limit warning Output when the load fault upper limit warning is
211 311 LUP
detection detected.
Lower limit warning Output when the load fault lower limit warning is
212 312 LDN Pr.1480 to Pr.1492 255
detection detected.
During load characteristics Output during measurement of the load
213 313 Y213
measurement characteristics.
215 315 Y215 During cleaning Output during operation of the cleaning function. Pr.1469 to Pr.1479 375
9999 ― No function ― ― ―
Take caution when changing the frequency setting with an analog signal or the setting dial of the operation panel (FR-DU08), because this
change speed and the timing of the change speed determined by the acceleration/deceleration time setting may cause the output of the SU (up
to frequency) signal to switch repeatedly between ON and OFF. (This repeating does not occur when the acceleration/deceleration time setting
is "0 s".)
The setting is available only for standard models.
This signal cannot be assigned to the output terminals for plug-in options (FR-A8AY, FR-A8AR).
Available when the plug-in option is connected.
When the power is reset, the fault output 2 signal (ALM2) turns OFF at the same time as the power turns OFF.
NOTE
• The same function may be set to more than one terminal
• The terminal conducts during function operation when the setting is "0 to 99, 200 to 299", and does not conduct when the
setting is "100 to 199, 300 to 399".
• When Pr.76 Fault code output selection = "1", the output signals of terminals SU, IPF, OL and FU operate according to
Pr.76 setting. (When the inverter's protective function is activated, the signal output switches to fault code output.)
• The outputs of terminal RUN and the fault output relay are assigned according to the settings above, regardless of Pr.76.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• Do not assign signals which repeat frequently between ON and OFF to terminals A1B1C1 or A2B2C2. The life of the relay
contacts will be shortened.
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 291
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Time
RUN ON OFF
Pr.289 = 9999
ON OFF
RUN
Pr.289 ≠ 9999
Pr.289 Pr.289
NOTE
• When Pr.157 OL signal output timer is set for the Overload warning (OL) signal output, the OL signal is output when the set
time of (Pr.157 + Pr.289) elapses.
• For the output signal and the fault code output (on page 300) used in the PLC function (on page 431), the Pr.289 setting is
invalid (no filter).
Inverter operation ready signals (RY signal) and inverter running signals
(RUN, RUN3 signals)
• When the inverter is ready for operation, the Inverter
Power ON OFF operation ready (RY) signal turns ON (stays ON during
supply
ON OFF operation.)
STF
ON • When the inverter output frequency reaches Pr.13
RH
Starting frequency or higher, the Inverter running
(RUN) signals turn ON. The signal is OFF while the
Output frequency
DC injection brake
operation point inverter is stopped and during DC injection brake
DC injection operation. Inverter
brake • The Inverter running and start command is ON (RUN3)
Pr. 13 operation
signal is ON while the inverter is running or the start
Reset Time
processing signal is ON. (When the start command is ON, the RUN3
ON OFF signal output turns ON even while the inverter's
RY
protective function is activated or the MRS is ON.)
ON OFF
RUN During DC
RUN3
ON OFF injection brake operation as well, the output is ON, and
when the inverter stops, it turns OFF.
• According to the inverter condition, the ON/OFF operation of each signal is as shown below.
292 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
• When using the RY, RUN and RUN3 signals, refer to the following and assign the functions by Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output
terminal function selection).
Pr.190 to Pr.196 settings
Output signal
Positive logic Negative logic
RY 11 111
RUN 0 100
RUN3 45 145
NOTE
• The RUN signal (positive logic) is assigned to the terminal RUN in the initial status.
Reset ON
NOTE
• For the inverter fault details, refer to page 535.
Fault record
Inrush current limit circuit fault (E.IOH)
CPU fault (E.CPU)
CPU fault (E.6)
CPU fault (E.7)
Parameter storage device fault (E.PE)
Parameter storage device fault (E.PE2)
24 VDC power fault (E.P24)
Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485
terminals power supply short circuit (E.CTE)
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF)
5
Output phase loss (E.LF)
Brake transistor alarm detection (E.BE)
Internal circuit fault (E.13/E.PBT)
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequency page 197, page 198
Pr.76 Fault code output selection page 302
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 293
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
41 Up-to-frequency
10% 0 to 100% Set the level where the SU signal turns ON.
M441 sensitivity
42 Output frequency
6 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency where the FU signal turns ON.
M442 detection
Output frequency 0 to 590 Hz
Set the frequency where the FU signal turns ON in
43 reverse rotation.
detection for reverse 9999
M443
rotation 9999 Same as the Pr.42 setting.
50 Second output
30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency where the FU2 signal turns ON.
M444 frequency detection
870 Speed detection
0 Hz 0 to 5 Hz Set the hysteresis width for the detected frequency.
M400 hysteresis
range Pr.41
frequency.
• The Pr.41 value can be adjusted within the range ±1% to ±100%
consindering the set frequency as 100%.
• This parameter can be used to check that the set frequency has been
(Hz)
Time
reached, and provide signals such as the operation start signal for related
OFF ON OFF equipment.
SU
Output frequency detection (FU signal, FU2 signal, Pr.42, Pr.43, Pr.50)
• Output frequency detection (FU) is output when the output frequency reaches the Pr.42 setting or higher.
• The FU (FU2) signals can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, opening, etc.
• Frequency detection that is dedicated to reverse rotation can be set by setting the detection frequency in Pr.43. This is
useful for changing the timing of the electromagnetic brake operation during forward rotation (lifting) and reverse rotation
(lowering) in operations such as lift operation.
• When Pr.43 ≠ "9999", forward rotation uses the Pr.42 setting and reverse rotation uses the Pr.43 setting.
• When outputting a frequency detection signal separately from the FU signal, set the detection frequency in Pr.50. When the
output frequency reaches the Pr.50 setting or higher, the FU2 signal is output.
Forward
rotation
Output frequency
Pr.50
Pr.42
Pr.43 Time
Pr.50
(Hz)
Output Reverse
signal rotation
FU OFF ON OFF ON OFF
294 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Pr.870
SU output level
Pr.870
Pr.41
Set frequency
Pr.870
SU output level
Pr.870
Time
SU signal
NOTE
• In the initial setting, the FU signal is assigned to the terminal FU, and the SU signal is assigned to the terminal SU.
• All signals turn OFF during DC injection brake, tuning at start-up.
• Each signal's reference frequency differs by the control method.
Compared frequency
Control method
FU, FU2 SU
V/F control Output frequency Output frequency
Output frequency before the slip Output frequency before the slip
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
compensation compensation
PM motor control Frequency command value Estimated frequency (actual motor speed)
• Setting a higher value in Pr.870 slows the response of frequency detection signals (SU).
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 295
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
150 Output current detection Set the output current detection level.
120% 110% 0 to 220%
M460 level 100% is the rated inverter current.
Set the output current detection time. Set the time
151 Output current detection from when the output current reaches the setting or
0s 0 to 10 s
M461 signal delay time higher until the output current detection (Y12) signal
is output.
152 Zero current detection Set the zero current detection level.
5% 0 to 220%
M462 level The rated inverter current is regarded as 100%.
Set the time from when the output current drops to
153 Zero current detection
0.5 s 0 to 10 s the Pr.152 setting or lower until the zero current
M463 time detection (Y13) signal is output.
0 to 10 s Set the retention time when the Y12 signal is ON.
166 Output current detection
0.1 s Retain the Y12 signal ON status. The signal is turned
M433 signal retention time 9999
OFF at the next start.
167 Output current detection Select the operation when Y12 and Y13 signals turn
0 0, 1, 10, 11
M464 operation selection ON.
296 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
NOTE
• The signals are enabled even when online or offline auto tuning is being executed.
• The response time of the Y12 and Y13 signals is approximately 0.1 s. Note that the response time varies with the load.
• When Pr.152 = "0", detection is disabled.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Caution
The zero current detection level setting should not be too low, and the zero current detection time
setting not too long. When the output current is low and torque is not generated, the detection signal
may not be output.
Even when using the zero current detection signal, a safety backup such as an emergency brake
must be provided to prevent hazardous machine or equipment conditions.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Online auto tuning page 359
Offline auto tuning page 341, page 351
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 297
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
A signal is output when the motor torque is higher than the setting.
This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, open signal, etc.
NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Remote output data is cleared when
0 Remote output data is
the power supply is turned OFF
cleared during an inverter
Remote output data is retained when
1 reset
495 Remote output the power supply is turned OFF
0
M500 selection Remote output data is cleared when
10 Remote output data is
the power supply is turned OFF
retained during an inverter
Remote output data is retained when reset
11
the power supply is turned OFF
496 Set values for the bits corresponding to each output terminal of the
Remote output data 1 0 0 to 4095
M501 inverter output terminal. (Refer to the diagram below.)
497 Set values for the bits corresponding to each output terminal of
Remote output data 2 0 0 to 4095
M502 options FR-A8AY and FR-A8AR. (Refer to the diagram below.)
298 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
ABC1
RUN
IPF
SU
FU
OL
∗1
∗1
∗1
∗1
∗1
RA2 ∗3
RA1 ∗3
Y6 ∗2
Y5 ∗2
Y4 ∗2
Y3 ∗2
Y2 ∗2
Y1 ∗2
Y0 ∗2
function selection).
∗1
∗1
• Refer to the left figure, and set "1" in the terminal bit
Any value.
(terminal with the REM signal assigned) of Pr.496 or Pr.497
Y0 to Y6 are available when the extension output option to turn ON the output terminal (OFF when using negative
(FR-A8AY) is installed.
logic). Set "0" to turn OFF the output terminal (ON when
RA1 to RA3 are available hen the relay output option
(FR-A8AR) is installed. using negative logic).
• For example, when Pr.190 RUN terminal function
selection = "96" (positive logic) and "1" (H01) is set in
Pr.496, the terminal RUN turns ON.
NOTE
• The output terminals that have not been assigned with a REM signal by Pr.190 to Pr.196 do not turn ON/OFF even if "0 or 1"
is set in the terminal bits of Pr.496 and Pr.497. (ON/OFF is performed with the assigned functions.)
• When Pr.495 = "1 or 11" (remote output data retention at power OFF), take measures such as connecting R1/L11 with P/+,
and S1/L21 with N/- so that the control power is retained. If the control power is not retained, the output signal after turning
5
ON the power is not guaranteed to work. When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) or the converter unit
(FR-CC2), assign the instantaneous power failure detection (X11) signal to an input terminal to input the IPF signal from the
FR-HC2/FR-CC2 to the terminal for X11 signal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 299
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Remote output data is cleared when the
0 Remote output data is
power supply is turned OFF
cleared during an inverter
Remote output data is retained when the
1 reset
655 Analog remote power supply is turned OFF
0
M530 output selection Remote output data is cleared when the
10 Remote output data is
power supply is turned OFF
retained during an inverter
Remote output data is retained when the reset
11
power supply is turned OFF
656 Analog remote 800 to Value output from the terminal set as "87" in
1000%
M531 output 1 1200% terminal function selection (Pr.54, Pr.158)
657 Analog remote 800 to Value output from the terminal set as "88" in Set the analog value for
1000%
M532 output 2 1200% terminal function selection (Pr.54, Pr.158) outputting from the analog
658 Analog remote 800 to Value output from the terminal set as "89" in output terminals FM/CA and
1000% AM and option FR-A8AY.
M533 output 3 1200% terminal function selection (Pr.54, Pr.158)
659 Analog remote 800 to Value output from the terminal set as "90" in
1000%
M534 output 4 1200% terminal function selection (Pr.54, Pr.158)
55K
1440 50K
0 0
800 1000 1100 1200 800 1000 1100 1200
Analog remote output value [%] Analog remote output value [%]
Terminal FM (FM output) Terminal FM (High-speed pulse train output)
• When Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or 90" (remote output), the CA type inverter can output any
analog current from the terminal CA.
300 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
0
800 1000 1100 1200
Analog remote output value [%]
Terminal CA
• When Pr.158 AM terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or 90", an analog voltage can be output from the terminal AM.
• Terminal AM output [V] = 10 [V] (analog remote output value - 1000)/100
The output range is -10 V to +10 V regardless of the Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection setting.
Output voltage [V]
10
800 900 0
1000 1100 1200
Analog remote output value [%]
-10
Terminal AM
PARAMETERS 301
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
NOTE
• If an error occurs while Pr.76 ≠ "0", the output terminals SU, IPF, OL, and FU output the signals in the table above regardless
of the settings in Pr.191 to Pr.194 (output terminal function selection). Take caution when controlling the inverter with the
output signals set by Pr.191 to Pr.194.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
302 PARAMETERS
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
Output power
20kWh
10kWh
Pulse output of
output power OFF Time
(Y79)
ON for 0.15s
When Pr.799 = 10
NOTE
• Because the accumulated data in the inverter is cleared when control power is lost by power failure or at an inverter reset, the
value on the monitor cannot be used to charge electricity bill.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. (Refer to page 288)
• In an application where the pulse outputs are frequently turned ON/OFF, do not assign the signal to the terminal ABC1 or
ABC2.
Otherwise, the life of the relay contact decreases.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
GROUP
M
PARAMETERS 303
(M) Monitor display and monitor output signal
NOTE
• The Y207 signal is turned OFF when the control circuit temperature becomes 5°C or more lower than the Pr.663 setting.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection page 273
Pr.158 AM terminal function selection page 273
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection page 273
304 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
5
GROUP
T
PARAMETERS 305
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
Switch 2 - ON
0 Terminal 4 input, 4 to 20 mA
267 Terminal 4 input (initial status)
0
T001 selection 1 Terminal 4 input, 0 to 5 V
Switch 2 - OFF
2 Terminal 4 input, 0 to 10 V
• The terminal 2/4 rating specifications change depending on the voltage/current input switch settings.
Voltage input: input resistance 10 kΩ ±1 kΩ, permissible maximum voltage 20 VDC
Current input: input resistance 245 Ω ±5 Ω, permissible maximum current 30 mA
• Correctly set Pr.73, Pr.267 and voltage/current input switch settings so that the analog signal appropriate for the settings is
input. The incorrect settings shown in the table below cause a failure. Other incorrect settings result in an incorrect
operation.
NOTE
• Check the voltage/current input switch number indication before setting, because it is different from the FR-F700(P) series
switch number indication.
306 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
• Set the Pr.73 and voltage/current input switch settings according to the table below. ( indicates the main
speed setting.)
Compensation input
Terminal 2 Terminal 1
Pr.73 setting Switch 1 terminal compensation Polarity reversible
input input
method
0 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to ±10 V
1 (initial value) 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to ±10 V Terminal 1
2 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to ±5 V Addition compensation Not applied
3 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to ±5 V (state in which a negative
4 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to ±10 V Terminal 2 polarity frequency command
5 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to ±5 V Override signal is not accepted)
6 0 to 20 mA ON 0 to ±10 V
7 0 to 20 mA ON 0 to ±5 V
10 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to ±10 V Terminal 1
11 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to ±10 V Addition compensation
12 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to ±5 V
13 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to ±5 V
Applied
14 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to ±10 V Terminal 2
15 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to ±5 V Override
16 0 to 20 mA ON 0 to ±10 V Terminal 1
17 0 to 20 mA ON 0 to ±5 V Addition compensation
• Turning the Terminal 4 input selection(AU) signal ON sets terminal 4 to the main speed. With this setting, the main speed
setting terminal is invalidated.
• Set the Pr.267 and voltage/current input switch setting according to the table below.
Terminal 4
Pr.267 setting Switch 2
input
0 (initial value) 4 to 20 mA ON
1 0 to 5 V OFF
2 0 to 10 V OFF
NOTE
• To enable the terminal 4, turn the AU signal ON.
• Set the parameters and the switch settings so that they agree. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
• Terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to the terminal 2 or 4 main speed setting signal.
• When the override setting is selected, terminal 1 or 4 is set to the main speed setting, and terminal 2 is set to the override
signal (0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V, and 50% to 150%). (If the main speed of terminal 1 or 4 is not input, the compensation by
terminal 2 is disabled.)
• Use Pr.125 (Pr.126) (frequency setting gain) to change the maximum output frequency at the input of the maximum output
frequency command voltage (current). At this time, the command voltage (current) need not be input.
The acceleration/deceleration time inclines up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, so it is not affected
by change of Pr.73.
• When Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment and Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "4", the terminal 1 and
terminal 4 values are set to the stall prevention operation level.
• After the voltage/current input signal is switched with Pr.73, Pr.267, and voltage/current input switches, be sure to let
calibration performed.
• When Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level ≠ "9999", terminal 2 does not function as an analog frequency command.
5
GROUP
T
PARAMETERS 307
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Inverter
To run with an analog input voltage
Forward STF • Concerning the frequency setting signal, input 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 VDC) to
Voltage/current
rotation SD input switch terminals 2 and 5. The 5 V (10 V) input is the maximum output frequency.
0 to 5 VDC
10 • The power supply 5 V (10 V) can be input by either using the internal power
Frequency 2 supply or preparing an external power supply. The internal power source is 5
setting 5 VDC output between terminals 10 and 5, and 10 VDC output between
2 4
Connection diagram
using terminal 4 (0 to 5 VDC)
308 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Inverter
Running with analog input current
Forward STF • For constant pressure or temperature control with fans, pumps, or other
rotation AU Voltage/current
input switch devices, automatic operation is available by setting the regulator output signal
SD 4 to 20 mADC to between terminals 4 and 5.
4 to 20mADC
• To use the terminal 4, the AU signal needs to be turned ON.
Frequency Current
input
4
setting equipment 5 2 4
4 to 20mADC
Frequency Current
input
2
setting equipment 5 2 4
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level page 248
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency page 314
Pr.252, Pr.253 override bias/gain page 311
Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level page 225
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment page 310
5
GROUP
T
PARAMETERS 309
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
• Concerning terminal 1 and terminal 4 used for analog input, the frequency (speed) command, stall prevention operation
level input, and other similar commands are usable. The functions available are different depending on Pr.868 Terminal 1
function assignment, Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment as shown in the table below.
Setting
Terminal 1 function (Pr.868) Terminal 4 function (Pr.858)
value
0 Frequency command
Frequency setting auxiliary
(initial value) (AU signal-ON)
Stall prevention operation level Stall prevention operation level
4
input input
9999 ― ―
―: No function
Invalid when Pr.868 = "4"
NOTE
• When Pr.868 = "4" (stall prevention), the terminal 4 function is enabled whether the AU terminal is turned ON/OFF.
310 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
When voltage
When voltage
across terminals
across terminals
2 and 5 is 0V
5
2 and 5 is 0V
-5V -2.5V 0 +2.5V +5V Terminal 1 -5V -2.5V 0 +2.5V +5V Terminal 1
(-10V) (-5V) (+5V) (+10V) (-10V) (-5V) (+5V) (+10V)
GROUP
T
Forward rotation Reverse rotation Forward rotation
STF Signal STF Signal
ON ON
PARAMETERS 311
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
NOTE
• After changing the Pr.73 setting, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction. (For the settings, refer to page 306.)
150
90 Terminal 2 5VDC
Pr.252 input(150%)
Initial value
Set frequency (Hz)
NOTE
• To use terminal 4, the AU signal needs to be turned ON.
• To make compensation input for the multi-speed operation or remote setting, set Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation
selection = "1" (with compensation) (initial value "0").
• After changing the Pr.73 setting, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction. (For the settings, refer to page 306.)
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selection page 222
Pr.73 Analog input selection page 306
312 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
5
Frequency
command Slope determined
according to Pr.125
and C2 to C4
Slope does not
change. GROUP
T
NOTE
• Under PID control, the analog input filter is invalid (no filter).
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.73 Analog input selection page 306
Pr.125, C2 to C4 (bias and gain of the terminal 2 frequency setting) page 314
PARAMETERS 313
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
314 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
To change the frequency for the maximum analog input (Pr.125, Pr.126)
• To change only the frequency setting (gain) for the maximum analog input voltage (current), set Pr.125 (Pr.126).
(C2 (Pr.902) to C7 (Pr.905) settings do not need to be changed.)
5
GROUP
T
PARAMETERS 315
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
60Hz 60Hz
(50Hz) (50Hz)
(Hz)
Output frequency
(Hz)
Gain
Pr.125 Gain Pr.126
Bias C14(Pr.918) Bias
C2 C5
C12(Pr.917) (Pr.904)
0 100% 0 20 100%
0 Frequency setting signal 5V 0 4 20mA
0 10V 0 1 Frequency setting signal 5V
0 20mA 0 2 10V
C3(Pr.902) C4(Pr.903) C6(Pr.904) C7(Pr.905)
C13(Pr.917) C15(Pr.918)
• There are three methods to adjust the frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain.
- Adjust any point with application of a voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5). page 317
- Adjust any point without application of a voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5). page 318
- Adjust frequency only without adjustment of voltage (current). page 319
NOTE
• Performing terminal 2 calibration that includes a change of the setting frequency incline changes terminal 1 setting.
• Calibration with voltage input to terminal 1 sets (terminal 2 (4) analog value + terminal 1 analog value) as the analog
calibration value.
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input signal with Pr.73, Pr.267, and the voltage/current input
selection switch.
NOTE
• When the terminal 1 input specification (0 to ±5 V, 0 to ±10 V) does not agree with the main speed (terminal 2, terminal 4
input) specification (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA), and if the voltages are applied to terminal 1, the analog input is not
correctly displayed. (For example, in the initial status, when 0 V is applied to terminal 2 and 10 V is applied to terminal 1, and
the analog value is displayed as 5 V (100%).)
Use the inverter with the Pr.241 = "0 (initial value)" setting. (0% display).
316 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2. Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator is on.
Calibration is also possible in the External operation mode.
Parameter setting mode
3.
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
5. Turn to choose C4(Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain for the terminal 1.
6. Press to display the analog voltage (current) % currently applied to the terminal 1 (4).
Press to enter the setting. The analog voltage (current) % and ( ) flicker alternately.
5
GROUP
T
PARAMETERS 317
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
(b) Adjust any point without application of a voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5). (Frequency setting gain
adjustment example)
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2. Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator is on.
Calibration is also possible in the External operation mode.
Parameter setting mode
3.
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
5. Turn to choose C4(Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain for the terminal 1.
Setting completed
Press to enter the setting. The analog voltage (current) % and ( ) flicker alternately.
NOTE
• By pressing after step 6, the present frequency setting bias/gain setting can be confirmed. Confirmation is not possible
318 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Operation
Parameter selection
1. Turn to choose (Pr.125) for the terminal 2, and (Pr.126) for the terminal 4.
Press to enter the setting. " " and " ( )" flicker alternately.
Checking the mode/monitor
3.
Press three times to change to the monitor / frequency monitor.
Start
4. Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR) to apply a voltage across terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5),
Operation is performed with 130% torque.
NOTE
• If the frequency meter (display meter) connected across the terminals FM and SD (CA and 5) does not indicate exactly 60
Hz, set the calibration parameter C0 FM/CA terminal calibration. (Refer to page 279.)
• If the gain and bias of voltage (current) setting voltage are too close, an error ( ) may be displayed at setting.
• Changing C4 (Pr.903) or C7 (Pr.905) (gain adjustment) will not change Pr.20.
Input to the terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to the frequency setting signal.
• For operation outline of the parameter unit (FR-PU07), refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-PU07.
• To set the value to 120 Hz or higher, the Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency needs to be 120 Hz or higher. (Refer to
page 245.)
• Make the bias frequency setting using the calibration parameter C2 (Pr.902) and C5 (Pr.904). (Refer to page 316.)
Caution
Be cautious when setting any value other than "0" as the bias frequency at 0 V (0 mA). Even if a
speed command is not given, simply turning ON the start signal will start the motor at the preset
frequency.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency page 245
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency page 187
Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection page 306
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment page 310
5
GROUP
T
PARAMETERS 319
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
C16
Set the stall prevention operation level of the bias side
(919) Terminal 1 bias command (torque) 0% 0 to 400%
of terminal 1 input.
T110
C17
Set the converted % on bias side voltage of terminal 1
(919) Terminal 1 bias (torque) 0% 0 to 300%
input.
T111
C18
Set the stall prevention operation level of the gain
(920) Terminal 1 gain command (torque) 150% 0 to 400%
(maximum) of terminal 1 input..
T112
C19
Set the converted % on the gain side voltage of terminal
(920) Terminal 1 gain (torque) 100% 0 to 300%
1 input.
T113
C38
Set the stall prevention operation level of the bias side
(932) Terminal 4 bias command (torque) 0% 0 to 400%
of terminal 4 input.
T410
C39
Set the converted % on bias side current (voltage) of
(932) Terminal 4 bias (torque) 20% 0 to 300%
terminal 4 input.
T411
C40
Set the stall prevention operation level of the gain
(933) Terminal 4 gain command (torque) 150% 0 to 400%
(maximum) of terminal 4 input.
T412
C41
Set the converted % on gain side current (voltage) of
(933) Terminal 4 gain (torque) 100% 0 to 300%
terminal 4 input.
T413
241 Analog input display unit 0 % display
0 Select the unit for analog input display.
M043 switchover 1 V/mA display
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.
320 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
5
GROUP
T
PARAMETERS 321
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Calibration of analog input bias and gain (C16 (Pr.919) to C19 (Pr.920),
C38 (Pr.932) to C41 (Pr.933))
• "Bias"/"gain" function can adjust the relation between the stall prevention operation level and the setting input signal.
Examples of setting input signals are 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 2 mADC, and they are externally input.
• Set the bias value of the terminal 1 input using C16 (Pr.919). (Shipped from factory with the stall prevention operation level
for 0 V)
• Set the stall prevention operation level against the input voltage set by Pr.73 Analog input selection with C18 (Pr.920).
(Initial value is 10 V.)
• Set the bias value of the terminal 4 input using C38 (Pr.932). (The initial value is the stall prevention operation level for 4
mA.)
• Set the stall prevention operation level against the 20 mA for input current (4 to 20 mA) with C40 (Pr.933).
Stall prevention operation level (%) Stall prevention operation level (%)
400 400
150
Gain Gain
(-5V) C18(Pr.920) 150
Bias C40
(-10V) Initial value
C16(Pr.919) (Pr.933)
-100%
0 100% Bias Initial value
0 Analog input 5V C38
0 10V (Pr.932)
C17(Pr.919) C19(Pr.920) 0 20 100%
∗1 -150 0 4 Analog input 20mA
C39(Pr.932) C41(Pr.933)
Calibration example of terminal 1
Calibration example of terminal 4
If a negative command is given, the stall prevention operation level is regarded as "0".
• There are three methods to adjust the torque setting voltage (current) bias and gain.
- Method to adjust arbitrary point with application of a voltage (current) between terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5). page 323
- Method to adjust arbitrary point without application of a voltage (current) between terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5). page
324
- Method to adjust only stall prevention operation level without adjusting voltage (current). page 325
NOTE
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/input signal with Pr.73, Pr.267, and the voltage/current input selection
switch.
Analog command
(terminals 1 and 4) Pr.241 = 0 (initial value) Pr.241 = 1
(Depends on Pr.73, Pr.267)
0 to 5 V input 0 to 5 V 0 to 100% (0.1%) display 0 to 100% 0 to 5 V (0.01 V) display
0 to 10 V input 0 to 10 V 0 to 100% (0.1%) display 0 to 100% 0 to 10 V (0.01 V) display
0 to 20 mA input 0 to 20 mA 0 to 100% (0.1%) display 0 to 100% 0 to 20 mA (0.01 mA)
322 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Adjust method for the stall prevention operation level setting voltage
(current) bias and gain
(a) Adjust any point with application of a voltage (current) between terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5).
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2. Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator is on.
Calibration is also possible in the External operation mode.
Parameter setting mode
3.
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
6. Press to display the analog voltage (current) % currently applied to the terminal 1 (4).
Press to enter the setting. The analog voltage (current) % and ( ) flicker alternately.
5
GROUP
T
PARAMETERS 323
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
(b) Adjust any point without application of a voltage (current) between terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5).
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2. Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator is on.
Calibration is also possible in the External operation mode.
Parameter setting mode
3.
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
Setting completed
Press to enter the setting. The analog voltage (current) % and ( ) flicker alternately.
NOTE
• By pressing after step 6, the bias/gain setting at the present stall prevention operation level can be confirmed.
Confirmation is not possible after executing step 7.
324 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
(c) Method to adjust only stall prevention operation level without adjusting gain voltage (current).
(When changing the gain value from 150% to 130%.)
Operation
Parameter selection
1. Turn to choose (Pr.920) for the terminal 2, and (Pr.933) for the terminal 4.
Press to enter the setting. " " and " ( )" flicker alternately.
Checking the mode/monitor
3.
Press three times to change to the monitor / frequency monitor.
Start
4. Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR) to apply a voltage across terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5),
Operation is performed with 130% stall prevention operation level.
NOTE
• If the gain and bias of the stall prevention operation level are too close, an error ( ) may displayed at setting.
• For operation outline of the parameter unit (FR-PU07), refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-PU07.
• Set the bias setting using the calibration parameter C16 (Pr.919) or C38 (Pr.932). (Refer to page 322.)
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection page 306
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment page 310
5
4 Continues operation with the Pr.777 setting.
9999 No current input check
Set the running frequency for current input loss.
777 4 mA input fault operation 0 to 590 Hz
(Valid when Pr.573 = "4")
9999
T053 frequency GROUP
9999 No current input check when Pr.573 = "4"
T
778
4 mA input check filter 0s 0 to 10 s Set the current input loss detection time.
T054
PARAMETERS 325
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Continue operation at analog current input loss (Pr.573 = "1, 4", Pr.777)
• When Pr.573 = "1", operation is continued with the output frequency before the current input loss.
• When Pr.573 = "4" and Pr.777 ≠ "9999", operation is continued with frequency set in Pr.777.
• When the start command is turned OFF during the input current loss, deceleration stop is immediately performed, and the
operation is not restored even if start command is input again.
• When the current input is restored, the LF signal is turned OFF, and operation is performed according to the current input.
• External operation
Pr.573=1 : Operation continued with the frequency before being lost
Pr.573=4 : Operation continued with Pr.777 setting
Output frequency
4mA 3mA
2mA
Time
STF
LF signal
• PID control (reverse action)
Pr.573=1 : Operation continued with the frequency before being lost
Pr.573=4 : Operation continued with Pr.777 setting
Output frequency
Input current
20mA
Set point (fixed) decrease
Return
Measured value
4mA 2mA 3mA
Time
STF
LF signal
NOTE
• When the setting is changed to continuously operate after the input current loss (Pr.573 = "1, 4"), the motor will operate as
the frequency before loss is 0 Hz.
326 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Input current
20mA decrease
Set point (fixed)
Return
Measured value
4mA 2mA 3mA
Time
STF
LF signal
PID signal
ALM signal
Input current
20mA decrease
Set point (fixed)
Return
Measured value
4mA 2mA 3mA
Time
STF
LF signal
PID signal
ALM signal
• The analog input current is restored during deceleration under PID control (reverse action)
Decelerates as the input current is lost
Normal operation after the current is restored
Output frequency
Input current
5
20mA
Set point (fixed) decrease
Return
GROUP
Measured value
4mA 3mA T
2mA
Time
STF
LF signal
OFF during
deceleration
PID signal
PARAMETERS 327
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection page 306
328 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Initial signal Setting range
value
0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 18, 24, 25,
178 STF terminal function 28, 37 to 40, 46 to 48, 50, 51,
60 STF (Forward rotation command)
T700 selection 60, 62, 64 to 67, 70 to 73,
77 to 81, 84, 94 to 98, 9999
0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 18, 24, 25,
179 STR terminal function 28, 37 to 40, 46 to 48, 50, 51,
61 STR (Reverse rotation command)
T7001 selection 61, 62, 64 to 67, 70 to 73,
77 to 81, 84, 94 to 98, 9999
180 RL terminal function
0 RL (Low-speed operation command)
T702 selection
181 RM terminal function
1 RM (Middle-speed operation command)
T703 selection
182 RH terminal function
2 RH (High-speed operation command)
T704 selection
183 RT terminal function
3 RT (Second function selection)
T705 selection
184 AU terminal function 0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 18, 24, 25,
4 AU (Terminal 4 input selection)
T706 selection 28, 37 to 40, 46 to 48, 50, 51,
185 JOG terminal function 62, 64 to 67, 70 to 73, 77 to 81,
5 JOG (Jog operation selection) 84, 94 to 98, 9999
T707 selection
186 CS terminal function
9999 No function
T708 selection
187 MRS terminal function 24 MRS (Output stop)
T709 selection 10 X10 (Inverter run enable signal)
188 STOP terminal function STP (STOP) (Start self-holding
25
T710 selection selection)
189 RES terminal function
62 RES (Inverter reset)
T711 selection
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
699 5 to 50 ms Set the time to delay the input terminal response.
Input terminal filter 9999
T740 9999 No input terminal filter
The initial value is for standard models.
The initial value is for separated converter types.
5
Signal Refer to
Setting Function Related parameter
name page
Pr.59 = 0 (initial Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
Low-speed operation command 222
0 RL value) Pr.232 to Pr.239
GROUP
Pr.59 0 Remote setting (setting clear) Pr.59 194 T
Pr.59 = 0 (initial Middle-speed operation Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
222
1 RM value) command Pr.232 to Pr.239
Pr.59 0 Remote setting (deceleration) Pr.59 194
Pr.59 = 0 (initial Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
High-speed operation command 222
2 RH value) Pr.232 to Pr.239
Pr.59 0 Remote setting (acceleration) Pr.59 194
Pr.44 to Pr.51, Pr.450 to Pr.463,
3 RT Second function selection 333
Pr.569, Pr.832, etc.
4 AU Terminal 4 input selection Pr.267 306
5 JOG Jog operation selection Pr.15, Pr.16 221
PARAMETERS 329
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Signal Refer to
Setting Function Related parameter
name page
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.162 to Pr.165, Pr.299,
414, 420
6 CS failure, flying start Pr.611
Electronic bypass function Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.135 to Pr.139, Pr.159 363
7 OH External thermal relay input Pr.9 225
15-speed selection Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
8 REX 222
(Combination with multi-speeds of RL, RM, and RH) Pr.232 to Pr.239
Inverter run enable signal (FR-HC2/FR-CV/FR-CC2
10 X10 Pr.30, Pr.599 508
connection)
FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous power failure
11 X11 Pr.30 508
detection
12 X12 PU operation external interlock Pr.79 200
13 X13 External DC injection brake operation start Pr.10 to Pr.12 502
14 X14 PID control valid terminal Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to Pr.577 378
PU/External operation switchover
16 X16 Pr.79, Pr.340 200
(External operation with X16-ON)
18 X18 V/F switchover (V/F control with X18-ON) Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.800 143
Output stop Pr.17 332
24 MRS
Electronic bypass function Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.135 to Pr.139, Pr.159 363
STP
25 Start self-holding selection Pr.250 335
(STOP)
28 X28 Start-time tuning start external input Pr.95 359
37 X37 Traverse function selection Pr.592 to Pr.597 373
38 PDI1 PID multistage set point setting 1
39 PDI2 PID multistage set point setting 2 Pr.1460 to Pr.1466 378
40 PDI3 PID multistage set point setting 3
46 TRG Trace trigger input Pr.1020 to Pr.1047 433
47 TRC Trace sampling start/end Pr.1020 to Pr.1047 433
48 X48 Power failure stop external Pr.261 to Pr.266, Pr.294, Pr.668 426
50 SQ Sequence start Pr.414 431
51 X51 Fault clear Pr.414 431
Forward rotation command (Assignable to the STF
60 STF Pr.250 335
terminal (Pr.178) only)
Reverse rotation command (Assignable to the STR
61 STR Pr.250 335
terminal (Pr.179) only)
62 RES Inverter reset Pr.75 162
64 X64 PID forward/reverse action switchover Pr.127 to Pr.134 378
65 X65 PU/NET operation switchover (PU operation with X65-ON) Pr.79, Pr.340 200
External/NET operation switchover (NET operation with
66 X66 Pr.79, Pr.340 200
X66-ON)
Command source switchover (Command by Pr.338,
67 X67 Pr.338, Pr.339 210
Pr.339 enabled with X67-ON)
70 X70 DC feeding operation permission Pr.30 508
71 X71 DC feeding cancel Pr.30 508
72 X72 PID integral value reset Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to Pr.577 378
73 X73 Second PID P control switchover Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to Pr.577 378
77 X77 Pre-charge end command Pr.760 to Pr.764 402
78 X78 Second pre-charge end command Pr.765 to Pr.769 402
79 X79 Second PID forward/reverse action switchover Pr.753 to Pr.758 378
80 X80 Second PID control valid terminal Pr.753 to Pr.758 378
81 PGT PID gain tuning start/forced end Pr.1211 to Pr.1219 394
84 X84 Emergency drive execution command Pr.514, Pr.515, Pr.523, Pr.524, Pr.1013 238
94 X94 Control signal input for main circuit power supply MC Pr.30, Pr.137, Pr.248, Pr.254 370
95 X95 Converter unit fault input
Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.135 to Pr.139, Pr.159 363
96 X96 Converter unit fault input (E.CPU, E.OUT)
97 X97 Cleaning valid
Pr.1469 to Pr.1479 375
98 X98 Cleaning trigger
9999 ——— No function ———— ————
When Pr.59 Remote function selection "0", functions of the RL, RM, and RH signals will be changed as in the table.
OH signal will operate with the relay contact "open".
Available when the plug-in option is connected. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.
The setting is available only for standard models.
330 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
NOTE
• Same function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the logic of terminal input is OR.
• Priority of the speed command is JOG > multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL, REX) > PID (X14).
• When the (X10) signal is not set up, Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", and PU operation external interlock (X12) signal
is Inverter run enable signal.
• Same signal is used to assign multi-speed (7 speed) and remote setting. Setting cannot be performed individually.
• When the terminal assignment is changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection), the terminal name
will be different, which may result in an error of wiring, or affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function
of each terminal.
Time
ON OFF
STF
Pr.699 9999
Pr.699 Pr.699
NOTE
• Setting of Pr.699 is disabled (no filter) in the following cases.
- Input terminal is already turned ON when the power is turned ON
- Input signal used for the PLC function
- Inverter run enable signal (X10) signal
5
GROUP
T
PARAMETERS 331
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Motor coasts
About output shutoff signal (MRS signal)
to stop • When the Output stop (MRS) signal is turned ON while operating the
inverter, the inverter output is instantaneously shut off.
• The response time of the MRS signal is within 2 ms.
• Terminal MRS may be used as described below.
Time (a) To use a mechanical brake (e.g. electromagnetic brake) to stop the
motor
The inverter output is shut off when the mechanical brake operates.
MRS signal ON
(b) To provide interlock to disable operation by the inverter
STF (STR) With the MRS signal ON, the inverter cannot be operated even if the
signal ON
start signal is entered into the inverter.
(c) To coast the motor to a stop
Setting value "0" (Initial Setting value "2"
value) When the start signal is turned OFF, the inverter decelerates the
Output Inverter Output Inverter motor to a stop in the preset deceleration time, but when the MRS
stop stop signal is turned ON, the motor coasts to a stop.
MRS MRS
SD (PC) SD (PC) MRS signal logic inversion (Pr.17 = "2")
• When Pr.17 = "2", the MRS signal can be changed to normally closed
(NC contact) specification. The inverter will shut off the output with MRS
signal turned ON (opened).
Pr.17 setting
External MRS Communication MRS
0 2 4
OFF OFF Operation enabled Output shutoff Output shutoff
OFF ON Output shutoff Output shutoff Output shutoff
ON OFF Output shutoff Output shutoff Operation enabled
ON ON Output shutoff Operation enabled Output shutoff
NOTE
• The MRS signal is assigned to the terminal MRS in the initial status. By setting "24" in either Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal
function selection), the RT signal can be assigned to the other terminal.
• When using an external terminal to input the MRS signal, the MRS signal shuts off the output in any of the operation modes.
• MRS signal is valid from either of communication or external, but when the MRS signals is to be used as Inverter run enable
signal (X10), it is required to input from external.
• When the terminal assignment is changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection), the terminal name
will be different, which may result in an error of wiring, or affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function
of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
332 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Start STF/STR
Second function selection RT
Acceleration
High speed RH time is applied
Middle speed Time
RM
SD RT
RH
RM
5
GROUP
T
PARAMETERS 333
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
• When the RT signal is ON, the following second functions are selected at the same time.
NOTE
• RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
334 PARAMETERS
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Description
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Stop operation
Start signal (STF/STR)
(Refer to page 507.)
STF signal: Forward rotation start Turn OFF the start signal and it
0 to 100 s will coast to stop after the
STR signal: Reverse rotation start
specified time period.
STF signal: Start signal When set to 1000 s to 1100 s, it
1000 s to 1100 s STR signal: Forward/reverse will coast to stop after
250 Stop rotation signal (Pr.250 - 1000) s.
9999
G106 selection STF signal: Forward rotation start
9999
STR signal: Reverse rotation start It will perform deceleration stop
STF signal: Start signal when the start signal is turned
8888 STR signal: Forward/reverse OFF.
rotation signal
Forward
rotation start STF Start signal STF
Reverse Forward
rotation rotation
rotation rotation
Output frequency
Output frequency
Time Time
ON ON 5
STF STF
ON ON
STR STR
GROUP
2-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "9999") 2-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "8888") T
NOTE
• By setting Pr.250 = "0 to 100, 1000 to 1100", it will perform coast to stop when the start command is turned OFF. (Refer to
page 507.)
• The STF and STR signals are assigned to the terminals STF and STR in the initial status. STF signal can be assigned to a
terminal by Pr.178 STF terminal function selection, and STR signal can be assigned to a terminal by Pr.179 STR terminal
function selection.
PARAMETERS 335
(T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Reverse Forward
rotation rotation
rotation rotation
Output frequency
Output frequency
Time Time
ON ON ON
STF STF
ON
STR STR ON
3-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "9999") 3-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "8888")
NOTE
• The STP (STOP) signal is assigned to the terminal STP (STOP) by the initial setting. Set "25" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to
assign the STP (STOP) signal to another terminal.
• When the JOG operation is enabled by turning ON the JOG signal, STOP signal will be disabled.
• Even when the output is stopped by turning ON the MRS signal, self-holding function is not canceled.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting) page 222
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
336 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
PARAMETERS 337
(C) Motor constant parameters
NOTE
• Regardless of the Pr.71(Pr.450) setting, offline auto tuning can be performed according to Pr.96(Pr.463) Auto tuning
setting/status. (Refer to page 341 for offlne auto tuning.)
338 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
RT signal ON (second
Function RT signal OFF (first motor)
motor)
Electronic thermal O/L relay Pr.51 Pr.9
Applied motor Pr.450 Pr.71
Motor capacity Pr.453 Pr.80
Number of motor poles Pr.454 Pr.81
Motor excitation current Pr.455 Pr.82
Rated motor voltage Pr.456 Pr.83
Rated motor frequency Pr.457 Pr.84
Motor constant (R1) Pr.458 Pr.90
Motor constant (R2) Pr.459 Pr.91
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) Pr.460 Pr.92
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) Pr.461 Pr.93
Motor constant (X) Pr.462 Pr.94
Auto tuning setting/status Pr.463 Pr.96
Frequency search gain Pr.560 P.r298
Online auto tuning selection Pr.574 Pr.95
Induced voltage constant (phi f) Pr.738 Pr.706
Motor Ld decay ratio Pr.739 Pr.711
Motor Lq decay ratio Pr.740 Pr.712
Starting resistance tuning compensation Pr.741 Pr.717
Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width Pr.742 Pr.721
Maximum motor frequency Pr.743 Pr.702
Motor inertia (integer) Pr.744 Pr.707
Motor inertia (exponent) Pr.745 Pr.724
Motor protection current level Pr.746 Pr.725
Torque current/Rated PM motor current Pr.860 Pr.859
NOTE
• The RT signal is a second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 333.)
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
GROUP
C
PARAMETERS 339
(C) Motor constant parameters
NOTE
• When using the SF-PR heavy duty setting, set Pr.14 Load pattern selection = "0".
• When the Pr.0 setting is changed from its initial value, the automatic change is not performed.
NOTE
• When the Pr.0 and Pr.12 settings are changed from their initial values, the automatic change is not performed.
Caution
Make sure to set this parameter correctly according to the motor used. Incorrect setting may cause
the motor and inverter to overheat and burn.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.0 Torque boost page 496
Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage page 502
Pr.14 Load pattern selection page 499
Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status page 341
Pr.100 to Pr.109 (Adjustable 5 points V/F) page 501
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.684 Tuning data unit switchover page 341
340 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
684 Tuning data unit 0 Internal data converted value
0
C000 switchover 1 The value is indicated with "A, Ω, mH or %".
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 40,
71 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, By selecting a motor, the thermal characteristic
Applied motor 0
C100 210, 213, 214, 8090, 8093, and motor constant of each motor are set.
8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
0.4 to 55 kW
80 Set the applied motor capacity.
Motor capacity 9999 0 to 3600 kW
C101
9999 V/F control
81 Number of motor 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of motor poles.
9999
C102 poles 9999 V/F control
Rated 0 to 500 A
9 Electronic thermal O/
inverter Set the rated motor current.
C103 L relay current
0 to 3600 A
83
Rated motor voltage 200/400 V 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
C104
84 Rated motor 10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
9999
C105 frequency 9999 Use the value set in Pr.3 Base frequency.
707 Motor inertia Set the motor inertia.
9999 10 to 999, 9999
C107 (integer) 9999: Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi
724 Motor inertia motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-
9999 0 to 7, 9999 HRCA and so on).
C108 (exponent)
0 No offline auto tuning
Performs offline auto tuning without rotating the
1
motor
96 Auto tuning setting/ Performs offline auto tuning without rotating the
0
C110 status motor (V/F control, IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-
11
THE4)
(Refer to page 351)
101 Performs offline auto tuning by rotating the motor
90 0 to 50 Ω, 9999
Motor constant (R1) 9999
C120 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999
91 0 to 50 Ω, 9999
Motor constant (R2) 9999
C121 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999
Motor constant (L1)/ 0 to 6000 mH, 9999
92
C122
d-axis inductance
(Ld)
9999
0 to 400 mH, 9999 Tuning data
(The value measured by offline auto tuning is
5
Motor constant (L2)/ 0 to 6000 mH, 9999 automatically set.)
93
q-axis inductance 9999 9999: Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi
C123 0 to 400 mH, 9999 motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-
(Lq) GROUP
HRCA and so on). C
94
Motor constant (X) 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
C124
82 Motor excitation 0 to 500 A, 9999
9999
C125 current 0 to 3600 A, 9999
859 Torque current/Rated 0 to 500 A, 9999
9999
C126 PM motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999
PARAMETERS 341
(C) Motor constant parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
The offline auto tuning automatically sets the
0 to 32767
gain required for the frequency search.
298 Frequency search
9999 Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor (SF-
A711 gain
9999 PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so
on).
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24,
40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, Set this parameter when using the second motor.
450 Second applied 74, 210, 213, 214, 8090, 8093, (the same specifications as Pr.71).
9999
C200 motor 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
9999 The function is disabled.
0.4 to 55 kW
453 Second motor Set the capacity of the second motor.
9999 0 to 3600 kW
C201 capacity
9999 V/F control
454 Number of second 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of poles of the second motor.
9999
C202 motor poles 9999 V/F control
0 to 500 A This function is enabled when the RT signal is
51 Second electronic ON.
9999 0 to 3600 A Set the rated motor current.
C203 thermal O/L relay
9999 Second electronic thermal O/L relay disabled
456 Rated second motor
200/400 V 0 to 1000 V Set the rated voltage (V) of the second motor.
C204 voltage
457 Rated second motor 10 to 400 Hz Set the rated frequency (Hz) of the second motor.
9999
C205 frequency 9999 Use the Pr.84 Rated motor frequency setting.
744 Second motor inertia Set the inertia of the second motor.
9999 10 to 999, 9999
C207 (integer) 9999: Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi
745 Second motor inertia motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-
9999 10 to 7, 9999 HRCA and so on).
C208 (exponent)
0 No auto tuning for the second motor.
Performs offline auto tuning without rotating the
1
second motor
463 Second motor auto Performs offline auto tuning without rotating the
0 motor (V/F control, IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-
C210 tuning setting/status 11
THE4)
(Refer to page 351)
Performs offline auto tuning by rotating the
101
second motor
458 Second motor 0 to 50 Ω, 9999
9999
C220 constant (R1) 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999
459 Second motor 0 to 50 Ω, 9999
9999
C221 constant (R2) 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999
Second motor 0 to 6000 mH, 9999
460
constant (L1) / d-axis 9999
C222 0 to 400 mH, 9999 Tuning data of the second motor
inductance (Ld)
(The value measured by offline auto tuning is
Second motor 0 to 6000 mH, 9999
461 automatically set.)
constant (L2) / q-axis 9999
C223 0 to 400 mH, 9999 9999: Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi
inductance (Lq) motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-
462 Second motor HRCA and so on).
9999 0 to 100%, 9999
C224 constant (X)
455 Second motor 0 to 500 A, 9999
9999
C225 excitation current 0 to 3600 A, 9999
Second motor torque 0 to 500 A, 9999
860
current/Rated PM 9999
C226 0 to 3600 A, 9999
motor current
The offline auto tuning automatically sets the
0 to 32767 gain required for the frequency search of the
560 Second frequency second motor.
9999
A712 search gain Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor (SF-
9999 PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so
on).
For the FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower and FR-F840-01160(55K)or lower.
For the FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and FR-F840-01800(75K)or higher.
Differs according to the voltage class. (200 V/400 V)
The setting range and unit change according to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting.
342 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
POINT
• The function is enabled under Advanced magnetic flux vector control.
• Even if a motor other than Mitsubishi standard motors (SF-JR 0.4 kW or higher), high-efficiency motors (SF-HR 0.4 kW or
higher), Mitsubishi constant-torque motors (SF-JRCA 4P, SF-HRCA 0.4 kW to 55 kW), or Mitsubishi high-performance
energy-serving motor (SF-PR), such as other manufacturers' induction motors, SF-JRC, SF-TH, etc., is used, or when the
wiring length is long (approx. 30 m or longer), a motor can run with the optimum operation characteristics by using the offline
auto tuning function.
• Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor.
• During offline auto tuning, the motor rotation can be locked (Pr.96 = "1") or unlocked (Pr.96 = "101"). The tuning is more
accurate when the motor can rotate (unlocked).
• Reading/writing of the motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled. The offline auto tuning data (motor
constants) can be copied to another inverter with the operation panel.
• The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the operation panel and the parameter unit.
GROUP
C
PARAMETERS 343
(C) Motor constant parameters
Setting
• To perform tuning, set the following parameters about the motor.
First Second
Name Initial value Description
motor Pr. motor Pr.
80 453 Motor capacity 9999 (V/F control) Set the motor capacity (kW).
81 454 Number of motor poles 9999 (V/F control) Set the number of motor poles (2 to 12).
Electronic thermal O/L Rated inverter
9 51 Set the rated motor current (A).
relay current
Set the rated motor voltage (V) printed on the motor's
83 456 Rated motor voltage 200 V/400 V
rating plate.
Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
84 457 Rated motor frequency 9999 When the setting is "9999", the Pr.3 Base frequency
setting is used.
Set this parameter according to the motor.
71 450 Applied motor 0 (standard motor) Three types of motor constant setting ranges, units and
tuning data can be stored according to settings.
Set "1" or "101".
1: Performs tuning without rotating the motor. (Excitation
Auto tuning setting/
96 463 0 noise occurs at this point.)
status
101: Performs tuning without rotating the motor. The motor
can rotate up to the speed near the rated motor frequency.
Differs according to the voltage class. (200 V/400 V)
According to the Pr.71 setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be changed. Set the Pr.71 Applied motor
setting according to the motor to be used and the motor constant setting range. (For other setting values of Pr.71, refer to page 337.)
Pr.71 setting
Motor constant Motor constant
Motor constant
Motor parameter mH, parameter
parameter Ω, mΩ
% and A unit Internal data
and A unit setting
setting setting
Mitsubishi standard SF-JR and SF-TH 0 (initial value) 3 (4) ―
motor SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20 23 (24) ―
Mitsubishi high- SF-HR 40 43 (44) ―
efficiency motor Others 0 (initial value) 3 (4) ―
SF-JRCA 4P and SF-TH (constant-torque) 1 13 (14) ―
Mitsubishi constant-
SF-HRCA 50 53 (54) ―
torque motor
Other (SF-JRC, etc.) 1 13 (14) ―
Mitsubishi high-
performance SF-PR 70 73(74) ―
energy-saving motor
5 (star connection
Other manufacturer's motor)
― 0 (initial value) 3 (4)
standard motor 6 (delta connection
motor)
15 (star connection
Other manufacturer's
motor)
constant-torque ― 1 13 (14)
16 (delta connection
motor
motor)
NOTE
• If Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time = "0" or Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage = "0", offline auto tuning is
performed considering Pr.11 or Pr.12 is set to the initial value.
• If "star connection" or "delta connection" is incorrectly selected in Pr.71, Advanced magnetic flux vector control is not
performed normally.
344 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
• For tuning accuracy improvement, set the following parameters when the motor constants are known in advance.
Performing tuning
POINT
• Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or the parameter unit if the inverter is in the state
ready for tuning. (Refer to 2) below.) Turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable starts the motor.
NOTE
• Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of MRS signal.
• To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press on the operation panel.
(Turning the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) OFF also ends tuning.)
• During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid. (initial value)
Input terminals <effective signals>: STP (STOP), OH, MRS, RT, RES, STF, STR, S1 and S2
Output terminals: RUN, OL, IPF, FM/CA, AM, A1B1C1 and SO
• When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM/CA and AM, the progress status of offline
auto tuning is output in fifteen steps from FM/CA and AM.
• Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection(RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not
be performed properly.
• When the offline auto tuning is selected (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "101"), the motor rotates. Take caution and
ensure the safety.
• Since the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence
which releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
• When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) of
the inverter.
• While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal ON to tune in the PU
operation mode.
• Monitor is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU08) and the parameter unit (FR-PU07) during tuning as below.
READ:List READ:List
(1) Setting 1 101
STOP PU STOP PU
TUNE
2
TUNE
102
5
(2) During tuning
STF FWD PU STF FWD PU
GROUP
TUNE
C
3 TUNE 103
(3) Normal completion COMPLETION COMPLETION
STF STOP PU STF STOP PU
Flickering Flickering
TUNE
ERROR 8
(4) Forced end
STOP PU
PARAMETERS 345
(C) Motor constant parameters
• When offline auto tuning ends, press on the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal).
This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
NOTE
• The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the
offline auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared by performing all parameter clear.
• Changing Pr.71 (Pr.450) after tuning completion will change the motor constant. For example, if Pr.71 = "3" is set after tuning
is performed with Pr.71 = "0", the tuning data becomes invalid. Set Pr.71 = "0" again for using the tuning data.
• If offline auto tuning has ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set. Perform an inverter reset and
restart tuning.
• When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto
tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
• If using a motor falling under the following conditions, set the value of Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay as shown below
after tuning is complete.
a) If the rated power supply of the motor is 200/220 V(400/440 V) 60 Hz, set the rated motor current multiplied by 1.1 in
Pr.9.
b) If using a motor with a temperature detector such as PTC thermistor and Klixon and performs motor overheat protection,
set Pr.9 = "0" (disables the motor overheat protection feature of the inverter).
NOTE
• An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter starts
normal operation. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor runs in the forward (reverse) rotation.
• Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. Note that even if a retry operation has been set,
retry is not performed.
• The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz
Caution
Note that the motor may start running suddenly.
For the offline auto tuning in vertical lift applications, etc., caution is required to avoid falling due to
insufficient torque.
346 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
Changing the motor constants (If setting the Pr.92 and Pr.93 motor
constants in units of mH)
• Set Pr.71 as shown below.
M2
The setting value of Pr.94 = (1 - ) 100(%)
L1 L2
R1 I1 I2
PARAMETERS 347
(C) Motor constant parameters
NOTE
• If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi motors (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA,
SF-HRCA and so on) are used.
Changing the motor constants (If setting motor constants in the internal
data of the inverter)
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
NOTE
• As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following
setting example when making setting:
• Setting example: To slightly increase the Pr.90 value (5%)
If Pr.90 = "2516" is displayed,
the value is calculated with 2516 1.05 = 2641.8. Therefore set Pr.90 = "2642".
(The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Hence, simple addition of a given
value to the displayed value has no significance.)
• If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi motors (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA,
SF-HRCA and so on) are used.
348 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
Changing the motor constants (If setting the Pr.92 and Pr.93 motor
constants in units of [Ω])
• Set Pr.71 as shown below.
Pr.71 setting
Applicable motor
Star connection motor Delta connection motor
Standard motor 5 6
Constant-torque motor 15 16
• Set given values as the motor constant parameters.
NOTE
• If "star connection" or "delta connection" is incorrectly selected in Pr.71, Advanced magnetic flux vector control is not
performed normally.
• If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi motors (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA,
SF-HRCA and so on) are used.
GROUP
C
PARAMETERS 349
(C) Motor constant parameters
NOTE
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay page 225
Pr.31 to Pr.36 Frequency jump
Pr.71 Applied motor page 337
Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection page 248
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
350 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 Internal data converted value
684
Tuning data unit switchover 0 The value is indicated with "A, Ω, mH or
C000 1
mV".
Perform adjustment if the overcurrent
1002 Lq tuning target current 50 to 150% protective function is activated during
9999 tuning.
C150 adjustment coefficient
9999 No adjustment
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 40,
By selecting a motor, the thermal
71 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74,
Applied motor 0 characteristic and motor constant of each
C100 210, 213, 214, 8090, 8093,
motor are set.
8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
0.4 to 55 kW
80 Applied motor capacity setting.
Motor capacity 9999 0 to 3600 kW
C101
9999 V/F control
81 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of motor poles.
Number of motor poles 9999
C102 9999 V/F control
Rated 0 to 500 A
9
Electronic thermal O/L relay inverter Set the rated motor current.
C103 current 0 to 3600 A
83 200/400
Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
C104 V
10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
The MM-EFS/MM-THE4 constant is used
when the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4
84 is selected, and the inverter internal data
Rated motor frequency 9999
C105 9999 is used when a PM motor other than MM-
EFS/MM-THE4 is selected. Use the
correct setting according to the motor
specification.
0 to 400 Hz Set the maximum frequency of the motor.
The MM-EFS/MM-THE4 motor maximum
702 frequency is used when the IPM motor
Maximum motor frequency 9999 MM-EFS/MM-THE4 is selected, and
C106 9999
Pr.84 setting is used when a PM motor
other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4 is
5
selected.
707
Motor inertia (integer) 9999 10 to 999, 9999 Set the motor inertia.
C107
9999: Uses MM-EFS/MM-THE4 inertia for
724 IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4.
Motor inertia (exponent) 9999 0 to 7, 9999
C108 GROUP
PARAMETERS 351
(C) Motor constant parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
90 0 to 50 Ω, 9999
Motor constant (R1) 9999
C120 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999 Tuning data
92 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis 0 to 500 mH, 9999 (The value measured by offline auto
9999 tuning is automatically set.)
C122 inductance (Ld) 0 to 50 mH, 9999
9999: Uses the MM-EFS/MM-THE4
93 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis 0 to 500 mH, 9999
constant for the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-
9999
C123 inductance (Lq) 0 to 50 mH, 9999 THE4, and the inverter internal data for a
859 Torque current/Rated PM 0 to 500 A, 9999 PM motor other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4.
9999
C126 motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999
Set this parameter according to the PM
0 to 5000 mV/(rad/s)
706 Induced voltage constant motor specifications.
9999
C130 (phi f) The value calculated by the motor
9999
constant parameter setting is used.
711
Motor Ld decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
C131
Tuning data
712 (The value measured by offline auto
Motor Lq decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
C132 tuning is automatically set.)
717 Starting resistance tuning 9999: Uses the MM-EFS/MM-THE4
9999 0 to 200%, 9999 constant for the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-
C182 compensation
THE4, and the inverter internal data for a
Starting magnetic pole
721 0 to 6000 μs, PM motor other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4.
position detection pulse 9999
C185 10000 to 16000 μs, 9999
width
Set the maximum current (OCT) level of
100 to 500%
the motor.
725 Motor protection current Uses the MM-EFS/MM-THE4 constant for
9999
C133 level the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4, and
9999
200% for a PM motor other than MM-
EFS/MM-THE4.
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24,
Set this parameter when using the second
30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54,
450 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090,
motor.
Second applied motor 9999 (the same specifications as Pr.71).
C200 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
9999 The function is disabled.
0.4 to 55 kW
453 Set the capacity of the second motor.
Second motor capacity 9999 0 to 3600 kW
C201
9999 V/F control
Set the number of poles of the second
454 Number of second motor 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
motor.
9999
C202 poles
9999 V/F control
0 to 500 A
Set the rated current of the second motor.
51 Second electronic thermal 0 to 3600 A
9999
C203 O/L relay Second electronic thermal O/L relay
9999
disabled.
456 Rated second motor 200/400 Set the rated voltage (V) of the second
0 to 1000 V
C204 voltage V motor.
Set the rated frequency (Hz) of the
10 to 400 Hz
second motor.
The MM-EFS/MM-THE4 constant is used
457 Rated second motor when the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4
9999 is selected for the second motor, and the
C205 frequency
9999 inverter internal data is used when a PM
motor other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4 is
selected. Use the correct setting
according to the motor specification.
Set the maximum frequency of the
0 to 400 Hz
second motor.
743 Second motor maximum The maximum frequency of an MM-EFS/
9999 MM-THE4 motor when MM-EFS/MM-
C206 frequency
9999 THE4 is selected.
The setting value of Pr.457 is used for
non-MM-EFS/MM-THE4 motors.
352 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
744 Second motor inertia
9999 10 to 999, 9999 Set the inertia of the second motor.
C207 (integer)
9999: Uses MM-EFS/MM-THE4 inertia for
745 Second motor inertia IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4.
9999 0 to 7, 9999
C208 (exponent)
0, 101 No auto tuning for the second motor.
Performs offline auto tuning without
1 rotating the second motor. (motor other
463 Second motor auto tuning
0 than the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4)
C210 setting/status
Performs offline auto tuning without
11 rotating the motor (for IPM motor MM-
EFS/MM-THE4).
458 0 to 50 Ω, 9999
Second motor constant (R1) 9999
C220 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999
Tuning data of the second motor
460 Second motor constant (L1) 0 to 500 mH, 9999 (The value measured by offline auto
9999
C222 / d-axis inductance (Ld) 0 to 50 mH, 9999 tuning is automatically set.)
461 Second motor constant (L2) 0 to 500 mH, 9999 9999: Uses the MM-EFS/MM-THE4
9999 constant for the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-
C223 / q-axis inductance (Lq) 0 to 50 mH, 9999
THE4, and the inverter internal data for a
Second motor torque 0 to 500 A, 9999
860 PM motor other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4.
current/Rated PM motor 9999
C226 0 to 3600 A, 9999
current
Set this parameter according to the PM
0 to 5000 mV/(rad/s)
738 Second motor induced motor specifications.
9999
C230 voltage constant (phi f) Value calculated based on the tuning
9999
data.
739 Second motor Ld decay
9999 0 to 100%, 9999
C231 ratio
Tuning data of the second motor.
740 Second motor Lq decay (The value measured by offline auto
9999 0 to 100%, 9999
C232 ratio 9999: Uses the MM-EFS/MM-THE4
741 Second starting resistance constant for the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-
9999 0 to 200%, 9999 THE4, and the inverter internal data for a
C282 tuning compensation
PM motor other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4.
742 Second motor magnetic 0 to 6000 μs,
9999
C285 pole detection pulse width 10000 to 16000 μs, 9999
Set the maximum current (OCT) level of
100 to 500%
the second motor.
746 Second motor protection Uses the MM-EFS/MM-THE4 constant for
9999
C233 current level the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4, and
9999
200% for a PM motor other than MM-
EFS/MM-THE4.
For the FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower and FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower.
For the FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher.
Differs according to the voltage class. (200 V/400 V)
The setting range and unit change according to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting.
POINT
• The settings are valid under the PM motor control.
• The offline auto tuning enables the operation with SPM motors and IPM motors other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4. (When a PM
motor other than the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4 is used, always perform the offline auto tuning.)
• Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor. 5
• Reading/writing of the motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled. The offline auto tuning data (motor
constants) can be copied to another inverter with the operation panel.
• The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the operation panel and the parameter unit.
GROUP
C
PARAMETERS 353
(C) Motor constant parameters
Setting
• To perform tuning, set the following parameters about the motor.
Pr.71 setting
Motor constant Motor constant
Motor
parameter Ω, mH and A parameter Internal data
unit setting setting
MM-EFS/MM-THE4 210 213 (214)
IPM motor
Other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4 8090 8093 (8094)
SPM motor 9090 9093 (9094)
NOTE
• If PM motor control is performed, tuning cannot be performed even when Pr.96 = "101" is set. If MM-EFS/MM-THE4 is set to
the applied motor, tuning cannot be performed even when Pr.96 = "1, 101" is set.
• For the tuning accuracy improvement, set the following parameter when the motor constant is known in advance.
354 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
Performing tuning
POINT
• Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or the parameter unit if the inverter is in the state
ready for tuning. Turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable starts the motor.
NOTE
• Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of MRS signal.
• To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press on the operation panel. (Turning the start signal (STF
signal or STR signal) OFF also ends tuning.)
• During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid (initial value)
Input terminals <effective signals>: STP (STOP), OH, MRS, RT, RES, STF, STR, S1 and S2
Output terminals: RUN, OL, IPF, FM/CA, AM, A1B1C1 and SO
• When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM/CA and AM, the progress status of offline
auto tuning is output in fifteen steps from FM/CA and AM.
• Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection(RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not
be performed properly.
• A motor with 14 or more poles cannot be tuned.
• Since the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence
which releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
• When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) of
the inverter.
• While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal ON to tune in the PU
operation mode.
• Monitor is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU08) and the parameter unit (FR-PU07) during tuning as below.
READ:List READ:List
(1) Setting 1 11
STOP PU STOP PU
TUNE TUNE
2 12
(2) During tuning
STF FWD PU STF FWD PU
TUNE 3 TUNE 13
(3) Normal completion COMPLETION COMPETION
STF STOP PU STF STOP PU
Flickering Flickering
5
TUNE
ERROR 8
(4) Forced end STOP PU
GROUP
C
PARAMETERS 355
(C) Motor constant parameters
• When offline auto tuning ends, press on the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal).
This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
NOTE
• The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the
offline auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared by performing all parameter clear.
• Changing Pr.71 after tuning completion will change the motor constant. For example, if Pr.71 = "8093" is set after tuning is
performed with Pr.71 ="8090", the tuning data becomes invalid. Set Pr.71 = "8090" again for using the tuning data.
• If offline auto tuning has ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set.
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
• When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto
tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
NOTE
• An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter starts normal operation. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor runs in the
forward (reverse) rotation.
• Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. However, if the retry function is set, no retry is
performed even when a protective function that performs a retry is activated.
• The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.
Caution
Note that the motor may start running suddenly.
356 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
Changing the motor constants (If setting motor constants in units of [Ω],
[mH] or [A])
• Set Pr.71 as shown below.
PARAMETERS 357
(C) Motor constant parameters
NOTE
• Setting "9999" disables the tuning data. The MM-EFS/MM-THE4 constant is used for the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4, and
the inverter internal constant is used for a PM motor other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4.
NOTE
• As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following
setting example when making setting:
• Setting example: To slightly increase Pr.90 value (5%)
If Pr.90 = "2516" is displayed
The value can be calculated with "2516 1.05 = 2641.8". Therefore set Pr.90 = "2642".
(The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Hence, simple addition of a given
value to the displayed value has no significance)
• Setting "9999" disables the tuning data. The MM-EFS/MM-THE4 constant is used for the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4, and
the inverter internal constant is used for a PM motor other than MM-EFS/MM-THE4.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay page 225
Pr.71 Applied motor page 337
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
358 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
If online auto tuning is selected under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, favorable torque accuracy is retained by
adjusting temperature even when the resistance value varies due to increase in the motor temperature.
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the rated inverter current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due
to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the rated inverter current.
NOTE
• When performing the online auto tuning at start for a lift, consider utilization of tuning using the external terminal. The tuning
is completed in approximately 500 ms at the maximum after the start. Not enough torque may be provided during that period.
Caution is required to prevent the object from dropping. Use of the start-time tuning start (X28) signal is recommended to
perform tuning. (Refer to page 360.)
• Perform online auto tuning at startup when the motor is stopped.
• The online auto tuning is disabled when the MRS signal is being input, the setting speed is Pr.13 Starting frequency or
lower (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control), an inverter fault is occurring, or the inverter's startup condition is
not satisfied.
• Online auto tuning does not operate during deceleration and restart from DC injection brake operation.
• It is disabled during JOG operation.
5
• If automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected, automatic restart is prioritized. (Online auto tuning at startup
does not run during frequency search.)
If automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is used together, perform online auto tuning while stopping operation GROUP
PARAMETERS 359
(C) Motor constant parameters
Online auto tuning at startup using the external terminal (setting value
"1", X28 signal and Y39 signal)
• Before turning ON the start signal (STF or STR), online auto tuning
Output frequency (Hz)
can be performed by turning ON the Start-time tuning start external
input (X28) signal in a stopped status. Such operation will minimize
the startup delay by turning at start.
• Perform offline auto tuning and set Pr.95 = "1" (tuning at start).
• When Start time tuning completion (Y39) is OFF, tuning at start can
be performed with X28 signal.
Time • Up to 500 ms can be taken to complete tuning at startup.
ON
X28signal • To use the X28 signal, set "28" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input
Tuning status Completed terminal function selection) to assign the function to an input
at starting Tune
terminal.
Y39signal
• To use the Y39 signal, set "39 (positive logic) or 139 (negative logic)"
Start signal in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) to
assign function to an output terminal.
Output frequency
0Hz
Time
While the X28 signal is ON Switching motor
ON Second motor
X28 Signal OFF Motor First motor First motor
switching
Tuning is not performed at start since X28 signal
and Y39 signal is ON. RT signal ON
Tune
Tuning status OFF
Completed X28 signal
at starting
Tune
ON
Tuning status Completed
Y39 signal OFF
at starting Y39 turns OFF when the
ON ON driven motor is switched
to the second motor
OFF
OFF Y39 signal
Start signal Y39 turns ON due
Secondary magnetic to the residual second
ON flux exists a few seconds magnetic flux at the
Start OFF first motor.
signal
Output
frequency 0Hz Output
Time frequency
0Hz
Time
NOTE
• The Y39 signal remains ON as long as there is second flux even after the motor is stopped.
• The X28 signal is disabled while the Y39 signal is ON.
• The STF and STR signals are enabled after completing tuning at start.
• The Inverter running (RUN) signal is not turned ON during online auto tuning. The RUN signal is turned ON after starting up.
• It is disabled during V/F control or PM motor control.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) and Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output
terminal function selection) may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
360 PARAMETERS
(C) Motor constant parameters
NOTE
• The RT signal is a second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 329.)
The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay page 225
Pr.71 Applied motor page 337
Pr.80 Motor capacity page 143, page 341, page 351
Pr.81 Number of motor poles page 143, page 341, page 351
Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status page 341, page 351
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
GROUP
C
PARAMETERS 361
(A) Application parameters
362 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
The inverter contains complicated sequence circuits for switching between the commercial power supply operation and
inverter operation. Therefore, interlock operation of the magnetic contactor for switching can be easily performed by
simply inputting start, stop, and automatic switching selection signals.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 Coasting time differs according to the inverter capacity.
57 Set the waiting time for the inverter to perform a restart at
Restart coasting time 9999 0.1 to 30 s
A702 power restoration after an instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart
58
Restart cushion time 1s 0 to 60 s Set the voltage cushion time for restart.
A703
135 Electronic bypass 0 Without electronic bypass sequence
0
A000 sequence selection 1 With electronic bypass sequence
136 MC switchover interlock
1s 0 to 100 s Set the operation interlock time for MC2 and MC3.
A001 time
Set a time period that is a little longer than the time period
137
Start waiting time 0.5 s 0 to 100 s from the ON signal input to the actual pick-up operation of
A002 MC3 (0.3 to 0.5 s).
0 Inverter output stop (motor coasting) at inverter failure
Automatic switchover to commercial power supply operation
138
Bypass selection at a fault 0 at inverter failure. (Switchover is not possible when an
A003 1
external thermal relay (E.OHT) or CPU fault (E.CPU) is
occurring.)
Set the frequency where the inverter operation is switched to
commercial power supply operation.
Automatic switchover The inverter operation is performed from a start to Pr.139
139 0 to 60 Hz
frequency from inverter to 9999 setting, then it switches automatically to the commercial
A004 power supply operation when the output frequency is equal
bypass operation
to or above Pr.139.
9999 Without automatic switchover
Set the frequency where the commercial power supply
operation, which has been switched from the inverter
operation with Pr.139, switches back to inverter operation.
When the frequency command becomes less than (Pr.139 -
0 to 10 Hz
Pr.159), the motor switches automatically to inverter
Automatic switchover
operation and operates at the frequency of the frequency
159 frequency range from
9999 command. Turning OFF the inverter start command (STF/
A005 bypass to inverter STR) also switches the operation to the inverter operation.
operation To switch the commercial power supply operation, which has
been switched from the inverter operation with Pr.139, to the
9999 inverter operation again, the inverter start command (STF/
STR) is turned OFF. The operation switches to the inverter
operation, and the motor decelerates to a stop.
The coasting time when Pr.57 = "0" is as shown below. (When Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection is set to
the initial value.)
FR-F820-00077(1.5K) or lower and FR-F840-00038(1.5K) or lower: 0.5 s
FR-F820-00105(2.2K) to FR-F820-00340(7.5K) and FR-F840-00052(2.2K) to FR-F840-00170(7.5K): 1 s
5
FR-F820-00490(11K) to FR-F820-02330(55K) and FR-F840-00250(11K) to FR-F840-01160(55K): 3.0 s
FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher: 5.0 s
PARAMETERS 363
(A) Application parameters
Connection diagram
• A tipical connection diagram of the electronic bypass sequence is shown below.
- Sink logic, Pr.185 = "7", Pr.186 = "6", Pr.192 = "17", Pr.193 = "18", and Pr.194 = "19"
MC2
External
MCCB MC1 thermal relay
MC3
R/L1 U
S/L2 V IM
T/L3 W
R1/L11
S1/L21
Inverter start MC1
(forward rotation) ∗1
STF (MC1)IPF
Inverter/bypass CS
operation interlock MRS
∗1 MC3 MC2
∗3 (MC2)OL ∗2
External thermal JOG(OH) 24VDC
Reset RES
∗1 MC2 MC3
SD
(MC3)FU
Frequency 10
setting signal 2 SE
5
Standard models
- Sink logic, Pr.182 = "24", Pr.183 = "95", Pr.184 = "96", Pr.185 = "7", Pr.192 = "17", Pr.193 = "18", Pr.194 = "19"
MC2
External
Converter unit Inverter thermal relay
MCCB MC1
P/+ MC3
R/L1 P/+ U
S/L2 N/- N/- V IM
T/L3 Inverter start W
(forward rotation) STF
R1/L11 Inverter/bypass CS
S1/L21 operation interlock RH(MRS) ∗3 MC1
SE SD ∗1
(MC1)IPF
RDA MRS(X10)
∗4 ALM MC2
External RT(X95) ∗3 ∗1 MC3
OH (MC2)OL ∗2
thermal ∗4 Y214 AU(X96) ∗3 24VDC
Reset RES
SD RSO RES MC3
∗1 MC2
Frequency 10
2 (MC3)FU
setting signal
5
SE
R1/L11
S1/L21
Separated converter type
Be careful of the capacity of the sequence output terminals.
The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection).
NOTE
• Use the electronic bypass function in External operation mode. In addition, the wiring terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 must be
connected to a separate power source that does go through MC1. Be sure to connect using a separate power supply.
• Be sure to provide a mechanical interlock for MC2 and MC3.
364 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Operation
Magnetic
Installation location During commercial During inverter
contactor During inverter fault
power supply operation operation
Between power supply and Open
MC1 Shorted Shorted
inverter input side (short by reset)
Open
(Selected by Pr.138. Always
MC2 Between power supply and motor Shorted Open
open when the external
thermal relay is operating.)
Between inverter output side and
MC3 Open Shorted Open
motor
• The input signals are as shown below.
Applied MC operation
Signal Function Operation
terminal MC1 MC2 MC3
ON Electronic bypass operation
- -
Selects whether or not available
MRS MRS
operation is available. OFF Electronic bypass operation
Invariance
not available
ON Inverter operation
Inverter/commercial power
CS CS OFF Commercial power supply
supply operation switchover
operation
Inverter operation command ON Forward rotation (reverse
STF STF
(Disabled during commercial rotation)
(STR) (STR)
power supply operation) OFF Stop
Set one of Pr.180 ON Motor normal - -
OH External thermal relay input
to Pr.189 to "7". OFF Motor fault
ON Reset Invariance Invariance
RES RES Operation status reset
OFF Normal operation - -
X95 signal OFF, X96 signal OFF
Converter fault (E.OHT, E.CPU)
Set "95" and "96" Converter unit fault / X95 signal ON, X96 signal ON
- -
X95/X96 in any of Pr.180 Converter unit fault (E.CPU, Converter normal
to Pr.189. E.OHT) X95 signal OFF, X96 signal ON
Converter fault (other than -
E.OHT or E.CPU)
For separated converter types, the X10 signal is assigned to the terminal MRS in the initial setting. For the MRS signal, set "24" to any of
Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function to another terminal.
When the MRS signal is OFF, neither the commercial power supply operation nor the inverter operation can be performed.
Terminal CS is initially set to "no function". To enable CS signal, set "6" in Pr.186 CS terminal function selection to assign the function to a
terminal. The CS signal operates only when the MRS signal is ON.
STF(STR) operates only when the MRS and CS signals are both ON.
The RES signal can be used for reset input acceptance with Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. When
RES signal and another input signal are simultaneously input, the MC operation by the RES signal has a higher priority.
MC1 turns OFF at an inverter fault.
When Pr.138="0 (electronic bypass invalid at a fault)", MC2 is OFF. When Pr.138="1 (electronic bypass valid at a fault)", MC2 is ON.
MC operation
: MC-ON
: MC-OFF
-: During inverter operation, MC2-OFF, MC3-ON 5
During commercial power supply operation, MC2-ON, MC3-OFF
Invariance: The status before changing the signal ON or OFF is held.
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 365
(A) Application parameters
Applied terminal
Signal Description
(Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting)
Operation output signal of the magnetic contactor MC1
MC1 17
on the inverter's input side.
Operation output signal of the magnetic contactor MC2
MC2 18
for the commercial power supply operation.
Operation output signal of the magnetic contactor MC3
MC3 19
on the inverter's output side.
Operating status
(motor speed)
INV Coasting Bypass Coasting INV Stop
operation operation operation
• Example of operation sequence with automatic bypass sequence (Pr.139 "9999", Pr.159 = "9999")
ON
STF
OFF
Output frequency Pr.139
Frequency command
Time
Actual motor speed
Time
INV ON
operation MC3
OFF
Commercial ON
power supply MC2 OFF
operation
C A A B C D
A : Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time B : Pr.137 Start waiting time
C : Pr.57 Restart coasting time D : Pr.58 Restart cushion time
366 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
• Example of operation sequence with automatic bypass sequence (Pr.139 "9999", Pr.159 "9999")
ON
STF
OFF
Output frequency Pr.139
Pr.159
Frequency command
Time
Actual motor speed
Time
INV ON
operation MC3 OFF
Commercial ON
power supply MC2
operation OFF
C A A B C D A A B C D
A : Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time B : Pr.137 Start waiting time
C : Pr.57 Restart coasting time D : Pr.58 Restart cushion time
Operation
• Procedure for operation
Power supply ON
• Pr.135 = "1" (open collector output terminal of inverter)
Setting the parameters • Pr.136 = "2.0 s"
• Pr.137 = "1.0 s" (Set the time until MC3 is actually turned ON
Start inverter operation and the inverter and motor are electrically connected. If the
time is short, the restart may not function properly.)
Constant-speed commercial • Pr.57 = "0.5 s"
power supply operation
• Pr.58 = "0.5 s" (Always set this to switchover from the
Deceleration (stop) commercial power supply operation to the inverter operation.)
inverter operation
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 367
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• Connect the control power (R1/L11, S1/L21) in front of the input-side MC1. If the control power is connected behind the input-
side MC1, the electronic bypass sequence function will not operate.
• The electronic bypass sequence function is only enabled when Pr.135 = "1" and in the External operation mode or combined
operation mode (PU speed command and External operation command with Pr.79 = "3"). MC1 and MC3 turn ON when
Pr.135 = "1" and in an operation mode other than mentioned above.
• MC3 turns ON when the MRS and CS signals are ON and the STF(STR) signal is OFF. If the motor was coasted to a stop
from commercial power supply operation at the previous stop, the motor starts running only after waiting the time set in
Pr.137.
• Inverter operation is only available when the MRS, STF(STR), and CS signals are ON. In all other cases (when the MRS
signal is ON), commercial power supply operation is available.
• When the CS signal is OFF, the motor switches to the commercial power supply operation. However, when the STF(STR)
signal is OFF, the motor decelerates to a stop during inverter operation.
• From the point where MC2 and MC3 are both turned OFF, there is a waiting time set in Pr.136, till MC2 or MC3 is turned ON.
• Even when the electronic bypass sequence is enabled (Pr.135 = "1"), the Pr.136 and Pr.137 settings are ignored in PU
operation mode.
In addition, the input terminals (STF, CS, MRS, OH) return to perform their normal functions.
• When the electronic bypass sequence function (Pr.135 = "1") and PU operation interlock function (Pr.79 = "7") are used at the
same time, the MRS signal is shared with the PU operation external interlock if the X12 signal is not assigned. (The inverter
operation is available when the MRS and CS signals are ON.)
• Set the acceleration time to the level that does not activate the stall prevention operation.
• When switching to the commercial power supply operation while a failure such as an output short circuit is occurring between
the magnetic contactor MC3 and the motor, the damage may further spread. When a failure occurs between the MC3 and
motor, make sure to provide a protection circuit, such as using the OH signal input.
• Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.
• Switching with the electronic bypass sequence is not available during retry. Switching occurs after the retry. When the
electronic bypass is valid at a fault (Pr.138="1"), switching occurs also during retry.
• When the electronic bypass sequence function and the retry function of the converter unit are used at the same time for the
separated converter type, set 101 or more in the number of retries at fault occurrence (Pr.67) on the converter unit side.
When a value less than 100 is set, ALM signal does not turn ON until the retry count is exceeded. In this case, the electronic
bypass at a fault is not performed until the retry count is exceeded.
368 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time page 502
Pr.57 Restart coasting time page 414, page 420
Pr.58 Restart cushion time page 414
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 369
(A) Application parameters
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 Self power management function disabled
Self power management function enabled (main circuit OFF
248 Self power management 1
0 at protective function activation)
A006 selection
Self power management function enabled (main circuit OFF
2
at protective function activation due to a circuit failure)
Set a time period that is a little longer than the time period
137
Start waiting time 0.5 s 0 to 100 s from the ON signal input to the actual pick-up operation of
A002 MC1 (0.3 to 0.5 s).
Set the waiting time until the main circuit power supply is
0 to 3600 s
254 Main circuit power OFF turned OFF after the motor is stopped.
600 s
A007 waiting time The main circuit power supply is turned OFF only when the
9999
protective function selected by Pr.248 is activated.
Power supply to the inverter: AC (terminals R, S, and T)
When power is supplied only to the control circuit, and then
100, 101
switched to be supplied to both the control and main
30 Regenerative function circuits, inverter reset is not performed.
0
E300 selection 0 to 2, 10, 11,
20, 21, 102,
For other settings, refer to page 508.
110, 111, 120,
121
Connection diagram
• For sink logic and Pr.192="17" (terminal R1, S1 inputs)
MC1 Inverter Converter unit Inverter
MCCB MCCB MC1
R/L1 U R/L1 P/+ P/+ U
S/L2 V M S/L2 N/- N/- V M
T/L3 W T/L3 W
R1/L11 R1/L11 RDA MRS(X10)
S1/L21 S1/L21 RSO RES
MC1 Y17 X94 MC1
(MC1)IPF SE SD (MC1)IPF
• For sink logic and Pr.192="17" (24 V external power supply input)
MCCB MC1 Inverter MCCB MC1 Converter unit Inverter
R/L1 U R/L1 P/+ P/+ U
S/L2 V M S/L2 N/- N/- V M
T/L3 W T/L3 W
R1/L11 R1/L11 RDA MRS(X10)
S1/L21 S1/L21 RSO RES
MC1 MC1
Y17 X94
(MC1)IPF SE SD (MC1)IPF
+24
+24 +24
24VDC 24VDC 24VDC
SD 24VDC 24VDC
SE SD SD SE
370 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Output frequency
(Hz)
DC brake
Time
Pr.11 Pr.254 Pr.137
STF ON OFF ON
MC1 ON OFF ON
R1S1 input/
Power supply mode RST input RST input
external 24 V input
• When the protective function of the inverter is activated, the MC1 signal is immediately turned OFF according to the Pr.248
setting. (The MC1 signal is turned OFF before the time set in Pr.254 has passed.)
When Pr.248="1", the MC1 signal is turned OFF when the protective function is activated due to any cause.
When Pr.248="2", the MC1 signal is turned OFF only when the protective function is activated due to an error resulted from
a failure in the inverter circuit or a wiring error (refer to the following table). (For the alarm details, refer to page 535.)
Fault record
Inrush current limit circuit fault (E.IOH)
CPU fault (E.CPU)
CPU fault (E.6)
CPU fault (E.7)
Parameter storage device fault (E.PE)
Parameter storage device fault (E.PE2)
24 VDC power fault (E.P24)
Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485
terminals power supply short circuit (E.CTE)
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) 5
Output phase loss (E.LF)
Brake transistor alarm detection (E.BE)
Internal circuit fault (E.13/E.PBT)
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 371
(A) Application parameters
• To enable the self power management function for the separated converter type, enable the self power management
function also on the converter unit side. To activate the self power management function when a converter unit fault occurs,
connect the terminal to which Y17 signal of the converter unit is assigned and the terminal to which X94 signal of the
inverter is assigned.
Y17 output signal MC1 output signal MC1 output signal Main circuit power
(on the converter unit side) (inverter side) actual operation supply
OFF OFF OFF Stop
OFF ON OFF Stop
ON OFF OFF Stop
ON ON ON Supplied
NOTE
• When the start signal is turned OFF before the time set in Pr.137 has passed after the start signal is turned ON, the inverter
does not start and the MC1 signal is turned OFF after the time set in Pr.254 has passed.
If the start signal is turned ON again before the time set in Pr.254 has passed, the inverter immediately starts outputting.
Time Time
STF ON OFF STF ON OFF ON
Pr.137 Pr.137
Pr.254 Pr.254
• At inverter reset, the status of the MC1 signal is held and operation of the magnetic contactor is not performed.
• When the inverter stops the output due to, for example, the Output stop (MRS) signal, the MC1 signal is turned OFF after the
time set in Pr.254 has passed.
• During the stop, turning ON the External DC injection brake operation start signal (X13) turns ON the MC1 signal.
• To avoid inverter reset when supplying power to the main circuit is started when power is supplied only to the control circuit,
set 100 or more in Pr.30. (For the separated converter type, setting Pr.30 of the converter unit is also required.)
• When supplying power to the main circuit is started when power is supplied only to the control circuit, there is a little waiting
time before starting.
• Repeated operation of the magnetic contactor due to frequent start and stop or activation of the protective function may
shorten the inverter life.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time page 502
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection page 508
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
372 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 Traverse function invalid
592 Traverse function
0 1 Traverse function valid only in External operation mode
A300 selection
2 Traverse function valid regardless of the operation mode
593 Maximum amplitude
10% 0 to 25% Level of amplitude during traverse operation
A301 amount
Amplitude compensation
594 Compensation amount during amplitude inversion (from
amount during 10% 0 to 50%
A302 acceleration to deceleration)
deceleration
Amplitude compensation
595 Compensation amount during amplitude inversion (from
amount during 10% 0 to 50%
A303 deceleration to acceleration)
acceleration
596 Amplitude acceleration
5s 0.1 to 3600 s Time period of acceleration during traverse operation
A304 time
597 Amplitude deceleration
5s 0.1 to 3600 s Time period of deceleration during traverse operation
A305 time
• Setting Pr.592 Traverse function selection = "1 or 2" will enable the traverse function.
• Assigning the Traverse function selection (X37) signal to the input terminal will enable the traverse function only when the
X37 signal is ON. (When the X37 signal is not assigned, the traverse function is always available.) To input the X37 signal,
set "37" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal.
Output frequency(Hz) Traverse operation
f0: set frequency
f2 f1: amplitude amount from the set frequency
f1 Pr.7 (f0 × Pr.593/100)
f2: compensation amount at transition from
f0
acceleration to deceleration
f1 (f1 × Pr.594/100)
f3 f3: compensation amount at transition from
Pr.8
deceleration to acceleration
(f1 × Pr.595/100)
Pr.7 t2 t1 t1: time from acceleration during traverse
(Pr.597) (Pr.596) operation (Time from (f0 − f1) to (f0 + f1))
Time(s) (Pr.596)
STF(STR) t2: time from deceleration during traverse
ON
signal operation (Time from (f0 + f1) to (f0 − f1))
X37 signal ON (Pr.597)
• The motor accelerates to the set frequency f0 according to the normal Pr.7 Acceleration time at turn ON of the start
command (STF or STR).
• When the output frequency reaches f0 and the X37 signal turns ON, the inverter begins traverse operation and accelerates
to f0 + f1. The acceleration time at this time is according to the Pr.596 setting. (If the X37 signal turns ON before the output
frequency reaches f0, traverse operation begins after the output frequency reaches f0.)
• After the inverter accelerates to f0 + f1, this is compensated with f2 (f1 Pr.594), and the inverter decelerates to f0 - f1. The
deceleration time at this time is according to the Pr.597 setting. 5
• After the inverter decelerates to f0 - f1, this is compensated with f3 (f1 Pr.595), and the inverter accelerates again to f0 +
f1.
• When the X37 signal turns OFF during traverse operation, the inverter accelerates/decelerates to f0 according to the
normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr.7, Pr.8). If the start command (STF or STR) is turned OFF during traverse GROUP
A
operation, the inverter decelerates to a stop according to the normal deceleration time (Pr.8).
PARAMETERS 373
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• If the set frequency (f0) and traverse operation parameters (Pr.598 to Pr.597) are changed during traverse operation, this is
applied in operations after the output frequency reaches f0 before the change was made.
• If the output frequency exceeds Pr.1 Maximum frequency or Pr.2 Minimum frequency during traverse operation, the
output frequency is clamped at the maximum/minimum frequency when the set pattern exceeds the maximum/minimum
frequency.
• When the traverse function and S-pattern acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 "0") are selected, S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration operation occurs only in the range operated at the normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr.7, Pr.8).
Acceleration/deceleration during traverse operation is performed linearly.
• If stall prevention activates during traverse operation, traverse operation stops and normal operation begins. When stall
prevention operation is completed, the inverter accelerates/decelerates to f0 at the normal acceleration/deceleration time
(Pr.7, Pr.8). After the output frequency reaches f0, the traverse operation begins again.
• If the value of the amplitude inversion compensation amount (Pr.594, Pr.595) is too large, an overvoltage trip or stall
prevention occurs, and pattern operation cannot be performed as set.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.3 Base frequency page 497
Pr.180 to Pr.186 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.190 to Pr.195 (output terminal function selection) page 288
374 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
1469 Number of cleaning times
0 0 to 255 Displays the number of cleaning times. (Read-only)
A420 monitor
1470 Number of cleaning times
0 0 to 255 Set the number of cleaning times.
A421 setting
1471
Cleaning trigger selection 0 0 to 15 Select the condition to start cleaning.
A422
1472 Cleaning reverse rotation
30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the reverse rotation frequency for cleaning operation.
A423 frequency
1473 Cleaning reverse rotation Set the operating time after the cleaning reverse rotation
5s 0 to 3600 s
A424 operation time frequency is reached.
1474 Cleaning forward rotation 0 to 590 Hz Set the forward rotation frequency for cleaning operation.
9999
A425 frequency 9999 As set in Pr.1472.
Set the operating time after the cleaning forward rotation
1475 Cleaning forward rotation 0 to 3600 s
frequency is reached.
9999
A426 operation time
9999 As set in Pr.1473.
1476 Set the stop time when the rotation is switched from forward
Cleaning stop time 5s 0 to 3600 s
A427 to reverse or from reverse to forward.
1477 0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration time during cleaning.
Cleaning acceleration time 9999
A428 9999 Acceleration time for normal operation
1478 0 to 3600 s Set the deceleration time during cleaning.
Cleaning deceleration time 9999
A429 9999 Deceleration time for normal operation
1479 0 Time trigger disabled
Cleaning time trigger 0
A430 0.1 to 6000 h Cleaning is performed at a set time interval.
Trigger ON ON
Y215 ON OFF
Cleaning operation
Output
frequency Pr.1475
5
Pr.8
Pr.1474 Pr.7
Normal Pr.1476 Pr.1477 Pr.1478 Pr.1476
operation Pr.1476
0Hz
Time
Pr.1476
GROUP
The cleaning operation is
Pr.1477 Pr.1478 terminated when the number of A
Pr.1472
cleaning operation times reaches
Pr.1473 the Pr.1470 setting.
3
2
Pr.1469 0 1
• When the number of times of cleaning operation is an odd number, the operation in the opposite direction to the start
command is performed. When the number of cleaning times is an even number, the operation in the start command
direction is performed.
PARAMETERS 375
(A) Application parameters
• When the motor rotation direction is restricted in Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection, rotation is performed not in
the prohibited direction but in the permitted direction.
STF ON
Y215 ON
Output frequency
Pr.1474
0Hz
Time
Pr.1471 bit 15 7 0
bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Decimal Binary 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
15 1111
14 1110 bit 0 Start trigger
13 1101 bit 1 Output current trigger
12 1100 bit 2 PID upper/lower limit trigger
11 1011 bit 3 Load warning trigger
10 1010
9 1001
8 1000
7 0111 Pr.1471 setting
6 0110
5 0101
4 0100 Set the decimal converted
3 0011 value of the bit image.
2 0010
1 0001
0 0000
: Trigger enabled, : Trigger disabled
376 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
• Turning ON of X98 signal can be used as a trigger to start the cleaning operation. For the X98 signal input, set "98" in any
of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign the function.
• When using the cleaning function for the purpose of periodic maintenance in such applications that require continuous
pump operation for a long time, use a time trigger. The time trigger is enabled by setting a time period before starting the
cleaning operation in Pr.1479 Cleaning time trigger. The timer starts when the timer starting condition is satisfied, and the
cleaning operation is performed at a time interval set in Pr.1479.
• Starting conditions of the timer for a time trigger
- When the start command turns ON
- When the cleaning ends
STF ON
Start command ON trigger Time trigger Time trigger
Y215 ON ON ON
Output
Pr.1479 Pr.1479
frequency
0 Hz
Time
NOTE
• When a trigger occurs during the following operations, the cleaning operation is started upon completion of the following
operations.
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, online auto tuning at startup
• The following functions are disabled during cleaning operation.
PID control automatic switchover frequency, PID control SLEEP function, pre-charge fault, determination of pre-charge
ending with parameters, PID gain tuning, electronic bypass with the automatic switchover frequency of the inverter (Pr.139),
automatic switchover of auxiliary motors of the multi-pump function, output stop function (Pr.522), restart at every start during
cleaning
• When the stall prevention is activated during acceleration of the cleaning function, the operation is shifted to the cleaning
deceleration operation. 5
• If the number of cleaning times set in Pr.1470 is an even number, the operation is shifted to the normal operation after the
cleaning forward/reverse operation time (Pr.1473/Pr.1475) of the final cleaning operation has elapsed.
• Changing the terminal assignment with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters
after confirming the function of each terminal. GROUP
A
Parameters
??????? referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time page 187
PARAMETERS 377
(A) Application parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
Set the value at which control is automatically switched to
127 PID control automatic 0 to 590 Hz
PID control.
9999
A612 switchover frequency
9999 Without PID control automatic switchover function
0, 10, 11, 20, 21,
50, 51, 60, 61, 70,
71, 80, 81, 90, 91,
128 Select how to input the deviation value, measured value and
PID action selection 0 100, 101, 1000,
A610 1001, 1010, 1011,
set point, and forward and reverse action.
2000, 2001, 2010,
2011
If a narrow proportional band is set (small parameter setting
value), the manipulated amount changes considerably by
slight changes in the measured value. As a result, response
129 0.1 to 1000%
improves as the proportional band becomes narrower,
PID proportional band 100%
A613 though stability worsens as shown by the occurrence of
hunting. Gain Kp=1/proportional band
9999 Without proportional band
With deviation step input, this is the time (Ti) used for
obtaining the same manipulated amount as proportional
130 0.1 to 3600 s band (P) by only integral (I) action. Arrival to the set point
PID integral time 1s
becomes quicker the shorter an integral time is set, though
A614
hunting is more likely to occur.
9999 Without integral control
Sets the upper limit. The FUP signal is output when the
feedback value exceeds this setting. The maximum input
131 0 to 100%
(20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is
PID upper limit 9999
A601 equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
Set the lower limit. The FDN signal is output when the
measured value falls below the setting range. The maximum
132 0 to 100%
input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is
PID lower limit 9999
A602 equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
133 0 to 100% Set the set point during PID control.
PID action set point 9999
A611 9999 Set point set by Pr.128.
With deviation ramp input, this is the time (Td) used for
obtaining the manipulated amount only by proportional
134 0.01 to 10 s
action (P). Response to changes in deviation increase
PID differential time 9999
A615 greatly as the differential time increases.
9999 Without differential control
The Y48 signal is output when the absolute value of the
553 0 to 100%
deviation exceeds the deviation limit value.
PID deviation limit 9999
A603
9999 No function
The action when the upper or lower limit for a measured
554 PID signal operation value input is detected or when a limit for the deviation is
0 0 to 3, 10 to 13
A604 selection detected can be selected. The operation for PID output
suspension function can be selected.
If the status where the output frequency after PID
575 Output interruption 0 to 3600 s calculation is less than the Pr.576 setting is continuously the
1s
A621 detection time Pr.575 set time or more, inverter running is suspended.
9999 Without output interruption function
576 Output interruption
0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which output interruption is performed.
A622 detection level
Level at which the PID output suspension function is
577 Output interruption
1000% 900 to 1100% released.
A623 cancel level Set "Pr.577 -1000%".
378 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
1 Input of set point, deviation value from terminal 1
2 Input of set point, deviation value from terminal 2
609 PID set point/deviation 3 Input of set point, deviation value from terminal 4
2
A624 input selection Input of set point, deviation value via CC-Link
4
communication
5 Input of set point, deviation value by PLC function
1 Terminal 1 input
2 Terminal 2 input
3 Terminal 4 input
Direct input of the measured value
CC-Link
4
communication input
610 PID measured value 5 PLC function input
3
A625 input selection 101 Terminal 1 input
102 Terminal 2 input
103 Terminal 4 input Input of the square root of the
CC-Link measured value
104
communication input
105 PLC function input
Integral stopped at limited frequency, integral cleared during
0
output interruption
Integral continued at limited frequency, integral cleared
1
1015 Integral stop selection during output interruption
0
A607 at limited frequency Integral stopped at limited frequency, integral stopped
10
during output interruption
Integral continued at limited frequency, integral stopped
11
during output interruption
1460 PID multistage set point
A683 1
1461 PID multistage set point
A684 2
1462 PID multistage set point
A685 3
Seven set points can be set according to the combination of
1463 PID multistage set point
9999 0 to 100% the PDI1, PDI2, and PDI3 signals.
A686 4 9999: Not selected
1464 PID multistage set point
A687 5
1465 PID multistage set point
A688 6
1466 PID multistage set point
A689 7
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 379
(A) Application parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0, 10, 11, 20, 21,
50, 51, 60, 61, 70,
71, 80, 81, 90, 91,
753 Second PID action
0 100, 101, 1000, Refer to Pr.128.
A650 selection 1001, 1010, 1011,
2000, 2001, 2010,
2011
Second PID control
754
automatic switchover 9999 0 to 600 Hz, 9999 Refer to Pr.127.
A652
frequency
755 Second PID action set
9999 0 to 100%, 9999 Refer to Pr.133.
A651 point
756 Second PID 0.1 to 1000%,
100 Refer to Pr.129.
A653 proportional band 9999
757 Second PID integral 0.1 to 3600 s,
1s Refer to Pr.130.
A654 time 9999
758 Second PID differential
9999 0.01 to 10 s, 9999 Refer to Pr.134.
A655 time
Second PID set point/
1140
deviation input 2 1 to 5 Refer to Pr.609. Set the second PID control.
A664 For how to enable the second PID
selection
control, refer to page 392.
1141 Second PID measured
3 1 to 5, 101 to 105 Refer to Pr.610.
A665 value input selection
1143
Second PID upper limit 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 Refer to Pr.131.
A641
1144
Second PID lower limit 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 Refer to Pr.132.
A642
Refer to Pr.553.
1145 Second PID deviation
9999 0 to 100%, 9999 (Y205 signal is
A643 limit output.)
1146 Second PID signal
0 0 to 3, 10 to 13 Refer to Pr.554.
A644 operation selection
Second output
1147
interruption detection 1s 0 to 3600 s, 9999 Refer to Pr.575.
A661
time
Second output
1148
interruption detection 0 Hz 0 to 600 Hz Refer to Pr.576.
A662
level
1149 Second output
1000% 900 to 1100% Refer to Pr.577.
A663 interruption cancel level
380 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Note that the input of terminal 1 is added to the set point of terminal 2 as a set point.
Set "0" to Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment. When Pr.858 "0", PID control is invalid.
PI action is a combination of proportional action (P) and integral action (I), and
Deviation Set point
applies a manipulated amount according to the size of the deviation and
Measured value
transition or changes over time.
P action
[Example of action when the measured value changes in a stepped manner] Time
(Note) PI action is the result of P and I actions being added together. I action
Time
PI action
Time
• PD action
PD action is a combination of proportional action (P) and differential action (D),
Set point
and applies a manipulated amount according to the speed of the deviation to
Deviation
improve excessive characteristics.
Measured value
P action
[Example of action when the measured value changes proportionately] Time
D action 5
(Note) PD action is the result of P and D actions being added together. Time
PD
action GROUP
Time A
PARAMETERS 381
(A) Application parameters
• PID action
I action
Time
D action
Time
PID action
Time
• Reverse action
When deviation X = (set point - measured value) is a plus value, the manipulated amount (output frequency) is increased, and
when the deviation is a minus value, the manipulated amount is decreased.
Deviation Set point
[Heating]
+ X>0
Set Cold Increase
point X<0 Hot Decrease
- Measured value
Feedback signal
(measured value)
• Forward action
When deviation X = (set point - measured value) is a minus value, the manipulated amount (output frequency) is increased,
and when the deviation is a plus value, the manipulated amount is decreased.
Measured value
[Cooling]
+ X>0 Set point
Set Too cold Decrease
point - X<0 Hot Increase
Feedback signal
(measured value) Deviation
Deviation
PID action setting
Plus Minus
Reverse action
Forward action
382 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Connection diagram
Sink logic
Inverter
MCCB Pump
Pr.128=20 Motor
R/L1 U
Pr.183=14 Power supply S/L2 V M P
T/L3 W
Pr.191=47
Pr.192=16 Forward
rotation STF
Pr.193=14 STR
Reverse
Pr.194=15 rotation
RT(X14)*3 2-wire type 3-wire
PID control
selection SD ∗2(PID)SU During PID action Detector type
∗2(FUP)FU Upper limit
Setting 10 ∗2(FDN)OL Lower limit
- + + - +
Potentiometer 2 ∗2(RL)IPF
Forward rotation
output
(Set point setting) Reverse rotation
5
output
1 (OUT) (24V)
4 *4 SE Output signal common (COM)
0 24V
Power
supply ∗1
AC1φ
200/220V 50/60Hz
Prepare a power supply matched to the power supply specification of the detector.
The output signal terminal to be used differs according to the Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) setting.
The input signal terminal to be used differs according to the Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) setting.
The AU signal need not be input.
Selection of deviation value, measured value and set point input method,
and PID action method (Pr.128, Pr.609, Pr.610)
• Using Pr.128, select the input method for the PID set point, measured value detected by the meter, and externally
calculated deviation. Also, select forward or reverse action.
• Switch the power voltage/current specifications of terminals 2 and 4 by Pr.73 Analog input selection or Pr.267 Terminal 4
input selection to match the specification of the input device. After changing the Pr.73 and Pr.267 settings, check the
voltage/current input selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 306 for the
setting.)
Pr.128 Pr.609
PID action Set point input Measured value input Deviation input
setting Pr.610
0 PID invalid ― ― ―
10 Reverse action
― ― Terminal 1
11 Invalid Forward action
20 Reverse action
Terminal 2 or Pr.133 Terminal 4 ―
21 Forward action
50
51
Reverse action
Forward action
― ―
CC-Link communication,
BACnet communication 5
60 Reverse action CC-Link communication, CC-Link communication,
―
61 Forward action BACnet communication BACnet communication
70 Reverse action PLC function
― ―
71 Forward action (with frequency reflected) GROUP
PARAMETERS 383
(A) Application parameters
Pr.128 Pr.609
PID action Set point input Measured value input Deviation input
setting Pr.610
1000 Reverse action
According to Pr.609 According to Pr.610 ―
1001 Forward action
1010 Reverse action
― ― According to Pr.609
1011 Forward action
Reverse action (without
2000
frequency reflected)
Valid According to Pr.609 According to Pr.610 ―
Forward action (without
2001
frequency reflected)
Reverse action (without
2010
frequency reflected)
― ― According to Pr.609
Forward action (without
2011
frequency reflected)
When Pr.133 "9999", the Pr.133 setting is valid.
For the details of CC-Link communication, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE.
For the details of the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.
• The set point/deviation input method can also be flexibly selected by Pr.609 PID set point/deviation input selection and
the measured value input method can be selected by Pr.610 PID measured value input selection. Selection by Pr.609
and Pr.610 is valid when Pr.128 = "1000 to 2011".
Setting value
Command source Input method
Pr.609 Pr.610
1 1 Terminal 1
2 2 Terminal 2
3 3 Terminal 4 Direct input
4 4 CC-Link communication
5 5 PLC function
― 101 Terminal 1
― 102 Terminal 2
― 103 Terminal 4 Square root input
― 104 CC-Link communication
― 105 PLC function
When the same command source has been selected for the set point and measured value using Pr.609 and Pr.610, set point input is invalid.
(The inverter runs at set point 0%)
• When Pr.610 PID measured value input selection = "101 to 105", the square root of the input value is used as the
measured value.
Flow rate
NOTE
• When terminals 2 and 4 are selected for deviation input, perform bias calibration using C3 and C6 to prevent a minus voltage
from being entered as the deviation input signal. Input of a minus voltage might damage devices and the inverter.
384 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
• The following shows the relationship between the input values of the analog input terminals and set point, measured value
and deviation. (Calibration parameter initial values)
NOTE
• Always perform calibration after changing the voltage/input specification with Pr.73, Pr.267, and the voltage/current input
selection switch.
5
When functions are not assigned to the input terminals, the signals are treated as OFF.
NOTE
• The multistage set point input is not available for the second PID.
• The priority of the set point input is as follows: Pr.1460 to Pr.1466 > Pr.133 > Pr.128.
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 385
(A) Application parameters
Input/output signals
• Assigning the PID control valid terminal signal (X14) to the input terminal by Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection) enables PID control to be performed only when the X14 signal is turned ON. When the X14 signal is OFF,
regular inverter running is performed without PID action.
• Input signal
Pr.178 to Pr.189
Signal Function Description
setting
X14 PID control valid terminal 14
When the signal is assigned to the input terminal, PID control is enabled
Second PID control valid
X80 80 when the signal is ON.
terminal
PID multistage set point
PDI1 38
setting 1
PID multistage set point The set point set in Pr.1460 to Pr.1466 can be selected by combining the
PDI2 39
setting 2 ON/OFF status of the signals.
PID multistage set point
PDI3 40
setting 3
PID forward/reverse
X64 64
action switchover PID control is switched between forward and reverse action without
Second PID forward/ changing parameters by turning ON the signal.
X79 79
reverse action switchover
X72 PID integral value reset 72
Second PID P control Integral and differential values can be reset by turning the signal ON.
X73 73
switchover
• Output signal
Pr.190 to Pr.196
setting value
Signal Function Description
positive negative
logic logic
FUP PID upper limit 15 115 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr.131 PID upper limit
FUP2 Second PID upper limit 201 301 (Pr.1143 Second PID upper limit).
FDN PID lower limit 14 114 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr.132 PID lower limit
FDN2 Second PID lower limit 200 300 (Pr.1144 Second PID lower limit).
PID forward/reverse
RL 16 116 "Hi" is output when the output display of the parameter unit is forward
rotation output
rotation (FWD), and "Low" is output when the display is reverse rotation
Second PID forward/
RL2 202 302 (REV) and stop (STOP).
reverse rotation output
During PID control Turns ON during PID control.
PID 47 147
activated When the PID calculation result is not reflected to the output frequency
(Pr.128 < "2000"), the PID signal turns OFF at turn OFF of the start signal.
Second During PID When the PID calculation result is reflected to the output frequency
PID2 203 303
control activated (Pr.128 "2000"), the PID signal turns ON regardless of the start signal
status during PID calculation.
SLEEP PID output interruption 70 170 Set Pr.575 Output interruption detection time (Pr.1147 Second output
During second PID output interruption detection time) "9999". This signal turns ON when the
SLEEP2 204 304
shutoff PID output suspension function is activated.
NOTE
• Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.
386 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Output frequency
Without PID
control PID control
Pr.127
Time
STF
PID
Inverter operation
Pr.554 setting
At FUP signal, FDN signal output At Y48 signal output At SLEEP operation start
0 (Initial value) Signal output only
Signal output only
1 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
Coasts to stop
2 Signal output only Signal output + output shutoff
3 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID) (E.PID)
10 Signal output only
Signal output only
11 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
Deceleration stop
12 Signal output only Signal output + output shutoff
13 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID) (E.PID)
When each of Pr.131, Pr.132 and Pr.553 corresponding to each of the FUP, FDN and Y48 signals is set to "9999" (function not
activated), signal output and protective function are disabled.
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 387
(A) Application parameters
Output frequency
Pr.576
RUN OFF
PID
SLEEP ON
Deviation
Output frequency
Deceleration stop ∗1
Pr.576
RUN OFF
PID
SLEEP ON
When the PID output shutoff release level is reached during a deceleration stop, output shutoff is released, operation is re-accelerated and PID control
is continued. During deceleration Pr.576 Output interruption detection level is invalid.
388 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Monitor range
Parameter Monitor Minimum
Terminal Terminal Operation Remarks
settings description increment
FM/CA AM panel
52 PID set point
Second PID 0.1% 0 to 100%
92
set point
PID measured "0" is displayed at all times when PID control
53 is based in deviation input.
value
Second PID 0.1% 0 to 100%
93 measured
value
PID measured
67 The measured value is also displayed when
value 2
PID control is invalid.
Second PID 0.1% 0 to 100%
"0" is displayed at all times when PID control
95 measured
is based in deviation input.
value 2
900% to
54 PID deviation
Setting not -100% to 1100% or Using Pr.290 Monitor negative output
0.1%
Second PID available 100% -100% to selection, minus values can be output to the
94
deviation 100% terminal AM and displayed on the operation
PID panel.
91 manipulated 900% to Even if minus display is enabled, the display
variable Setting not -100% to 1100% or range is 900% to 1100% in monitors on the
0.1% operation panel. (0% is offset and displayed
Second PID available 100% -100% to
as 1000%.)
5
96 manipulated 100%
variable
When C42(Pr.934) and C44(Pr.935) are set, the minimum increment changes from unit % to no unit, and the monitor range can be changed.
(Refer to page 399.)
When the minus value display is set disabled using Pr.290, the terminal AM output becomes "0".
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 389
(A) Application parameters
Adjustment procedure
When Pr.128 "0", PID control is enabled.
Enable PID control Set the set point, measured value and deviation input methods at Pr.128,
Pr.609 and Pr.610.
Adjust the PID control parameters of Pr.127, Pr.129 to Pr.134, Pr.553, Pr.554,
Setting the parameter
Pr.575 to Pr.577.
Pr.129, Pr.130 and Pr.134 are adjusted automatically by PID gain tuning.
PID gain tuning
(Refer to page 394.)
Set the I/O terminals for PID control. (Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal
Terminal setting
function selection), Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection))
When the X14 signal is assigned to the input terminal, PID control is enabled by
Turn the X14 signal ON
the X14 signal turning ON.
Start
390 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Calibration example
Adjust room temperature to 25°C by PID control using a detector that outputs 4 mA at 0°C and 20 mA at 50°C.)
Start
Make calibration. Make the following calibration ∗1 when the target setting input (0 to 5V)
and detector output (4 to 20mA) must be calibrated.
Setting of set point • To set the set point to 50% using voltage input
The terminal 2 specification is 0 V for 0%, and 5 V for 100%. Thus, to set to 50%, input 2.5 V to the terminal 2.
Input a voltage across terminals 2-5
• To set the set point to 50% using parameters
according to the set value %.
Set Pr.133 = "50". (If C42(Pr.934) and C44(Pr.935) ≠ "9999", set "25 (no % conversion)" directly in Pr.133.)
Yes
Is the set point stable?
No
Parameter adjustment Parameter optimization
To stabilize the measured value, change While the measured value is stable
the proportional band (Pr. 129) to a larger throughout the operation status, the
value, the integral time (Pr. 130) to a proportional band (Pr. 129) may be
slightly longer time, and the differential decreased, the integral time (Pr. 130)
time (Pr. 134) to a slightly shorter time. decreased, and the differential time (Pr. 134)
may be increased.
Adjustment end
NOTE
• When the set point is set at Pr.133, the setting frequency of C2 (Pr.902) is equivalent to 0% and the setting frequency of
Pr.125 (Pr.903) is equivalent to 100%.
PARAMETERS 391
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• Set the frequencies set at C5 (Pr.904) and Pr.126 to each of the same values set at C2 (Pr.902) and Pr.125.
• The display unit for analog input can be changed from "%" to "V" or "mA". (Refer to page 316.)
• The figure below shows the results of having performed the calibration above.
[Set point setting] [Measured value] [Manipulated variable]
Manipulated variable (Hz)
(%) (%)
100 100 60
0 0 0
0 5 (V) 0 4 20 (mA) 0 100 Deviation (%)
• The second PID function parameters and signals function in the same way as the following parameters and signals of the
first PID function. Refer to the first PID function when setting the second PID functions.
392 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• Even if the X14 signal is ON, PID control is stopped and multi-speed or JOG operation is performed when the RH, RM, RL, or
REX signal (multi-speed operation) or JOG signal (JOG operation) is input.
• PID control is invalid under the following settings.
Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "6" (Switchover mode)
• Note that input to the terminal 1 is added to the terminals 2 and 4 inputs. For example when Pr.128 = "20 or 21", the terminal
1 input is considered as a set point and added to the set point of the terminal 2.
• To use terminal 4 and 1 inputs in PID control, set "0" (initial value) to Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment and Pr.868
Terminal 1 function assignment. When a value other than "0", PID control is invalid.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 or Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters
after confirming the function of each terminal.
• When PID control is selected, the minimum frequency becomes the frequency of Pr.902 and the maximum frequency
becomes the frequency of Pr.903.
(The Pr.1 Maximum frequency and Pr.2 Minimum frequency settings also are valid.)
• During PID operation, the remote operation function is invalid.
• When control is switched to PID control during normal operation, the frequency during that operation is not carried over, and
the value resulting from PID calculation referenced to 0 Hz becomes the command frequency.
Frequency
command
Frequency command
during normal operation
PID action ON
Normal operation PID operation Normal operation
Parameters referred to
Pr.59 Remote function selection page 194
Pr.73 Analog input selection page 306
Pr.79 Operation mode selection page 200
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection)
Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection page 273
page 288
5
C2 (Pr.902) to C7 (Pr.905) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain page 314
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 393
(A) Application parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
1211 PID gain tuning timeout Set the time after the PID gain tuning starts until a
100 s 1 to 9999 s
A690 time timeout error occurs.
1212 Step manipulated Set the step manipulated amount when using the step
1000% 900 to 1100%
A691 amount response method to perform the PID gain tuning.
Set the cycle for sampling of measurement values when
1213 Step responding
1s 0.01 to 600 s using the step response method to perform the PID gain
A692 sampling cycle tuning.
Set the time after the measurement of the maximum
1214 Timeout time after the
10 s 1 to 9999 s slope until the completion of the tuning when using the
A693 maximum slope step response method to perform the PID gain tuning.
Set the upper limit value of the two-position output when
1215 Limit cycle output upper
1100% 900 to 1100% using the limit cycle method to perform the PID gain
A694 limit tuning.
Set the lower limit value of the two-position output when
1216 Limit cycle output lower
1000% 900 to 1100% using the limit cycle method to perform the PID gain
A695 limit tuning.
1217 Set the hysteresis of the set point when using the limit
Limit cycle hysteresis 1% 0.1 to 10%
A696 cycle method to perform the PID gain tuning.
0, 100 to 102, 111, 112,
1218 Select the target loop, method, and control adjustment
PID gain tuning setting 0 121, 122, 200 to 202,
A697 211, 212, 221, 222
method for the PID gain tuning.
Measured value[%]
Maximum Measured value
slope R variation range Y
(R=Y/T)
Time
Equivalent
waste time L (s) Equivalent time constant T (s)
PID gain tuning start Timeout time after the maximum slope (s)
(Pr.1214)
STF
PID
PGT
• The step manipulated amount (Pr.1212 - 1000) is added to the present manipulated amount.
• The measured value is taken for every sampling cycle of step response (Pr.1213). From the variation between the
measured values (Y) and the time (t), the maximum slope (R) is calculated.
394 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
• The measurement ends when the timeout time after the maximum slope (Pr.1214) elapsed after the maximum slope is
obtained.
• After the integral term is cleared, PID control is performed with the constant to which the change has been applied (the
constant used before PID gain tuning when a fault occurs).
Set point[%]
Time
STF
PID
PGT
Details of the two-position ON/OFF operation
PID control
Initial output of the manipulated amount Two-position ON/OFF operation
operation
When measured value ≤ set point Using measured value ≥ set point + hysteresis (Pr.1217)
Manipulated amount = Upper limit of the output (Pr.1215- Manipulated amount = Lower limit of the output (Pr.1216-
1000) 1000)
Reverse action
When measured value > set point Using measured value ≤ set point - hysteresis (Pr.1217)
Manipulated amount = Lower limit of the output (Pr.1216- Manipulated amount = Upper limit of the output (Pr.1215-
1000) 1000)
When measured value ≤ set point Using measured value ≥ set point + hysteresis (Pr.1217)
Manipulated amount = Lower limit of the output (Pr.1216- Manipulated amount = Upper limit of the output (Pr.1215-
1000) 1000)
Forward action
When measured value > set point Using measured value ≤ set point - hysteresis (Pr.1217)
Manipulated amount = Upper limit of the output (Pr.1215- Manipulated amount = Lower limit of the output (Pr.1216-
1000) 1000)
• The manipulated amount is output at the limit cycle output upper limit (Pr.1215 - 1000). (When measured value > set point,
5
the manipulated amount is once output at the limit cycle lower limit (Pr.1216 - 1000), and then after set point > measured
value is achieved, the manipulated amount is output at the limit cycle output upper limit (Pr.1215 - 1000).)
• The two-position ON/OFF operation is repeated three times. From the waveform data of the values measured for output of GROUP
the second and third two-position operation, the vibration amplitude (Xc) and the vibration cycle (Tc) are measured. A
• From the vibration amplitude (Xc) and the vibration cycle (Tc), the threshold sensitivity (Ku) and the threshold cycle (Tu) are
calculated.
• Each constant is calculated using a formula depending on the Pr.1218 setting, and PID gain tuning is finished.
• After the integral term is cleared, PID control is performed with the constant to which the change has been applied (the
constant used before PID gain tuning when a fault occurs).
PARAMETERS 395
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• Confirm that the measured values are stable when performing PID gain tuning with the step response method. When the
measured values are unstable, the tuning result may not be accurate.
• Accurate measurement of the maximum slope may not be achieved if the Pr.1213 setting is small in the step response
method.
: Parameter to set
396 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Tuning start
• To use the PGT signal, set "81" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function to an
input terminal.
• The PID gain tuning status can be checked with the read value of Pr.1219 or the PID gain tuning status monitor. The PID
gain tuning status monitor is displayed instead of the output voltage monitor.
Status
PID gain tuning status
monitor
2 During tuning
3 Tuning completed
8 Tuning forced end
• When PID gain tuning is completed, the following parameters are automatically set.
Step response method Limit cycle method
Pr. Name
P control PI control PID control PI control PID control
129 (756) PID proportional band
130 (757) PID integral time -
134 (758) PID differential time - - -
: The calculation result is applied. -: "9999" is set.
• To forcibly terminate the tuning during PID gain tuning, perform any of the following operations.
- Turn OFF the PID gain tuning start/forced end signal (PGT).
- Set Pr.1219 PID gain tuning start/status = "8".
- Select the PID gain tuning forced end (8.END) in the function menu on the operation panel (FR-DU08).
- Turn the power supply OFF, reset the inverter, or turn OFF the start command.
NOTE
• By PID gain tuning, the settings of the PID constant parameters (Pr.129, Pr.130, Pr.134, Pr.756 to Pr.758) are automatically
changed. Before performing PID gain tuning, record the PID constant parameter settings before tuning as required.
• PID gain tuning also requires setting of the PID upper limit (Pr.131 or Pr.1143), PID lower limit (Pr.132 or Pr.1144), PID
deviation limit (Pr.553 or Pr.1145).
• Changing the terminal assignment with Pr.178 to Pr.189 may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the
function of each terminal.
• By PID gain tuning, the manipulated amount is changed considerably. In some applications such as a winding machine,
5
materials may be affected.
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 397
(A) Application parameters
Time
Optimal
Measured value[%]
Set point[%] —
Time
Response is slow. • Decrease the proportional band (Pr.129 or Pr.756).
(Larger proportional effect)
Measured value[%]
• Decrease the integral time (Pr.130 or Pr.757).
Set point[%] (Larger integral effect)
Time
NOTE
• When the differential operation is used, adjust the differential time (Pr.134 or Pr.758) while checking the stability and the
response. (Increasing the differential time makes the differential effect larger, and decreasing the differential time makes the
differential effect smaller.)
398 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
Change the PID control-related display unit that is displayed
759 Operation mode 0 to 43 on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter
0
A600 selection unit (FR-PU07).
9999 Without display unit switching
C42 Set the coefficient of the bias side (minimum) of measured
PID display bias 0 to 500
A630 9999 value input.
coefficient
(934) 9999 Displayed in %.
C43
PID display bias analog Set the converted % of the bias side (minimum) current/
A631 20% 0 to 300%
value voltage of measured value input.
(934)
C44 Set the coefficient of the gain side (maximum) of measured
PID display gain 0 to 500
A632 9999 value input.
coefficient
(935) 9999 Displayed in %.
C45
PID display gain analog Set the converted % of the gain side (maximum) current/
A633 100% 0 to 300%
value voltage of measured value input.
(935)
1136 Second PID display bias 0 to 500
9999 Refer to C42 (934)
A670 coefficient 9999
1137 Second PID display bias
20% 0 to 300% Refer to C43 (934)
A671 analog value
1138 Second PID display gain 0 to 500
9999 Refer to C44 (935) Second PID control
A672 coefficient 9999
1139 Second PID display gain
100% 0 to 300% Refer to C45 (935)
A673 analog value
1142 Second PID unit
9999 0 to 43, 9999 Refer to Pr.759
A640 selection
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.
GROUP
A
Gain
Bias C44 (Pr.935)
C42 (Pr.934)
0 20 100%
0 4 20mA
Frequency setting signal
0 1 5V
0 2 10V
C43 (Pr.934) C45 (Pr.935)
PARAMETERS 399
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input specification with Pr.73 and Pr.267, and the voltage/
current input selection switch.
• Take caution when the following condition is satisfied because the inverter recognizes the deviation value as negative
(positive) value even though a positive (negative) deviation is given: Pr.934 (PID bias coefficient) Pr.935 (PID gain
coefficient)
To perform a reverse action, set Pr.128 PID action selection to forward action. Alternatively, to perform a forward action,
set Pr.128 to reverse action.
When the set point=400 and the measured value=360, the Set point 400
Deviation +40
deviation is +40 (>0), but the inverter recognizes the Measured value 360
• The display of the following parameters is changed according to the C42 (Pr.934)), C44 (Pr.935), Pr.1136, and Pr1138
settings.
400 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Changing the PID display coefficient of the LCD operation panel (FR-
LU08), parameter unit (FR-PU07) (Pr.759)
• Use Pr.759 PID unit selection to change the unit displayed on FR-LU08 or FR-PU07. For the coefficient set in
C42(Pr.934) to C44(Pr.935), the displayed units can be changed to the following units.
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 401
(A) Application parameters
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Fault indication with output shutoff immediately after pre-
0
760 Pre-charge fault charge fault occurs.
0
A616 selection Fault indication with deceleration stop after pre-charge fault
1
occurs.
761 0 to 100% Set the measured amount to end the pre-charge operation.
Pre-charge ending level 9999
A617 9999 Without pre-charge ending level
762 0 to 3600 s Set the time to end the pre-charge operation.
Pre-charge ending time 9999
A618 9999 Without pre-charge ending time
Set the upper limit for the pre-charged amount. A pre-charge
763 Pre-charge upper 0 to 100% fault occurs when the measured value exceeds the setting
9999 during pre-charging.
A619 detection level
9999 Without pre-charge upper limit level
Set the time limit for the pre-charged amount. A pre-charge
764 0 to 3600 s
fault occurs when the pre-charge time exceeds the setting.
Pre-charge time limit 9999
A620
9999 Without pre-charge time limit
Set the change increment amount per second after the
0 to 100% automatic switchover frequency is reached. (for vertical
1132 Pre-charge change pumps).
9999
A626 increment amount
Constant-speed operation after the automatic switchover
9999
frequency is reached (for horizontal pumps).
765 Second pre-charge fault
0 0, 1 Refer to Pr.760.
A656 selection
766 Second pre-charge 0 to 100%,
9999 Refer to Pr.761.
A657 ending level 9999
767 Second pre-charge 0 to 3600 s,
9999 Refer to Pr.762.
A658 ending time 9999 Set the second pre-charge function.
768 Second pre-charge 0 to 100%, The second pre-charge function is
9999 Refer to Pr.763. valid when the RT signal is ON.
A659 upper detection level 9999
769 Second pre-charge time 0 to 3600 s,
9999 Refer to Pr.764.
A660 limit 9999
Second pre-charge
1133 0 to 100%,
change increment 9999 Refer to Pr.1132.
A666 9999
amount
402 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• During the pre-charge operation, it is regarded as integrated value=estimated value. The motor speed may drop shortly from
the automatic switchover frequency depending on the parameter settings.
• Parameter changes and switchover to the second PID control are applied immediately. If PID control has not started when
the settings were changed, PID control starts with changed settings. (If PID control has already started, these settings do not
apply. If the changed settings already satisfies a condition to start PID control, the PID control starts as soon as these are
changed.)
• The pre-charge also ends when PID control is set to invalid, the start command has been turned OFF, and output has been
shut off.
Measured value[PSI]
Pr.761
Ending level
Time
PID control
Output frequency[Hz]
Pr.127
0Hz Time
STF
Y49
- When Pr.1132 Pre-charge change increment amount "9999" (vertical pumps), PID control is performed so that the
change increment amount of the set point equals the Pr.1132 setting after the automatic switchover frequency is reached
until the pre-charge ending condition is satisfied. (Although PID control is performed after the automatic switchover
frequency is reached until the pre-charge ends, the status is regarded as the one during pre-charge.)
5
Measured value[PSI] Ending level
Pr.761
Target
Measured value GROUP
Time A
PID control
Output frequency[Hz]
Pr.127
0Hz Time
STF
Y49
PARAMETERS 403
(A) Application parameters
• When the elapsed time reaches the pre-charge ending time (Pr.762 Pre-charge ending time "9999")
The pre-charge operation ends when the pre-charge time reaches the Pr.762 setting or higher, then the PID control is
performed.
Output frequency[Hz]
Pr.127
Ending time
Pr.762 PID control
0Hz Time
STF
Y49
Pr.127
PID control
Time
0Hz
STF
10ms or more
X77
Y49
NOTE
• When the PID output suspension (SLEEP) function is in use, and the X77 signal is set to valid after this function is released,
set the X77 signal to OFF after checking that the during pre-charge operation signal (Y49) is OFF.
• When the PID output suspension (SLEEP) function is in use, and PID control is to be performed immediately after this
function is released, leave the X77 signal ON until PID control ends.
• When the pre-charge operation is valid, the pre-charge operation is performed at the output shutoff cancellation (MRS signal,
etc.). (The pre-charge operation is also performed in the case of instantaneous power failure when the automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure is valid.)
• When the control method is changed to PID control from a control with higher priority in frequency command (multi-speed
setting, Jog operation, etc.), the motor is accelerated/decelerated until its speed reaches the automatic switchover frequency
(Pr.127), and the pre-charge is performed.
NOTE
• For Pr.764 Pre-charge time limit, set a value greater than Pr.762 Pre-charge ending time.
• For Pr.763 Pre-charge upper detection level, set a value greater than Pr.761 Pre-charge ending level.
404 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Time
Output frequency[Hz]
Pr.127 When Pr.760="0",
output is immediately shut off.
Pr.764
0Hz Time
STF
Y49
Y51
ALM
E.PCH
• Example of protective function measured value limit (Pr.760 = "1")
Measured value[PSI]
Pr.763
Time
Output frequency[Hz]
Pr.127
When Pr.760="1",
output is shut off after the motor decelerates to a stop.
0Hz
Time
STF
Y49
Y53
ALM
E.PCH
NOTE
• The second PID pre-charge function is valid also when the first pre-charge function is set to invalid and the second pre-
charge function is set.
• When "10" (second function enabled only during constant-speed operation) is set to Pr.155, the second PID function is not
selected even if the RT signal turns ON.
PARAMETERS 405
(A) Application parameters
POINT
• Refer to page 378 to set PID control.
• When using the SLEEP function, refer to page 388 to set the function.
406 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Flow rateQ
Qmax
Q3
Q2
Q1
Pr. 579 = 2
Motor 1 (M1)
Motor 2 (M2)
Motor 3 (M3)
5
Motor 4 (M4)
∗2 ∗2
Pr. 579 = 3 Driven
Motor 1 (M1) by inverter
GROUP
NOTE
• The motor 1 (M1) starts first when power is turned ON for the first time or after inverter reset.
• When the Pr.578 or Pr.579 setting has been changed, The motor 1 (M1) starts first.
PARAMETERS 407
(A) Application parameters
Connection diagram
• Basic system
Distributed water
(Pr.579="0") MC
M4
- Sink logic
Pump 4
RO4
- Pr.183=14 M3
- Pr.185=64 RO3
Pump 3
- Pr.194=72 M2
Pump 2
- Pr.193=73 Inverter RO2
- Pr.194=74
Power
supply RST UVW M1
Pump 1
10 ∗2(RO2)FU
Setting MC RO3
For 2-wire type Detector
potentiometer 2 ∗2(RO3)OL
(Set point setting) - +
5 MC RO4
∗2(RO4)IPF 24VDC
1
SE
4*4
0 24V
∗1
Power supply
Prepare the power supply in accordance with the power supply specifications of the detector.
The applied output signal terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection).
The applied input signal terminals differ by the settings of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
There is no need to input AU signal.
408 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
• Alternative system (Pr.579="1"), direct system (Pr.579="2"), alternative direct system (Pr.579="3")
- Sink logic
- Pr.183=14, Pr.185=64, Pr.194=75, Pr.193=71, Pr.192=76, Pr.191=72, Pr.190=77
- Pr.320=73, Pr.321=78, Pr.322=74
Inverter
Distributed water
MC∗2
Power RST UVW M1
supply
MC RIO1
Forward rotation STF RIO1 Pump 4
∗3(RIO1)FU
Reverse rotation STR RO1 RO1
PID control ∗3(RO1)OL
selection RT(X14)*4 M2
RIO2
RIO2
∗3(RIO2)IPF Pump 3
PID forward/ JOG(X64)*4
reverse action RO2
switchover SD ∗3(RO2)SU RO2
RIO3
10 ∗3(RIO3)RUN
Setting M3
potentiometer 2 SE RIO3
Pump 2
(Set point setting) FR-A8AR
5 MC
(Option)*1 RO3 RO3
DC24V
1 ∗5(RO3)1A
M4
4∗6 1C RIO4
RIO4
Pump 1
∗5(RIO4)2A
RO4 Detector
2C
RO4 Supplied water
∗5(RO4)3A - +
0 24V
∗7
Power supply
When driving three or more motors, use the plug-in option (FR-A8AR).
Always provide mechanical interlocks for the MC.
The applied output signal terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection).
The applied input signal terminals differ by the settings of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
The applied output signal terminals differ by the settings of Pr.320 to Pr.322 (RA output selection).
There is no need to input AU signal.
Prepare the commercial power supply in accordance with the power supply specifications of the detector.
I/O signals
• When the PID control valid (X14) signal is assigned to the input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal
function selection), the multi-pump function is enabled only at turn-ON of the X14 signal.
• Use Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) or plug-in option (FR-A8AR) to assign functions of motor
control signal to Pr.320 to Pr.322 (RA output selection). (Only positive logic is available.)
Pr.190 to Pr.196 and Pr.320 to Pr.322 settings
Output signal Function
Positive logic Negative logic
SLEEP 70 170 PID output interruption
RO1 71 —
Commercial power supply side motor 1 5
connection RO1
Commercial power supply side motor 2
RO2 72 —
connection RO2
Commercial power supply side motor 3
RO3 73 — GROUP
connection RO3 A
Commercial power supply side motor 4
RO4 74 —
connection RO4
RIO1 75 — Inverter side motor 1 connection RIO1
RIO2 76 — Inverter side motor 2 connection RIO2
RIO3 77 — Inverter side motor 3 connection RIO3
RIO4 78 — Inverter side motor 4 connection RIO4
PARAMETERS 409
(A) Application parameters
Maximum frequency
Pr. 584
Auxiliary motor 1
starting frequency
Variation
Pr. 584-Pr. 587
Pr. 587
Auxiliary motor 1
stopping frequency
Minimum frequency
Flow
Pr. 591 Auxiliary motor stop detection time
• Switchover timing at a start (stop) of an auxiliary motor 1 in the direct system (Pr.579="2") and alternative direct system
(Pr.579="3")
Maximum frequency
Pr. 584
Auxiliary motor 1
starting frequency
Variation
Pr. 587 Pr. 584 - Pr. 587
Auxiliary motor 1
stopping frequency
Minimum frequency
Flow
410 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Output
frequency Motor connection occurs
Pr.20
Motor
Pr.583 disconnection occurs
Time
Pr.582 Pr.591 Pr.583
PARAMETERS 411
(A) Application parameters
Timing diagram
• When using four motors in the basic system (Pr.579="0")
STF
(STR)
RO2
RO3
RO4
Pr.590 Pr.590 Pr.590
Pr.126 Pr.126 Pr.126
Pr.591 Pr.591 Pr.591 Pr.575
Commercial
power
M2 supply
operation
Commercial
M3 power
supply
operation
Commercial
M4 power
supply
operation
SLEEP
RIO1
RIO2
RO1
RO2
Pr.590
Pr.584
Pr.125 Pr.575
Commercial
Pr.591 power supply operation
M1 Pr.576
Inverter
operation Pr.587
SLEEP Pr.590
C2(Pr.902) Pr.125
Pr.584
Commercial
M2 power supply operation Inverter
operation
412 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
RIO2
RO1
RO2
Pr. 580 Pr. 580
Pr. 590
Pr. 125
Pr. 584
Commercial power
supply operation
M1 Inverter Pr. 581
operation
Inverter
Pr. 590 operation
Pr. 125
Pr. 584
Commercial power
Pr. 581 Pr. 591 supply operation
M2
Inverter operation
Pr. 587
Inverter operation C2 (902)
NOTE
• When a start signal is turned OFF while running, MC (RO1 to RO4) turns OFF and the motor decelerates.
• When a protective function is activated while running, MC (RO1 to RO4) turns OFF and the inverter output is shut off.
• When using two motors in the alternative direct system (Pr.579="3")
RIO1
RIO2
RO1
RO2
Pr.580 Pr.580
Pr.590 Pr.581
Pr.57+Pr.58
Pr.125
Pr.584 Commercial
Pr.575
power supply Motor
Motor Pr.581
M1 operation coasting
coasting
Inverter
operation SLEEP Pr.590 Pr.580
The motor is
driven by inverter Commercial
Pr.584 Motor power supply
Pr.581 Pr.591 after frequency
M2 search. coasting operation
NOTE
• When the start signal is turned OFF during operation, the inverter-driven motor is decelerated to stop. The motors under
commercial power supply operation are switched over to inverter-driven operation one at a time and decelerated to stop after
5
frequency search in order from the longest operation time.
• When a protective function is activated while running, MC (RO1 to RO4) turns OFF and the inverter output is shut off.
• When the MRS signal is turned ON during operation, the inverter output is shut off and the running motors coast to a stop.
GROUP
Although the motor with the longest operating time of the commercial power supply operation is switched to the inverter
A
operation after elapse of time set in Pr.591 Auxiliary motor stop detection time, the output shutoff status remains. When
the MRS signal is turned OFF, the inverter-driven operation starts after frequency search.
• If the starting signal is turned ON during deceleration regardless of the Pr.579 setting, the multi-pump operation is performed
again.
Parameters referred to
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments page 187
Pr.57 Restart coasting time, Pr.58 Restart cushion time page 414
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
PARAMETERS 413
(A) Application parameters
The inverter can be restarted without stopping the motor in the following conditions:
• When switching from commercial power supply operation over to inverter running
• When an instantaneous power failure occurs during inverter running
• When the motor is coasting at start
414 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
NOTE A
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• If the CS signal is not assigned to any input terminal, solely setting Pr.57 will enable the restart operation at all times.
PARAMETERS 415
(A) Application parameters
Restart operation with frequency search (Pr.162 = "0, 2, 3, 10, 12, 13",
Pr.299)
• When Pr.162 = "0 (initial value), 2, 3, 10, 12, 13", the motor speed is detected at a power restoration so that the motor can
re-start smoothly.
• The encoder also detects the rotation direction so that the motor can re-start smoothly even during the reverse rotation.
• Whether or not to detect the rotation direction can be selected by Pr.299 Rotation direction detection selection at
restarting.
If the motor capacity is different from the inverter capacity, set Pr.299 = "0 (no rotation direction detection)".
• When the rotation direction is detected, the following operation is performed according to the Pr.78 Reverse rotation
prevention selection setting.
Pr.78 setting
Pr.299 setting
0 1 2
9999
0 (initial value)
1
: With rotation direction detection : Without rotation direction detection
• By setting "3, 13" in Pr.162, the restart can be made smoother with even less impact than when "0, 2, 10, 12" is set in
Pr.162. When the inverter is restarted with "3, 13" set to Pr.162, offline auto tuning is required. (For details on offline auto
tuning of Advanced magnetic flux vector control, refer to page 341, and for details on offline auto tuning of V/F control, refer
to page 423.)
416 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• The rotation speed detection time (frequency search) changes according to the rotation speed of the motor. (maximum 1 s)
• When the inverter capacity is two ranks or greater than the motor capacity, the overcurrent protective function (E.OC[]) is
sometimes activated and prevents the inverter from restarting.
• If two or more motors are connected to one inverter, this function operates abnormally. (The inverter does not restart
successfully.)
• Because a DC injection brake is applied instantaneously at speed detection during a restart, the speed might drop if the
moment of inertia (J) of the load is small.
• If reverse operation is detected when "1" (reverse rotation disabled) is set to Pr.78, operation decelerates by reverse rotation
and then changes to forward rotation when the start command is forward rotation. The inverter does not restart when the start
command is reverse rotation.
• When "3, 13" is set to Pr.162, limit the wiring length to within 100 m.
Inverter output
voltage E(V)
Coasting time
Pr.57 setting Restart cushion time
(Pr.58 setting)
∗ The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
NOTE
• This restart method uses the output frequency that was active before the instantaneous power failure stored in memory. If the
instantaneous power failure time is 0.2 s or more, the output frequency can no longer be stored and held in memory, so the
restart is performed from Pr.13 Starting frequency (initial value is 1.5 Hz).
NOTE
• When output is shut off using safety stop function (terminals S1 and S2), the inverter restarts in the same way as when output
is shut off by MRS (X10) signal.
PARAMETERS 417
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• Changing the Pr.21 setting does not affect the Pr.611 setting increment.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• When the restart operation is selected, undervoltage (E.UVT) and instantaneous power failure (E.IPF) of the fault output
signals become invalid.
• The SU and FU signals are not output during the restart. These signals are output after the restart cushion time passes.
• Restart operation is also performed after the inverter reset is released or after the retry by the retry function occurs.
418 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Caution
Provide a mechanical interlock for MC1 and MC2. The inverter will be damaged if power supply is
input to the inverter output section.
When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, the motor
suddenly starts (after reset time passes) when an instantaneous power failure occurs. Stay away
from the motor and machinery.
Apply the supplied CAUTION stickers to easily visible places when automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure has been selected.
Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments page 187
Pr.13 Starting frequency page 197, page 198
Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 retry function page 236
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection page 217
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 419
(A) Application parameters
When using the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4, the inverter operation can be restarted without stopping the motor
operation.
When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, the motor driving is resumed in the
following situations:
• When power comes back ON during inverter driving after an instantaneous power failure
• When the motor is coasting at start
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 No coasting time
57 Set the waiting time for the inverter to perform a restart after
Restart coasting time 9999 0.1 to 30 s
A702 restoring power due to an instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart
Automatic restart after 0, 1, 2, 3 Frequency search only performed at the first start
162
instantaneous power 0 10, 11, 12,
A700 Frequency search at every start
failure selection 13
Set the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/
0 to 3600 s
611 Acceleration time at a deceleration reference frequency at restart.
9999
F003 restart Standard acceleration time (for example, Pr.7) is applied as
9999
the acceleration time at restart.
NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• If the CS signal is not assigned to any input terminal, solely setting Pr.57 will enable the restart operation at all times.
• If the restart operation is selected, instantaneous power failure protection (E.IPF) is disabled while the fault output signal is
output at an instantaneous power failure.
• The SU and FU signals are not output during the restart. These signals are output after the restart cushion time passes.
• Restart operation is also performed after the inverter reset is released or after the retry by the retry function occurs.
420 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• Because a DC injection brake is applied instantaneously at speed detection during a restart, the speed might drop if the
moment of inertia (J) of the load is small.
• Restart operation with reduced voltage is not available for PM motor control.
NOTE
• Changing the Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting does not affect the Pr.611 setting increment.
• A PM motor is a motor with interior permanent magnets. Regression voltage is generated when the motor coasts at an
instantaneous power failure or at a flying start. The inverter's DC bus voltage rises if the motor coasts fast or makes a flying
start in this condition.
When using the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 "9999"), it is recommended to also use
the regenerative avoidance function (Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection = "1") to make startups stable. If
the overvoltage protective function (E.OV[]) still occurs with the regeneration avoidance function, also use the retry function
(Pr.67).
• During PM motor control, the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function operates only when an MM-EFS/
MM-THE4 IPM motor is connected
When a regeneration unit is used, the frequency search may not be available if the rotation speed is about 10% higher than
the rating.
Caution
An IPM motor is a motor with interior permanent magnets. High voltage is generated at motor
terminals while the motor is running.
5
Do not touch motor terminals and other parts until the motor stops to prevent an electric shock.
When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, the motor
suddenly starts (after reset time passes) when an instantaneous power failure occurs.
GROUP
Stay away from the motor and machinery. A
Apply the supplied CAUTION stickers to easily visible places when automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure has been selected.
Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequency page 197, page 198
Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 retry function page 236
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection page 217
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection page 514
PARAMETERS 421
(A) Application parameters
During V/F control or when driving the IPM motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4, the accuracy of the "frequency search", which is
used to detect the motor speed for the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure and flying start, can be
improved.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 (2) Frequency search only performed at the first start
Reduced voltage start only at the first start
1
(no frequency search)
Frequency search only performed at the first start
Automatic restart after 3
162 (reduced impact restart)
instantaneous power failure 0
A700 10 (12) Frequency search at every start
selection
Reduced voltage start at every start (no frequency
11
search)
Frequency search at every start (reduced impact
13
restart)
The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain
0 to 32767
required for the frequency search.
298
Frequency search gain 9999 Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor (SF-PR,
A711
9999 SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, MM-EFS, MM-
THE4 and so on).
The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain
0 to 32767 required for the frequency search of the second
560 Second frequency search motor.
9999
A712 gain Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor (SF-PR,
9999 SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, MM-EFS, MM-
THE4 and so on).
0 No offline auto tuning.
Perform offline auto tuning for the Advanced
1, 101
96 magnetic flux vector control. (Refer to page 341.)
Auto tuning setting/status 0
C110 Performs offline auto tuning without rotating the motor
11 (V/F control, PM motor control (IPM motor MM-EFS/
MM-THE4)).
0 to 50 Ω, 9999 Tuning data
(The value measured by offline auto tuning is
90 automatically set.)
Motor constant (R1) 9999
C120 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999 9999: Uses the constant value of Mitsubishi motor
(SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so
on).
0 No auto tuning for the second motor.
1, 101 Performs offline auto tuning for the second motor.
463 Second motor auto tuning
0 Performs offline auto tuning without rotating the
C210 setting/status
11 second motor (V/F control, PM motor control (IPM
motor MM-EFS/MM-THE4)).
458 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 Tuning data of the second motor
Second motor constant (R1) 9999
C220 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999 (same as Pr.90)
For the FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower and FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower.
For the FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher.
422 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Setting
1) Set Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "11".
2) Set the rated motor current (initial value is inverted rated current) to Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page
225.)
3) Set Pr.71 Applied motor according to the motor to be used.
Performing tuning
POINT
• Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or the parameter unit if the inverter is in the state
5
ready for tuning. Turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable starts the motor.
PARAMETERS 423
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• It takes about 10 seconds for tuning to complete. (The time depends on the inverter capacity and motor type.)
• Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of MRS signal.
• To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press on the operation panel.
(Turning the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) OFF also ends tuning.)
• During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid. (Initial value)
Input terminals <valid signals> STP (STOP), OH, MRS, RT, RES, STF, STR, S1 and S2
Output terminals: RUN, OL, IPF, FM/CA, AM, A1B1C1 and SO
• When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM/CA and AM, the progress status of offline
auto tuning is output in fifteen steps from FM/CA and AM.
• During execution of offline auto tuning, do not switch the second function selection signal (RT) ON or OFF. Auto tuning is not
executed properly.
• Since the RUN signal turns ON when tuning is started, caution is required especially when a sequence which releases a
mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed
• When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) of
the inverter.
• While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal ON to tune in the PU
operation mode.
• Monitor is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU08) and the parameter unit (FR-PU07) during tuning as below.
READ:List
11
Setting STOP PU
TUNE 12
Tuning in progress STF FWD PU
TUNE 13
Normal end COMPLETION
STF STOP PU
Flickering
TUNE
ERROR 8
Forced end STOP PU
• When offline auto tuning ends, press on the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal).
This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
• At tuning completion, the tuning results are set in the following parameters:
Parameter Name
90 Motor constant (R1)
298 Frequency search gain
96 Auto tuning setting/status
NOTE
• The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the
offline auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared when performing all parameter clear.
424 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
• If offline auto tuning has ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set.
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
• When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto
tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
• If using a motor falling under the following conditions, set the value of Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay as shown below
after tuning is complete.
- If the rated power supply of the motor is 200/220 V(400/440 V) 60 Hz, set the rated motor current multiplied by 1.1 in Pr.9.
- For a motor with a PTC thermistor, thermal protector or other thermal detection, set "0" (motor overheat protection by
inverter invalid) in Pr.9 to protect the motor from overheating.
NOTE
• An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter goes into the normal operation. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor runs
in the forward (reverse) rotation.
• Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. Note that even if a retry operation has been set,
retry is not performed.
• The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.
NOTE
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. 5
Caution
Note that the motor may start running suddenly. GROUP
For the offline auto tuning in vertical lift applications, etc., caution is required to avoid falling due to A
insufficient torque.
Parameters referred to
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay page 225
Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 retry function page 236
Pr.71 Applied motor page 337
Pr.79 Operation mode selection
Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection page 248
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
PARAMETERS 425
(A) Application parameters
426 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
• The power failure time deceleration stop function operates as follows at an input phase loss.
Power restoration
Pr.261 Action at undervoltage during deceleration at Undervoltage avoidance
Deceleration stop time
Setting and power failure occurrence of power function
failure
0 Coasts to stop Coasts to stop — —
1 Deceleration stop Not used
2 Re-acceleration According to Pr.262 to Pr.266 Not used
11 Deceleration stop setting With
Deceleration stop
12 Re-acceleration With
21 Deceleration stop Automatic adjustment of Not used
22 Re-acceleration deceleration time Not used
GROUP
A
Time
STF
Y46
PARAMETERS 427
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• If the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is
selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time "9999") while the power Power supply ON
Not started as inverter Output
failure time deceleration-to-stop function is set enabled (Pr.261 = is stopped due to power frequency
failure
"1, 11, or 21"), the power failure time deceleration-to-stop
Time
function is disabled. STF OFF ON
• When the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is Y46 ON
enabled (Pr.261 = "1, 11 or 21"), the inverter will not start even if
the power is turned ON or inverter reset is performed with the
start signal (STF/STR) ON. Turn OFF the start signal once and
then ON again to make a start.
428 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Pr.261 = 21
Power
supply
During deceleration at
occurrence of power failure
Deceleration time : Automatic adjustment
Output
frequency During stop at occurrence
of power failure
Time
STF
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 429
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• When "2" is set to Pr.30 Regenerative function selection (for instance, when FR-HC2, FR-CV is used), the deceleration-to-
stop function is invalid at a power failure.
• If the "output frequency - Pr.262" at undervoltage or at power failure is a negative value, it is regarded as 0 Hz. (DC injection
brake operation is performed without deceleration.)
• The power failure time deceleration stop function is disabled during a stop or when the breaker is tripped.
• The Y46 signal turns ON if an undervoltage occurs even if a deceleration at a power failure has not occurred. For this reason,
the Y46 signal is sometimes output instantaneously when the power supply is turned OFF. This is not a fault.
• When the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is selected, undervoltage protection (E.UVT), instantaneous power
failure protection (E.IPF) and input phase loss protection (E.ILF) are not invalid.
• When the load is high during PM motor control, an undervoltage sometimes causes the inverter to coast to a stop.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) or Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Caution
Even if the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is set, some loads might cause the
inverter to trip and the motor to coast.
The motor will coast if sufficient regenerative power is not obtained from the motor.
Parameters referred to
Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage page 502
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments page 187
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection page 508
Pr.57 Restart coasting time page 414, page 420
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
Pr.872 Input phase loss protection selection page 235
430 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
NOTE
• For the details of the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual and the Instruction Manual of FR
Configurator2.
PARAMETERS 431
(A) Application parameters
• The following data can be copied by copying the project data via USB memory.
NOTE
• If the project data of the PLC function is locked with a password using FR Configurator 2, copying to the USB memory device
and verification are disabled. Also if set to write-disabled, writing to the inverter is disabled.For the details of the PLC function,
refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual and the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator 2.
Parameters referred to
Pr.338 Communication operation command source page 210
432 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 Without trace operation
1 Sampling start
1020
Trace operation selection 0 2 Forced trigger
A900
3 Sampling stop
4 Transfer of data to USB memory divice
0 Memory mode
1021
Trace mode selection 0 1 Memory mode (automatic transfer)
A901
2 Recorder mode
Set the sampling cycle.
0: 0.125 ms, 1: 0.252 ms, 2: 1 ms, 3: 2 ms,
1022
Sampling cycle 2 0 to 9 4: 5 ms, 5: 10 ms, 6: 50 ms, 7: 100 ms, 8: 500 ms, 9: 1 s
A902 (Regarding the setting value "0 and 1", the cycle varies by the
control mode.)
1023 Number of analog
4 1 to 8 Select the number of analog channels to be sampled.
A903 channels
0 Manual sampling start
1024
Sampling auto start 0 Sampling starts automatically when the power supply is turned
A904 1
ON or at a reset
0 Fault trigger
1 Analog trigger
1025
Trigger mode selection 0 2 Digital trigger
A905
3 Analog or digital trigger (OR logic)
4 Both analog and digital trigger (AND logic)
1026 Number of sampling Set the percentage of the pre-trigger sampling time with
0 to 100% 90%
A906 before trigger respect to the overall sampling time.
1027 Analog source selection
201
A910 (1ch)
1028 Analog source selection
202
A911 (2ch) 1 to 3,
1029 Analog source selection 5 to 14,
203 17, 18, 20,
A912 (3ch)
23, 24, 34,
A1030 Analog source selection 40 to 42,
204
A913 (4ch) 52 to 54, Select the analog data (monitor) to be sampled on each
1031 Analog source selection 61, 62, 64, channel.
205 67, 68,
A914 (5ch)
81 to 96, 98,
1032 Analog source selection 201 to 213,
206
A915 (6ch) 230 to 232,
1033 Analog source selection 237, 238
207
A916 (7ch)
1034 Analog source selection
208 5
A917 (8ch)
1035
Analog trigger channel 1 1 to 8 Select the analog channel to be the trigger.
A918
Sampling starts when the value of the analog monitor exceeds
0 GROUP
1036 Analog trigger operation the value set at the trigger level (Pr.1037) A
0
A919 selection Sampling starts when the value of the analog monitor falls
1
below the value set at the trigger level (Pr.1037)
Set the level at which the analog trigger turns ON.
1037
Analog trigger level 1000 600 to 1400 The trigger level is the value obtained by subtracting 1000
A920 from the set value.
PARAMETERS 433
(A) Application parameters
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
1038 Digital source selection
1
A930 (1ch)
1039 Digital source selection
2
A931 (2ch)
1040 Digital source selection
3
A932 (3ch)
1041 Digital source selection
4
A933 (4ch) Select the digital data (I/O signal) to be sampled on each
1 to 255
1042 Digital source selection channel.
5
A934 (5ch)
1043 Digital source selection
6
A935 (6ch)
1044 Digital source selection
7
A936 (7ch)
1045 Digital source selection
8
A937 (8ch)
1046
Digital trigger channel 1 1 to 8 Select the digital channel to be the trigger.
A938
1047 Digital trigger operation 0 Trace starts when the signal turns ON
0
A939 selection 1 Trace starts when the signal turns OFF
Operation outline
• This function samples the status (analog monitor and digital monitor) of the inverter, traces the sampling data when a
trigger (trace start condition) is generated, and saves the resulting trace data.
• When the trace function is set enabled, samplings are collected and the inverter goes into the pre-trigger status.
• In the pre-trigger status, samples are collected, and the trigger standby status is entered when sufficient samples for the
number of pre-trigger samples have been collected.
• When the trigger is generated in the trigger standby status, the trace is started and the trace data is saved.
Sampling data
0% 90%
Sampling data
0% 90% 100%
Sampling data
0% 90% 100%
434 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Pr.1021
Mode Description
setting
In this mode, trace data is saved sequentially to internal RAM on the inverter.
0 Memory mode
If automatic transfer is set, the trace data in internal RAM is transferred to USB memory device when the
Memory mode trigger is being generated.
1 (automatic Data can be transferred to a USB memory device as long as data is held in internal RAM.
transfer) Trace data in internal RAM is cleared when the power supply is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset.
In this mode, trace data is saved directly to USB memory device.
2 Recorder mode Sampling data is fixed at eight analog channels and eight digital channels.
The sampling cycle in this mode is longer than in the memory mode. (1 ms or longer)
NOTE
• When the trace function is used in the recorder mode, use a USB memory device having at least 1 GB of free space.
• Data transferred to USB is saved in the "TRC" folder under the "FR_INV" folder.
• Up to 99 sets of trace data can be saved in the USB memory device. When data transfer to USB memory device reaches 99
sets of trace data, data is successively overwritten starting with the older data.
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 435
(A) Application parameters
criterion
criterion
display
display
Setting
Trigger
Setting
Trigger
Minus
Minus
value
value
level
level
sign
sign
Monitored item Monitored item
00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 01800 02160 02600 03250 03610 04320 04810 05470 06100 06830
Model FR-F840-[]
0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K 90K 110K 132K 160K 185K 220K 250K 280K 315K
Trigger level reference
1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547
current (A)
436 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
GROUP
A
PARAMETERS 437
(A) Application parameters
Pr.1036
Trigger generation conditions Trigger level setting
setting
Sampling starts when the analog data targeted for the trigger exceeds the value
0
specified at the trigger level Set the trigger level by
Sampling starts when the analog data targeted for the trigger has fallen below the value Pr.1037 (-400% to 400%)
1
specified at the trigger level
For Pr.1037, set the number obtained by adding 1,000 to the trigger level.
Pr.1047
Trigger generation conditions
setting
0 Trace starts when the digital data targeted for the trigger turns ON
1 Trace starts when the digital data targeted for the trigger turns OFF
438 PARAMETERS
(A) Application parameters
Pr.1020
Setting by trace mode Operation
setting
0 Sampling standby
1 Sampling start
3 Sampling stop
4 Data transmission
• Trace operation can also be set in the trace mode on the operation panel.
PARAMETERS 439
(A) Application parameters
• During trace operation, the trace status signal (Y40) can be output.
To use the Y40 signal, set "40 (positive logic) or 140 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to
Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection page 263
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
440 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
8 to 1
5
Pin number Name Description
1 SG Earth (ground) (connected to terminal 5)
2 ― Operation panel power supply
3 RDA Inverter receive+
4 SDB Inverter send-
5 SDA Inverter send+
GROUP
6 RDB Inverter receive- N
7 SG Earth (ground) (connected to terminal 5)
8 ― Operation panel power supply
NOTE
• Pins No. 2 and 8 provide power to the operation panel or the parameter unit. Do not use these pins during RS-485
communication.
• Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector. The
product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.
PARAMETERS 441
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Make connection in accordance with the Instruction Manual of the computer to be used with. Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer
since they vary with the model.
NOTE
• When performing RS-485 communication with multiple inverters, use the RS-485 terminals. (Refer to page 444.)
• Computer-inverter connection cable
Refer to the following for the connection cable (RS-232C RS-485 converter) between the computer with an RS-232C
interface and an inverter. Commercially available products (as of Novemver 2013)
Model Manufacturer
Interface embedded cable
DAFXIH-CAB (D-SUB25P for personal computer side)
DAFXIH-CABV (D-SUB9P for personal computer side)
+ Diatrend Corp.
Connector conversion cable DINV-485CAB (for inverter side)
Interface embedded cable dedicated for inverter
DINV-CABV
The conversion cable cannot connect multiple inverters. (The computer and inverted are connected in a 1:1 pair.) This product is a RS-232C
RS-485 conversion cable that has a built-in converter. No additional cable or connector is required. For the product details, contact the
manufacturer.
• Refer to the following table when fabricating the cable on the user side.
Commercially available products (as of November 2013)
Name Model Manufacturer
Communication cable SGLPEV-T (Cat5e/300m) 24AWG 4P Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
RJ-45 connector 5-554720-3 Tyco Electronics
Do not use pins No. 2 and 8 of the communication cable.
442 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
NOTE
• To avoid malfunction, keep the RS-485 terminal wires away from the control circuit board.
• When the FR-F820-01250(30K) or lower, or the FR-F840-00620(30K) or lower is used with a plug-in option, lead the wires
through the hole on the side face of the front cover for wiring of the RS-485 terminals.
• When the FR-F820-01540(37K) of higher, or the FR-F840-00770(37K) or higher is used with a plug-in option, lead the wires
on the left side of the plug-in option for wiring of the RS-485 terminals.
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 443
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Computer Computer
Inverter Inverter
RS-485 RS-485
RS-485 terminals Maximum terminals
interface/ ∗ RS-232C 15 m ∗
terminals cable
Converter
444 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
+
+
-
-
RSB
∗1
CSA
SDB1
SDA1
RDB1
RDA1
CSB
SG SG
FG
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
RSB
∗1
CSA
SDB1
SDA1
SDB2
SDA2
RDB1
RDA1
RDB2
RDA2
SDB1
SDA1
SDB2
SDA2
RDB1
RDA1
RDB2
RDA2
SDB1
SDA1
RDB1
RDA1
CSB
SG SG SG SG SG SG
FG Station 0 Station 1 Station n
Make connection in accordance with the Instruction Manual of the computer to be used with.
Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since they vary with the model.
For the inverter farthest from the computer, set the terminating resistor switch to ON (100 side).
NOTE
• For branching, connect the wires as shown below.
VCC TXD RXD VCC TXD RXD
To computer ground
To computer receive
Reception RXD-
Pass a wire
enable SG SG
NOTE
• A program should be created so that transmission is disabled (receiving state) when the computer is not sending and
reception is disabled (sending state) during sending to prevent the computer from receiving its own data.
PARAMETERS 445
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link)
549
Protocol selection 0 1 Modbus-RTU protocol
N000
2 BACnet MS/TP protocol
Parameter values written by communication are written to
0
342 Communication the EEPROM and RAM.
0
N001 EEPROM write selection Parameter values written by communication are written to
1
the RAM.
At fault occurrence At fault removal
0 Coasts to stop
Stays stopped (E.SER
E.SER display
display)
ALM signal output
Deceleration stop
502 Stop mode selection at Stays stopped (E.SER
0 1 E.SER display after stop
N013 communication error display)
ALM signal output after stop
Deceleration stop
2 Automatic restart function
E.SER display after stop
Operation continued at the
3 Normal operation
set frequency of Pr.779
Set the frequency to be run at a communication error
Operation frequency 0 to 590 Hz
779 occurrence.
during communication 9999
N014 The motor runs at the frequency used before the
error 9999
communication error.
If in communication by the communication option, E.OP1 is displayed.
NOTE
• Turning OFF the inverter's power supply clears the modified parameter settings when Pr.342 = "1 (write only to RAM)".
Therefore, the parameter values at next power-ON are the values last stored in EEPROM.
• The parameter setting written in RAM cannot be checked on the operation panel. (The values displayed on the operation
panel are the ones stored in EEPROM.)
446 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Pr. 502 setting "0" (initial value) Pr. 502 setting "1"
Fault occurrence Fault removal Fault occurrence Fault removal
Output frequency
Motor coasting
Time Tim
to stop
Output frequency
Pr.779 ≠“9999”
(Runs at the frequency setting of Pr.779)
GROUP
Time Tim
N
Fault display Display Not displayed
Fault display
( E.SER∗1)
Fault output OFF Fault output OFF
(ALM) (ALM)
Alarm output OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
Alarm output
(LF) (LF)
If in communication by the communication option, E.OP1 is displayed.
PARAMETERS 447
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
NOTE
• Fault output indicates the Fault signal (ALM) and an alarm bit output.
• When the fault output is set enabled, fault records are stored in the faults history. (A fault record is written to the faults history
at a fault output.)
• When the fault output is not set enabled, fault record is overwritten to the faults history of the faults history temporarily but not
stored.
• After the fault is removed, the fault indication goes back to normal indication on the monitor, and the faults history goes back
to the previous status.
• If Pr.502 is set to "1, 2, or 3", the normal deceleration time setting (settings like Pr.8, Pr.44, and Pr.45) is applied as the
deceleration time. Normal acceleration time setting (settings like Pr.7 and Pr.44) is applied as the acceleration time for
restart.
• When Pr.502 = "2 or 3", the inverter operates with the start command and the speed command, which were used before the
fault.
• If a communication line error occurs, then the error is removed during deceleration while Pr.502 = "2", the motor re-
accelerates from that point.
• The Pr.502 and Pr.779 settings are valid when communication is performed via the RS-485 terminals or a communication
option.
• These parameters are valid under the Network operation mode. When performing communication with RS-485 terminals, set
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection to "2 (initial value)".
• Pr.502 is valid for the device that has the command source under the Network operation mode. If a communication option is
installed while Pr.550 = "9999 (initial value)", a communication error in RS-485 terminals occurs and Pr.502 becomes invalid.
• If the communication error setting is disabled with Pr.502 = "3", Pr.335 = "9999", and Pr.539 = "9999", the inverter does not
continue its operation with the frequency set by Pr.779 at a communication error.
• If a communication error occurs while continuous operation at Pr.779 is selected with Pr.502 = "3", the inverter operates at
the frequency set in Pr.779 even though the speed command source is at the external terminals.
Example) If a communication error occurs while Pr.339 = "2" and the external terminal RL is ON, the operation is continued at
the frequency set in Pr.779.
Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time page 187
Pr.335 RS-485 communication retry count page 449
Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time interval page 449
Pr.539 Modbus-RTU communication check time interval page 465
Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection page 210
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection page 210
448 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 449
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
NOTE
• The monitored items and parameter settings can be read during communication with the Pr.336 RS-485 communication
check time interval = "0 (initial value)" setting, but such operation will become faulty once the operation mode is changed to
the NET operation mode. When the NET operation mode is selected as the start-up operation mode, communication is
performed once, then a Communication fault (inverter) (E.SER) occurs. To perform operation or parameter writing via
communication, set "9999" or a large setting value in Pr.336. (The setting value is determined by the computer
program.)(Refer to page 457.)
• Always reset the inverter after making the initial settings of the parameters. After changing the communication-related
parameters, communication cannot be made until the inverter is reset.
450 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Communication specifications
• The communication specifications are given below.
Related
Item Description
Parameter
Communication protocol Mitsubishi protocol (computer link) Pr.551
Conforming standard EIA-485 (RS-485) ―
Pr.117
Connectable units 1:N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 31 stations
Pr.331
PU connector Selected among 4800/9600/19200/38400 bps Pr.118
Communication
Selected among 300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/38400/
Speed RS-485 terminals Pr.332
57600/76800/115200 bps
Control procedure Asynchronous system ―
Communication method Half-duplex system ―
Pr.119
Character system ASCII (7 bits or 8 bits can be selected.)
Pr.333
Start bit 1 bit ―
Pr.119
Stop bit length 1 bit or 2 bits can be selected.
Communication Pr.333
specifications Pr.120
Parity check Check (at even or odd numbers) or no check can be selected.
Pr.334
Error check Sum code check ―
Pr.124
Terminator CR/LF (presence/absence selectable)
Pr.341
Pr.123
Waiting time setting Selectable between presence and absence
Pr.337
Communication procedure
• Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in the following procedure.
(a) Request data is sent from the computer to the inverter. (The inverter will not send data unless requested.)
(b) After waiting for the waiting time,
(c) The inverter sends reply data to the computer in response to the computer request.
(d) After waiting for the inverter data processing time,
(e) An answer from the computer in response to reply data (c) of the inverter is transmitted. (Even if (e) is not sent,
subsequent communication is made properly.)
PARAMETERS 451
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (No data error detected)
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ACK Inverter station
C
No.
Send Receive Error Error
STX Inverter station ETX
C1 data data code code Data1 Data2 Sum check
No.
type type 1 2
452 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (No data error detected)
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Inverter station
E STX Read data ETX Sum check
No.
Inverter station
E1 STX Read data ETX Sum check
No.
Inverter station
E2 STX Read data ETX Sum check
No.
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 to 23 24 25 26 27
Inverter station
E3 STX Read data (Inverter model information) ETX Sum check
No.
c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (Data error detected)
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5
Inverter station Error
D NAK
No. code
e. Transmission data from the computer to the inverter when reading data
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4
C
Inverter station
(No data error ACK
No.
detected)
F Inverter station
NAK
(Data error detected) No.
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 453
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Data definitions
• Control code
NOTE
• When Pr.123 or Pr.337 (Waiting time setting) ≠ "9999", create a communication request data without "waiting time" in the
data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
• The data check time varies depending on the instruction code. (Refer to page 455.)
• Sum check code
The sum check code is a 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from
the checked ASCII data.
(Example 1) Sum
*Waiting
Instruction
ENQ Station code Data check
time
H30+H31+H45+H31+H31+H30+H37+H41+H44
= H1F4
Sum
* When the Pr.123 or Pr.337 (Waiting time setting) "9999", create the communication request
data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
(Example 2) Sum
Data read
STX Station ETX
check
Inverter Computer number code
0 1 1 7 7 0 3 0 Binary code
ASCII Code H02 H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30
H30+H31+H31+H37+H37+H30
= H130
Sum
454 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
• Error code
If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its error definition is sent back to the computer together with the
NAK code.
Error
Error Item Error Description Inverter Operation
Code
The number of errors consecutively detected in communication
H0 Computer NAK error request data from the computer is greater than the permissible
number of retries.
H1 Parity error The parity check result does not match the specified parity.
The sum check code in the computer does not match that of the data Trips (E.PUE/E.SER) if error
H2 Sum check error
received by the inverter. occurs continuously more
The data received by the inverter has a grammatical mistake. Or, data than the permissible number
H3 Protocol error receive is not completed within the predetermined time. CR or LF is of retries.
not as set in the parameter.
H4 Framing error The stop bit length differs from the initial setting.
New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter
H5 Overrun error
completes receiving the preceding data.
H6 —— —— ——
Does not accept the received
The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F, control
H7 Character error data, burt the inverter does
code).
not trip.
H8 —— —— ——
H9 —— —— ——
Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link
HA Mode error operation mode, when operation command source is not selected or
during inverter operation. Does not accept the received
data, but the inverter does not
HB Instruction code error The specified instruction code does not exist.
trip.
Invalid data has been specified for parameter writing, running
HC Data range error
frequency setting, etc.
HD —— —— ——
HE —— —— ——
HF Normal (no error) —— ——
Response time
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Inverter data processing time Waiting time Data check time
Computer (setting 10 ms) (depends on the
instruction code (see the
Inverter following table))
Time
Inverter 10 ms or more necessary
Computer Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
PARAMETERS 455
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Fault (E.PUE)
ENQ
ENQ
Computer Inverter Illegal Illegal
ACK
NAK
NAK
Inverter Computer
ALM ON
ENQ
ENQ
Computer Inverter Illegal Illegal Normal
ACK
NAK
NAK
ACK
Inverter Computer
LF OFF ON ON
ALM OFF
NOTE
• For the RS-485 terminal communication, the operation at a communication error occurrence depends on the Pr.502 Stop
mode selection at communication error setting. (Refer to page 446)
456 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Computer Inverter
Inverter Computer
Fault (E.PUE)
Check start
Pr.122
Communication
check counter
Time
ALM OFF ON
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 457
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
void main(void){
HANDLE hCom; // Communication handle
DCB hDcb; // Structure for setting communication settings
COMMTIMEOUTS hTim; // Structure for setting timeouts
nRet = WriteFile(hCom,szTx,nTx,&nTx,NULL);
// Send
if(nRet != 0) {
nRet = ReadFile(hCom,szRx,sizeof(szRx),&nRx,NULL);
// Receive
if(nRet != 0) {
// Display receive data
for(i = 0;i < nRx;i++) {
printf("%02X ",(BYTE)szRx[i]);// Output received data to console
// Display ASCII code in Hexadecimal' In case of 0', "30" is displayed.
}
printf("\n\r");
}
}
}
CloseHandle(hCom); // Close communication port
}
}
458 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
General flowchart
Port open
Communication setting
Caution
Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous
conditions.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides
a communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable
breakage etc., the inverter cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has
elapsed, the inverter will trip (E.PUE, E.SER).
The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching ON the RES signals or by switching the power
OFF.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the inverter does not
detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 459
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Number of
Read/ Instruction
Item Data description data digits
Write code
(Format)
H0000: Network operation
4 digits
Read H7B H0001: External operation
(B.E/D)
H0002: PU operation, External/PU combined operation, PUJOG operation
Operation mode
H0000: Network operation
4 digits
Write HFB H0001: External operation
(A,C/D)
H0002: PU operation (RS-485 communication operation via PU connector)
Output H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency in 0.01Hz increments
4 digits
frequency Read H6F (The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37 and
(B.E/D)
/speed Pr.144. (Refer to page 261))
H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal)
Increment 0.01 A (FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower, FR-F840-01160(55K) or
Output 4 digits
Read H70 lower)
current (B.E/D)
Increment 0.1 A (FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher, FR-F840-01800(75K) or
higher)
Output 4 digits
Read H71 H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1 V increments
voltage (B.E/D)
Special 4 digits
Read H72 H0000 to HFFFF: Monitor data selected in the instruction code HF3
monitor (B.E/D)
2 digits
Special Read H73
(B.E1/D)
monitor Monitor selection data (Refer to page 263 for details on selection No.)
2 digits
selection No. Write HF3
(A1,C/D)
H0000 to HFFFF: Two latest fault records
Monitor
b15 b8 b7 b0
H74 Second fault in past Latest fault
460 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Number of
Read/ Instruction
Item Data description data digits
Write code
(Format)
Set frequency Write the set frequency/speed into the RAM or EEPROM.
HED H0000 to HE678 (0 to 590.00Hz): frequency in 0.01Hz increments
(RAM)
(The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37 and 4 digits
Write
Set frequency Pr.144. (Refer to page 261)) (A,C/D)
HEE • To change the set frequency consecutively, write data to the inverter
(RAM, EEPROM)
RAM. (Instruction code: HED)
H9696: Inverter reset
4 digits
• As the inverter is reset at the start of communication by the computer, the
(A,C/D)
inverter cannot send reply data back to the computer.
Inverter reset Write HFD
H9966: Inverter reset
4 digits
• When data is sent normally, ACK is returned to the computer, and then
(A,D)
the inverter is reset.
Faults history 4 digits
Write HF4 H9696: Faults history batch clear
batch clear (A,C/D)
All parameters return to initial values.
Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be selected
according to the data.
• Parameter clear
H9696: Communication parameters are cleared.
H5A5A: Communication parameters are not cleared.
• All parameter clear
H9966: Communication parameters are cleared.
Parameter clear 4 digits
Write HFC H55AA: Communication parameters are not cleared.
All clear (A,C/D)
For the details of whether or not to clear parameters, refer to page 597.
When a clear is performed with H9696 or H9966, communication related
parameter settings also return to the initial values. When resuming the
operation, set the parameters again.
Performing a clear will clear the instruction code HEC, HF3, and HFF
settings.
Only H9966 and H55AA (all parameter clear) are valid during the password
lock (refer to page 171).
Refer to the instruction code (page 597) and write and/or read parameter 4 digits
Read H00 to H63
values as required. (B.E/D)
Parameter
When setting Pr.100 and later, the link parameter extended setting must be 4 digits
Write H80 to HE3
set. (A,C/D)
2 digits
Read H7F
Link parameter Parameter settings are switched according to the H00 to H0D settings. (B.E1/D)
Extended setting For details of the settings, refer to the instruction code (page 597). 2 digits
Write HFF
(A1,C/D)
2 digits
Read H6C
Second parameter When setting the calibration parameters (B.E1/D)
changing H00: Frequency
(instruction code H01: Parameter-set analog value
HFF = 1, 9) H02: Analog value input from terminal 2 digits
Write HEC
(A1,C/D)
Write/ Available for writing 2 commands, and monitoring 2 items for reading data 10 digits
Multi command HF0
Read (refer to page 464 for detail) (A2,C1/D)
Reading inverter model in ASCII code.
Inverter "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area 20 digits 5
Inverter model monitor
Read H7C
model Example of "FR-F840-1 (FM type)" (B,E3/D)
H46, H52, H2D, H46, H38, H34, H30, H2D, H31, H20, H20 ......... H20
Reading inverter ND rated capacity in ASCII code.
Data is read in increments of 0.1kW, and rounds down to 0.01kW
increments 6 digits
Capacity Read H7D
"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area (B,E2/D) GROUP
Example N
0.75K......... "7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)
Refer to page 452 for data formats (A, A1, A2, B, C, C1, D, E, E1, E2, E3, F)
Turning OFF the power supply while clearing parameters with H5A5A or H55AA returns the communication parameter settings to the initial
settings.
Refer to the calibration parameter list below for details on calibration parameters.
The gain frequency can be also written using Pr.125 (instruction code: H99) or Pr.126 (instruction code: H9A).
PARAMETERS 461
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
NOTE
• Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
• For the instruction codes HFF, HEC and HF3, their values are held once written but cleared to zero when an inverter reset or
all clear is performed.
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitored value is read and the read value exceeds HFFFF, the reply data will be HFFFF.
Example) When reading the C3 (Pr.902) and C6 (Pr.904) settings from the inverter of station No. 0.
Computer send data Inverter send data Description
a ENQ 00 FF 0 01 7D ACK 00 Set "H01" in the extended link parameter
b ENQ 00 EC 0 01 79 ACK 00 Set "H01" in second parameter changing
c ENQ 00 5E 0 0A STX 00 0000 ETX 20 C3 (Pr.902) is read. 0% is read.
d ENQ 00 60 0 F6 STX 00 0000 ETX 20 C6 (Pr.904) is read. 0% is read.
To read/write C3 (Pr.902) or C6 (Pr.904) after inverter reset or parameter clear, execute from (a) again.
Extended
Pr. Name Pr. Name
Write
Write
Read
Read
Terminal 2 frequency setting C17 (919) Terminal 1 bias (torque) 13 93 9
C2 (902) 5E DE 1
bias frequency Terminal 1 gain command
C18 (920) 14 94 9
Terminal 2 frequency setting (torque)
C3 (902) 5E DE 1
bias C19 (920) Terminal 1 gain (torque) 14 94 9
Terminal 2 frequency setting C8 (930) Current output bias signal 1E 9E 9
125 (903) 5F DF 1
gain frequency
C9 (930) Current output bias current 1E 9E 9
Terminal 2 frequency setting
C4 (903) 5F DF 1 C10 (931) Current output gain signal 1F 9F 9
gain
C11 (931) Current output gain current 1F 9F 9
Terminal 4 frequency setting
C5 (904) 60 E0 1 Terminal 4 bias command
bias frequency C38 (932) 20 A0 9
(torque)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
C6 (904) 60 E0 1 C39 (932) Terminal 4 bias (torque) 20 A0 9
bias
Terminal 4 frequency setting Terminal 4 gain command
C40 (933) 21 A1 9
126 (905) 61 E1 1 (torque)
gain frequency
C41 (933) Terminal 4 gain (torque) 21 A1 9
Terminal 4 frequency setting
C7 (905) 61 E1 1 C42 (934) PID display bias coefficient 22 A2 9
gain
Terminal 1 bias frequency C43 (934) PID display bias analog value 22 A2 9
C12 (917) 11 91 9
(speed) C44 (935) PID display gain coefficient 23 A3 9
C13 (917) Terminal 1 bias (speed) 11 91 9 C45 (935) PID display gain analog value 23 A3 9
Terminal 1 gain frequency
C14 (918) 12 92 9
(speed)
C15 (918) Terminal 1 gain (speed) 12 92 9
Terminal 1 bias command
C16 (919) 13 93 9
(torque)
462 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Operation command
Instruction Bit
Item Description Example
code length
b0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection)
b1: Forward rotation command [Example 1] H02 Forward rotation
b2: Reverse rotation command b7 b0
b3: RL (Low-speed operation command) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Operation b4: RM (Middle-speed operation
HFA 8 bits
command command) [Example 2] H00 Stop
b5: RH (High-speed operation b7 b0
command) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6: RT (Second function selection)
b7: MRS (Output stop)
b0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection)
b1: Forward rotation command [Example 1] H0002 Forward rotation
b2: Reverse rotation command b15 b0
b3: RL (Low-speed operation command)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
b4: RM (Middle-speed operation
command) [Example 2] H0800 low speed operation
b5: RH (High-speed operation (When Pr. 189 RES terminal function selection is set to "0")
Operation
command)
command HF9 16 bits b15 b0
b6: RT (Second function selection)
(extended) 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b7: MRS (Output stop)
b8: JOG (Jog operation selection)
b9: CS (No function)
b10: STP (STOP) (Start self-holding
selection)
b11: RES (Inverter reset)
b12 to b15: -
The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.184, Pr.187 (Input
terminal function selection) (page 329).
JOG operation/automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/start self-holding selection/reset cannot be controlled over a network, so in the
initial status bit8 to bit11 are invalid. To use bit8 to bit11, change the signal by Pr.185, Pr.186, Pr.188, or Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) (page 329) (A reset can be executed by the instruction code HFD.)
In RS-485 communication from the PU connector, only the forward rotation command and reverse rotation command can be used.
PARAMETERS 463
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
• Reply data format from inverter to computer (No data error detected)
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Send
Receive Error Error
Inverter data CR/
C1 STX data code code Data1 Data2 ETX Sum check
station No. type LF
type 1 2
464 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 Broadcast communication
331 RS-485 communication
0 Inverter station number specification
N030 station number
1 to 247 Set the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are
connected to one personal computer.
3, 6, 12, 24,
Set the communication speed.
332 RS-485 communication 48, 96, 192,
96 The setting value 100 equals the communication speed.
N031 speed 384, 576, 768,
For example, if 96 is set, the communication speed is 9600 bps.
1152
Without parity check
0
Stop bit length 2 bits
334 RS-485 communication With parity check at odd numbers
2 1
N034 parity check selection Stop bit length 1 bit
With parity check at even numbers
2
Stop bit length 1 bit
343 Communication error Displays the communication error count during Modbus-RTU
0 ―
N080 count communication. Read-only.
Modbus-RTU communication, but the inverter trips in the NET
0
Modbus-RTU operation mode.
539
communication check 9999 Set the interval of the communication check (signal loss
N002 0.1 to 999.8 s
detection) time. (same specifications as Pr.122)
time interval
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)
0 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link)
549
Protocol selection 0 1 Modbus-RTU protocol
N000
2 BACnet MS/TP protocol
NOTE
• To use the Modbus-RTU protocol, set "1" to Pr.549 Protocol selection.
• If Modbus-RTU communication is performed from the master to the address 0 (station number 0), the data is broadcasted,
and the inverter does not send any reply to the master. To obtain replies from the inverter, set Pr.331 RS-485
communication station number "0 (initial value)". Some functions are disabled in broadcast communication. (Refer to
page 467.)
• If a communication option is mounted with Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "9999 (initial value)",
commands (operation commands) transmitted via RS-485 terminals become invalid. (Refer to page 210.)
Communication specifications
• The communication specifications are given below.
Related
Item Description
parameter
Communication protocol Modbus-RTU protocol Pr.549
Conforming standard
Connectable units
EIA-485 (RS-485)
1:N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 247 stations
―
Pr.331
5
Selected among 300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/76800/
Communication Speed Pr.332
115200 bps
Control procedure Asynchronous system ―
Communication method Half-duplex system ―
GROUP
Character system Binary (fixed at 8 bits) ― N
Start bit 1 bit ―
PARAMETERS 465
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Outline
• The Modbus communication protocol was developed by Modicon for programmable controllers.
• The Modbus protocol uses exclusive message frames to perform serial communication between a master and slaves.
These exclusive message frames are provided with a feature called "functions" that allows data to be read or written. These
functions can be used to read or write parameters from the inverter, write input commands to the inverter or check the
inverter's operating status, for example. This product classifies the data of each inverter into holding register area (register
address 40001 to 49999). The master can communicate with inverters (for instance,. slaves) by accessing pre-assigned
holding register addresses.
NOTE
• There are two serial transmission modes, the ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) mode and the
RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode. However, this product supports only the RTU mode, which transfers 1 byte data (8 bits)
as it is. Also, only communication protocol is defined by the Modbus protocol. Physical layers are not stipulated.
Message format
Inverter response time
Query communication (Refer to the following table for the
data check time)
Query Message
Programmable controller
(Master)
Inverter (slave) Response Message
Data absence time
(3.5 bytes or more)
Broadcast communication
Query Message
Programmable controller
(Master)
Inverter (slave) No Response
• Normal Response
After the query from the master is received, the slave executes the request function, and returns the corresponding normal
response to the master.
• Error Response
When an invalid function code, address or data is received by the slave, the error response is returned to the master.
This response is appended with an error code that indicates the reason why the request from the master could not be
executed.
This response cannot be returned for errors, detected by the hardware, frame error and CRC check error.
• Broadcast
The master can broadcast messages to all slaves by specifying address 0. All slaves that receive a message from the
master execute the requested function. With this type of communication, slaves do not return a response to the master.
NOTE
• During broadcast communication, functions are executed regarded of the set inverter station number (Pr.331).
466 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Eight-Bit Eight-Bit
Data Bytes Data Bytes
Message frames comprise of the four message fields shown in the figures above.
A slave recognizes message data as a message by the message data being prefixed and appended with a no data time of
3.5 characters (T1: start/end).
• Details of protocol
The following table explains the four message fields.
Start ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC CHECK End
L H
T1 8 bits 8 bits n 8 bits T1
8 bits 8 bits
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 467
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
468 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Message Description
Set the address to send messages to. Broadcast communication is not possible.
a Slave Address
(Invalid when "0" is set.)
b Function Set H03.
Set the address from which to start reading of data from the holding register.
Start address = start register address (decimal) - 40001
c Starting Address
For example, when start register address 0001 is set, the data of holding register
address 40002 is read.
d No. of Points Set the number of holding registers to read. Data can be read from up to 125 registers.
• Content of normal response
Message Description
The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).
e Byte Count
Twice the number of reads specified by (d) is set.
The amount of data specified by (d) is set. Read data is output Hi bytes first followed
f Data by Lo bytes, and is arranged as follows: data of start address, data of start address+1,
data of start address+2, and so forth.
Example) Read the register values of 41004 (Pr.4) to 41006 (Pr.6) from slave address 17 (H11).
Query message
Slave Address Function Starting Address No. of Points CRC Check
H11 H03 H03 HEB H00 H03 H77 H2B
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
Response message
Byte
Slave Address Function Data CRC Check
Count
H11 H03 H06 H17 H70 H0B HB8 H03 HE8 H2C HE6
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
Read value
Register 41004 (Pr.4): H1770 (60.00 Hz)
Register 41005 (Pr.5): H0BB8 (30.00 Hz)
Register 41006 (Pr.6): H03E8 (10.00 Hz) 5
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 469
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Message Description
a Slave Address Set the address to send messages to. Setting "0" enables broadcast communication.
b Function Set H06.
Set the address from data is written to the holding register.
Register address = holding register address (decimal) - 40001
c Register Address
For example, when register address 0001 is set, data is written to holding register
address 40002.
d Preset Data Set the data to write to the holding register. Write data is fixed at 2 bytes.
• Content of normal response
With a normal response, the content is the same as a to d (including the CRC check) query messages.
In the case of broadcast communication, no response is returned.
Example) Write 60Hz (H1770) to 40014 (running frequency) of slave address 5 (H05).
Query message
Slave
Function Register Address Preset Data CRC Check
Address
H05 H06 H00 H0D H17 H70 H17 H99
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
NOTE
• With broadcast communication, no response is generated even if a query is executed, so when the next query is made, it
must be made after waiting for the inverter data processing time after the previous query is executed.
470 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Message Description
Set the address to send messages to. Broadcast communication is not possible.
a Slave Address
(Invalid when "0" is set.)
b Function Set H08.
c Subfunction Set H0000.
d Data Any data 2 bytes long can be set. Setting range is H0000 to HFFFF.
• Content of normal response
With a normal response, the content is the same as a to d (including the CRC check) query messages.
NOTE
• With broadcast communication, no response is generated even if a query is executed, so when the next query is made, it
must be made after waiting for the inverter data processing time after the previous query is executed.
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 471
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Message Description
a Slave Address Set the address to send messages to. Setting "0" enables broadcast communication.
b Function Set H10.
Set the address from which to start writing of data to the holding register.
Start address = start register address (decimal) - 40001
c Starting Address
For example, when start register address 0001 is set, the data of holding register
address 40002 is read.
Set the number of holding registers to write to. Data can be written to up to 125
d No. of Points
registers.
The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).
e Byte Count
Set twice the value specified by d.
Set the amount of data specified by d. Set write data Hi bytes first followed by Lo
f Data bytes, and arrange it as follows: data of start address, data of start address+1, data of
start address+2, and so forth.
• Content of normal response
With a normal response, the content is the same as a to d (including the CRC check) query messages.
Example) Write 0.5 s(H05) to 41007 (Pr.7) and 1 s (H0A) to 41008 (Pr.8) of slave address 25 (H19).
Query message
Slave Starting Byte
Function No. of Points Data CRC Check
Address Address Count
H19 H10 H03 HEE H00 H02 H04 H00 H05 H00 H0A H86 H3D
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
472 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Message Description
Set the address to send messages to. Broadcast communication is not possible.
a Slave Address
(Invalid when "0" is set.)
b Function Set H46.
• Content of normal response
Message Description
The start address of the holding register that was successfully accessed is
returned.
c Starting Address Start address = start register address (decimal) - 40001
For example, when start address 0001 is returned, the holding register address
that was successfully accessed is 40002.
d No. of Points The number of holding registers that were successfully accessed is returned.
Example) Read the successful register start address and number of successful accesses from slave address 25 (H19).
Query message
Slave
Function CRC Check
Address
H19 H46 H8B HD2
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 473
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Error response
• An error response is returned if the query message received from the master contains an illegal function, address or data.
No response is returned for parity, CRC, overrun, framing, and Busy errors.
NOTE
• No response is also returned in the case of broadcast communication.
• Error response (Response message)
a. Slave c. Exception
b. Function CRC Check
Address Code
H80 + Function L H
(8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
Message Description
a Slave Address Set the address received from the master.
b Function The function code requested by the master + H80 is set.
c Exception Code The codes in the following table are set.
• Error code list
Code Error Item Error description
The query message from the master is set with a function code that cannot be
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION
handled by the slave.
The query message from the master is set with a register address that cannot
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS be handled by the inverter.
(No parameter, parameter cannot be read, parameter cannot be written)
The query message from the master is set with data that cannot be handled by
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE the inverter.
(Out of parameter write range, a mode is specified, other error)
NOTE
• An error will occur if all accesses holding registers do not exist. The data read value of non-existent holding registers is 0, and
data is invalid when written to non-existent holding registers.
• Error detection of message data
The following errors are detected in message data from the master. The inverter is not tripped even if an error is detected.
NOTE
• The LF signal can be assigned to an output terminal by setting Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
474 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Modbus register
• System environmental variables
Register Definition Read/Write Remarks
40002 Inverter reset Write Any value can be written
40003 Parameter clear Write Set H965A for the write value.
40004 All parameter clear Write Set H99AA for the write value.
40006 Parameter clear Write Set H5A96 for the write value.
40007 All parameter clear Write Set HAA99 for the write value.
40009 Inverter status/control input command Read/Write Refer to the following.
40010 Operation mode/inverter setting Read/Write Refer to the following.
40014 Running frequency (RAM value) Read/Write The display can be changed to the rotations
per minute using Pr.37 and Pr.144. (Refer to
40015 Running frequency (EEPROM value) Write page 261)
The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal
function selection) (page 329).
For each of the assigned signals, some signals are enabled by NET and some are disabled. (Refer to page 215.)
The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal
function selection) (page 288).
<Operation mode/inverter setting>
Write
Mode Read value
value 5
EXT H0000 H0010
PU H0001 H0011
EXT
H0002 ―
JOG
PU GROUP
H0003 ―
JOG N
NET H0004 H0014
PU+EXT H0005 ―
Enable/disable parameter writing by Pr.79 and Pr.340 settings. For the details, refer to page 209.
Restrictions in each operation mode conform with the computer link specification.
PARAMETERS 475
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
• Real-time monitor
Refer to page 263 for the register numbers and monitored items of the real time monitor.
• Parameters
Read/
Pr. Register Name Remarks
Write
41000 to For details on parameter names, refer Read/
0 to 999 The parameter number + 41000 is the register number.
41999 to the parameter list (page 112). Write
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias Read/
C2 (902) 41902
(frequency) Write
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias Read/
42092 Analog value (%) set to C3 (902)
(analog value) Write
C3 (902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
43902 Read Analog value (%) of voltage (current) applied to terminal 2
(terminal analog value)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain Read/
125 (903) 41903
(frequency) Write
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain Read/
42093 Analog value (%) set to C4 (903)
(analog value) Write
C4 (903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
43903 Read Analog value (%) of voltage (current) applied to terminal 2
(terminal analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Read/
C5 (904) 41904
(frequency) Write
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Read/
42094 Analog value (%) set to C6 (904)
(analog value) Write
C6 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
43904 Read Analog value (%) of current (voltage) applied to terminal 4
(terminal analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain Read/
126 (905) 41905
(frequency) Write
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain Read/
42095 Analog value (%) set to C7 (905)
(analog value) Write
C7 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
43905 Read Analog value (%) of current (voltage) applied to terminal 4
(terminal analog value)
Read/
C12 (917) 41917 Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed)
Write
Read/
42107 Terminal 1 bias (speed) Analog value (%) set to C13 (917)
Write
C13 (917)
Terminal 1 bias (speed)
43917 Read Analog value (%) of voltage applied to terminal 1
(terminal analog value)
Read/
C14 (918) 41918 Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed)
Write
Read/
42108 Terminal 1 gain (speed) Analog value (%) set to C15 (918)
Write
C15 (918)
Terminal 1 gain (speed)
43918 Read Analog value (%) of voltage applied to terminal 1
(terminal analog value)
Read/
C16 (919) 41919 Terminal 1 bias command (torque)
Write
Read/
42109 Terminal 1 bias (torque) Analog value (%) set to C17 (919)
Write
C17 (919)
Terminal 1 bias (torque)
43919 Read Analog value (%) of voltage applied to terminal 1
(terminal analog value)
Read/
C18 (920) 41920 Terminal 1 gain command (torque)
Write
Read/
42110 Terminal 1 gain (torque) Analog value (%) set to C19 (920)
Write
C19 (920)
Terminal 1 gain (torque)
43920 Read Analog value (%) of voltage applied to terminal 1
(terminal analog value)
Read/
C9 (930) 42120 Current output bias current Analog value (%) set to C9 (930)
Write
Read/
C11 (931) 42121 Current output gain current Analog value (%) set to C11 (931)
Write
Read/
C38 (932) 41932 Terminal 4 bias command (torque)
Write
Read/
42122 Terminal 4 bias (torque) Analog value (%) set to C39 (932)
Write
C39 (932)
Terminal 4 bias (torque)
43932 Read Analog value (%) of current (voltage) applied to terminal 4
(terminal analog value)
476 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Read/
Pr. Register Name Remarks
Write
Read/
C40 (933) 41933 Terminal 4 gain command (torque)
Write
Read/
42123 Terminal 4 gain (torque) Analog value (%) set to C41 (933)
Write
C41 (933)
Terminal 4 gain (torque)
43933 Read Analog value (%) of current (voltage) applied to terminal 4
(terminal analog value)
Read/
C42 (934) 41934 PID display bias coefficient
Write
Read/
42124 PID display bias analog value Analog value (%) set to C43 (934)
Write
C43 (934)
PID display bias analog value
43934 Read Analog value (%) of current (voltage) applied to terminal 4
(terminal analog value)
Read/
C44 (935) 41935 PID display gain coefficient
Write
Read/
42125 PID display gain analog value Analog value (%) set to C45 (935)
Write
C45 (935)
PID display gain analog value
43935 Read Analog value (%) of current (voltage) applied to terminal 4
(terminal analog value)
1000 to 45000 to For details on parameter names, refer Read/
The parameter number + 44000 is the register number.
1999 45999 to the parameter list (page 112). Write
• Faults history
44011 Capacity (First and second characters) Read Reading inverter capacity in ASCII code.
Data is read in increments of 0.1 kW, and
rounds down to 0.01 kW increments. 5
44012 Capacity (Third and fourth characters) Read "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
Example
0.75K ........."7"
44013 Capacity (Fifth and sixth characters) Read (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)
GROUP
NOTE N
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitored value is read and the read value exceeds HFFFF, the reply data will be HFFFF.
PARAMETERS 477
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Minimum
Parameter Setting range Initial value
setting range
343 (Read only) 1 0
NOTE
• The communication error count is temporarily stored in the RAM memory. The value is not stored in EEPROM, and so is
cleared to 0 when power is reset and the inverter is reset.
NOTE
• The LF signal can be assigned to an output terminal by setting Pr.190 to Pr.196. Changing the terminal assignment may
affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
478 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
ALM OFF ON
Broadcast communication
Operation mode External NET
5
check counter
Check start Time
ALM OFF ON
NOTE
• For the RS-485 terminal communication, the operation at a communication error occurrence depends on the Pr.502 Stop GROUP
PARAMETERS 479
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
0, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 81: BACnet reception status
Operation panel 20, 23 to 25, 34, 38, 82: BACnet token pass counter (Displays the count of
52
main monitor 0 40 to 45, 50 to 57, received token)
M100 61, 62, 64, 67, 68, 83: BACnet valid APDU counter (Displays the count of valid
selection
81 to 96, 98, 100 APDU detection)
774 Second motor 84: BACnet communication error counter (Displays the count
M101 inertia (integer) of communication error)
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17,
85: Terminal FM/CA output level (Same display as Analog
775 Second motor 18, 20, 23 to 25, 34, Output 0)
M102 inertia (exponent) 38, 40 to 45,
9999 86: Terminal AM output level (Same display as Analog Output
50 to 57, 61, 62, 64,
1)
Second motor 67, 68, 81 to 96, 98,
776 The count of the setting values "82" and "83" returns to "0" if
protection current 100
M103 the count exceeds "9999". The upper limit of the count of the
level setting value "84" is "9999".
RS-485
331
communication 0 0 to 127 Set the inverter station number (node).
N030
station number
Set the communication speed.
RS-485
332 96, 192, 384, 576, The setting value × 100 equals the communication speed.
communication 96
N031 768, 1152 For example, the communication speed is 9600 bps when the
speed setting value is "96".
390 % setting reference
60 Hz 50 Hz 1 to 590 Hz Set a reference frequency of the set frequency.
N054 frequency
0 Mitsubishi inverter (computer link) protocol
549
Protocol selection 0 1 Modbus-RTU protocol
N000
2 BACnet MS/TP protocol
Auto baud rate (bit 7)
726 Auto Baudrate/Max 0: inactive, 1: active
255 0 to 255
N050 Master Max Master (bit 0 to bit 6) setting range: 0 to 127
Maximum address for master node
727 Set the maximum number of frames that the inverter can
Max Info Frames 1 1 to 255
N051 transmit while it owns the token.
Device instance Device identifier
728 0 to 419 When the combination of Pr.728 and Pr.729 is not within "0
number (Upper 3 0
N052 (0 to 418) to 4194302", the setting is out of range.
digits)
When Pr.728="419", the setting range of Pr.729 is "0 to
Device instance 4302".
729 0 to 9999
number (Lower 4 0 When Pr.729="4303" or more, the setting range of Pr.728 is
N053 (0 to 4302)
digits) "0 to 418".
When the set value is outside of the setting range, the initial value is applied.
When the Auto baudrate is used, the communication speed is changed to the detected communication speed.
480 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Communication specifications
• The specifications conform to the BACnet standard of physical medium EIA-485.
Item Description
Physical medium EIA-485 (RS-485)
Connection port RS-485 terminals (PU connector is not available.)
Data transfer method NRZ encoding
Baud rate 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 76800 bps, 115200 bps
Start bit Fixed to 1 bit
Data length Fixed to 8 bits
Parity bit Fixed to none
Stop bit Fixed to 1 bit
Network topology Bus topology
Token passing (token bus)
Communication method
Master-slave (Only the master is available for this product.)
Communication protocol MS/TP (master-slave/token passing LAN)
Maximum connection 255 (up to 32 for one segment, addition with a repeater available)
Node number 0 to 127
Master 0 to 127 (This product is the master.)
Supported property of BACnet
Refer to page 483.
standard object type
Supported BIBBs (Annex K) Refer to page 491.
BACnet standard device profile (Annex
Refer to page 491.
L)
Segmentation Not supported
Device address binding Not supported
NOTE
• This product conforms to BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).
• This product is designed for multiple master network, therefore 2-wire type connection is supported.
Other
node P5S SG SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1
(VCC) (GND) (TXD1+) (TXD1-) (RXD1+) (RXD1-)
510Ω
GROUP
N
Connect two 510 Ω (1/4W) resistors.
PARAMETERS 481
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Monitor LF signal
Status Description
value output
0 Idle Never had BACnet communication OFF
Automatic baud rate Automatic baud rate recognition
1 OFF
recognition (Communication error during automatic baud rate recognition is not counted.)
2 Not joined the network Waiting for a token to own node OFF
10 Received a token to own node OFF
11 Data to own node Received a supported request to own node (including broadcasting) OFF
12 Received an unsupported request to own node (including broadcasting) OFF
20 Data to other node Received a token to other nodes OFF
30 Node separated Separated from token passing after joined in it OFF
90 Detected a communication error ON
Error data Protocol error
91 ON
(LPDU, NPDU, APDU are not following the format regulations.)
Set frequency = % setting reference frequency × Speed scale (Refer to page 485)
0.00 Hz
0% 100.00%
NOTE
• The % setting reference frequency cannot be set at less than the minimum frequency resolution of the inverter.
• The set frequency is written to RAM.
• The set frequency is applied at the writing of Speed scale. (The set frequency is not applied at the setting of Pr.390.)
NOTE
• After the baud rate recognition, the recognized baud rate is written in EEPROM as the Pr.332 setting regardless of the Pr.342
Communication EEPROM write selection setting.
• The BACnet status monitor displays "1" during automatic baud rate recognition.
• The communication error monitor count is not performed during automatic baud rate recognition.
• During automatic baud rate recognition, the inverter does not transmit data, but only accepts data.
• The baud rate switching operation cannot be finished if the inverter is not connected to the communication bus. (BACnet
protocol will not be established.)
• The baud rate switching operation cannot be finished if the inverter is continuously receiving abnormal data during automatic
baud rate switching. (BACnet protocol will not be established.)
482 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Analog Output
Binary Output
Analog Value
Analog Input
Binary Value
Binary Input
Device
Property
APDU Timeout R
Application Software Version R
Database Revision R
Device Address Binding R
Event State R R R R R R
Firmware Revision R
Max APDU Length Accepted R
Max Info Frames W
Max Master W
Model Name R
Number of APDU Retries R
Object Identifier R R R R R R R
Object List R
Object Name R R R R R R R
Object Type R R R R R R R
Out Of Service R R R R R R
Polarity R R
Present Value R C C R C C
Priority Array R R R R
Protocol Object Types Supported R
Protocol Revision R
Protocol Services Supported R
Protocol Version R
Relinquish Default R R R R
Segmentation Supported R
Status Flags R R R R R R
System Status R
Unit R R R
Vendor Identifier R
Vendor Name R
This property is commandable for some instances of this object. Otherwise it is read/write.
This property is supported only for instances of this object where the Present Value property is commandable.
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 483
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
ANALOG OUTPUT
Object Present value
Object name Description Unit
identifier access type
Controls actual output current level of terminal FM/CA.
Control is available when Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function percent
0 Terminal FM (CA) C
selection="85". (98)
(Setting range: 0 to 200%)
Controls actual output voltage level of terminal AM.
Control is available when Pr.158 AM terminal function percent
1 Terminal AM C
selection="86". (98)
(Setting range: -200 to 200%)
R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
Values written to the objects that support the commandable values are stored in the Priority Array, even when "Write Access Denied" is returned
due to inconsistency of the writing requirements such as the operating mode, on condition that the values are written within the setting range.
Available regardless of the operation mode, operation command source, and speed command source.
ANALOG VALUE
Object Present value
Object name Description Unit
identifier access type
hertz
1 Output frequency R Represents the output frequency monitor.
(27)
amperes
2 Output current R Represents the output current monitor.
(3)
volts
3 Output voltage R Represents the output voltage monitor.
(5)
revolution-
6 Running speed R Represents the running speed monitor. per-minute
(104)
Converter output volts
8 R Represents the converter output voltage monitor.
voltage (5)
kilowatts
14 Output power R Represents the output power monitor.
(48)
percent
17 Load meter R Represents the load meter monitor.
(98)
Cumulative hours
20 R Represents the cumulative energization time monitor.
energization time (71)
hours
23 Actual operation time R Represents the actual operation time monitor.
(71)
484 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
PARAMETERS 485
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
BINARY INPUT
Object Present value Description
Object name
identifier access type (0: Inactive, 1: Active)
0 Terminal STF R Represents actual input of terminal STF.
1 Terminal STR R Represents actual input of terminal STR.
2 Terminal AU R Represents actual input of terminal AU.
3 Terminal RT R Represents actual input of terminal RT.
4 Terminal RL R Represents actual input of terminal RL.
5 Terminal RM R Represents actual input of terminal RM.
6 Terminal RH R Represents actual input of terminal RH.
7 Terminal JOG R Represents actual input of terminal JOG.
8 Terminal MRS R Represents actual input of terminal MRS.
9 Terminal STOP R Represents actual input of terminal STOP.
10 Terminal RES R Represents actual input of terminal RES.
11 Terminal CS R Represents actual input of terminal CS.
100 Terminal RUN R Represents actual output of terminal RUN.
101 Terminal SU R Represents actual output of terminal SU.
102 Terminal IPF R Represents actual output of terminal IPF.
103 Terminal OL R Represents actual output of terminal OL.
104 Terminal FU R Represents actual output of terminal FU.
105 Terminal ABC1 R Represents actual output of terminal ABC1.
106 Terminal ABC2 R Represents actual output of terminal ABC2.
107 Terminal SO R Represents actual output of terminal SO.
R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
BINARY OUTPUT
Object Present value Description
Object name
identifier access type (0: Inactive, 1: Active)
Represents actual output of terminal RUN.
0 Terminal RUN CMD C
Available when Pr.190 RUN terminal function selection="82 or 182".
Controls actual output of terminal SU.
1 Terminal SU CMD C
Available when Pr.191 SU terminal function selection="82 or 182".
Controls actual output of terminal IPF.
2 Terminal IPF CMD C
Available when Pr.192 IPF terminal function selection="82 or 182".
Controls actual output of terminal OL.
3 Terminal OL CMD C
Available when Pr.193 OL terminal function selection="82 or 182".
Controls actual output of terminal FU.
4 Terminal FU CMD C
Available when Pr.194 FU terminal function selection="82 or 182".
Controls actual output of terminal ABC1.
5 Terminal ABC1 CMD C
Available when Pr.195 ABC1 terminal function selection="82 or 182".
Controls actual output of terminal ABC2.
6 Terminal ABC2 CMD C
Available when Pr.196 ABC2 terminal function selection="82 or 182".
R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
Values written to the objects that support the commandable values are stored in the Priority Array, even when "Write Access Denied" is returned
due to inconsistency of the writing requirements such as the operating mode, on condition that the values are written within the setting range.
Available regardless of the operation mode, operation command source, and speed command source.
486 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
BINARY VALUE
Object Present value
Object name Description
identifier access type
0 Inverter running R Represents inverter running (RUN signal) status.
Inverter operation
11 R Represents inverter operation ready (RY signal) status.
ready
98 Alarm output R Represents alarm output (LF signal) status.
99 Fault output R Represents fault output (ALM signal) status.
Inverter running
200 R Represents inverter reverse running status.
reverse
Controls the function assigned to terminal AU.
Control input
300 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.184 AU terminal
instruction AU
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal RT.
Control input
301 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.183 RT terminal
instruction RT
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal RL.
Control input
302 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.180 RL terminal
instruction RL
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal RM.
Control input
303 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.181 RM terminal
instruction RM
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal RH.
Control input
304 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.182 RH terminal
instruction RH
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal JOG.
Control input
305 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.185 JOG
instruction JOG
terminal function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal MRS.
Control input
306 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.187 MRS
instruction MRS
terminal function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal STOP.
Control input
307 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.188 STOP
instruction STOP
terminal function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal RES.
Control input
308 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.189 RES
instruction RES
terminal function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal CS.
Control input
309 C Setting 1 in this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr.186 CS terminal
instruction CS
function selection.
Controls the start/stop command. The start command is written after the
Speed scale is applied.
400 Run/Stop C
1: Start
0: Stop
Controls the forward/reverse rotation.
401 Forward/Reverse C 1: Reverse rotation
0: Forward rotation
Clears fault output status.
402 Fault reset C
(Release of an inverter fault without inverter reset is available.)
R: Read only, W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported), C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
5
Values written to the objects that support the commandable values are stored in the Priority Array, even when "Write Access Denied" is returned
due to inconsistency of the writing requirements such as the operating mode, on condition that the values are written within the setting range.
The following signals cannot be controlled by the network: Jog operation, selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, start
self-holding, and reset. Therefore control input instruction JOG, STOP, RES, and CS are invalid in the initial status. To use the control input
instruction JOG, STOP, RES, and CS, change the signals with Pr.185, Pr.186, Pr.188, Pr.189 (input terminal function selection). (Refer to
page 329.) (Reset is available with ReinitializeDevice.)
If communication operation command source is other than NET, the setting value can be written, but not to be applied.
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 487
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Writing is available depending on the Pr.79 and Pr.340 settings. For the details, refer to page 209.
The restrictions depending on the operation mode changes according to the computer link specifications.
488 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Read/
Pr. Register Parameter name Remarks
write
42107 Terminal 1 bias (speed) Read/write Analog value (%) set to C13 (917)
C13 (917) Terminal 1 bias (speed)
43917 Read Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to the terminal 1
(terminal analog value)
C14 (918) 41918 Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) Read/write
42108 Terminal 1 gain (speed) Read/write Analog value (%) set to C15 (918)
C15 (918) Terminal 1 gain (speed)
43918 Read Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to the terminal 1
(terminal analog value)
C16 (919) 41919 Terminal 1 bias command (torque) Read/write
42109 Terminal 1 bias (torque) Read/write Analog value (%) set to C17 (919)
C17 (919) Terminal 1 bias (torque)
43919 Read Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to the terminal 1
(terminal analog value)
C18 (920) 41920 Terminal 1 gain command (torque) Read/write
42110 Terminal 1 gain (torque) Read/write Analog value (%) set to C19 (920)
C19 (920) Terminal 1 gain (torque)
43920 Read Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to the terminal 1
(terminal analog value)
C9 (930) 42120 Current output bias current Read/write Analog value (%) set to C9 (930)
C11 (931) 42121 Current output gain current Read/write Analog value (%) set to C11 (931)
C38 (932) 41932 Terminal 4 bias command (torque) Read/write
42122 Terminal 4 bias (torque) Read/write Analog value (%) set to C39 (932)
C39 (932) Terminal 4 bias (torque) Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to the
43932 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 4
C40 (933) 41933 Terminal 4 gain command (torque) Read/write
42123 Terminal 4 gain (torque) Read/write Analog value (%) set to C41 (933)
C41 (933) Terminal 4 gain (torque) Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to the
43933 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 4
C42 (934) 41934 PID display bias coefficient Read/write
42124 PID display bias analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set to C43 (934)
C43 (934) PID display bias analog value Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to the
43934 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 4
C44 (935) 41935 PID display gain coefficient Read/write
42125 PID display gain analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set to C45 (935)
C45 (935) PID display gain analog value Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to the
43935 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 4
1000 to 45000 to Refer to the parameter list (page 112)
Read/write The parameter number + 44000 is the register number.
1999 45999 for parameter names.
• Faults history
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
40501 Faults history 1 Read/write
40502 Faults history 2 Read Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as "H00".
40503 Faults history 3 Read Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the error code. (Refer to page 533
40504 Faults history 4 Read for the error codes.)
40505 Faults history 5 Read Performing write using the register 40501 batch-clears the faults
40506 Faults history 6 Read history.
40507 Faults history 7 Read Set any value as data.
40508 Faults history 8 Read
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 489
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
NOTE
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned.
490 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Product Description:
Segmentation Capability:
Segmented requests supported Window Size
Segmented responses supported Window Size
5
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 491
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
For the object types supported by the FR-F800 series, refer to page 484.
Networking Options:
Router, Clause 6 - List all routing configurations, e.g., ARCNET-Ethernet, Ethernet-MS/TP, etc.
Annex H, BACnet Tunneling Router over IP
BACnet/IP Broadcast Management Device (BBMD)
Does the BBMD support registrations by Foreign Devices? Yes No
492 PARAMETERS
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
547 USB communication
0 0 to 31 Inverter station number specification
N040 station number
USB communication is possible, however the inverter will
0 trip (E.USB) when the mode changes to the PU operation
mode.
548 USB communication
9999 Set the communication check time interval.
N041 check time interval 0.1 to 999.8 s If a no-communication state persists for longer than the
permissible time, the inverter will trip (E.USB).
9999 No communication check
Changed setting value becomes valid at power ON or the inverter reset.
• At the initial setting (Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection = "9999"), communication with FR
Configurator2 can be made in the PU operation mode simply by connecting a USB cable. To fix the command source to the
USB connector in the PU operation mode, set "3" to Pr.551.
• Parameter setting and monitoring can be performed by FR Configurator2. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR
Configurator2. 5
Parameters referred to
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection page 210
GROUP
N
PARAMETERS 493
(N) Operation via communication and its settings
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Set the inverter station numbers.
117 PU communication The inverter station number setting is required when multiple
0 0 to 31
N020 station number inverters are connected to one GOT (PU connector
communication).
Set the inverter station numbers.
331 RS-485 communication 0 to 31 The inverter station number setting is required when multiple
0
N030 station number (0 to 247) inverters are connected to one GOT (RS-485 terminal
communication).
When Pr.549 Protocol selection = "1" (Modbus-RTU protocol), the setting range is as shown in the parentheses.
When the set value is outside of the setting range, the initial value is applied.
GOT2000
Terminating resistor
NOTE
• If the automatic recognition cannot be performed, initial setting in Pr.999 is required.
• For connecting the inverter to the GOT2000 series using the RS-485 terminal block, set Pr.549 Protocol selection = "0
(initial value) or 1".
• For connection to a device other than the GOT2000 series, initial setting in Pr.999 is required.
• For details, refer to the GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Product).
Parameters referred to
Pr.999 Automatic parameter setting page 173
494 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
GROUP
G
PARAMETERS 495
(G) Control parameters
Voltage drop in the low-frequency range can be compensated, improving reduction of the motor torque in the low-speed
range.
• Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted according to the load, increasing the motor torque at the
start up.
• By using the RT signal, it is possible to switch between 2 types of torque boost.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
6%
4%
0 3%
Torque boost 0 to 30% Set the output voltage at 0 Hz in %.
G000 2%
1.5%
1%
46 0 to 30% Set the torque boost value at when RT signal is ON.
Second torque boost 9999
G010 9999 Without second torque boost
Initial value for the FR-F820-00046(0.75K) or lower and FR-F840-00023(0.75K) or lower.
Initial values for the FR-F820-00077(1.5K) to FR-F820-00167(3.7K), FR-F840-00038(1.5K) to FR-F840-00083(3.7K).
Initial values for the FR-F820-00250(5.5K), FR-F820-00340(7.5K), FR-F840-00126(5.5K), FR-F840-00170(7.5K).
Initial values for the FR-F820-00490(11K) to FR-F820-01540(37K), FR-F840-00250(11K) to FR-F840-00770(37K).
Initial value for the FR-F820-01870(45K), FR-F820-02330(55K), FR-F840-00930(45K), FR-F840-01160(55K).
Initial value for the FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher.
Output
voltage
Pr.0 Setting
Pr.46 range
0 Output Base
frequency frequency
(Hz)
NOTE
• The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 333.)
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Set a larger value when the distance between the inverter and the motor is long or when there is not enough motor torque in
the low-speed range. It may cause overcurrent trip when it is set too large.
• Setting for Pr.0 and Pr.46 becomes enabled only when the V/F control is selected.
• When the initial value is set in Pr.0, the Pr.0 setting is automatically changed by changing the Pr.71 Applied motor setting.
(Refer to page 337)
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.19 Base frequency voltage page 497
Pr.71 Applied motor page 337
Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) page 329
496 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
Use this function to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to match with the motor rating.
Pr.19
Output frequency
(Hz)
Pr.3
Pr.47
NOTE
• The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 333.)
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. It is also possible to assign the RT signal to other terminal by
setting "3" on Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
GROUP
G
PARAMETERS 497
(G) Control parameters
NOTE
• When the Advanced magnetic flux vector control or PM motor control is selected, Pr.3, Pr.47 and Pr.19 will become disabled,
and Pr.83 and Pr.84 will become enabled.
However, S-pattern curve with Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection = "1" (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
A) will make Pr.3 or Pr.47 enabled. (S-pattern curve at the time of the PM motor control is the rated frequency of the motor.)
• When Pr.71 Applied motor = "2" (adjustable 5 points V/F), setting for Pr.47 will become disabled. Also, Pr.19 cannot be set
to "8888" or "9999".
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to
Pr.14 Load pattern selection page 499
Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection page 191
Pr.71 Applied motor page 337
Pr.83 Rated motor voltage, Pr.84 Rated motor frequency page 341
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
498 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics) for application or load characteristics can be selected.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
14 0 For constant-torque load
Load pattern selection 1
G003 1 For variable-torque load
100%
Output voltage
POINT
• Select for constant-torque load (setting value "0") even for fan and pump in following cases.
- When accelerating a blower with large moment of inertia (J) in a short period of time.
- When it is a constant-torque load such as rotary pump or gear pump.
- When the load torque increases in low speed such as screw pump.
100%
Output voltage
NOTE
• Pr.14 will become enabled at the time of V/F control. 5
Parameters referred to
Pr.0 Torque boost page 496
Pr.3 Base frequency page 497
Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) page 329
GROUP
G
PARAMETERS 499
(G) Control parameters
Inverter will perform energy saving control automatically even when the detailed parameter settings are made.
It is appropriate for applications such as fan and pump.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 Normal operation
60 Energy saving control
0 4 Energy saving operation
G030 selection
9 Optimum excitation control
NOTE
• An energy saving effect is not expected with the energy saving operation mode for applications with high load torque or with
the equipment with frequent acceleration and deceleration.
• An energy saving effect is not expected with the Optimum excitation control mode when the motor capacity is extremely small
compared with the inverter capacity or when multiple motors are connected to a single inverter.
• When the energy saving operation mode or Optimum excitation control mode is selected, the deceleration time may become
longer than setting value. Also, it may cause overvoltage more often compared to constant-torque load characteristics, so set
the deceleration time longer.
• When the motor becomes unstable during the acceleration, set the acceleration time longer.
• Output current may increase slightly with the energy saving operation mode or the Optimum excitation control mode since the
output voltage is controlled.
500 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
By setting a desired V/F characteristic from the start up to the base frequency or base voltage with the V/F control
(frequency voltage/frequency), a dedicated V/F pattern can be generated.
Optimal V/F pattern matching the torque characteristics of the facility can be set.
Voltage
• By setting the V/F1 (first frequency voltage/first frequency) to V/F5
Base parameters in advance, a desired V/F characteristic can be obtained.
frequency
voltage
• For an example, with the equipment with large static friction factor and
V/F5
Pr.19 small dynamic friction factor, large torque is required only at the start up, so
V/F4 a V/F pattern that will raise the voltage only at the low-speed range is set.
Torque V/F3 • Setting procedure
V/F1
boost
V/F2 1) Set the rated motor voltage in Pr.19 Base frequency voltage. (No
Pr.0 Frequency
0 Base function at the setting of "9999" or "8888".)
V/F Characteristic frequency 2) Set Pr.71 Applied motor = "2" (adjustable 5 points V/F).
Pr.3
3) Set frequency and voltage to be set in Pr.100 to Pr.109.
Caution
Make sure to set this parameter correctly according to the motor used. Incorrect setting may cause
5
the motor to overheat and burn.
NOTE
• Adjustable 5 points V/F will become enabled at the time of V/F control.
• At the time of Pr.19 Base frequency voltage ="8888, 9999", setting of Pr.71 = "2" cannot be made. When setting Pr.71 =
"2", set the rated motor voltage in Pr.19.
• Read only error ( ) is generated when the frequency value for each point is same. GROUP
• Set each point for Pr.100 to Pr.109 (frequency, voltage) within the range of Pr.3 Base frequency and Pr.19 Base frequency G
voltage.
• When Pr.71 = "2", Pr.47 Second V/F (base frequency) will not function.
• When Pr.71 = "2", electronic thermal O/L relay will make calculations assuming a standard motor.
• By simultaneously using Pr.60 Energy saving control selection and the adjustable 5 points V/F, further energy saving effect
is expected.
• The Pr.0 Torque boost and Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage settings are automatically changed according to
the Pr.71 setting. (Refer to page 340)
PARAMETERS 501
(G) Control parameters
Parameters referred to
Pr.0 Torque boost page 496
Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.19 Base frequency voltage page 497
Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage page 502
Pr.47 Second V/F (base frequency) page 501
Pr.60 Energy saving control selection page 500
Pr.71 Applied motor, Pr.450 Second applied motor page 337
• As compared to our conventional SF-JR motor, the slip amount is small for the high-performance energy-saving SF-
PR motor. When replacing the SF-JR to the SF-PR, the slip amount is reduced and the rotations per minute increases.
Therefore, when the SF-PR is used with the same frequency setting as that of the SF-JR, power consumption may
increase as compared to the SF-JR.
• By setting the slip amount adjustment mode, the frequency command can be adjusted to keep the rotations per minute
of the SF-PR equivalent to those of the SF-JR for power consumption reduction.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
SF-PR slip amount 2, 4, 6 Set the number of SF-PR motor poles.
673
adjustment operation 9999
G060 9999 Slip amount adjustment mode invalid
selection
674 SF-PR slip amount
100% 0 to 500% Setting is available for fine adjustment of the slip amount.
G061 adjustment gain
• By setting the number of SF-PR motor poles in Pr.673 SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation selection, the SF-PR
slip amount adjustment mode is activated.
• The SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode is available only under V/F control.
• Use Pr.674 SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain to fine-tune the rotations per minute. To reduce the rotations per minute
(to increase the compensation frequency), set a larger value in Pr.674. To increase the rotations per minute (to reduce the
compensation frequency), set a smaller value in Pr.674.
NOTE
• The slip amount adjustment mode is not available in the following cases.
During acceleration/deceleration, during DC injection brake operation, during PID control, during stall prevention operation,
during regeneration avoidance operation, during traverse operation, and while the slip compensation is valid (Pr.245).
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
10 DC injection brake 0 to 120 Hz Set the operation frequency for the DC injection brake.
3 Hz
G100 operation frequency 9999 Operate at Pr.13 or lower
0 Without DC injection brake
11 DC injection brake
0.5 s 0.1 to 10 s Set the operation time for the DC injection brake.
G101 operation time
8888 Operate with X13 signal ON
4%
12 DC injection brake Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque). When set to "0",
2% 0 to 30%
G110 operation voltage there will be without DC injection brake.
1%
Initial value for the FR-F820-00340(7.5K) or lower and FR-F840-00170(7.5K) or lower.
Initial values for the FR-F820-00490(11K) to FR-F820-02330(55K), FR-F840-00250(11K) to FR-F840-01160(55K).
Initial value for the FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher.
502 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
• DC injection brake operation frequency will be fixed to 0 Hz at the time of PM motor control.
(Hz)
Output
frequency
Pr. 10 Operation
frequency
Time
DC injection Pr.12
brake Operation
voltage voltage
Time
(Hz)
Time
Pr.12
DC injection
brake voltage Time
STF ON
5
NOTE
• The X13 signal is disabled during PM motor control.
GROUP
G
PARAMETERS 503
(G) Control parameters
NOTE
• When the initial value is set in Pr.12, the setting corresponding to the motor is set according to the Pr.71 Applied motor
setting. (Refer to page 340)
However, when an energy saving motor (SF-HR or SF-HRCA) is used, change the Pr.12 setting as shown below.
Inverter Pr.12 setting
FR-F820-00167(3.7K) or lower
4%
FR-F840-00083(3.7K) or lower
FR-F820-00250(5.5K), FR-F820-00340(7.5K)
3%
FR-F840-00126(5.5K), FR-F840-00170(7.5K)
FR-F820-00490(11K) to FR-F820-00930(22K), FR-F820-01540(37K) or higher
2%
FR-F840-00250(11K) to FR-F840-00470(22K), FR-F840-00770(37K) or higher
FR-F820-01250(30K)
1.5%
FR-F840-00620(30K)
• Even if the setting value of Pr.12 is made larger, braking torque will be limited so the output current will be within the rated
current of the inverter.
Caution
Install a mechanical brake to make an emergency stop or to stay stopped for a long time.
Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequency page 197, page 198
Pr.71 Applied motor page 337
Pr.80 Motor capacity page 341
Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) page 329
504 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
522 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency to start coasting to a stop (output shutoff).
Output stop frequency 9999
G105 9999 No function
• When both of the frequency setting signal and output frequency falls to the frequency set in Pr. 522 or lower, the inverter
stops the output and the motor coasts to a stop.
• At a stop condition, the motor starts running when the frequency setting signal exceeds Pr.522 + 2 Hz. The motor is
accelerated at the Pr.13 Starting frequency (0.01 Hz under PM motor control) at the start.
Output frequency∗1
Target frequency
(fixed)
Pr.522+2Hz
Pr.522
Pr.13
Time
Inverter output shutoff
STF
RUN
The output frequency before the slip compensation is compared with the Pr.522 setting.
NOTE
• When the output stop function is valid (Pr.522 "9999"), the DC injunction brake becomes invalid and the motor coasts to
stop when the output frequency drops to the Pr.522 setting or lower.
Example of: target frequency = analog input command, start signal always ON
Pr.522+2Hz
Pr.522
Time
∗2
Output frequency
∗3 ∗3
Pr.522+2Hz
Pr.522
5
∗1 ∗1
Pr.13
Time
Inverter output Inverter output
shutoff shutoff
STF
GROUP
RUN
G
At a stop condition, the motor is accelerated at the Pr.13 Starting frequency (0.01 Hz under PM motor control).
The output frequency to be compared with the Pr.522 setting is the output frequency before slip compensation (V/F control and Advanced
magnetic flux vector control), or the speed command value converted into the frequency (PM motor control).
Steepness of the slope depends on the acceleration/deceleration time settings such as Pr.7.
PARAMETERS 505
(G) Control parameters
NOTE
• Motor coasts when the command value drops to Pr.522 or lower while the start signal is ON. If the command value exceeds
Pr.522+2 Hz again while coasting, the motor starts running at Pr.13 Starting frequency (0.01 Hz under PM motor control).
When the motor re-accelerates after coasting, the inverter may trip in some parameter settings. (Activation of the restart
function is recommended especially for an PM motor.)
• The output stop frequency function is disabled during PID control, JOG operation, power failure stop, traverse function
operation, or offline auto tuning.
• Output stop function does not operate during reverse rotation deceleration. However, when the frequency setting signal and
output frequency falls to Pr.522 or lower, the inverter coasts to a stop.
• During the output stop due to the output stop function (when forward/reverse command is given, but frequency command is
not given), FWD/REV LED indication on the operation panel flickers fast.
Caution
A PM motor is a motor with interior permanent magnets. High voltage is generated at motor
terminals while the motor is running. Do not touch motor terminals and other parts until the motor
stops to prevent an electric shock.
Parameters referred to
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency, Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time, Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage page 502
Pr.13 Starting frequency page 197, page 198
506 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Start signal (STF/STR)
value range Stop operation
(Refer to page 335.)
It will coast to stop after set
STF signal: Forward rotation start
0 to 100 s time when the start signal is
STR signal: Reverse rotation start
turned OFF.
DC brake
Time
is turned OFF.
Start
ON OFF
signal
RUN
signal ON OFF
Time
the start signal is turned OFF. The motor will coast to stop.
Start signal ON OFF
• The RUN signal will be turned OFF at the time of output stop.
RUN signal ON OFF
NOTE
• Stop selection is disabled when following functions are operating.
- Power failure stop function (Pr.261)
- PU stop (Pr.75)
- Deceleration stop due to communication error (Pr.502)
- Offline auto tuning (with motor rotation)
• When Pr.250 ≠ "9999 or 8888", acceleration/deceleration is performed in accordance to the frequency command until the 5
output is shutoff by turning OFF the start signal.
• When the restart signal is turned ON during the motor coasting, the operation is resumed from Pr.13 Starting frequency.
Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time page 187
GROUP
Pr.13 Starting frequency page 197, page 198
G
Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection page 162
Pr.261 Power failure stop selection page 426
Pr.502 Stop mode selection at communication error page 446
PARAMETERS 507
(G) Control parameters
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 to 2, 10, 11, 20, First digit: Regeneration unit selection ("0" for FR-BU2 (GZG/
21, 100 to 102, GRZG/FR-BR), "1" for FR-BU2 (MT-BR5), "2" for FR-HC2 or FR-
110, 111, 120, CV)
30 Regenerative 0 121 Second digit: Selection of the power supply terminal to the
E300 function selection 10 inverter ("0" for AC, "1" for DC, "2" for AC and DC)
2, 10, 11, 102, Third digit: Reset when the power is supplied to the main circuit
110, 111 ("0" for reset, "1" for no reset)
For details, refer to the table below.
599 X10 terminal input 0 0 Normally open input
T721 selection 1 1 Normally closed input (NC contact input specification)
The initial value or setting range for the standard model
The initial value or setting range for the separated converter type.
• FR-F842-07700(355K) or higher
Regeneration unit Pr.30 Setting
Without regenerative function (FR-CC2) 10 (initial value), 110
Brake unit
11, 111
(FR-CC2+FR-BU2 (MT-BR5))
High power factor converter (FR-HC2) 2, 102
While the power is supplied only to the control circuit with Pr.30 = "100 or higher", the inverter reset is not performed when the power is supplied to the
main circuit.
508 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
NOTE
• When Pr.30 = "1, 11, 21", oL (stall prevention (overvoltage)) does not operate.
When using the high power factor converter (FR-HC2), the power
regeneration common converter (FR-CV), or the converter unit (FR-CC2)
• To use FR-HC2 or FR-CV, set Pr.30="2".
• When using FR-CC2, set Pr.30="10" (initial value of separated converter type).
• Assign the following signal to a contact input terminal using any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
(a) Inverter run enable signal (X10): FR-HC2 connection, FR-CV connection, FR-CC2connection
To have coordinated protection with FR-HC2, FR-CV or FR-CC2, shutoff the inverter output by the X10 signal.
Input the RDY signal of the FR-HC2 (RDYB signal of FR-CV or RDA signal of FR-CC2).
(b) FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous power failure detection signal (X11): FR-HC2 connection, FR-CC2
connection
During the operation using RS-485 communication, with the remote output and analog remote output functions
enabled, the X11 signal is used to store the status when the inverter is set to store the status before an
instantaneous power failure.
Input the IPF signal (instantaneous power failure detection signal) of the FR-HC2 or FR-CC2.
• For the terminal to be used for the X10 and X11 signal, set "10" (X10), "11" (X11) in Pr.178 to Pr.189 and assign the
function. (For separated converter types, the X10 signal is assigned to the terminal MRS in the initial setting.)
NOTE
• For details of brake unit, high power factor converter (FR-HC2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) connections,
refer to page 63 to 67. Also, for details of each option, refer to instruction manual of each option.
• When changed to Pr.30 = "2", inverter will reset, so "Err" is displayed on the operation panel.
GROUP
G
PARAMETERS 509
(G) Control parameters
• Relationship between Pr.599 and the inverter operation enable signal of each option unit
Corresponding signals of the option units Operation according to the
Pr.599 setting
FR-HC2 FR-CV FR-CC2 X10 signal status
0 RDY (negative logic) X10-ON: Inverter output shutoff
RDYB RDB
(Initial value of standard models) (initial setting) (NO contact)
1
X10-OFF: Inverter output shutoff
(Initial value of separated converter RDY (positive logic) RDYA RDA
(NC contact)
types)
NOTE
• If the X10 signal is unassigned while Pr.30 = "2" (FR-HC2/FR-CV connection) or "10 or 11" (DC feeding mode 1), the MRS
signal can be used as the X10 signal. At this time, logic setting for the signal will follow Pr.17 MRS input selection.
• MRS signal is enabled from any of the communication or external input, but when using the MRS signal as Inverter run
enable signal (X10), it can be used as input from external.
• When FR-HC or MT-HC is connected, set Pr.599 = "0 (initial value)".
• When the terminal assignment is changed with Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection), wiring may be
mistaken due to different terminal name and signal contents, or may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming
the function of each terminal.
Reset when the power is supplied to the main circuit (Pr.30 = "100, 101,
102, 110, 111, 120 or 121")
• While the power is supplied only to the control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L12 input or 24 V external power supply) with Pr.30 =
"100 or higher", the inverter reset is not performed when the power is supplied (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 input) to the main circuit.
• When a communication option, etc. is used, communication interruption due to the inverter reset can be avoided.
NOTE
• When the power is supplied to the main circuit while the inverter protective function is activated, the inverter reset is
performed even if it the setting is "No reset" at power ON.
510 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
Inrush
R/L1 current U
S/L2 limit circuit
V
IM
T/L3 W
R1/L11
DC power MC S1/L21 Earth
(+) P/+ (Ground)
N/-
(-)
10
3
Frequency command 2
2
Frequency setting
potentiometer 1 5
1/2W1kΩ
Caution
Do not connect a separated converter type inverter to a DC power supply. Doing so may damage the
inverter.
Signal Parameter
Name Description
name setting
To operate with DC feeding, turn ON the X70 signal. When the inverter output is shutoff due
DC feeding to power failure, it will be possible to start up 200 ms after turning ON the X70 signal. Set "70" to
operation (Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure can start after the time set in Pr.57 has either of
X70
permission elapsed.) Pr.178 to
signal When the X70 signal is turned OFF while operating the inverter, output shutoff (Pr.261 = 0) Pr.189.
5
Input
DC feeding The Y85 signal will not turn OFF even with the power restoration while the inverter is
Y85 (negative
signal running, but turns OFF after stopping the inverter. When the Y85 signal is turned ON due to
logic)" to one
undervoltage, the Y85 signal will not turn OFF even when the undervoltage is resolved.
of Pr.190 to
The ON/OFF status is maintained when the inverter is reset.
Pr.196.
PARAMETERS 511
(G) Control parameters
• Following is the connection diagram of switching to DC power supply using the power failure detection of the inverter.
Inverter
MCCB MC Inrush
R/L1 current U
Three-phase AC S/L2 limit circuit V
power supply IM
T/L3 W
R1/L11
DC power MC1 S1/L21 Earth
P/+ (Ground)
(+)
N/-
(-)
Assign the function by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
Assign the function by setting Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection).
Y85(MC) ON
X70 ON
X71 ON
STF(STR) ON ON
Motor
Output coasting
frequency
(Hz)
Time
Approx.
200ms
Back up operation
• Operation example at the time of power failure occurrence 2 (when the AC power supply is restored)
X70 ON
X71 OFF
STF(STR) ON ON
Motor
Output coasting
frequency
(Hz)
Time
Approx.200ms
Back up operation
512 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
• Operation example at the time of power failure occurrence 3 (when continuing the operation)
Control power AC DC AC
supply
ON Power restoration
AC power supply
X70 ON
X71 OFF
STF(STR) ON
Output
frequency
(Hz)
Time
Back up operation
NOTE
• The voltage between P and N will temporarily increase to 415 V (830 V) or higher during the regenerative driving, so take
caution on the selection of the DC power supply.
• When an AC power supply is connected to the R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 terminals during the DC feeding with Pr.30 = "2, 10, 11"
(DC feeding), an option fault (E.OPT) will occur.
• When set to Pr.30 = "2, 10, 11, 20, 21" (DC feeding) and operated by DC feeding, detection of undervoltage (E.UVT) and
instantaneous power failure (E.IPF) is not performed.
• When DC power is switched on, a larger inrush current flows than in AC power. The number of power-on times should be
minimized.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) or Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to
Pr.17 MRS input selection page 332
Pr.57 Restart coasting time page 414, page 420
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) page 329
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) page 288
Pr.261 Power failure stop selection page 426
GROUP
G
PARAMETERS 513
(G) Control parameters
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
0 Disables regeneration avoidance function
882 Regeneration avoidance 1 Constantly enables regeneration avoidance function
0
G120 operation selection Enables regeneration avoidance function only during
2
constant-speed operation
Pr. 883
(VDC)
Pr. 883
(VDC)
Bus voltage
Pr. 883
(VDC)
Time
frequency(Hz)
Time
frequency(Hz)
Output
Time
Output
frequency(Hz)
Output
During regeneration
avoidance function operation During regeneration
avoidance function operation Time
Time
During regeneration Time
avoidance function operation
•
514 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
NOTE
• The slope of frequency rising or lowering by the regeneration avoidance operation will change depending on the regenerative
status.
• The DC bus voltage of the inverter will be approximately 2 times of the normal input voltage.
The bus voltage will be approximately 311 V (622 V) DC in case of input voltage of 220 V (440 V) AC.
However, it may vary depending on the input power supply waveform.
• Make sure that the setting value of Pr.883 will not get under DC bus voltage level. The frequency will rise with operation of the
regeneration avoidance function even at the time of no regenerative status.
• The stall prevention (overvoltage) (oL) will only operate during deceleration, stopping the lowering of output frequency, but on
the other hand, the regeneration avoidance function will constantly operate (Pr.882 = "1") or operate only at constant speed
(Pr.882 = "2"), and raise the frequency depending on the amount of regeneration.
• When the motor becomes unstable due to operation of the stall prevention (overcurrent) (OL) during the regeneration
avoidance operation, increase the deceleration time or lower the setting of Pr.883.
NOTE
• When the setting value is too small (detection sensitivity is not good), detection will not be possible, and regeneration
avoidance will operate even with the bus voltage change caused by a change in the input power.
Limit level
frequency(Hz)
5
Output frequency (Hz)
Output
Pr.885
Pr.885/2
Time
PARAMETERS 515
(G) Control parameters
NOTE
• During the regeneration avoidance operation, the stall prevention (overvoltage) (oL) is displayed and the overload alarm (OL)
signal is output. The operation when the OL signal is output can be set with Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection.
The OL signal output timing can be set with Pr.157 OL signal output timer.
• The stall prevention is enabled even at the time of regeneration avoidance operation.
• The regeneration avoidance function cannot decrease the actual deceleration time for the motor to stop. The actual
deceleration time is determined by the regenerative power consumption performance, so to decrease the deceleration time,
consider using a regeneration unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU, FR-CV, FR-HC2).
• When using regeneration unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU, FR-CV, FR-HC2) to consume the regenerative power, set to Pr.882 = "0
(initial value)" (disables regeneration avoidance function). When consuming the regenerative power at the time of
deceleration with the regeneration unit, etc., set to Pr.882 = "2" (enables regeneration avoidance function only at the time of
constant speed).
Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency page 245
Pr.8 Deceleration time page 187
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level page 248
516 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
Increase the loss in the motor by increasing the magnetic flux at the time of deceleration. Deceleration time can be
reduced by suppressing the stall prevention (overvoltage) (oL).
It will make possible to reduce the deceleration time without a brake resistor.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Increased magnetic 0 Without increased magnetic excitation deceleration
660
excitation deceleration 0
G130 1 With increased magnetic excitation deceleration
operation selection
661 Magnetic excitation 0 to 40% Set the increase of excitation.
9999
G131 increase rate 9999 Magnetic excitation increase rate 10%
The increased magnetic excitation rate is automatically
662 Increased magnetic
100% 0 to 300% lowered when the output current exceeds the setting value at
G132 excitation current level the time of increased magnetic excitation deceleration.
NOTE
• The increased magnetic excitation deceleration will be disabled in the following conditions:
During PM motor control, power failure stop, operation with FR-HC2/FR-CV, energy saving operation, Optimum excitation
control.
GROUP
G
PARAMETERS 517
(G) Control parameters
NOTE
• When set to Pr.662 > Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, overcurrent preventive function will operate at the setting
value of Pr.22. (Operates at Pr.622 when Pr.22 = "0")
Parameters referred to
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level page 248
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection page 508
Pr.60 Energy saving control selection page 500
Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection page 414, page 420
Pr.261 Power failure stop selection page 426
Slip of the motor is estimated from the inverter output current at the time of V/F control, and maintain the rotation of the
motor constant.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
245 0.01 to 50% Set the rated motor slip.
Rated slip 9999
G203 0, 9999 Without slip compensation
Set the response time of the slip compensation. Response
246 Slip compensation time will become faster when the value is lowered, but the
0.5s 0.01 to 10s
G204 constant regenerative overvoltage (E.OV[]) error will occur more
frequently when the load inertia is larger.
Constant-power range 0
Do not perform slip compensation at constant output range
247 (frequency range higher than the frequency set in Pr.3).
slip compensation 9999
G205
selection 9999 Perform the slip compensation of the constant output range.
• Slip compensation will become enabled by calculating the rated motor slip, and setting to Pr.245
Slip compensation is not performed when Pr.245 = "0, 9999".
NOTE
• When the slip compensation is performed, the output frequency may become larger than the set frequency. Set Pr.1
Maximum frequency higher than the set frequency.
• Slip compensation will be disabled in following cases.
At the times of stall preventive (oL, OL) operation, regeneration avoidance operation, auto tuning
Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency page 245
Pr.3 Base frequency page 497
518 PARAMETERS
(G) Control parameters
There are times where the vibration due to mechanical resonance affect the inverter, making the output current
(torque) unstable. In such case, vibration can be decreased by reducing the deviation in the output current (torque) by
changing the output frequency.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
653 Confirm the effect by raising and lowering the value with
Speed smoothing control 0% 0 to 200%
G410 100% as a reference.
654 Speed smoothing cutoff
20 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the lower limit of the torque deviation cycle (frequency).
G411 frequency
+ Output frequency
Speed Frequency output
V/F control
command Voltage output
-
Speed smoothing control
Cutoff frequency
Pr.654
Proportional gain
Current for torque
Pr.653
Setting method
• When vibration caused by mechanical resonance occurs, set Pr.653 Speed smoothing control to 100%, and operate at
the operation frequency with largest vibration, and confirm if the vibration is suppressed after few seconds.
• If there is no effect, gradually raise the setting value of Pr.653, perform the operation and confirmation of the effect
repeatedly, and use the value (Pr.653) with most effect as the final setting value.
• If the vibration gets larger by raising Pr.653, lower the value of Pr.653 under 100%, and perform the confirmation of result in
a same manner.
• When the vibration frequency (frequency of torque deviation, speed deviation, or converter output voltage deviation) by the
mechanical resonance with a measurement device, etc., set the frequency of 1/2 to 1 times the vibration frequency in
Pr.654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency. (Setting vibrational frequency range can suppress the vibration better.)
Cutoff frequency
Current for
torque
Torque fluctuation
detection range
NOTE 5
• Depending on the equipment, the vibration may not be suppressed sufficiently or the effect is not obtained.
GROUP
G
PARAMETERS 519
Parameter clear / all parameter clear
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Changing the operation mode
2.
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator is lit.
4. To perform a parameter clear, turn to , and to perform all parameter clear, turn it to and press
Parameter clear
Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to enter the setting. " " and " "( ) flicker
alternately after parameters are cleared.
Description
Setting
Pr.CLR Parameter clear ALL.CL All parameter clear
0 Initial display (Parameters are not cleared.)
Returns parameters excluding calibration Returns all parameters which can be cleared
1 parameters and terminal function selection including calibration parameters and terminal
parameters to their initial values. function selection parameters to their initial values.
NOTE
• and are displayed alternately... Why?
- The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
1) Press .
is lit, and " " appears on the monitor. (When Pr.79 ="0" (initial value))
520 PARAMETERS
Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel
NOTE
• When the destination inverter is other than the FR-F800 series or when parameter copy is attempted after the parameter
4. Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to start reading of the inverter parameter settings by the operation
panel. (It takes about 30 seconds to read all the settings. During reading, " " flickers.)
End reading
5.
" " and " " flicker alternately after settings are read.
5
NOTE
• appears... Why?
- Parameter read error. Perform the operation from step 3 again.
PARAMETERS 521
Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel
appears.
Copying to the inverter
5. Press to start copying to the inverter. (It takes about 60 seconds to copy all the settings. During copying, the selected
parameter group flickers.)
Perform this step while the inverter is stopped. (Parameter settings cannot be copied during operation.)
Ending copying
6.
" " and " " flicker alternately after copying ends.
When parameters are written to the destination inverter, reset the inverter before operation by, for example, turning the power
7.
supply OFF.
NOTE
• appears... Why?
- Parameter write error. Perform the operation from step 3 again.
- After setting Pr.989, perform setting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.82, Pr.90 to Pr.94, Pr.453, Pr.455,
Pr.458 to Pr.462, Pr.557, Pr.859, Pr.860, and Pr.893 again.
522 PARAMETERS
Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel
Operation
1. Copy the parameter settings of the verification source inverter to operation panel according to the procedure on page 521.
2. Move the operation panel to the inverter to be verified.
Screen at power-ON
3.
The monitor display appears.
Parameter setting mode
4.
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
Turn to change to setting value " " (parameter copy verification mode).
Press . Verification of the parameter settings copied to the operation panel and the parameter settings of the verification
6.
destination inverter is started. (It takes about 60 seconds to verify all the settings. During verification, " " flickers.)
If there are different parameters, the different parameter number and " " flicker.
7. " " and " " flicker alternately after verification ends.
NOTE
• flickers... Why?
PARAMETERS 523
Copying and verifying parameters using USB memory
NOTE
• When parameter settings are copied to USB memory without specifying a parameter setting file number in USB memory,
numbers are automatically assigned.
• Up to 99 files can be saved on USB memory. When the USB memory device already has 99 files, attempting copying of
another file to the USB memory device causes the file quantity error (rE7).
• Refer to the FR Confirurator 2 instruction manual for details on importing files to FR Configurator 2.
524 PARAMETERS
Copying and verifying parameters using USB memory
3. Press three times to display (file selection screen) and press . (To overwrite files on USB memory,
display the file selection screen, turn to select the file number, and press .)
Turn to change to " ". Press to copy the parameter settings at the copy source to USB memory. (It takes about
4.
15 seconds to copy all the settings. During copying, " " flickers.)
" " and "file number when the parameter file was copied to USB memory" flicker after copying ends.
Press to write the parameters copied to the USB memory to the destination inverter. (It takes about 15 seconds to copy all
6.
the settings. During copying, " " flickers.)
" " and "copied file number" flicker after copying ends.
Perform this step while the inverter is stopped.
When parameters are written to the destination inverter, reset the inverter before operation by, for example, turning the power
7.
supply OFF.
PARAMETERS 525
Copying and verifying parameters using USB memory
NOTE
• , appears... Why?
- A fault occurred on USB memory. Check the USB memory connection, then retry.
- After setting Pr.989, perform setting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.82, Pr.90 to Pr.94, Pr.453, Pr.455,
Pr.458 to Pr.462, Pr.557, Pr.859, Pr.860, and Pr.893 again.
• When the destination inverter is other than the FR-F800 series or when parameter copy is attempted after the parameter
Parameter verification
Turn to display the setting " " (parameter copy verification mode), and press .
7. Press . Verification of the parameter settings copied to the USB memory and the parameter settings of the verification
destination inverter is started. (It takes about 15 seconds to verify all the settings. During verification, " " flickers.)
If there are different parameters, the different parameter number and " " flicker.
8. "Verified file number" and " " flicker after verification ends.
NOTE
• flickers... Why?
526 PARAMETERS
Checking parameters changed from their initial values (Initial value change list)
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Parameter setting mode
2.
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
Turn . The parameter numbers that have been changed from their initial value appear in order.
If is pressed with parameters that have been changed, the parameter settings can be changed as they are. (Parameter
4.
numbers are no longer displayed in the list when they are returned to their initial values.)
NOTE
• Calibration parameters (C0 (Pr.900) to C7 (Pr.905), C42 (Pr.934) to C45 (Pr.935)) are not displayed even when these are
changed from the initial settings.
• Only the simple mode parameters are displayed when the simple mode is set (Pr.160 ="9999").
• Only user groups are displayed when user groups are set (Pr.160 = "1").
• Pr.160 is displayed independently of whether the setting value is changed or not.
• Parameter setting using the initial value change list is also possible.
PARAMETERS 527
MEMO
528
6 PROTECTIVE
FUNCTIONS
Item Description
Opening the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the inverter at a fault occurrence
Fault output signal
shuts off the control power to the inverter, therefore, the fault output will not be retained.
Fault or alarm indication When a protective function activates, the operation panel displays a fault indication.
While a protective function is activated, the inverter output is kept shutoff. Reset the inverter to restart
Operation restart method
the operation.
• Inverter fault or alarm indications are categorized as below.
NOTE
• The past eight faults can be displayed on the operation panel. (Faults history) (For the operation, refer to page 531.)
OFF
• Turn ON the reset signal (RES) for 0.1 s or more. (If the RES signal
Inverter
is kept ON, "Err" appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in
a reset status.)
RES
SD
NOTE
• OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before resetting the inverter fault. Resetting an inverter fault with the start
signal ON restarts the motor suddenly.
Flickering Flickering
Faults history1
Flickering Flickering
Press the
setting dial.
Latest fault
Press the
setting dial.
Month Year
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Parameter setting mode
2.
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to start clear.
" " and " " flicker alternately after parameters are cleared.
4.
Turn to read another parameter.
Operation Refer
Data
panel Name to
to code
indication page
Copy operation error 536 Overcurrent trip during 16
541
acceleration (H10)
to
Overcurrent trip during constant 17
541
speed (H11)
Error 537 Overcurrent trip during 18
542
deceleration or stop (H12)
• The inverter does not trip even when a warning is Regenerative overvoltage trip 33
542
displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures during constant speed (H21)
Regenerative overvoltage trip 34
will lead to a fault. 543
during deceleration or stop (H22)
Inverter overload trip (electronic
48
Operation Refer 543
thermal relay function) (H30)
panel Name to Motor overload trip (electronic 49
543
indication page thermal relay function) (H31)
64
Stall prevention (overcurrent) 538 Heatsink overheat 543
(H40)
Stall prevention (overvoltage) 538 80
Instantaneous power failure 544
(H50)
Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm 539 81
Undervoltage 544
(H51)
PU stop 539
82
Input phase loss 544
Parameter copy 539 (H52)
96
Stall prevention stop 544
Safety stop 539 (H60)
97
to Loss of synchronism detection 545
Maintenance signal output 540 (H61)
98
Operation panel
HOLD
indication
Name Operation panel lock
Description Operation lock is set. Operation other than is invalid. (Refer to page 166.)
Check point ————
Operation panel
LOCD
indication
Name Password locked
Description Password function is active. Display and setting of parameters are restricted.
Check point ————
Enter the password in Pr.297 Password lock/unlock to unlock the password function before
Corrective action
operating.(Refer to page 173.)
Operation panel
Er1
indication
Name Parameter write error
• Parameter setting was attempted while Pr.77 Parameter write selection is set to disable parameter write.
• Overlapping range has been set for the frequency jump.
Description • Overlapping range has been set for the adjustable 5 points V/F.
• The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication.
• IPM parameter initialization was attempted while Pr.72 = "25".
• Check the Pr.77 Parameter write selection setting. (Refer to page 169.)
• Check the settings of Pr.31 to Pr.36 (frequency jump). (Refer to page 246.)
• Check the settings of Pr.100 to Pr.109 (adjustable 5 points V/F). (Refer to page 501.)
Check point
• Check the connection of PU and the inverter.
• Check the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting. A sine wave filter cannot be used under PM motor
control.
Operation panel
Er2
indication
Name Write error during operation
Description Parameter write was attempted while Pr.77 = "0".
Check point • Check that the inverter is stopped.
• After stopping the operation, make parameter setting.
Corrective action
• When setting Pr.77 = "2", parameter write is enabled during operation. (Refer to page 169.)
Operation panel
Er3
indication
Name Calibration error
Description Analog input bias and gain calibration values have been set too close.
Check the settings of calibration parameters C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions). (Refer to page
Check point
314.)
6 5
Operation panel
Er4
indication
Name Mode designation error
• Parameter setting was attempted in the External or NET operation mode while Pr.77 = "1".
Description
• Parameter write was attempted when the command source is not at the operation panel (FR-DU08).
• Check that operation mode is PU operation mode.
Check point
• Check that the Pr.551 setting is correct.
• After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page 200.)
Corrective action • When Pr.77 = "2", parameter write is enabled regardless of the operation mode. (Refer to page 169.)
• Set Pr.551 = "2". (Refer to page 210.)
Operation panel
Er8
indication
Name USB memory device operation error
• An operation command was given during the USB memory device operation.
Description • A copy operation (writing) was performed while the PLC function was in the RUN state.
• A copy operation was attempted for a password locked project.
• Check if the USB memory device is operating.
Check point • Check if the PLC function is in the RUN state.
• Check if the project data is locked with a password.
• Perform the operation after the USB memory device operation is completed.
• Stop the PLC function. (Refer to page 433 and the PLC function programming manual.)
Corrective action
• Unlock the password of the project data using FR Configurator2. (Refer to the Instruction Manuals of FR
Configurator2 and GX Works2.)
Operation panel
rE1
indication
Name Parameter read error
• A failure has occurred at the operation panel side EEPROM while reading the copied parameters.
Description • A failure has occurred in the USB memory device while copying the parameters or reading the PLC function
project data.
Check point ————
• Perform parameter copy again. (Refer to page 521, page 524.)
• Perform PLC function project data copy again.(Refer to page 433)
Corrective action
• The USB memory device may be faulty. Replace the USB memory device.
• The operation panel (FR-DU08) may be faulty. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation panel
rE2
indication
Name Parameter write error
• Parameter copy from the operation panel to the inverter was attempted during operation.
• A failure has occurred at the operation panel side EEPROM while writing the copied parameters.
Description
• A failure has occurred in the USB memory device while writing the copied parameters or PLC function
project data.
Check point • Check that the inverter is stopped.
• After stopping the operation, perform parameter copy again. (Refer to page 521.)
• The operation panel (FR-DU08) may be faulty. Please contact your sales representative.
Corrective action
• Perform parameter copy or PLC project data copy again. (Refer to page 433 and page 524)
• The USB memory device may be faulty. Replace the USB memory device.
Operation panel
rE3
indication
Name Parameter verification error
• The data in the inverter are different from the data in the operation panel.
• A failure has occurred at the operation panel side EEPROM during parameter verification.
Description • A failure has occurred in the USB memory device during parameter verification.
• The data in the inverter are different from the data in the USB memory device or the personal computer (FR
Configurator2)
Check point • Check the parameter setting of the source inverter against the setting of the destination inverter.
Operation panel
rE4
indication
Name Model error
• A different model was used when parameter copy from the operation panel or parameter verification was
performed.
Description
• The data in the operation panel were not correct when parameter copy from the operation panel or
parameter verification was performed.
• Check that the parameter copy or verification source inverter is of the same model.
Check point • Check that parameter copy to the operation panel was not interrupted by switching OFF the power or by
disconnecting the operation panel.
• Perform parameter copy and parameter verification between inverters of the same model (FR-F800 series).
Corrective action
• Perform parameter copy to the operation panel from the inverter again.
Operation panel
rE6
indication
Name File error
• The parameter copy file in the USB memory device cannot be recognized.
Description
• An error has occurred in the file system during transfer of the PLC function data or writing to RAM.
Check point ————
• Perform parameter copy again.(Refer to page 524.)
Corrective action
• Copy the PLC function project data again.(Refer to page 433.)
Operation panel
rE7
indication
Name File quantity error
• A parameter copy was attempted to the USB memory device in which the copy files from 001 to 099 had
Description
already been saved.
Check point • Check if the number of copy files in the USB memory device has reached 99.
Corrective action • Delete the copy file in the USB memory device and perform parameter copy again.(Refer to page 524.)
Operation panel
rE8
indication
Name No PLC function project file
Description The specified PLC function project file does not exist in the USB memory device.
• Check that the file exists in the USB memory device.
Check point
• Check that the folder name and the file name in the USB memory device is correct.
Corrective action The data in the USB memory device may be damaged.
Operation panel
Err.
indication
• The RES signal is turned ON.
• The operation panel and inverter cannot make normal communication (contact faults of the connector).
Description • This error may occur when the voltage at the input side of the inverter drops.
• When using a separate power source for the control circuit power (R1/L11, S1/L21) from the main circuit
power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3), this error may appear at turning ON of the main circuit. It is not a fault.
• Turn OFF the RES signal.
Corrective action • Check the connection between the operation panel and the inverter.
• Check the voltage on the input side of the inverter.
6 5
Warning
Output is not shut off when a protective function activates.
Operation panel
OL FR-PU07 OL
indication
Name Stall prevention (overcurrent)
• When the output current of the inverter increases, the stall prevention (overcurrent) function activates.
• The following section explains about the stall prevention (overcurrent) function.
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention level (Pr.22 Stall
prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until the
During
overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip.
acceleration
When the overload current has reduced below stall prevention operation level, this
function increases the frequency again.
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention level (Pr.22 Stall
Description During prevention operation level, etc.), this function reduces frequency until the overload
constant-speed current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the
operation overload current has reduced below stall prevention operation level, this function
increases the frequency up to the set value.
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention level (Pr.22 Stall
prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until the
During
overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip.
deceleration
When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this
function decreases the frequency again.
• Check that the Pr.0 Torque boost setting is not too large.
• The Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time settings may be too short.
• Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check point
• Check for any failures in peripheral devices.
• Check that the Pr.13 Starting frequency is not too large.
• Check that Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is appropriate.
• Gradually increase or decrease the Pr.0 setting by 1% at a time and check the motor status.(Refer to
page 496.)
• Set a larger value in Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time. (Refer to page 187.)
• Reduce the load.
• Try Advanced magnetic flux vector control.
Corrective action
• Change the Pr.14 Load pattern selection setting.
• The stall prevention operation current can be set in Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level. The
acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level with Pr.22 Stall
prevention operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection.
(Use Pr.156 to set either operation continued or not at OL operation.)
Operation panel
oL FR-PU07 oL
indication
Name Stall prevention (overvoltage)
• When the output voltage of the inverter increases, the stall prevention (overvoltage) function activates.
• The regeneration avoidance function activates due to excessive regenerative power of the motor. (Refer to
page 514.)
• The following section explains the stall prevention (overvoltage) function.
Description
If the regenerative power of the motor becomes excessive to exceed the regenerative
power consumption capability, this function stops decreasing the frequency to prevent
During deceleration
overvoltage trip. As soon as the regenerative power has reduced, deceleration
resumes.
• Check for sudden speed reduction.
Check point
• Check if the regeneration avoidance function (Pr.882 to Pr.886) is being used. (Refer to page 514.)
Corrective action The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration time using Pr.8 Deceleration time.
Operation panel
TH FR-PU07 TH
indication
Name Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm
Appears if the cumulative value of the electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the preset
Description level of Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. If the value reaches 100% of Pr.9 setting, motor overload trip
(E.THM) occurs.
• Check for large load or sudden acceleration.
Check point
• Check that the Pr.9 setting is appropriate. (Refer to page 225.)
• Reduce the load and frequency of operation.
Corrective action
• Set an appropriate value in Pr.9. (Refer to page 225.)
Operation panel
PS FR-PU07 PS
indication
Name PU stop
• The motor is stopped using under the mode other than the PU operation mode. (To enable
Description
under the mode other than the PU operation mode, set Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU
detection/PU stop selection. Refer to page 162 for details.)
Check point • Check for a stop made by pressing of the operation panel.
Corrective action • Turn the start signal OFF and release with .
Operation panel
CP FR-PU07 CP
indication
Name Parameter copy
Appears when parameter copy is performed between inverters FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower, FR-F840-
Description
01160(55K) or lower, FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher
Resetting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.82, Pr.90 to Pr.94, Pr.453, Pr.455, Pr.458 to
Check point
Pr.462, Pr.557, Pr.859, Pr.860 and Pr.893 is necessary.
Corrective action Set the initial value in Pr.989 Parameter copy alarm release.
Operation panel
SA FR-PU07 —
indication
Name Safety stop
Description Appears when safety stop function is activated (during output shutoff). (Refer to page 58.)
• Check if an emergency stop device is activated.
Check point • Check if the shorting wire between S1 and PC or between S2 and PC is disconnected when not using the
safety stop function.
• An emergency stop device is active when using the safety stop function. Identify the cause of emergency
stop, ensure the safety and restart the system.
• When not using the safety stop function, short across terminals S1 and PC and across S2 and PC with
Corrective action shorting wire for the inverter to run.
• If is indicated when wires across S1 and SIC and across S2 and SIC are both conducted while using
the safety stop function (drive enabled), internal failure might be the cause. Check the wiring of terminals
S1, S2 and SIC and contact your sales representative if the wiring has no fault.
6 5
Operation panel to
MT1 to MT3 FR-PU07 MT
indication
Operation panel
UF FR-PU07 —
indication
Name USB host error
Description Appears when an excessive current flows into the USB A connector.
Check point Check if a USB device other than a USB memory device is connected to the USB A connector.
• If a device other than a USB memory device is connected to the USB A connector, remove the device.
Corrective action
• Setting Pr.1049 USB host reset = "1" or inverter reset clears the UF indication.
Operation panel
EV FR-PU07 —
indication
Name 24 V external power supply operation
Description Flickers when the main circuit power supply is off and the 24 V external power supply is being input.
Check point • Power is supplied from a 24 V external power supply.
• Turning ON the power supply (main circuit) of the inverter clears the indication.
Corrective action • If the indication is still displayed after turning ON of the power supply (main circuit) of the inverter, the power
supply voltage may be low, or the jumper between the terminals P/+ and P1 may be disconnected.
Operation panel
ED FR-PU07 —
indication
Name Emergency drive in operation
Description Appears during emergency drive operation.
Check point • Emergency drive operation is performed by turning ON X84 signal.
Corrective action • The display is cleared when the emergency drive operation ends. (Refer to page 238.)
Operation panel
LDF FR-PU07 —
indication
Name Load fault warning
Appears when the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1488 Upper limit warning detection
Description
width or Pr.1489 Lower limit warning detection width.
• Check if too much load is applied to the equipment, or if the load is too light.
Check point
• Check that the load characteristics settings are correct.
• Inspect the equipment.
Corrective action
• Set the load characteristics (Pr.1481 to Pr.1487) correctly.
Alarm
Output is not shut off when a protective function activates. An alarm can also be output with a parameter setting.
(Set "98" in Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 288.)
Operation panel
FN FR-PU07 FN
indication
Name Fan alarm
For the inverter that contains a cooling fan, FN appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops
Description due to a fault, low rotation speed or different operation from the setting of Pr.244 Cooling fan operation
selection.
Check point Check the cooling fan for a failure.
Corrective action The fan may be faulty. Please contact your sales representative.
Fault
When a protective function activates, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
Operation panel
E.OC1 FR-PU07 OC During Acc
indication
Name Overcurrent trip during acceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% (LD rating) / 148% (SLD rating) of
Description
the rated current during acceleration, the protection circuit is activated and the inverter trips.
• Check for sudden speed acceleration.
• Check if the downward acceleration time is too long in a lift application.
• Check for output short-circuit.
• Check that the Pr.3 Base frequency setting is not 60 Hz when the motor rated frequency is 50 Hz.
• Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high. Check if the fast-response current limit operation
Check point is disabled.
• Check that the regenerative driving is not performed frequently. (Check if the output voltage becomes larger
than the V/F reference voltage at regenerative driving and overcurrent occurs due to increase in the motor
current.)
• Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (PM motor control)
• Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (PM motor control)
• Set the acceleration time longer. (Shorten the downward acceleration time of the lift.)
• If "E.OC1" always appears at start, disconnect the motor once and restart the inverter.
If "E.OC1" still appears, contact your sales representative.
• Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
• Set 50 Hz in Pr.3 Base frequency. (Refer to page 497.)
• Lower the stall prevention operation level. Activate the fast-response current limit operation.
Corrective action
(Refer to page 248.)
• Set the base voltage (rated voltage of the motor, etc.) in Pr.19 Base frequency voltage.
(Refer to page 497.)
• Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (PM motor control)
• Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 420.) (IPM motor control)
Operation panel
E.OC2 FR-PU07 Stedy Spd OC
indication
Name Overcurrent trip during constant speed
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% (LD rating) / 148% (SLD rating) of
Description
the rated current during constant-speed operation, the protection circuit is activated and the inverter trips.
• Check for sudden load change.
• Check for output short-circuit.
• Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high. Check if the fast-response current limit operation
Check point
is disabled.
• Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (PM motor control)
6 5
• Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (PM motor control)
• Keep the load stable.
• Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
• Lower the stall prevention operation level. Activate the fast-response current limit operation.
Corrective action (Refer to page 248.)
• Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (PM motor control)
• Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 420.) (PM motor control)
Operation panel
E.OC3 FR-PU07 OC During Dec
indication
Name Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% (LD rating) / 148% (SLD rating) of
Description the rated current during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protection circuit is
activated and the inverter trips.
• Check for sudden speed reduction.
• Check for output short-circuit.
• Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake.
Check point • Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high. Check if the fast-response current limit operation
is disabled.
• Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (PM motor control)
• Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (PM motor control)
• Set the deceleration time longer.
• Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
• Check the mechanical brake operation.
• Lower the stall prevention operation level. Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (Refer to page
Corrective action
248.)
• Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (PM motor control)
• Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 420.) (PM motor control)
Operation panel
E.OV1 FR-PU07 OV During Acc
indication
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
If regenerative power causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified
Description value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a
surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
• Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during downward acceleration in vertical lift load)
Check point • Check that the Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is not set to the no load current or lower.
• Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load inertia.
• Set the acceleration time shorter.
Use the regeneration avoidance function (Pr.882 to Pr.886). (Refer to page 514.)
Corrective action • Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr.22.
• Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10, 11". (Refer to page
248.)
Operation panel
E.OV2 FR-PU07 Stedy Spd OV
indication
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed
If regenerative power causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified
Description value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a
surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
• Check for sudden load change.
• Check that the Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is not set to the no load current or lower.
Check point
• Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load inertia.
• Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short.
• Keep the load stable.
• Use the regeneration avoidance function (Pr.882 to Pr.886). (Refer to page 514.)
• Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
• Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr.22.
Corrective action • Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10, 11". (Refer to page
248.)
• Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer. (Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the output
torque can be increased. However, sudden acceleration may cause an overshoot in speed, resulting in an
occurrence of overvoltage.)
Operation panel
E.OV3 FR-PU07 OV During Dec
indication
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop
If regenerative power causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified
Description value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a
surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
• Check for sudden speed reduction.
Check point
• Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load inertia.
• Set the deceleration time longer. (Set the deceleration time which matches the moment of inertia of the
load.)
• Make the brake cycle longer.
Corrective action • Use the regeneration avoidance function (Pr.882 to Pr.886). (Refer to page 514.)
• Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
• Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10, 11". (Refer to page
248.)
Operation panel
E.THT FR-PU07 Inv. Overload
indication
Name Inverter overload trip
When the temperature of the output transistor element exceeds the protection level while a current flows at
Description the rated output current level or higher without causing an overcurrent trip (E.OC[]), the inverter output is
stopped.(Permissible overload capacity 120% 60 s)
• Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short.
• Check that torque boost setting is not too large (small).
Check point
• Check that load pattern selection setting is appropriate for the load pattern of the using machine.
• Check the motor for the use under overload.
• Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer.
• Adjust the torque boost setting.
Corrective action
• Set the load pattern selection setting according to the load pattern of the using machine.
• Reduce the load.
Resetting the inverter initializes the internal cumulative heat value of the electronic thermal O/L relay function.
Operation panel
E.THM FR-PU07 Motor Ovrload
indication
Name Motor overload trip
The electronic thermal O/L relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat, which is caused by overload
or reduced cooling capability during low-speed operation. When the cumulative heat value reaches 85% of
Description
the Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, pre-alarm (TH) is output. When the accumulated value
reaches the specified value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
• Check the motor for the use under overload.
Check point • Check that the setting of Pr.71 Applied motor for motor selection is correct. (Refer to page 337.)
• Check that the stall prevention operation setting is correct.
• Reduce the load.
Corrective action • For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr.71.
• Set the stall prevention operation level accordingly. (Refer to page 248.)
Resetting the inverter initializes the internal cumulative heat value of the electronic thermal O/L relay function.
Operation panel
E.FIN FR-PU07 H/Sink O/Temp
indication
Name Heatsink overheat
When the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor activates, and the inverter output is stopped.
The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink overheat
Description protection operation temperature.
For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26 (positive logic) or 126
(negative logic)" from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 288.)
• Check for too high surrounding air temperature.
6 5
Check point • Check for heatsink clogging.
• Check that the cooling fan is not stopped. (Check that FN is not displayed on the operation panel.)
• Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications.
Corrective action • Clean the heatsink.
• Replace the cooling fan.
Operation panel
E.IPF FR-PU07 Inst. Pwr. Loss
indication
Name Instantaneous power failure (Standard models only)
If a power failure occurs for longer than 15 ms (this also applies to inverter input shut-off), the instantaneous
power failure protective function is activated to trip the inverter in order to prevent the control circuit from
malfunctioning. If a power failure persists for 100 ms or longer, the fault warning output is not provided, and
the inverter restarts if the start signal is ON upon power restoration. (The inverter continues operating if an
Description
instantaneous power failure is within 15 ms.) In some operating status (load magnitude, acceleration/
deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power restoration.
When instantaneous power failure protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to page 414, page
420.)
Check point Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.
• Remedy the instantaneous power failure.
• Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure.
Corrective action
• Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57).
(Refer to page 414, page 420.)
Operation panel
E.UVT FR-PU07 Under Voltage
indication
Name Undervoltage (Standard models only)
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions. In
addition, the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if the power
supply voltage decreases to about 150 VAC (300 VAC for the 400 V class) or below, this function shuts off the
Description
inverter output.
When a jumper is not connected across P/+ and P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated.
When undervoltage protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to page 414, page 420.)
• Check if a high-capacity motor is driven.
Check point
• Check if the jumper is connected across terminals P/+ and P1.
• Check the power supply system equipment such as the power supply.
Corrective action • Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
• If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, contact your sales representative.
Operation panel
E.ILF FR-PU07 Input phase loss
indication
Name Input phase loss (Standard models only)
When Pr.872 Input phase loss protection selection is enabled ("1") and one of the three-phase power
Description input is lost, the inverter output is shut off. This protective function is not available when Pr.872 is set to the
initial value (Pr.872 = "0"). (Refer to page 235)
Check point Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
• Wire the cables properly.
Corrective action
• Repair a break portion in the cable.
Operation panel
E.OLT FR-PU07 Stll Prev STP
indication
Name Stall prevention stop
V/F Magnetic flux
If the output frequency has fallen to 0.5 Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3 s, a fault (E.OLT)
appears and the inverter trips. OL appears while stall prevention is being activated.
Description PM
During speed control, a fault (E.OLT) appears and the inverter trips if the frequency value converted from the
motor rotation speed drops to 1.5 Hz or lower by stall prevention operation and the output torque exceeds the
Pr.874 OLT level setting (refer to page 248) and remains there for 3 s.
• Check the motor for the use under overload.
• Check that the Pr.865 and Pr.874 values are correct.
Check point (Check the Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level setting under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux
vector control.)
• Check if a motor is connected under PM motor control.
• Reduce the load.
• Change the Pr.22, Pr.865, and Pr.874 values. (Check the Pr.22 setting under V/F control and Advanced
magnetic flux vector control.)
Corrective action • For a test run without connecting a motor, select the PM sensorless vector control test operation.(Refer to
page 144.)
• Also check that the stall prevention (overcurrent) warning (OL) or the stall prevention (overvoltage) warning
(oL) countermeasure is taken.
Operation panel
E.LUP FR-PU07 Fault
indication
Name Upper limit fault detection
When the load exceeds the upper limit fault detection range, the inverter trips. This protective function is not
Description
available in the initial setting of Pr.1490 (Pr.1490 = "9999").
• Check if too much load is applied to the equipment.
Check point
• Check that the load characteristics settings are correct.
• Inspect the equipment.
Corrective action
• Set the load characteristics (Pr.1481 to Pr.1487) correctly.
Operation panel
E.LDN FR-PU07 Fault
indication
Name Lower limit fault detection
When the load falls below the lower limit fault detection range, the inverter trips. This protective function is not
Description
available in the initial setting of Pr.1491 (Pr.1491 = "9999").
• Check if the equipment load is too light.
Check point
• Check that the load characteristics settings are correct.
• Inspect the equipment.
Corrective action
• Set the load characteristics (Pr.1481 to Pr.1487) correctly.
Operation panel
E.GF FR-PU07 Ground Fault
indication
Name Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
The inverter trips if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows due to an earth (ground) fault that occurred on
Description
the inverter's output side (load side).
Check point Check for an earth (ground) fault in the motor and connection cable.
Corrective action Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
6 5
Operation panel
E.LF FR-PU07 E.LF
indication
Name Output phase loss
Description The inverter trips if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) is lost.
• Check the wiring. (Check that the motor is normally operating.)
Check point • Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter.
• Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (PM motor control)
• Wire the cables properly.
Corrective action • Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure/flying start function (page 420). (PM motor control)
Operation panel
E.OHT FR-PU07 OH Fault
indication
Name External thermal relay operation
The inverter trips if the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection or the internally mounted
thermal relay in the motor, etc. switches ON (contacts open).
Description
This function is available when "7" (OH signal) is set in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection). This protective function is not available in the initial status. (OH signal is not assigned.)
• Check for motor overheating.
Check point • Check that the value "7" (OH signal) is set correctly to any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function
selection).
• Reduce the load and operation duty.
Corrective action
• Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.
Operation panel
E.PTC FR-PU07 PTC activated
indication
Name PTC thermistor operation
The inverter trips if resistance of the PTC thermistor connected between the terminal 2 and terminal 10 is
equal to or higher than the Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level setting for a continuous time equal to or
Description
longer than the setting value in Pr.1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time. When the initial value
(Pr.561 = "9999") is set, this protective function is not available.
• Check the connection with the PTC thermistor.
Check point • Check the Pr.561, Pr.1016 setting.
• Check the motor for operation under overload.
Corrective action Reduce the load.
Operation panel
E.OPT FR-PU07 Option Fault
indication
Name Option fault
• Appears when the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, or T/L3 accidentally when a
high power factor converter (FR-HC2) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) is connected
Description (when Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "2").
• Appears when the switch for manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
• Appears when a communication option is connected while Pr.296 Password lock level = "0 or 100".
• Check that the AC power supply is not connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, or T/L3 when a high power
factor converter (FR-HC2) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) is connected (when Pr.30 =
Check point
"2").
• Check for the password lock with a setting of Pr.296 = "0, 100".
• Check the Pr.30 setting and wiring.
• The inverter may be damaged if the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, or T/L3 when
a high power factor converter is connected. Please contact your sales representative.
Corrective action • Set the switch on the plug-in option, which is for manufacturer setting, back to the initial setting. (Refer to the
Instruction Manual of each option.)
• To apply the password lock when installing a communication option, set Pr.296 "0, 100".
(Refer to page 171.)
Operation panel
E.OP1 FR-PU07 Option1 Fault
indication
Name Communication option fault
Description The inverter trips if a communication line error occurs in the communication option.
• Check for an incorrect option function setting and operation.
• Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector properly.
Check point
• Check for a break in the communication cable.
• Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly.
• Check the option function setting, etc.
Corrective action • Connect the plug-in option securely.
• Check the connection of communication cable.
Operation panel to
E.16 to E.20 FR-PU07 —
indication
Operation panel
E.PE FR-PU07 Corrupt Memory
indication
Name Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board)
Description The inverter trips if a fault occurs in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure)
Check point Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Please contact your sales representative.
Set "1" in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection(write to RAM) for the operation which requires
Corrective action
frequent parameter writing via communication, etc. Note that writing to RAM goes back to the initial status at
power OFF.
Operation panel
E.PUE FR-PU07 PU Leave Out
indication
Name PU disconnection
• The inverter trips if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the operation panel or
the parameter unit is disconnected, when the disconnected PU disconnection function is valid in Pr.75
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection .
Description • The inverter trips if communication errors occurred consecutively for more than permissible number of
retries when Pr.121 Number of PU communication retries ≠ "9999" during the RS-485 communication.
• The inverter trips if communication is broken within the period of time set in Pr.122 PU communication
check time interval during the RS-485 communication via the PU connector.
• Check that the operation panel or the parameter unit is connected properly.
Check point
• Check the Pr.75 setting.
Corrective action Fit the operation panel or the parameter unit securely.
Operation panel
E.RET FR-PU07 Retry No Over
indication
Name Retry count excess
The inverter trips if the operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set in Pr.67
Description
Number of retries at fault occurrence. 6 5
Check point Find the cause of the fault occurrence.
Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.
Operation panel
E.PE2 FR-PU07 PR storage alarm
indication
Name Parameter storage device faultParameter storage device fault (main circuit board)
Description The inverter trips if a fault occurs in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure)
Check point —————
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.
E. 5 Fault 5
Operation panel
FR-PU07
indication
E. 6 Fault 6
E. 7 Fault 7
Name CPU fault
Description The inverter trips if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs.
Check point Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
• Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
Corrective action
• Please contact your sales representative.
Operation panel
E.CTE FR-PU07 E.CTE
indication
Name Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit
• When the power supply for the operation panel (PU connector) is shorted, the power output is shutoff and
the inverter trips. The use of the operation panel (parameter unit) and the RS-485 communication via the PU
connector are disabled. To reset, enter the RES signal from the terminal, reset via communication through
the RS-485 terminals, or switch power OFF then ON again.
Description
• When the power supply for the RS-485 terminals are short circuited, this function shuts off the power output.
At this time, communication from the RS-485 terminals cannot be made. To reset, use of the
operation panel, enter the RES signal, or switch power OFF then ON again.
• Check that the PU connector cable is not shorted.
Check point
• Check that the RS-485 terminals are connected correctly.
• Check PU and the cable.
Corrective action
• Check the connection of the RS-485 terminals.
Operation panel
E.P24 FR-PU07 E.P24
indication
Name 24 VDC power fault
When the 24 VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output.
Description At this time, all external contact inputs switch OFF. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal.
To reset it, use the operation panel, or switch power OFF, then ON again.
• Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output.
Check point
• Check that the 24 V external power supply voltage is correct.
• Repair the short-circuited portion.
• Supply the power at 24 V. (If the power at insufficient voltage is supplied to the 24V input circuit for a long
Corrective action
time, the inverter internal circuit may heat up. Input power at correct voltage although it will not damage the
inverter.)
Operation panel
E.CDO FR-PU07 OC detect level
indication
Name Abnormal output current detection
The inverter trips if the output current exceeds the Pr.150 Output current detection level setting.
Description This functions is available when Pr.167 Output current detection operation selection is set to "1". When
the initial value (Pr.167 = "0") is set, this protective function is not available.
Check the settings of Pr.150, Pr.151 Output current detection signal delay time, Pr.166 Output current
Check point
detection signal retention time, and Pr.167. (Refer to page 296.)
Operation panel
E.IOH FR-PU07 Inrush overheat
indication
Name Inrush current limit circuit fault (Standard models only)
The inverter trips when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit is overheated. The inrush current limit
Description
circuit failure
• Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
• Check if the input side fuse (5A) in the power supply circuit of the inrush current limit circuit contactor (FR-
Check point
F840-03250(132K) or higher) is blown.
• Check that the power supply circuit of inrush current limit circuit contactor is not damaged.
Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
Corrective action
If the situation does not improve after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
Operation panel
E.SER FR-PU07 VFD Comm error
indication
Name Communication fault (inverter)
The inverter trips when communication error occurs consecutively for the permissible number of retries or
more when Pr.335 RS-485 communication retry count "9999" during RS-485 communication from the
Description
RS-485 terminals. The inverter also trips if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr.336 RS-
485 communication check time interval.
Check point Check the RS-485 terminal wiring.
Corrective action Perform wiring of the RS-485 terminals properly.
Operation panel
E.AIE FR-PU07 Analog in error
indication
Name Analog input fault
The inverter trips when a 30 mA or higher current or a 7.5 V or higher voltage is input to terminal 2 while the
Description current input is selected by Pr.73 Analog input selection, or to terminal 4 while the current input is selected
by Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection.
Check point Check the Pr.73, Pr.267, and the voltage/current input switch settings.(Refer to page 306)
Either give a current less than 30 mA, or set Pr.73, Pr.267, and the voltage/current input switch to the voltage
Corrective action
input and input a voltage.
Operation panel
E.USB FR-PU07 USB comm error
indication
Name USB communication fault
The inverter trips when the communication is cut off for the time set in Pr.548 USB communication check
Description
time interval.
Check point • Check that the USB communication cable is connected securely.
• Check the Pr.548 setting.
Corrective action • Connect the USB communication cable securely.
• Increase the Pr.548 setting or set "9999." (Refer to page 493.)
E.PBT Fault
Operation panel
E.13 FR-PU07 Fault 13
indication
E.BE Br.Cct.Fault 6 5
Name Opposite rotation deceleration fault
Description The inverter trips when an internal circuit fault occurs.
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.
Operation panel
E.OS FR-PU07 E.OS
indication
Name Overspeed occurrence
The inverter trips when the motor speed exceeds the Pr.374 Overspeed detection level under PM motor
Description
control. This protective function is not available in the initial status.
Check point • Check that the Pr.374 setting is correct.
Corrective action • Set the Pr.374 correctly.
Operation panel
E.LCI FR-PU07 Fault
indication
Name 4 mA input fault
The inverter trips when the analog input current is 2 mA or less for the time set in Pr.778 4 mA input check
Description filter. This function is available when Pr.573 4 mA input check selection = "2 or 3". (Refer to page 325.)
This function is not available in the initial status.
• Check for a break in the wiring for the analog current input.
Check point
• Check that the Pr.778 setting is not too short.
• Check the wiring for the analog current input.
Corrective action
• Set the Pr.778 setting larger.
Operation panel
E.PCH FR-PU07 Fault
indication
Name Pre-charge fault
• The inverter trips when the pre-charge time exceeds Pr.764 Pre-charge time limit.
• The inverter trips when the measured value exceeds Pr.763 Pre-charge upper detection level during pre-
Description charging.
• This function is available when Pr.764 and Pr.763 are set. This protective function is not available in the
initial status.
• Check that the Pr.764 setting is not too short.
• Check that the Pr.763 setting is not too small.
Check point
• Check that the Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency setting is not too low.
• Check for a break in the connection to the pump.
• Set the Pr.764 setting longer.
• Set the Pr.763 setting larger.
Corrective action
• Set the Pr.127 setting higher.
• Check the connection to the pump.
Operation panel E. 1 to to
FR-PU07 Fault 1 to Fault 3
indication E. 3
NOTE
• If protective functions with indication of "Fault" are activated when using the FR-PU07, "ERR" appears in the faults history of
FR-PU07.
• If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
6 5
Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
points page
Increase the Pr.0 setting by 0.5% increments while observing
Under V/F control, Pr.0 Torque boost setting
the rotation of a motor. 496
is improper.
If that makes no difference, decrease the setting.
Check the Pr.78 setting.
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection
Set Pr.78 when you want to limit the motor rotation to only one 217
is set.
direction.
Pr.79 Operation mode selection setting is Select the operation mode which corresponds with input
200
incorrect. methods of start command and frequency command.
Bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to Check the bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7)
314
C7) settings are improper. settings.
Set running frequency higher than Pr.13.
Pr.13 Starting frequency setting is greater
The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal is less 197, 198
than the running frequency.
than the value set in Pr.13.
Frequency settings of various running
frequency (such as multi-speed operation) are Set the frequency command according to the application.
222, 245
zero. Set Pr.1 higher than the actual frequency used.
Especially, Pr.1 Maximum frequency is zero.
Pr.15 Jog frequency is lower than Pr.13 197, 198,
Set Pr.15 higher than Pr.13.
Starting frequency for JOG operation. 221
Check Pr.79 Operation mode selection, Pr.338
Communication operation command source, Pr.339
Operation mode and a writing device do not Communication speed command source, Pr.550 NET mode
200, 210
correspond. operation command source selection and Pr.551 PU mode
operation command source selection, and select an
Parameter operation mode suitable for the purpose.
Start signal operation selection is set by Check the Pr.250 setting and the connection of STF and STR
Setting 335
Pr.250 Stop selection. signals.
When power is restored, ensure the safety, and turn OFF the
The motor has decelerated to a stop when
start signal once, then turn ON again to restart.
power failure deceleration stop function is 426
When Pr.261 Power failure stop selection = "2 or 12", the
selected.
motor automatically restarts after the power is restored.
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.2 Minimum Check the settings of Pr.1, Pr.2, and Pr.18. 245
frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum
Parameter frequency, and calibration parameter C2 to
Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings. 314
Setting C7 settings are improper.
Pr.31 to Pr.36, Pr.552 (frequency jump)
Narrow down the range of frequency jump. 246
settings are improper.
Load Reduce the load weight. ―
Set Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level higher according to
Parameter Stall prevention function is
the load. (If Pr.22 is set too high, an overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) is 248
Setting activated due to a heavy load. likely to occur.)
Motor Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. ―
Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
points page
Load Load varies during an operation. Select Advanced magnetic flux vector control. 143
Frequency setting signal is varying. Check the frequency setting signal. ―
Set filter to the analog input terminal using Pr.74 Input filter
313
The frequency setting signal is affected by time constant , Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1.
EMI. Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using shielded
Input 74
wires for input signal lines.
signal
Malfunction is occurring due to the undesirable Use terminal PC (terminal SD when source logic) as a common
current generated when the transistor output terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable 51
unit is connected. current.
Multi-speed command signal is chattering. Take countermeasures to suppress chattering. ―
Fluctuation of power supply voltage is too Under V/F control, change the Pr.19 Base frequency voltage
497
large. setting (approximately by 3%).
Pr.80 Motor capacity and Pr.81 Number of
motor poles are not appropriate for the motor
Check the settings of Pr.80 and Pr.81. 143
capacity under Advanced magnetic flux vector
control, or PM motor control.
Wiring length exceeds 30 m when Advanced
magnetic flux vector control, or PM motor Perform offline auto tuning. 341
control is selected.
In the low-speed range, set 0.5% in Pr.0 Torque boost. 496
Parameter Under V/F control, wiring is too long and a
Change the control method to Advanced magnetic flux vector
Setting voltage drop occurs. 143
control.
Disable automatic control functions, such as the energy saving
operation, fast-response current limit operation, regeneration
avoidance function, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, stall
Hunting occurs by the generated vibration, for prevention, and online auto tuning.
―
example, when structural rigidity at load side is Under PID control, set smaller values to Pr.129 PID
insufficient. proportional band and Pr.130 PID integral time.
Adjust so that the control gain decreases and the level of safety
increases.
Change Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting. 179
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.2 Minimum Check the settings of Pr.1 and Pr.2 and set Pr.18. 245
frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum
frequency, and calibration parameter C2 to
C7 settings are improper. Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings. 314
560
7 PRECAUTIONS FOR
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any
fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and
vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
NOTE
• When using the safety stop function, periodic inspection is required to confirm that safety function of the safety system
operates correctly.
For more details, refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual (BCN-A23228-001).
Inspection
Corrective action Check
Area of interval
Inspection item Description at fault by the
inspection
Daily Periodic occurrence user
NOTE
• Continuous use of a leaked, deformed, or degraded smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor (as shown in the table above)
may lead to a burst, breakage or fire. Replace such a capacitor without delay.
Checking method
Change the polarity of the tester alternately at the inverter terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, P/+, and N/- and check the
electric continuity.
NOTE
• Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged.
• At the time of electric discontinuity, the measured value is almost . When there is an instantaneous electric continuity, due to
the smoothing capacitor, the tester may not indicate . At the time of electric continuity, the measured value is several Ω to
several tens of Ω. If all measured values are almost the same, although these values are not constant depending on the
module type and tester type, the modules are without fault.
D1 D4
P/+ R/L1 Continuity N/- R/L1 Discontinuity R/L1 C
U
S/L2 P/+ Discontinuity S/L2 N/- Continuity
D2 D5 S/L2 V
P/+ S/L2 Continuity N/- S/L2 Discontinuity
T/L3 P/+ Discontinuity T/L3 N/- Continuity T/L3 W
D3 D6
P/+ T/L3 Continuity N/- T/L3 Discontinuity
U P/+ Discontinuity U N/- Continuity
TR1 TR4 D4 D5 D6
P/+ U Continuity N/- U Discontinuity
TR4 TR6 TR2
V P/+ Discontinuity V N/- Continuity
TR3 TR6 N/−
P/+ V Continuity N/- V Discontinuity
W P/+ Discontinuity W N/- Continuity
TR5 TR2
P/+ W Continuity N/- W Discontinuity
(Assumes the use of an analog meter.)
7.1.5 Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean status.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
NOTE
• Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as these will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
• The display, etc. of the operation panel and the parameter unit are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol. Therefore, avoid
using them for cleaning.
NOTE
• For parts replacement, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity (Refer to page 183 for details.)
NOTE
• Refer to page 180 to perform the life check of the inverter parts.
AIR FLOW
FR-F820-00105(2.2K)
FR-A820-1.5K to 3.7K to 00250(5.5K) FR-F820-00340(7.5K)
FR-A820-5.5K to 15K to 00770(18.5K),
FR-A840-2.2K, 3.7K FR-A840-5.5K to 15K
FR-F840-00083(3.7K), 00126(5.5K) FR-F840-00170(7.5K) to 00380(18.5K)
FR-F820-00930(22K),
FR-A820-18.5K, 22K 01250(30K) FR-F820-01540(37K)
FR-A820-30K
FR-A840-18.5K, 22K FR-A840-30K
FR-F840-00470(22K), 00620(30K) FR-F840-00770(37K)
FR-F820-01870(45K),
FR-A820-37K, 45K 02330(55K) FR-F820-03160(75K)
FR-A820-55K or higher or higher
FR-A840-37K to 55K to 01800(75K)
FR-F840-00930(45K) FR-A840-75K or higher to 03610(160K)
FR-F840-02160(90K)
3) Reinstall the fan cover.
2. Insert hooks 1. Insert hooks 2. Insert hooks 1. Insert hooks 2. Insert hooks
until you hear into holes. until you into holes. until you
1. Insert hooks hear a click hear a click
a click sound.
into holes. sound. sound.
NOTE
• Installing the fan in the opposite direction of air flow can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
• Prevent the cable from being caught when installing a fan.
• Switch the power OFF before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power OFF,
replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.
Fan
Fan block
3)
Fan cover
2)
Fan connection
connector
1)
AIR FLOW
NOTE
• Installing the fan in the opposite air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
• Prevent the cable from being caught when installing a fan.
• Switch the power OFF before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power OFF,
replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.
Smoothing capacitors
A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an aluminum
electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are deteriorated by the
adverse effects of ripple currents, etc. The replacement intervals greatly vary with the surrounding air temperature and
operating conditions. When the inverter is operated in air-conditioned, normal environment conditions, replace the capacitors
about every 10 years.
The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows:
• Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion.
• Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack.
• heck for external crack, discoloration, liquid leakage, etc. Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the measured
capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80% of the rating.
NOTE
• The inverter diagnoses the main circuit capacitor and control circuit capacitor by itself and can judge their lives. (Refer to
page 180.)
Relays
To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times (switching life).
Loosen the
screws
2) Be careful not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it
with the mounting screws.
Fix it with
the screws
NOTE
• Before starting inverter replacement, switch power OFF, wait for at least 10 minutes, and then check the voltage with a tester
and such to ensure safety.
NOTE
• When installing meters etc. on the inverter output side
When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is large, especially in the 400 V class, small-capacity models, the meters and CTs
may generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the
current rating.
To measure and display the output voltage and output current of the inverter, it is recommended to use the terminal AM and
FM/CA output functions of the inverter.
Input current
Output current
Inverter
: Electrodynamometer type
V
+ - : Moving-coil type
Instrument
types : Rectifier type
T2 "SD" is
Pulse width T1: Adjust with C0 (Pr.900). common
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55.
(frequency monitor only)
Across STF, STR,
Start signal RH, RM, RL, JOG,
When open
Select signal RT, AU, STP (STOP),
20 to 30 VDC
Reset signal CS, RES, MRS(+)
ON voltage: 1 V or less
Output stop signal and SD (for sink
logic)
Continuity check
Across A1 and C1 Moving-coil type [Normal] [Fault]
Fault signal
Across B1 and C1 (such as tester) Across A1 and C1 Discontinuity Continuity
Across B1 and C1 Continuity Discontinuity
Use an FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. A tester or general measuring instrument cannot measure accurately.
When the carrier frequency exceeds 5 kHz, do not use this instrument since using it may increase eddy current losses produced in metal parts
inside the instrument, leading to burnout. In this case, use an approximate-effective value type.
When the setting of Pr.195 ABC1 terminal function selection is the positive logic
A digital power meter (designed for inverter) can also be used to measure.
100 100
Example of measuring inverter input power Example of measuring inverter output power
PT
No PT can be used in the output side of the inverter. Use a direct-reading meter. (A PT can be used in the input side of the
inverter.)
7
80 80 Clamp meter
Clamp-on wattmeter
current measurement
60 60
Clamp meter Clamp-on wattmeter
current measurement
0 20 40 60Hz 0 20 40 60Hz
Example of measuring inverter input current Example of measuring inverter output current
Effective power
Total power factor of the inverter =
Apparent power
Three-phase input power found by the 3-wattmeter method
=
3 V (power supply voltage) I (input current effective value)
NOTE
• Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter
so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter.
• For the continuity test of the control circuit, use a tester (high resistance range) and do not use the megger or buzzer.
Motor
Power R/L1 Inverter U
S/L2 V IM
supply
T/L3 W
500VDC
megger
576
8 SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS 577
Inverter rating
(A) LD 4.2 7 9.6 15.2 23 31 45 58 70.5 85 114 140 170 212 288 346 432
Overload SLD 110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature 40°C
current rating
LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature 50°C
Protective structure (IEC 60529) Enclose type (IP20) Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 1.9 2.1 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.3 6.3 8.3 15 15 15 22 42 42 54 74 74
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220 V for 200 V class.
The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter
and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the maximum
point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about .
The rated input current indicates a value at a rated output voltage. The impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and cables) affects the
rated input current.
The power supply capacity is the value when at the rated output current. It varies by the impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and
cables).
FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector section)
578 SPECIFICATIONS
Inverter rating
400 V class
00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 01800 02160 02600 03250 03610 04320 04810 05470 06100 06830
Model FR-F840-[ ]
0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K 90K 110K 132K 160K 185K 220K 250K 280K 315K
75/
Applicable motor SLD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
90
110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355
capacity (kW)
LD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315
Rated SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.3 10 13 19 24 29 36 47 59 71 88 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521
capacity
(kVA) LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 18 22 27 33 43 53 65 81 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465
Rated current SLD 2.3 3.8 5.2 8.3 12.6 17 25 31 38 47 62 77 93 116 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 683
Output
(A) LD 2.1 3.5 4.8 7.6 11.5 16 23 29 35 43 57 70 85 106 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610
Overload SLD 110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature 40°C
current rating
LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature 50°C
Protective structure (IEC 60529) Enclose type (IP20) Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 6.3 6.3 8.3 8.3 15 15 23 41 41 43 52 55 71 78 117 117 166 166 166
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440 V for 400 V class.
The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter
and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the maximum
point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about .
The rated input current indicates a value at a rated output voltage. The impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and cables) affects the
rated input current.
The power supply capacity is the value when at the rated output current. It varies by the impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and
cables).
FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector section)
For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection. (For details, refer to page 168.)
SPECIFICATIONS 579
Motor rating
580 SPECIFICATIONS
Motor rating
80 80%
60 Continuous operation 66.7%
torque
40
20
0
150 2100
0 300 500 900 1200 1500 1800 2250
Speed [r/min]
NOTE
• The motor can also be used for applications which require the rated speed of 1800 r/min.
• The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20°C, and the input voltage to the inverter is 200 VAC
or 400 VAC.
• Constant-speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 150 r/min or less.
SPECIFICATIONS 581
Motor rating
Motor specification
Moter model MM-THE4
Voltage class 200V 400V
FR-F820-[] FR-F840-[]
Applicable inverter
03160(75K) 01800(75K) 02160(90K) 02600(110K) 03250(132K) 03610(160K)
Continuous Rated output (kW) 75 75 90 110 132 160
characteristic
Rated torque (Nm) 477 477 573 700 840 1018
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 1800
Number of poles 6
Maximum torque 120% 60 s
Frame number 250MA 250MA 250MD 280MD
Inertia moment J (10-4 kgm2) 6000 6000 10000 17500 20500 23250
Rated current (A) 270 135 170 195 230 280
Structure Totally-enclosed fan-cooled motor. With steel framed legs. (protective structure IP44)
Insulation class F class
Vibration class V-25
Surrounding air
temperature and -10°C to +40°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Storage temperature
Environment -20°C to +70°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
and humidity
Atmosphere Indoors (not under direct sunlight), and free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt.
Altitude Maximum 1,000 m above sea level
Vibration 4.9 m/s2
Mass (kg) 470 470 610 780 810 860
Output and rated motor speed are not guaranteed when the power supply voltage drops.
For the LD rating
80
60
Continuous operation
40 torque
20
0
150
0 300 500 900 1200 1500 1800
Speed [r/min]
NOTE
• The motor can also be used for applications which require the rated speed of 1800 r/min.
• The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20°C, and the input voltage to the inverter is 200 VAC
or 400 VAC.
• Constant-speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 150 r/min or less.
582 SPECIFICATIONS
Common specifications
Frequency Analog input Within 0.2% of the max. output frequency (25°C 10°C)
accuracy Digital input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency Base frequency can be set from 0 to 590 Hz. Constant-torque/variable-torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/F can be
characteristics selected.
Induction
Starting 120% 0.5 Hz (Advanced magnetic flux vector control)
motor
torque
IPM motor 50%
Torque boost Manual torque boost
Acceleration/deceleration 0 to 3600 s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode,
time setting backlash countermeasures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
DC injection brake
Operation frequency (0 to 120 Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable
(induction motor)
Stall prevention operation Activation range of stall prevention operation (SLD rating: 0 to 120%, LD rating: 0 to 150%). Whether to use the stall
level prevention or not can be selected. (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control)
Frequency Analog input Terminals 2 and 4: 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA (0 to 20 mA) are available.
Terminal 1: -10 to +10 V, -5 to 5 V are available.
setting
Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or the parameter unit
signal Digital input
Four-digit BCD or 16-bit binary (when used with option FR-A8AX)
Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Low-speed operation command, Middle-speed operation command, High-speed operation command, Second function
Input signals (twelve selection, Terminal 4 input selection, Jog operation selection, Output stop, Start self-holding selection, Forward rotation
terminals) command, Reverse rotation command, Inverter reset
The input signal can be changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
Operation specifications
The monitored item can be changed using Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection.
(CA type)
Voltage Max. 10 VDC: one terminal (output voltage)
output The monitored item can be changed using Pr.158 AM terminal function selection.
Operating Output frequency, output current, output voltage, frequency setting value
Operation
status The monitored item can be changed using Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection.
panel
Fault record is displayed when a fault occurs. Past 8 fault records and the conditions immediately before the fault (output
(FR-DU08) Fault record
voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time/year/month/date/time) are saved.
Overcurrent trip during acceleration, Overcurrent trip during constant speed, Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop,
Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration, Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed, Regenerative
overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop, Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function), Motor overload trip
(electronic thermal relay function), Heatsink overheat, Instantaneous power failure, Undervoltage, Input phase loss,
Protective Stall prevention stop, Loss of synchronism detection, Upper limit fault detection, Lower limit fault detection, Output side
earth (ground) fault overcurrent, Output phase loss, External thermal relay operation, PTC thermistor operation, Option
Protective/ function fault, Communication option fault, Parameter storage device fault, PU disconnection, Retry count excess, CPU fault,
warning Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit, 24 VDC power fault, Abnormal
function output current detection, Inrush current limit circuit fault, Communication fault (inverter), Analog input fault, USB
communication fault, Safety circuit fault, Overspeed occurrence, 4 mA input fault, Pre-charge fault, PID signal fault,
Internal circuit fault, User definition error in the PLC function
Fan alarm, Stall prevention (overcurrent), Stall prevention (overvoltage), Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU
Warning stop, Parameter copy, Safety stop, Maintenance timer 1 to 3, USB host error, Operation panel lock, Password
function locked, Parameter write error, Copy operation error, 24 V external power supply operation, Load fault warning,
Emergency drive in operation 8
SPECIFICATIONS 583
Common specifications
With circuit board coating (conforming to IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2): 95% RH or less (non-condensing)
Surrounding air humidity
Without circuit board coating: 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage temperature -20°C to +65°C
Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt, etc.)
Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000 m above sea level, 5.9 m/s2 or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
Available only for the standard model.
This protective function is not available in the initial status.
Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
For the installation at an altitude above 1,000 m (up to 2,500 m), derate the rated current 3% per 500 m.
2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-F840-04320(185K) or higher.
584 SPECIFICATIONS
Outline dimension drawings
(7.5)
2-φ6 hole
245
260
7.5
(1.5)
6 5
7.5 95 D1
110 D
Inverter Model D D1
FR-F820-00046(0.75K) 110 20
FR-F820-00077(1.5K) 125 35
(Unit: mm)
2-φ6 hole
FAN
245
260
(7.5)
(1.5)
6 5
12.5 125 140
150
FR-F840-00023(0.75K) to
00052(2.2K) are not provided
with a cooling fan.
8
45.5
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS 585
Outline dimension drawings
(7.5)
2-φ6 hole
H1 FAN
H
2.3
7.5
H2
6
12.5 195
220 D
Inverter Model H H1 H2 D D1
FR-F820-00340(7.5K), 00490(11K)
260 245 1.5 170 84
FR-F840-00170(7.5K), 00250(11K)
FR-F820-00630(15K)
300 285 3 190 101.5
FR-F840-00310(15K), 00380(18.5K)
D1
(Unit: mm)
2-φ10 hole
(10)
FAN
380
400
2.3
10
10
(1.5)
10 230
250 190
93.3
(Unit: mm)
586 SPECIFICATIONS
Outline dimension drawings
FR-F820-01540(37K)
FR-F840-00770(37K)
(10)
2-φ 10 hole 4-φ 20 hole for hanging 17
(15)
520
530
550
15
10 3.2
10
270 195
325
(Unit: mm)
FAN
H2
H1
H
12 3.2
W1
10
18
W D
Inverter Model W W1 H H1 H2 d D D1
FR-F820-01870(45K), 02330(55K)
435 380 550 525 514 25 250 24
FR-F840-00930(45K), 01160(55K), 01800(75K)
FR-F820-03160(75K) 465 410 700 675 664 25 250 22
FR-F820-03800(90K), 04750(110K) 465 400 740 715 704 24 360 22
FR-F840-02160(90K), 02600(110K) 465 400 620 595 584 24 300 22
FR-F840-03250(132K), 03610(160K) 465 400 740 715 704 25 360 22 8
Always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS 587
Outline dimension drawings
FR-F840-04320(185K), 04810(220K)
22
(15)
(13)
3-φ12 hole 4-φ16 hole
FAN
1010
984
985
12 3.2
200 200
10
380
13
498
Always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. (Unit: mm)
3-φ12 hole
(13)
4-φ16 hole
FAN
1010
984
984
12 3.2
13
13
300 300
680 380
Always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. (Unit: mm)
588 SPECIFICATIONS
Outline dimension drawings
Air-
72.5
78.5
20
72.5
bleeding
hole
5
22
(FR-ADP option)
3 66 3 16
SPECIFICATIONS 589
Outline dimension drawings
H
C
KD
C0-0.5
KG
W Sliding distance
F F XB E E
U
X
T
N M
Z
• 37K to 55K
R
A B 140 D
KA 110
φ90
M16 screw
KP
C
KG
C
C-0.5
0
30 9
11
F F XB W 70
Sliding distance
U
T
N E E
18.5
4
M
S
Cross section C-C Frame leg viewed from underneath
NOTE
• The drawings shown above are sample outline dimension drawings. The outer appearance may differ depending on the
frame number.
590 SPECIFICATIONS
Outline dimension drawings
H
KG
W
U
T
C
K2 K1
G
4-φZ hole J
K K E E
HOLES S M
F F XB
N
• 90kW
L
(A) (R) D
(B)
(KA)
Q
QK
H
KG
W
U
T
C
G
K2 K2 J
4-φZ hole K1 K E E
S
HOLES F F XB M
N
Q
QK
H
KG
W
U
T
C
G
K2 K2 J
4-φZ hole K1 K E E
S
HOLES F F XB M
N
NOTE 8
• The drawings shown above are sample outline dimension drawings. The outer appearance may differ depending on the
frame number.
• For the 200 V class, models with capacities up to 75 kW are available.
SPECIFICATIONS 591
MEMO
592
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 593
Appendix1 For customers replacing the
conventional model with this
inverter
Appendix1.1 Replacement of the FR-F700(P) series
Differences and compatibility with the FR-F700(P) series
Item FR-F700(P) FR-F800
V/F control V/F control
Control method Simple magnetic flux vector control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
IPM motor control PM motor control (IPM motor/SPM motor)
USB host function
Added functions ― Safety stop function
etc.
Maximum
output frequency 400 Hz 590 Hz
V/F control
The X14 signal does not need to be assigned. (PID
PID control Turn the X14 signal ON to enable PID control.
control is available by the Pr.128 setting.)
Automatic restart after CS signal assignment not required. (Restart is
Turn the CS signal ON to enable restart.
enabled with the Pr.57 setting only.)
instantaneous power Pr.186 CS terminal function selection initial
Pr.186 CS terminal function selection initial
failure value "6"
value "9999"
Input from the terminal AU (The function of the Input from the terminal 2. (The function of the
PTC thermistor input
terminal AU is switched by a switch.) terminal 2 is switched by the Pr.561 setting.)
594 APPENDIX
Installation precautions
• Removal procedure of the front cover is different. (Refer to page 22.)
• Plug-in options of the FR-F700(P) series are not compatible.
• Operation panel (FR-DU07) cannot be used.
Wiring precautions
• The spring clamp type terminal block has changed to the screw type. Use of blade terminals is recommended.
APPENDIX 595
Appendix2 Specification comparison between
PM motor control and induction
motor control
Item PM motor control Induction motor control
Premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS,
General-purpose motor SF-JR, SF-PR series,
Applicable motor MM-THE4 series
etc.
(the same capacity as the inverter capacity)
Number of
1: 1 Several motors can be driven under V/F control.
connectable motors
MM-EFS 15 kW or lower: 6 poles
Number of motor
MM-THE4: 6 poles Normally 2, 4, or 6 poles.
poles MM-EFS 18.5 kW or higher: 8 poles
MM-EFS 15 kW or lower: 75 Hz
Rated motor
MM-THE4: 75 Hz Normally 50 Hz or 60 Hz
frequency MM-EFS 18.5 kW or higher: 100 Hz
MM-EFS 15 kW or lower: 112.5 Hz (2250 r/min with 6P) 590 Hz (17700 r/min with 4P)
Maximum output MM-EFS 18.5 kW or higher: 150 Hz (2250 r/min with (Set the upper limit frequency (Pr.0, Pr.18)
frequency 8P) according to the motor and machine
MM-THE4: 90 Hz (1800 r/min with 6P) specifications.)
120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics)
Permissible load
(The % value is a ratio to the rated motor current.) (The % value is a ratio to the rated inverter current.)
Maximum starting
50% 120% (Advanced magnetic flux vector control)
torque
0.018 Hz / 0 to 75 Hz (1500 r/min) /
0.025 Hz /0 to 100 Hz (1500 r/min) 0.015 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (1800 r/min with 4P)
(0 to 10 V/12 bits) (0 to 10 V/12 bits)
Frequency 0.036 Hz / 0 to 75 Hz (1500 r/min) / 0.03 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (1800 r/min with 4P)
Analog
setting 0.05 Hz / 0 to 100 Hz (1500 r/min) (0 to 5 V/11 bits, 0 to 20 mA/11 bits, 0 to ±10 V/12
input (0 to 5 V/11 bits, 0 to 20 mA/11bits, 0 to ±10 V/12 bits) bits)
resolution
0.072 Hz / 0 to 75 Hz (1500 r/min) / 0.06 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (1800 r/min with 4P)
0.1 Hz /0 to 100 Hz (1500 r/min) (0 to ±5 V/11 bits)
(0 to ±5 V/11 bits)
In the initial setting, 1 mA is output at the rated motor
In the initial setting, 1 mA is output at 60 Hz from
Pulse frequency from across terminals FM and SD. (SD is a
across terminals FM and SD. (SD is a common
Output common terminal.)
output terminal.)
signal The permissible frequency load current is 2 mA.
The permissible frequency load current is 2 mA.
for meter Pulse specification: 1440 pulses/s at the rated motor
Pulse specification: 1440 pulses/s at 60 Hz
frequency
Four patterns of 2 kHz, 6 kHz, 10 kHz, and 14 kHz Selectable between 0.75 kHz to 14.5 kHz
Carrier frequency
Two patterns of 2 kHz and 6 kHz 0.75 kHz to 6 kHz
Automatic restart No startup waiting time.
after instantaneous Using the regeneration avoidance function together is Startup waiting time exists.
power failure recommended.
Startup delay Startup delay of about 0.1 s for initial tuning. No startup delay.
Driving by the Not available
commercial power Never connect an IPM motor to the commercial power Can be driven by the commercial power supply.
supply supply.
While the motor is coasting, potential is generated
Operation during While the motor is coasting, no potential is
across motor terminals.
motor coasting Before wiring, make sure that the motor is stopped.
generated across motor terminals.
Maximum motor
100 m or shorter Overall length: 500 m or shorter
wiring length
For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (It must be 0.4 kW or higher.)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the rated inverter current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due
to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to 40% or higher of the rated inverter current.
The values differ for the 15K and lower capacity premium high-efficiency IPM motor, which requires 6 poles to run at the rated motor speed
(1500 r/min), or for 18K and higher, which requires 8 poles to run at the speed.
For the FR-F820-02330(55K) or lower and the FR-F840-01160(55K) or lower
For the FR-F820-03160(75K) or higher and the FR-F840-01800(75K) or higher
NOTE
• Before wiring, make sure that the motor is stopped. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
• Never connect an IPM motor to the commercial power supply.
• No slippage occurs with an IPM motor because of its characteristic. If an IPM motor, which took over an induction motor, is
driven at the same frequency as for the general-purpose motor, the rotation speed of the IPM motor becomes faster by the
amount of the general-purpose motor's slippage. Adjust the speed command to run the IPM motor at the same speed as the
induction motor, as required.
596 APPENDIX
Appendix3 Parameters (functions) and
instruction codes under different
control methods
Instruction codes are used to read and write parameters in accordance with the Mitsubishi inverter protocol of RS-485 communication.
(For RS-485 communication, refer to page 449.)
Function availability under each control method is shown as below:
: Available
: Not available
For "parameter copy", "parameter clear", and "all parameter clear", "" indicates the function is available, and "" indicates the function is not
available.
These parameters are not cleared by the parameter clear (all parameter clear) command, which are sent through RS-485 communication. (For
RS-485 communication, refer to page 449.)
When a communication option is installed, parameter clear (lock release) during password lock (Pr.297 ≠ "9999") can be performed only from
the communication option.
Reading and writing via the PU connector are available.
Symbols in the table indicate parameters that operate when the options are connected.
FR-A8AR, FR-A8AX, FR-A8AY, FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, FR-A8ND, FR-A8NP
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
0 Torque boost 00 80 0
1 Maximum frequency 01 81 0
2 Minimum frequency 02 82 0
3 Base frequency 03 83 0
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 04 84 0
5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 05 85 0
6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 06 86 0
7 Acceleration time 07 87 0
8 Deceleration time 08 88 0
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay 09 89 0
10 DC injection brake operation frequency 0A 8A 0
11 DC injection brake operation time 0B 8B 0
12 DC injection brake operation voltage 0C 8C 0
13 Starting frequency 0D 8D 0
14 Load pattern selection 0E 8E 0
15 Jog frequency 0F 8F 0
16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 10 90 0
17 MRS input selection 11 91 0
18 High speed maximum frequency 12 92 0
19 Base frequency voltage 13 93 0
20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 14 94 0
21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments 15 95 0
22 Stall prevention operation level 16 96 0
Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at
23 17 97 0
double speed
24 Multi-speed setting (speed 4) 18 98 0
25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5) 19 99 0
26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6) 1A 9A 0
27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7) 1B 9B 0
28 Multi-speed input compensation selection 1C 9C 0
29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection 1D 9D 0
30 Regenerative function selection 1E 9E 0
31 Frequency jump 1A 1F 9F 0
32 Frequency jump 1B 20 A0 0
33 Frequency jump 2A 21 A1 0
34 Frequency jump 2B 22 A2 0
35 Frequency jump 3A 23 A3 0
36 Frequency jump 3B 24 A4 0
37 Speed display 25 A5 0
APPENDIX 597
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name
Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 29 A9 0
42 Output frequency detection 2A AA 0
43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 2B AB 0
44 Second acceleration/deceleration time 2C AC 0
45 Second deceleration time 2D AD 0
46 Second torque boost 2E AE 0
47 Second V/F (base frequency) 2F AF 0
48 Second stall prevention operation level 30 B0 0
49 Second stall prevention operation frequency 31 B1 0
50 Second output frequency detection 32 B2 0
51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay 33 B3 0
52 Operation panel main monitor selection 34 B4 0
54 FM/CA terminal function selection 36 B6 0
55 Frequency monitoring reference 37 B7 0
56 Current monitoring reference 38 B8 0
57 Restart coasting time 39 B9 0
58 Restart cushion time 3A BA 0
59 Remote function selection 3B BB 0
60 Energy saving control selection 3C BC 0
65 Retry selection 41 C1 0
66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 42 C2 0
67 Number of retries at fault occurrence 43 C3 0
68 Retry waiting time 44 C4 0
69 Retry count display erase 45 C5 0
70 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
71 Applied motor 47 C7 0
72 PWM frequency selection 48 C8 0
73 Analog input selection 49 C9 0
74 Input filter time constant 4A CA 0
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop
75 4B CB 0
selection
76 Fault code output selection 4C CC 0
77 Parameter write selection 4D CD 0
78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 4E CE 0
79 Operation mode selection 4F CF 0
80 Motor capacity 50 D0 0
81 Number of motor poles 51 D1 0
82 Motor excitation current 52 D2 0
83 Rated motor voltage 53 D3 0
84 Rated motor frequency 54 D4 0
89 Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux vector) 59 D9 0
90 Motor constant (R1) 5A DA 0
91 Motor constant (R2) 5B DB 0
92 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) 5C DC 0
93 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) 5D DD 0
94 Motor constant (X) 5E DE 0
95 Online auto tuning selection 5F DF 0
96 Auto tuning setting/status 60 E0 0
100 V/F1 (first frequency) 00 80 1
101 V/F1 (first frequency voltage) 01 81 1
102 V/F2 (second frequency) 02 82 1
103 V/F2 (second frequency voltage) 03 83 1
104 V/F3 (third frequency) 04 84 1
105 V/F3 (third frequency voltage) 05 85 1
106 V/F4 (fourth frequency) 06 86 1
107 V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage) 07 87 1
108 V/F5 (fifth frequency) 08 88 1
109 V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage) 09 89 1
117 PU communication station number 11 91 1
118 PU communication speed 12 92 1
598 APPENDIX
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name
Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
119 PU communication stop bit length / data length 13 93 1
120 PU communication parity check 14 94 1
121 Number of PU communication retries 15 95 1
122 PU communication check time interval 16 96 1
123 PU communication waiting time setting 17 97 1
124 PU communication CR/LF selection 18 98 1
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 19 99 1
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 1A 9A 1
127 PID control automatic switchover frequency 1B 9B 1
128 PID action selection 1C 9C 1
129 PID proportional band 1D 9D 1
130 PID integral time 1E 9E 1
131 PID upper limit 1F 9F 1
132 PID lower limit 20 A0 1
133 PID action set point 21 A1 1
134 PID differential time 22 A2 1
135 Electronic bypass sequence selection 23 A3 1
136 MC switchover interlock time 24 A4 1
137 Start waiting time 25 A5 1
138 Bypass selection at a fault 26 A6 1
Automatic switchover frequency from inverter to bypass
139 27 A7 1
operation
140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 28 A8 1
141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 29 A9 1
142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 2A AA 1
143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 2B AB 1
144 Speed setting switchover 2C AC 1
145 PU display language selection 2D AD 1
147 Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency 2F AF 1
148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input 30 B0 1
149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input 31 B1 1
150 Output current detection level 32 B2 1
151 Output current detection signal delay time 33 B3 1
152 Zero current detection level 34 B4 1
153 Zero current detection time 35 B5 1
154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation 36 B6 1
155 RT signal function validity condition selection 37 B7 1
156 Stall prevention operation selection 38 B8 1
157 OL signal output timer 39 B9 1
158 AM terminal function selection 3A BA 1
Automatic switchover frequency range from bypass to
159 3B BB 1
inverter operation
160 User group read selection 00 80 2
161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection 01 81 2
162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection 02 82 2
163 First cushion time for restart 03 83 2
164 First cushion voltage for restart 04 84 2
165 Stall prevention operation level for restart 05 85 2
166 Output current detection signal retention time 06 86 2
167 Output current detection operation selection 07 87 2
168
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
169
170 Watt-hour meter clear 0A 8A 2
171 Operation hour meter clear 0B 8B 2
172 User group registered display/batch clear 0C 8C 2
173 User group registration 0D 8D 2
174 User group clear 0E 8E 2
178 STF terminal function selection 12 92 2
179 STR terminal function selection 13 93 2
APPENDIX 599
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name
Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
180 RL terminal function selection 14 94 2
181 RM terminal function selection 15 95 2
182 RH terminal function selection 16 96 2
183 RT terminal function selection 17 97 2
184 AU terminal function selection 18 98 2
185 JOG terminal function selection 19 99 2
186 CS terminal function selection 1A 9A 2
187 MRS terminal function selection 1B 9B 2
188 STOP terminal function selection 1C 9C 2
189 RES terminal function selection 1D 9D 2
190 RUN terminal function selection 1E 9E 2
191 SU terminal function selection 1F 9F 2
192 IPF terminal function selection 20 A0 2
193 OL terminal function selection 21 A1 2
194 FU terminal function selection 22 A2 2
195 ABC1 terminal function selection 23 A3 2
196 ABC2 terminal function selection 24 A4 2
232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8) 28 A8 2
233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9) 29 A9 2
234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10) 2A AA 2
235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11) 2B AB 2
236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12) 2C AC 2
237 Multi-speed setting (speed 13) 2D AD 2
238 Multi-speed setting (speed 14) 2E AE 2
239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15) 2F AF 2
240 Soft-PWM operation selection 30 B0 2
241 Analog input display unit switchover 31 B1 2
242 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 2) 32 B2 2
243 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 4) 33 B3 2
244 Cooling fan operation selection 34 B4 2
245 Rated slip 35 B5 2
246 Slip compensation time constant 36 B6 2
247 Constant-power range slip compensation selection 37 B7 2
248 Self power management selection 38 B8 2
249 Earth (ground) fault detection at start 39 B9 2
250 Stop selection 3A BA 2
251 Output phase loss protection selection 3B BB 2
252 Override bias 3C BC 2
253 Override gain 3D BD 2
254 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 3E BE 2
255 Life alarm status display 3F BF 2
256 Inrush current limit circuit life display 40 C0 2
257 Control circuit capacitor life display 41 C1 2
258 Main circuit capacitor life display 42 C2 2
259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 43 C3 2
260 PWM frequency automatic switchover 44 C4 2
261 Power failure stop selection 45 C5 2
262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 46 C6 2
263 Subtraction starting frequency 47 C7 2
264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 48 C8 2
265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 49 C9 2
266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 4A CA 2
267 Terminal 4 input selection 4B CB 2
268 Monitor decimal digits selection 4C CC 2
269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
289 Inverter output terminal filter 61 E1 2
290 Monitor negative output selection 62 E2 2
291 Pulse train I/O selection 63 E3 2
600 APPENDIX
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name
Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
294 UV avoidance voltage gain 66 E6 2
295 Frequency change increment amount setting 67 E7 2
296 Password lock level 68 E8 2
297 Password lock/unlock 69 E9 2
298 Frequency search gain 6A EA 2
299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting 6B EB 2
300 BCD input bias 00 80 3
301 BCD input gain 01 81 3
302 BIN input bias 02 82 3
303 BIN input gain 03 83 3
Digital input and analog input compensation enable/disable
304 04 84 3
selection
305 Read timing operation selection 05 85 3
306 Analog output signal selection 06 86 3
307 Setting for zero analog output 07 87 3
308 Setting for maximum analog output 08 88 3
309 Analog output signal voltage/current switchover 09 89 3
310 Analog meter voltage output selection 0A 8A 3
311 Setting for zero analog meter voltage output 0B 8B 3
312 Setting for maximum analog meter voltage output 0C 8C 3
313 DO0 output selection 0D 8D 3
314 DO1 output selection 0E 8E 3
315 DO2 output selection 0F 8F 3
316 DO3 output selection 10 90 3
317 DO4 output selection 11 91 3
318 DO5 output selection 12 92 3
319 DO6 output selection 13 93 3
320 RA1 output selection 14 94 3
321 RA2 output selection 15 95 3
322 RA3 output selection 16 96 3
323 AM0 0V adjustment 17 97 3
324 AM1 0mA adjustment 18 98 3
329 Digital input unit selection 1D 9D 3
331 RS-485 communication station number 1F 9F 3
332 RS-485 communication speed 20 A0 3
333 RS-485 communication stop bit length / data length 21 A1 3
334 RS-485 communication parity check selection 22 A2 3
335 RS-485 communication retry count 23 A3 3
336 RS-485 communication check time interval 24 A4 3
337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting 25 A5 3
338 Communication operation command source 26 A6 3
339 Communication speed command source 27 A7 3
340 Communication startup mode selection 28 A8 3
341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 29 A9 3
342 Communication EEPROM write selection 2A AA 3
343 Communication error count 2B AB 3
345 DeviceNet address 2D AD 3
346 DeviceNet baud rate 2E AE 3
349 Communication reset selection 31 B1 3
374 Overspeed detection level 4A CA 3
384 Input pulse division scaling factor 54 D4 3
385 Frequency for zero input pulse 55 D5 3
386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 56 D6 3
APPENDIX 601
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name
Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
390 % setting reference frequency 5A DA 3
414 PLC function operation selection 0E 8E 4
415 Inverter operation lock mode setting 0F 8F 4
416 Pre-scale function selection 10 90 4
417 Pre-scale setting value 11 91 4
418 Extension output terminal filter 12 92 4
434 IP address 1 22 A2 4
435 IP address 2 23 A3 4
450 Second applied motor 32 B2 4
453 Second motor capacity 35 B5 4
454 Number of second motor poles 36 B6 4
455 Second motor excitation current 37 B7 4
456 Rated second motor voltage 38 B8 4
457 Rated second motor frequency 39 B9 4
458 Second motor constant (R1) 3A BA 4
459 Second motor constant (R2) 3B BB 4
460 Second motor constant (L1) / d-axis inductance (Ld) 3C BC 4
461 Second motor constant (L2) / q-axis inductance (Lq) 3D BD 4
462 Second motor constant (X) 3E BE 4
463 Second motor auto tuning setting/status 3F BF 4
495 Remote output selection 5F DF 4
496 Remote output data 1 60 E0 4
497 Remote output data 2 61 E1 4
498 PLC function flash memory clear 62 E2 4
Communication error execution waiting time
500 00 80 5
602 APPENDIX
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name
Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
569 Second motor speed control gain 45 C5 5
570 Multiple rating setting 46 C6 5
571 Holding time at a start 47 C7 5
573 4 mA input check selection 49 C9 5
574 Second motor online auto tuning 4A CA 5
575 Output interruption detection time 4B CB 5
576 Output interruption detection level 4C CC 5
577 Output interruption cancel level 4D CD 5
578 Auxiliary motor operation selection 4E CE 5
579 Motor connection function selection 4F CF 5
580 MC switching interlock time 50 D0 5
581 Start waiting time 51 D1 5
582 Auxiliary motor connection-time deceleration time 52 D2 5
583 Auxiliary motor disconnection-time acceleration time 53 D3 5
584 Auxiliary motor 1 starting frequency 54 D4 5
585 Auxiliary motor 2 starting frequency 55 D5 5
586 Auxiliary motor 3 starting frequency 56 D6 5
587 Auxiliary motor 1 stopping frequency 57 D7 5
588 Auxiliary motor 2 stopping frequency 58 D8 5
589 Auxiliary motor 3 stopping frequency 59 D9 5
590 Auxiliary motor start detection time 5A DA 5
591 Auxiliary motor stop detection time 5B DB 5
592 Traverse function selection 5C DC 5
593 Maximum amplitude amount 5D DD 5
594 Amplitude compensation amount during deceleration 5E DE 5
595 Amplitude compensation amount during acceleration 5F DF 5
596 Amplitude acceleration time 60 E0 5
597 Amplitude deceleration time 61 E1 5
598 Undervoltage level 62 E2 5
599 X10 terminal input selection 63 E3 5
600 First free thermal reduction frequency 1 00 80 6
601 First free thermal reduction ratio 1 01 81 6
602 First free thermal reduction frequency 2 02 82 6
603 First free thermal reduction ratio 2 03 83 6
604 First free thermal reduction frequency 3 04 84 6
606 Power failure stop external signal input selection 06 86 6
607 Motor permissible load level 07 87 6
608 Second motor permissible load level 08 88 6
609 PID set point/deviation input selection 09 89 6
610 PID measured value input selection 0A 8A 6
611 Acceleration time at a restart 0B 8B 6
653 Speed smoothing control 35 B5 6
654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency 36 B6 6
655 Analog remote output selection 37 B7 6
656 Analog remote output 1 38 B8 6
657 Analog remote output 2 39 B9 6
658 Analog remote output 3 3A BA 6
659 Analog remote output 4 3B BB 6
Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation
660 3C BC 6
selection
661 Magnetic excitation increase rate 3D BD 6
662 Increased magnetic excitation current level 3E BE 6
663 Control circuit temperature signal output level 3F BF 6
665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 41 C1 6
668 Power failure stop frequency gain 44 C4 6
673 SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation selection 49 C9 6
674 SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain 4A CA 6
684 Tuning data unit switchover 54 D4 6
686 Maintenance timer 2 56 D6 6
687 Maintenance timer 2 warning output set time 57 D7 6
APPENDIX 603
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name
Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
688 Maintenance timer 3 58 D8 6
689 Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time 59 D9 6
692 Second free thermal reduction frequency 1 5C DC 6
693 Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 5D DD 6
694 Second free thermal reduction frequency 2 5E DE 6
695 Second free thermal reduction ratio 2 5F DF 6
696 Second free thermal reduction frequency 3 60 E0 6
699 Input terminal filter 63 E3 6
702 Maximum motor frequency 02 82 7
706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) 06 86 7
707 Motor inertia (integer) 07 87 7
711 Motor Ld decay ratio 0B 8B 7
712 Motor Lq decay ratio 0C 8C 7
717 Starting resistance tuning compensation 11 91 7
721 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width 15 95 7
724 Motor inertia (exponent) 18 98 7
725 Motor protection current level 19 99 7
726 Auto Baudrate/Max Master 1A 9A 7
727 Max Info Frames 1B 9B 7
728 Device instance number (Upper 3 digits) 1C 9C 7
729 Device instance number (Lower 4 digits) 1D 9D 7
738 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) 26 A6 7
739 Second motor Ld decay ratio 27 A7 7
740 Second motor Lq decay ratio 28 A8 7
741 Second starting resistance tuning compensation 29 A9 7
742 Second motor magnetic pole detection pulse width 2A AA 7
743 Second motor maximum frequency 2B AB 7
744 Second motor inertia (integer) 2C AC 7
745 Second motor inertia (exponent) 2D AD 7
746 Second motor protection current level 2E AE 7
753 Second PID action selection 35 B5 7
754 Second PID control automatic switchover frequency 36 B6 7
755 Second PID action set point 37 B7 7
756 Second PID proportional band 38 B8 7
757 Second PID integral time 39 B9 7
758 Second PID differential time 3A BA 7
759 PID unit selection 3B BB 7
760 Pre-charge fault selection 3C BC 7
761 Pre-charge ending level 3D BD 7
762 Pre-charge ending time 3E BE 7
763 Pre-charge upper detection level 3F BF 7
764 Pre-charge time limit 40 C0 7
765 Second pre-charge fault selection 41 C1 7
766 Second pre-charge ending level 42 C2 7
767 Second pre-charge ending time 43 C3 7
768 Second pre-charge upper detection level 44 C4 7
769 Second pre-charge time limit 45 C5 7
774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 4A CA 7
775 Operation panel monitor selection 2 4B CB 7
776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 4C CC 7
777 4 mA input fault operation frequency 4D CD 7
778 4 mA input check filter 4E CE 7
779 Operation frequency during communication error 4F CF 7
791 Acceleration time in low-speed range 5B DB 7
792 Deceleration time in low-speed range 5C DC 7
799 Pulse increment setting for output power 63 E3 7
800 Control method selection 00 80 8
820 Speed control P gain 1 14 94 8
821 Speed control integral time 1 15 95 8
604 APPENDIX
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name
Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
822 Speed setting filter 1 16 96 8
824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) 18 98 8
825 Torque control integral time 1 (current loop integral time) 19 99 8
827 Torque detection filter 1 1B 9B 8
828 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
830 Speed control P gain 2 1E 9E 8
831 Speed control integral time 2 1F 9F 8
832 Speed setting filter 2 20 A0 8
834 Torque control P gain 2 22 A2 8
835 Torque control integral time 2 23 A3 8
837 Torque detection filter 2 25 A5 8
849 Analog input offset adjustment 31 B1 8
858 Terminal 4 function assignment 3A BA 8
859 Torque current/Rated PM motor current 3B BB 8
860 Second motor torque current/Rated PM motor current 3C BC 8
864 Torque detection 40 C0 8
866 Torque monitoring reference 42 C2 8
867 AM output filter 43 C3 8
868 Terminal 1 function assignment 44 C4 8
869 Current output filter 45 C5 8
870 Speed detection hysteresis 46 C6 8
872 Input phase loss protection selection 48 C8 8
874 OLT level setting 4A CA 8
882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection 52 D2 8
883 Regeneration avoidance operation level 53 D3 8
Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection
884 54 D4 8
sensitivity
Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit
885 55 D5 8
value
886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 56 D6 8
888 Free parameter 1 58 D8 8
889 Free parameter 2 59 D9 8
891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 5B DB 8
892 Load factor 5C DC 8
893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity) 5D DD 8
Control selection during commercial power-supply
894 5E DE 8
operation
895 Power saving rate reference value 5F DF 8
896 Power unit cost 60 E0 8
897 Power saving monitor average time 61 E1 8
898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 62 E2 8
899 Operation time rate (estimated value) 63 E3 8
C0
FM/CA terminal calibration 5C DC 1
(900)
C1
AM terminal calibration 5D DD 1
(901)
C2
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 5E DE 1
(902)
C3
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 5E DE 1
(902)
125
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 5F DF 1
(903)
C4
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 5F DF 1
(903)
C5
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 60 E0 1
(904)
C6
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1
(904)
126
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 61 E1 1
(905)
APPENDIX 605
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name
Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
C7
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1
(905)
C12
Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) 11 91 9
(917)
C13
Terminal 1 bias (speed) 11 91 9
(917)
C14
Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 12 92 9
(918)
C15
Terminal 1 gain (speed) 12 92 9
(918)
C16
Terminal 1 bias command (torque) 13 93 9
(919)
C17
Terminal 1 bias (torque) 13 93 9
(919)
C18
Terminal 1 gain command (torque) 14 94 9
(920)
C19
Terminal 1 gain (torque) 14 94 9
(920)
C8
Current output bias signal 1E 9E 9
(930)
C9
Current output bias current 1E 9E 9
(930)
C10
Current output gain signal 1F 9F 9
(931)
C11
Current output gain current 1F 9F 9
(931)
C38
Terminal 4 bias command (torque) 20 A0 9
(932)
C39
Terminal 4 bias (torque) 20 A0 9
(932)
C40
Terminal 4 gain command (torque) 21 A1 9
(933)
C41
Terminal 4 gain (torque) 21 A1 9
(933)
C42
PID display bias coefficient 22 A2 9
(934)
C43
PID display bias analog value 22 A2 9
(934)
C44
PID display gain coefficient 23 A3 9
(935)
C45
PID display gain analog value 23 A3 9
(935)
977 Input voltage mode selection 4D CD 9
989 Parameter copy alarm release 59 D9 9
990 PU buzzer control 5A DA 9
991 PU contrast adjustment 5B DB 9
992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection 5C DC 9
997 Fault initiation 61 E1 9
998 PM parameter initialization 62 E2 9
999 Automatic parameter setting 63 E3 9
1000 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
1002 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient 02 82 A
1006 Clock (year) 06 86 A
1007 Clock (month, day) 07 87 A
1008 Clock (hour, minute) 08 88 A
1013 Emergency drive running speed after retry reset 0D 8D A
1015 Integral stop selection at limited frequency 0F 8F A
1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time 10 90 A
1019 Analog meter voltage negative output selection 13 93 A
1020 Trace operation selection 14 94 A
1021 Trace mode selection 15 95 A
606 APPENDIX
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name
Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
1022 Sampling cycle 16 96 A
1023 Number of analog channels 17 97 A
1024 Sampling auto start 18 98 A
1025 Trigger mode selection 19 99 A
1026 Number of sampling before trigger 1A 9A A
1027 Analog source selection (1ch) 1B 9B A
1028 Analog source selection (2ch) 1C 9C A
1029 Analog source selection (3ch) 1D 9D A
1030 Analog source selection (4ch) 1E 9E A
1031 Analog source selection (5ch) 1F 9F A
1032 Analog source selection (6ch) 20 A0 A
1033 Analog source selection (7ch) 21 A1 A
1034 Analog source selection (8ch) 22 A2 A
1035 Analog trigger channel 23 A3 A
1036 Analog trigger operation selection 24 A4 A
1037 Analog trigger level 25 A5 A
1038 Digital source selection (1ch) 26 A6 A
1039 Digital source selection (2ch) 27 A7 A
1040 Digital source selection (3ch) 28 A8 A
1041 Digital source selection (4ch) 29 A9 A
1042 Digital source selection (5ch) 2A AA A
1043 Digital source selection (6ch) 2B AB A
1044 Digital source selection (7ch) 2C AC A
1045 Digital source selection (8ch) 2D AD A
1046 Digital trigger channel 2E AE A
1047 Digital trigger operation selection 2F AF A
1048 Display-off waiting time 30 B0 A
1049 USB host reset 31 B1 A
1106 Torque monitor filter 06 86 B
1107 Running speed monitor filter 07 87 B
1108 Excitation current monitor filter 08 88 B
1132 Pre-charge change increment amount 20 A0 B
1133 Second pre-charge change increment amount 21 A1 B
1134
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
1135
1136 Second PID display bias coefficient 24 A4 B
1137 Second PID display bias analog value 25 A5 B
1138 Second PID display gain coefficient 26 A6 B
1139 Second PID display gain analog value 27 A7 B
1140 Second PID set point/deviation input selection 28 A8 B
1141 Second PID measured value input selection 29 A9 B
1142 Second PID unit selection 2A AA B
1143 Second PID upper limit 2B AB B
1144 Second PID lower limit 2C AC B
1145 Second PID deviation limit 2D AD B
1146 Second PID signal operation selection 2E AE B
1147 Second output interruption detection time 2F AF B
1148 Second output interruption detection level 30 B0 B
1149 Second output interruption cancel level 31 B1 B
1150 User parameters 1 32 B2 B
1151 User parameters 2 33 B3 B
1152 User parameters 3 34 B4 B
1153 User parameters 4 35 B5 B
1154 User parameters 5 36 B6 B
1155 User parameters 6 37 B7 B
1156 User parameters 7 38 B8 B
1157 User parameters 8 39 B9 B
1158 User parameters 9 3A BA B
1159 User parameters 10 3B BB B
1160 User parameters 11 3C BC B
APPENDIX 607
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name
Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
1161 User parameters 12 3D BD B
1162 User parameters 13 3E BE B
1163 User parameters 14 3F BF B
1164 User parameters 15 40 C0 B
1165 User parameters 16 41 C1 B
1166 User parameters 17 42 C2 B
1167 User parameters 18 43 C3 B
1168 User parameters 19 44 C4 B
1169 User parameters 20 45 C5 B
1170 User parameters 21 46 C6 B
1171 User parameters 22 47 C7 B
1172 User parameters 23 48 C8 B
1173 User parameters 24 49 C9 B
1174 User parameters 25 4A CA B
1175 User parameters 26 4B CB B
1176 User parameters 27 4C CC B
1177 User parameters 28 4D CD B
1178 User parameters 29 4E CE B
1179 User parameters 30 4F CF B
1180 User parameters 31 50 D0 B
1181 User parameters 32 51 D1 B
1182 User parameters 33 52 D2 B
1183 User parameters 34 53 D3 B
1184 User parameters 35 54 D4 B
1185 User parameters 36 55 D5 B
1186 User parameters 37 56 D6 B
1187 User parameters 38 57 D7 B
1188 User parameters 39 58 D8 B
1189 User parameters 40 59 D9 B
1190 User parameters 41 5A DA B
1191 User parameters 42 5B DB B
1192 User parameters 43 5C DC B
1193 User parameters 44 5D DD B
1194 User parameters 45 5E DE B
1195 User parameters 46 5F DF B
1196 User parameters 47 60 E0 B
1197 User parameters 48 61 E1 B
1198 User parameters 49 62 E2 B
1199 User parameters 50 63 E3 B
1211 PID gain tuning timeout time 0B 8B C
1212 Step manipulated amount 0C 8C C
1213 Step responding sampling cycle 0D 8D C
1214 Timeout time after the maximum slope 0E 8E C
1215 Limit cycle output upper limit 0F 8F C
1216 Limit cycle output lower limit 10 90 C
1217 Limit cycle hysteresis 11 91 C
1218 PID gain tuning setting 12 92 C
1219 PID gain tuning start/status 13 93 C
1460 PID multistage set point 1 3C BC E
1461 PID multistage set point 2 3D BD E
1462 PID multistage set point 3 3E BE E
1463 PID multistage set point 4 3F BF E
1464 PID multistage set point 5 40 C0 E
1465 PID multistage set point 6 41 C1 E
1466 PID multistage set point 7 42 C2 E
1469 Number of cleaning times monitor 45 C5 E
1470 Number of cleaning times setting 46 C6 E
1471 Cleaning trigger selection 47 C7 E
1472 Cleaning reverse rotation frequency 48 C8 E
1473 Cleaning reverse rotation operation time 49 C9 E
608 APPENDIX
Instruction
Control method Parameter
code
Extended
All clear
Pr. Name
Magnetic flux
Copy
Clear
V/F
PM
Write
Read
1474 Cleaning forward rotation frequency 4A CA E
1475 Cleaning forward rotation operation time 4B CB E
1476 Cleaning stop time 4C CC E
1477 Cleaning acceleration time 4D CD E
1478 Cleaning deceleration time 4E CE E
1479 Cleaning time trigger 4F CF E
1480 Load characteristics measurement mode 50 D0 E
1481 Load characteristics load reference 1 51 D1 E
1482 Load characteristics load reference 2 52 D2 E
1483 Load characteristics load reference 3 53 D3 E
1484 Load characteristics load reference 4 54 D4 E
1485 Load characteristics load reference 5 55 D5 E
1486 Load characteristics maximum frequency 56 D6 E
1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency 57 D7 E
1488 Upper limit warning detection width 58 D8 E
1489 Lower limit warning detection width 59 D9 E
1490 Upper limit fault detection width 5A DA E
1491 Lower limit fault detection width 5B DB E
Load status detection signal delay time / load reference
1492 5C DC E
measurement waiting time
APPENDIX 609
Appendix4 For customers using HMS network
options
List of inverter monitored items
The following items can be set using a communication option.
16bit data
Read/
No. Description Unit Type
write
H0000 No data - - -
H0001 Output frequency 0.01Hz unsigned R
H0002 Output current 0.01A/0.1A unsigned R
H0003 Output voltage 0.1V unsigned R
H0004 reserved - - -
H0005 Frequency setting value 0.01Hz unsigned R
H0006 Motor speed 1r/min unsigned R
H0007 Motor torque 0.1% unsigned R
H0008 Converter output voltage 0.1V unsigned R
H0009 reserved - - -
Electric thermal relay function
H000A 0.1% unsigned R
load factor
H000B Output current peak value 0.01A/0.1A unsigned R
H000C Converter output voltage peak value 0.1V unsigned R
H000D Input power 0.01kW/0.1kW unsigned R
H000E Output power 0.01kW/0.1kW unsigned R
H000F Input terminal status - - R
H0010 Output terminal status - - R
H0011 Load meter 0.1% unsigned R
H0012 Motor excitation current 0.01A/0.1A unsigned R
H0013 reserved - - -
H0014 Cumulative energization time 1h unsigned R
H0015 reserved - - -
H0016 Orientation status 1 unsigned R
H0017 Actual operation time 1h unsigned R
H0018 Motor load factor 0.1% unsigned R
H0019 Cumulative power 1kWh unsigned R
H001A to
reserved - - -
H0021
H0022 Motor output 0.1kW unsigend R
H0023 to
reserved - - -
H002D
H002E Motor temperature R
H002F to
reserved - - -
H0031
H0032 Power saving effect - unsigned R
H0033 Cumulative saving power - unsigned R
H0034 PID set point 0.1% unsigned R/W
H0035 PID measured value 0.1% unsigned R/W
H0036 PID deviation 0.1% unsigned R/W
H0037 to
reserved - - -
H0039
H003A Option input terminal status1 - - R
H003B Option input terminal status2 - - R
H003C Option output terminal status - - R
H003D Motor thermal load factor 0.1% unsigned R
H003E Transistor thermal load factor 0.1% unsigned R
H003F reserved - - -
H0040 PTC thermistor resistance ohm unsigned R
610 APPENDIX
Read/
No. Description Unit Type
write
Output power
H0041 R
(with regenerative display)
H0042 Cumulative regenerative power R
H0043 reserved
H0044 2nd PID set point 0.1% unsigned R/W
H0045 2nd PID measured value 0.1% unsigned R/W
H0046 2nd PID deviation 0.1% unsigned R/W
H0048 to
reserved - - -
H004F
H0050 Integrated power on time R
H0051 Running time R
H0052 Saving energy monitor R
H0053 reserved - - -
H0054 Fault code (1) - - R
H0055 Fault code (2) - - R
H0056 Fault code (3) - - R
H0057 Fault code (4) - - R
H0058 Fault code (5) - - R
H0059 Fault code (6) - - R
H005A Fault code (7) - - R
H005B Fault code (8) - - R
H00F9 Run command - - R/W
H00FA to
reserved - - -
H01FF
For details, refer to page 263.
Run command
Users can specify the terminal function using this data. These bits function is depending on inverter parameter setting. (Refer to page 329)
b15 b0
STP
- - - - RES CS JOG MRS RT RH RM RL - - AU
(STOP)
<32bit data>
Read/
No. Description Unit Type
write
H0200 reserved - - -
H0201 Output frequency (0-15bit)
0.01Hz signed R
H0202 Output frequency (16-31bit)
H0203 Setting frsequency (0-15bit)
0.01Hz signed R
H0204 Setting frequency (16-31bit)
H0205 Motor rotation (0-15bit)
1r/min signed R
H0206 Motor rotation (16-31bit)
H0207 Load meter (0-15bit)
0.1% signed R
H0208 Load meter (16-31bit)
H0209,
reserved - - -
H020A
H020B Watt-hour meter (1kWh step) (0-15bit)
1kWh unsigned R
H020C Watt-hour meter (1kWh step) (16-31bit)
H020D Watt-hour meter (0.1/0.01kWh step) (0-15bit)
0.1/0.01kWh unsigned R
H020E Watt-hour meter(0.1/0.01kWh step) (16-31bit)
H020F to
reserved - - -
H03FF
APPENDIX 611
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
612 IB(NA)-0600547ENG-A
INVERTER
FR-F800
FR-F800
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (DETAILED)
FR-F820-00046(0.75K) to 04750(110K)
FR-F840-00023(0.75K) to 06830(315K)
FR-F842-07700(355K) to 12120(560K)
INVRERTER
INTRODUCTION
1
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF
THE INVERTER 3